FlexLogix Controller System - Rockwell Automation...FlexLogix Controller System 3 Publication...

28
Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004 Installation Instructions FlexLogix Controller System Catalog numbers 1794-L33, 1794-L34, 1794-FLA Use this document as a guide for installing your FlexLogix controller system. This document provides installation instructions for both the FlexLogix controller (1794-L33, -L34) and the FlexLogix extended-local I/O adapter (1794-FLA). You should already be familiar with the FlexLogix system components. See the documentation references for additional information. You must FLASH upgrade the firmware on your FlexLogix controller before you can use it. The controller ships with firmware revision 1.x but must be upgraded to match the version of RSLogix 5000 that you are using (e.g. if you are using RSLogix 5000 V11, you must upgrade your FlexLogix controller firmware to revision 11.x before using it). For more information on upgrading your controller’s firmware, see page 22. Tools That You Need You need the following tools to install your FlexLogix controller system. slotted screwdriver phillips screwdriver mounting hardware (for mounting a DIN rail) drill (for mounting a DIN rail) needle-nose pliers Obtain a User Manual This product also has a user manual (pub. no. 1794-UM001). To view it, visit: www.theautomationbookstore.com. To purchase a manual, you can: contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative visit www.theautomationbookstore.com and place an order call 800.963.9548 (USA/Canada) or 001.320.725.1574 (outside USA/Canada)

Transcript of FlexLogix Controller System - Rockwell Automation...FlexLogix Controller System 3 Publication...

Page 1: FlexLogix Controller System - Rockwell Automation...FlexLogix Controller System 3 Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004 Environment and Enclosure Prevent Electrostatic Discharge

Installation Instructions

FlexLogix Controller System

Catalog numbers 1794-L33 1794-L34 1794-FLA

Use this document as a guide for installing your FlexLogixtrade controller system This document provides installation instructions for both the FlexLogix controller (1794-L33 -L34) and the FlexLogix extended-local IO adapter (1794-FLA) You should already be familiar with the FlexLogix system components See the documentation references for additional information

You must FLASH upgrade the firmware on your FlexLogix controller before you can use it The controller ships with firmware revision 1x but must be upgraded to match the version of RSLogix 5000 that you are using (eg if you are using RSLogix 5000 V11 you must upgrade your FlexLogix controller firmware to revision 11x before using it) For more information on upgrading your controllerrsquos firmware see page 22

Tools That You NeedYou need the following tools to install your FlexLogix controller system

bull slotted screwdriver

bull phillips screwdriver

bull mounting hardware (for mounting a DIN rail)

bull drill (for mounting a DIN rail)

bull needle-nose pliers

Obtain a User ManualThis product also has a user manual (pub no 1794-UM001) To view it visit wwwtheautomationbookstorecom To purchase a manual you can

bull contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative

bull visit wwwtheautomationbookstorecom and place an order

bull call 8009639548 (USACanada) or 0013207251574 (outside USACanada)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

2 FlexLogix Controller System

Important User Information

Solid state equipment has operational characteristics differing from those of electromechanical equipment Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls (Publication SGI-11 available from your local Rockwell Automation sales office or online at httpwwwabcommanualsgi) describes some important differences between solid state equipment and hard-wired electromechanical devices Because of this difference and also because of the wide variety of uses for solid state equipment all persons responsible for applying this equipment must satisfy themselves that each intended application of this equipment is acceptable

In no event will Rockwell Automation Inc be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of this equipment

The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes Because of the many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation Rockwell Automation Inc cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams

No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation Inc with respect to use of information circuits equipment or software described in this manual

Reproduction of the contents of this manual in whole or in part without written permission of Rockwell Automation Inc is prohibited

Throughout this manual we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations

WARNINGIdentifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment which may lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss

IMPORTANT Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product

ATTENTION Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss Attentions help you

bull identify a hazard

bull avoid a hazard

bull recognize the consequence

SHOCK HAZARD Labels may be located on or inside the drive to alert people that dangerous voltage may be present

BURN HAZARD Labels may be located on or inside the drive to alert people that surfaces may be dangerous temperatures

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 3

Environment and Enclosure

Prevent Electrostatic Discharge

ATTENTION This equipment is intended for use in a Pollution Degree 2 industrial environment in overvoltage Category II applications (as defined in IEC publication 60664-1) at altitudes up to 2000 meters without derating

This equipment is considered Group 1 Class A industrial equipment according to IECCISPR Publication 11 Without appropriate precautions there may be potential difficulties ensuring electromagnetic compatibility in other environments due to conducted as well as radiated disturbance

This equipment is supplied as open type equipment It must be mounted within an enclosure that is suitably designed for those specific environmental conditions that will be present and appropriately designed to prevent personal injury resulting from accessibility to live parts The interior of the enclosure must be accessible only by the use of a tool Subsequent sections of this publication may contain additional information regarding specific enclosure type ratings that are required to comply with certain product safety certifications

NOTE See NEMA Standards publication 250 and IEC publication 60529 as applicable for explanations of the degrees of protection provided by different types of enclosure Also see the appropriate sections in this publication as well as the Allen-Bradley publication 1770-41 (Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines) for additional installation requirements pertaining to this equipment

ATTENTION This equipment is sensitive to electrostatic discharge which can cause internal damage and affect normal operation Follow these guidelines when you handle this equipment

bull Touch a grounded object to discharge potential static

bull Wear an approved grounding wriststrap

bull Do not touch connectors or pins on component boards

bull Do not touch circuit components inside the equipment

bull If available use a static-safe workstation

bull When not in use store the equipment in appropriate static-safe packaging

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

4 FlexLogix Controller System

European Hazardous Location Approval

European Zone 2 Certification (The following applies when the product bears the EEx Marking)

This equipment is intended for use in potentially explosive atmospheres as defined by European Union Directive 949EC

The LCIE (Laboratoire Central des Industries Electriques) certifies that this equipment has been found to comply with the Essential Health and Safety Requirements relating to the design and construction of Category 3 equipment intended for use in potentially explosive atmospheres given in Annex II to this Directive The examination and test results are recorded in confidential report No 28 682 010

Compliance with the Essential Health and Safety Requirements has been assured by compliance with EN 50021

IMPORTANT When using this product also consider the following

bull This equipment is not resistant to sunlight or other sources of UV radiation

bull The secondary of a current transformer shall not be open-circuited when applied in Class I Zone 2 environments

bull Equipment of lesser Enclosure Type Rating must be installed in an enclosure providing at least IP54 protection when applied in Class I Zone 2 environments

bull This equipment shall be used within its specified ratings defined by Allen-Bradley

bull Provision shall be made to prevent the rated voltage from being exceeded by transient disturbances of more than 40 when applied in Class I Zone 2 environments

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 5

North American Hazardous Location ApprovalThe following information applies when operating this equipment in hazardous locations

Informations sur lrsquoutilisation de cet eacutequipement en environnements dangereux

Products marked ldquoCL I DIV 2 GP A B C Drdquo are suitable for use in Class I Division 2 Groups A B C D Hazardous Locations and nonhazardous locations only Each product is supplied with markings on the rating nameplate indicating the hazardous location temperature code When combining products within a system the most adverse temperature code (lowest ldquoTrdquo number) may be used to help determine the overall temperature code of the system Combinations of equipment in your system are subject to investigation by the local Authority Having Jurisdiction at the time of installation

Les produits marqueacutes CL I DIV 2 GP A B C D ne conviennent qursquoagrave une utilisation en environnements de Classe I Division 2 Groupes A B C D dangereux et non dangereux Chaque produit est livreacute avec des marquages sur sa plaque drsquoidentification qui indiquent le code de tempeacuterature pour les environnements dangereux Lorsque plusieurs produits sont combineacutes dans un systegraveme le code de tempeacuterature le plus deacutefavorable (code de tempeacuterature le plus faible) peut ecirctre utiliseacute pour deacuteterminer le code de tempeacuterature global du systegraveme Les combinaisons drsquoeacutequipements dans le systegraveme sont sujettes agrave inspection par les autoriteacutes locales qualifieacutees au moment de lrsquoinstallation

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

6 FlexLogix Controller System

WARNING EXPLOSION HAZARD

bull Do not disconnect equipment unless power has been removed or the area is known to be nonhazardous

bull Do not disconnect connections to this equipment unless power has been removed or the area is known to be nonhazardous Secure any external connections that mate to this equipment by using screws sliding latches threaded connectors or other means provided with this product

bull Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class I Division 2

bull If this product contains batteries they must only be changed in an area known to be nonhazardous

AVERTISSEMENT RISQUE DrsquoEXPLOSION

bull Couper le courant ou srsquoassurer que lrsquoenvironnement est classeacute non dangereux avant de deacutebrancher leacutequipement

bull Couper le courant ou sassurer que lrsquoenvironnement est classeacute non dangereux avant de deacutebrancher les connecteurs Fixer tous les connecteurs externes relieacutes agrave cet eacutequipement agrave laide de vis loquets coulissants connecteurs fileteacutes ou autres moyens fournis avec ce produit

bull La substitution de composants peut rendre cet eacutequipement inadapteacute agrave une utilisation en environnement de Classe I Division 2

bull Srsquoassurer que lrsquoenvironnement est classeacute non dangereux avant de changer les piles

The following information applies when operating this equipment in hazardous locations

Informations sur lrsquoutilisation de cet eacutequipement en environnements dangereux

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 7

Removal and Insertion Under PowerThe FlexLogix controller the extended-local IO adapter the communication daughtercards and the IO terminal bases cannot be removed or inserted under power

However you can remove and insert FLEX IO modules while backplane power is applied and the system is operating

Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding

Other Considerations

WARNING If you insert or remove the module while backplane power is on an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations

ATTENTION Also consider the following before you install your FlexLogix controller

bull This product is grounded through the DIN rail to chassis ground Use zinc plated yellow-chromate steel DIN rail to assure proper grounding The use of other DIN rail materials (eg aluminum plastic etc) that can corrode oxidize or are poor conductors can result in improper or intermittent grounding

bull Power connection length should be less than 10 meters

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

8 FlexLogix Controller System

What You Need to DoBefore you can install a FlexLogix controller or extended-local adapter you must

Install steel 35 x 755mm DIN rails (A-B part number 199-DR1 46277-3) where you want to place the FlexLogix system components

The DIN rails for all FlexLogix system components including all local and extended-local IO modules must be mounted on a common conductive surface to ensure proper electromagnetic interference (EMI) performance See 24 and 25 for approximate mounting dimensions and mounting clearances

For more information about mounting DIN rails and splitting IO across DIN rails see the FLEX IO Product Data publication 1794-21

Use DIN rail locks (A-B catalog number 1492-EA35) to meet the shock and vibrations specifications listed on 26 A pair of DIN locks comes with the controller

Mount an appropriate power supply on an appropriate DIN rail See the specifications on 26

To install a FlexLogix controller

Step 1 Verify That You Have All the Components see page 9

Step 2 Install the Battery see page 10

Step 3 Install Communication Daughtercards (optional) see page 11

Step 4 Install the Controller see page 12

Step 5 Install the Extended-Local Adapter (optional) see page 15

After you install the FlexLogix controller you can

Make an RS-232 Connection to the Controller see page 18

Select the Operating Mode of the Controller see page 21

Monitor the Controller LEDs see page 22

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 9

Step 1 Verify That You Have All the ComponentsThese components ship with the FlexLogix controller

bull 1756-BA1 battery and label

bull key

bull one spring-clip connector plug for 24V power connection

bull one screw-terminal connector plug for 24V power connection

bull two 1492-EA35 DIN rail locks

The system components you have depend on your application You might have

FlexLogix System Component Description

1788-CNC -CNCR for ControlNet communications1788-CNF -CNFR for ControlNet communications1788-DNBO for DeviceNet communications1788-ENBT for EtherNetIP communications

1756-CP3You can also use the 1747-CP3 cable from the SLC product family

1794-FLA

1794-CE1 (1 foot)1794-CE3 (3 foot)

communication card

serial cable

FlexLogix extended-local adapter

extended- local IO cable

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

10 FlexLogix Controller System

Step 2 Install the Battery

For Safety information on the handling of lithium batteries including handling and disposal of leaking batteries see Guidelines for Handling Lithium Batteries publication AG 5-4

1 Install a 1756-BA1 battery

2 Attach the battery label

a Write on the battery label the date you install the battery

b Attach the label to the inside of the battery compartment

ATTENTION Only install a 1756-BA1 battery If you install a different battery you may damage the controller

WARNING For safety information on the handling of lithium batteries in-cluding the handling and disposal of leaking batteries see Guide-lines for Handling Lithium Batteries publication AG-54Store batteries in a cool dry environment We recommend 25degC with 40 to 60 relative humidity You may store batteries for up to 30 days between -45deg to 85degC such as during transporta-tion To avoid possible leakage do not store batteries above 60degC for more than 30 days

When you connect or disconnect the battery an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location in-stallations Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhaz-ardous before proceeding

Attach battery here

top red lead (+)

middle black lead (-)

bottom no connection

Attach label here

This jumper is for service use only Do not use this jumper

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 11

Step 3 Install Communication Daughtercards (optional)

For specific information about configuring the communication card (such as setting a node address) see the installation instructions for the communication card

1 Turn off power to the controller

2 If necessary remove the blank cover from the communication slot

3 Slide the communication card into the communication slot Be sure to line up the card with the card guides in the controller

4 Record which slot you use for the communication card You need the slot number when you develop your controller application

5 Secure the card with the screws to ensure proper grounding Do not over-tighten the screws The maximum torque for the card screws is 48 to 52 inch pounds (05 to 06 Nm)

6 After the controller is installed (see page 12) connect the network cable

Removing a Communication CardIf you need to remove a communication card from the controller

1 Turn off power to the controller

2 Disconnect all cables from the communication card

3 Loosen the card screws from the communication card

4 Remove the card from the controller

5 Replace the card with a blank cover or a different communication card

WARNING If you insert or remove the card while host power is on an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in haz-ardous location installations

31032-M

slot 1slot 2

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

12 FlexLogix Controller System

Step 4 Install the Controller

1 Position the FlexLogix controller on the DIN rail at a 5deg angle and rotate the controller onto the DIN rail

2 Press the controller down onto the DIN rail until flush The locking tabs will snap into position and lock the controller onto the DIN rail

If the controller does not lock in place use a screwdriver or similar device to move the locking tabs down while pressing the controller onto the DIN rail Release the locking tabs to lock the controller in place If necessary push up on the locking tabs to lock

3 Ground the controller The DIN rail and the common conductive surface behind the DIN rail provide functional ground for the controller Use the grounding stud to meet safety ground requirements

For information about wiring and grounding see the Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41

IMPORTANT You can mount the FlexLogix controller either vertically or horizontally (as shown)

A

A

locking tabs

grounding stud

Equipment grounding conductor (ground lug with 208 sq mm [14 AWG] wire) to ground bus

nuts with captive star washer

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 13

4 Make sure power is not applied to the power supply

5 Connect the power supply to the controller The graphic below and its related instructions describe a 1794-PS13 power supply

a Connect +24V dc input to the top of the controller connector terminal A to the bottom left power connector terminal G

b Connect -24V common to top controller connector terminal B to the top left power connector terminal E

c Use connections C and D on the controller and connection F and H on the power supply to pass 24V dc power and common to the next module in the series if required

Use the screw-terminal connector plug that comes with the controller to meet the requirements for installations in Class I Division 2 locations

WARNING If you connect or disconnect wiring while the field-side power is on an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations Be sure that power is re-moved or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding

+

+

A

B

C

D

FE

HG

_

_

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

14 FlexLogix Controller System

6 Mount the IO terminal bases on the DIN rail

For information about IO terminal bases see the FLEX IO Terminal Base Installation Instructions publication 1794-IN092

7 Install the IO modules

To install an IO module see the installation instructions for that module

Removing the controllerIf you need to remove the controller follow these steps

1 Turn off power to the controller

2 Disconnect all cables from the controller

3 Remove the IO module that is adjacent to the controller

4 On the terminal base adjacent to the controller slide the FLEXBUS connector away from the controller and remove the IO terminal base

5 Remove the controller from the DIN rail

B

A

A

31036-M

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 15

Step 5 Install the Extended-Local Adapter (optional)

1 Position the 1794-FLA extended-local IO adapter on the DIN rail at a 30deg angle and rotate the adapter onto the DIN rail

2 Press the adapter down onto the DIN rail until flush The locking tab will snap into position and lock the adapter onto the DIN rail

If the adapter does not lock in place use a screwdriver or similar device to move the locking tab down while pressing the adapter onto the DIN rail Release the locking tab to lock the adapter in place If necessary push up on the locking tab to lock

3 Ground the adapter The adapter is grounded through the steel DIN rail and the common conductive surface behind the DIN rail Additionally use the grounding stud

grounding stud

Equipment grounding conductor (ground lug with 208 sq mm [14 AWG] wire) to ground bus

nuts with captive star washer

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

16 FlexLogix Controller System

4 Make sure power is not applied to the power supply Connect the power supply to the adapter This diagram and its related instructions describe a 1794-PS13 power supply

a Connect +24V dc input to the left adapter connector terminal A to the bottom left power connector terminal G

b Connect -24V common to left adapter connector terminal B to the top left power connector terminal E

c Use connections C and D on the adapter and connection F and H on the power supply to pass 24V dc power and common to the next module in the series if required

Use the screw-terminal connector plug that comes with the adapter to meet the requirements for installations in Class I Division 2 locations

5 Connect IO terminal bases and IO modules to the adapter the same way you connect them to the controller

6 Remove the plastic spacer from both ends of the extended-local IO cable (1794-CE1 or 1794-CE3)

plastic spacer

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 17

7 Connect the adapter to the controller

The following diagram shows how you can also use the 1794-CE1 -CE3 cable to split a rail of IO You can split each rail only once You can split a rail right after the controller (or adapter) or after any IO module For more information about the 1794-CE1 -CE3 cables see the Interconnect Cable Installation Instructions publication 1794-512

Removing the extended-local adapterIf you need to remove the adapter follow these steps

1 Turn off power to the adapter

2 Disconnect all cables from the adapter

3 Remove the IO module that is adjacent to the adapter

4 On the terminal base adjacent to the adapter slide the FLEXBUS connector away from the adapter and remove the IO terminal base

5 Remove the adapter from the DIN rail

31039-M

1794-CE1 or 1794-CE3 cable

LOCAL rail

LOCAL2 rail

1794-CE1 or 1794-CE3 cable

1794-CE1 or 1794-CE3 cable

1794-CE1 or 1794-CE3 cable

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

18 FlexLogix Controller System

Make an RS-232 Connection to the ControllerThe RS-232 port is a non-isolated serial port built-in to the front of the controller

To connect to the serial port

1 Determine whether you need an optical isolator

If you connect the controller to a device outside of the systemrsquos enclosure consider installing an isolator between the controller and device

One possible isolator is the 1761-NET-AIC interface converter

serial port

port 1 DB-9 RS-232 DTE

baud rate selector switch

port 2 mini-DIN 8 RS-232

dc power source selector switch

terminals for external 24V dc power supply

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 19

2 Select the appropriate cable

Are you using an isolator

Use this cable

no The 1756-CP3 cable attaches the controller directly to the controller

If you make your own cable it must be shielded and the shields must be tied to the metal shell (that surrounds the pins) on both ends of the cableYou can also use a 1747-CP3 cable (from the SLC product family) This cable has a taller right-angle connector housing than the 1756-CP3 cable

yes The 1761-CBL-AP00 cable (right-angle connector to controller) or the 1761-CBL-PM02 cable (straight connector to the controller) attaches the controller to port 2 on the 1761-NET-AIC isolator The mini-DIN connector is not commercially available so you cannot make this cable

2 RDX

3 TXD

4 DTR

COMMON

6 DSR

7 RTS

8 CTS

9

1 CD

2 RDX

3 TXD

4 DTR

COMMON

6 DSR

7 RTS

8 CTS

9

1 CD

DB-9 right-angle or straight cable end 8-pin mini-DIN cable end

Pin DB-9 end Mini-DIN end1 DCD DCD

2 RxD RxD

3 TxD TxD

4 DTR DTR

5 ground ground

6 DSR DSR

7 RTS RTS

8 CTS CTS

9 na na

1 2

34

5

6 7867

8

9

1

2

3

4

5

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

20 FlexLogix Controller System

3 Connect the appropriate cable to the serial port on the controller

Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding

4 If necessary attach the controller to the isolator

WARNING If you connect or disconnect the serial cable with power applied to this module or the serial device on the other end of the cable an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations

modem

1761-NET-AIC isolator

user-supplied modem cable

1761 cable

system enclosure

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 21

Select the Operating Mode of the Controller

1 Use this table to determine the operating mode of the controller

2 Turn the key on the front panel of the controller to select the mode

If you want to Select one of these modes

Run Program Remote

Run Program Test

turn outputs to the state commanded by the logic of the project

YES YES

turn outputs to their configured state for Program mode

YES YES YES

execute (scan) tasks YES YES YES

change the mode of the controller through software

YES YES YES

download a project YES YES

schedule a ControlNet network YES YES

while online edit the project YES YES YES YES

To select Turn the key to

Remote Run RUN and then to REM

Remote Program PROG and then to REM

Remote Test REM and then go online and select Test mode via the programming software

keyswitch

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

22 FlexLogix Controller System

Monitor the Controller LEDs

FLASH Upgrade the Controllerrsquos Firmware RevisionTo update the firmware of a controller first install a firmware upgrade kit

bull An upgrade kit ships on a supplemental CD along with RSLogix 5000 software

bull To download an upgrade kit go to httpsupportrockwellautomationcom Choose Firmware Updates

Indicator Color Description

RUN off bull no task(s) running

bull controller in Program mode

green bull one or more tasks are running

bull controller is in Run mode

OK off no power applied

red flashing after initially installing the controller - the controller requires a FLASH upgrade to the proper firmware revision see belowafter the controller is operating - recoverable fault

red bull controller faulted

bull clear faults clear memory or replace the controller

green controller OK

BATTERY off battery will support memory

red bull battery may not support memory

bull replace battery

IO off bull controller project not downloaded (the condition after power up)

bull no IO or communications configured

green communicating to all devices

green flashing one or more devices are not responding

LOCALandLOCAL2

off rail is inhibited

green communicating to all devices on that rail

green flashing one or more devices on that rail not responding

red flashing no modules exist on that rail

RS232 off no activity

green data being received or transmitted

FORCE off no forces present

amber forces present

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 23

Update the Controller

1 Connect the controller to the same network as your workstation

2 Start ControlFLASH software

3 Choose Next gt

4 Select the catalog number of the controller and choose Next gt

5 Expand the network until you see the controller If the required network is not shown first configure a driver for the network in RSLinx software

6 Select the controller and choose OK

7 Select the revision level to which you want to update the controller and choose Next gt

8 To start the update of the controller choose Finish and then Yes

After the controller is updated the status box displays Update complete

9 Choose OK

10 To close ControlFLASH software choose Cancel and then Yes

TIP RSLogix 5000 software revision 100 or later lets you update controller firmware as part of the download sequence To update the controller download your project and follow the prompts of the software

IMPORTANT If the Revision list is empty download a new upgrade kit Some older upgrade kits do not work with new controllers

42900

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

24 FlexLogix Controller System

FlexLogix Controller Approximate Mounting Dimensions

19949mm (785in)

849mm (334in) 5043mm (199in)

12197mm (481in)

18296mm (7203in)

8857mm (349in)

10596mm (417in)

10149mm (399in)

64mm (025in)

10457mm (412in)

8724mm (343in)

9296mm (366in)

8857mm (349in)

8014mm (316in)

1016mm (400in)

885mm (035in)

1853mm (730in)

135mm (053in)

825mm (033in)

60mm (024in)

6436mm (253in)

centerline of MTG Hole

centerline of DIN rail

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 25

FlexLogix Extended-Local IO Adapter Approximate Mounting Dimensions

Approximate Mounting Clearance

94mm (37in)

69mm (272in)

11712mm (461in)

8894mm (35in)

8106mm (319in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

26 FlexLogix Controller System

Other PublicationsYou can use the following manuals with this product

You can obtain manuals at wwwtheautomationbookstorecom

Specifications

Documents required for installation details Publication number

Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines 1770-41

Flex 1794-PS3 Power Supply Installation Instructions 1794-571

Flex 1794-PS13 Power Supply Installation Instructions 1794-569

Flex IO Terminal Base Installation Instructions 1794-516

1794-CE1 -CE3 Interconnect Cable Installation Instructions 1794-512

FLEX IO and FLEX Integra IO Technical Data 1794-21

Documents available for further reference Publication number

FlexLogix System User Manual 1794-UM001

Logix5000 Controllers Common Procedures Reference Manual 1756-PM001

Logix5000 Controllers General Instruction Set Reference Manual 1756-RM003

Guidelines for Handling Lithium Batteries AG-54

Category FlexLogix controller(1794-L33 -L34)

FlexLogix extended-local IO adapter (1794-FLA)

user memory 1794-L33 64 KBytes1794-L34 512 KBytes

na

input voltagerating (nominal)range

24V dc192V to 312V dc (includes 5 ac ripple)

isolation voltage(continuous-voltage withstand rating)

30V dcQualification tested to withstand 850V dc for 60 seconds

input current(1) 133A maximum at 192V dc085A maximum at 24V dc

039A maximum at 192V dc025A maximum at 24V dc

power dissipation(2) 255W maximum at 192V204W maximum at 24V dc

75W maximum at 192V60W maximum at 24V dc

backplane (FLEXBUS) current output

653mA maximum 51V dc 653mA maximum 51V dc

thermal dissipation 87BTUhour 192V 256BTUhour 192V

weight 1794-L33 71 kg (156 lbs oz)1794-L34 75 g (166 lbs)(no communication cards installed)

28 kg (62 lbs)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 27

power supply 1794-PS3 or 1794-PS13 ndash In applications that must be compliant with CSA requirements use a Separated Extra-Low Voltage (SELV) power supply that is compliant with IEC 610101 Annex H

power conductors 60deg C (140deg F) minimum copper22 to 14 AWG (0324 to 208 sq mm) stranded364 inch (12mm) insulation maximumlength 10m or less

category 3(2)

power connector torque 5 to 7 inch-pounds (06 to 08Nm)

battery 1756-BA1 (AB part number 94194801)059g lithium

na

serial cable 1761-CBLPM02 to 1761-NET-AIC 1761-CBLPA00 to 1761-NET-AIC1756-CP3 directly to controller1747-CP3 directly to controller

category 3(4)

na

extended local IO cable 1794-CE1 cable (1 foot)1794-CE3 cable (3 feet)

category 3(2)

DIN rail steel 35 x 755mm DIN railA-B part number 199-DR1 46277-3 EN 50022

operating temperature IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad Operating Cold)IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd Operating Dry Heat)IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock)0 to 60degC (32 to 140degF)

storage temperature IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab Un-packaged Non-operating Cold)IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb Un-packaged Non-operating Dry Heat)IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na Un-packaged Non-operating Thermal Shock)ndash40 to 85degC (ndash40 to 185degF)

relative humidity IEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db Un-packaged Non-operating Damp Heat)5 to 95 non-condensing

vibration(3) IEC60068-2-6 (Test Fc Operating) 5g 10-500Hz

shock(3)

operatingnon-operating

IEC60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged shock)

30g50g

emissions CISPR 11Group 1 Class A (with appropriate enclosure)

ESD immunity IEC 61000-4-26kV contact discharges8kV air discharges

Category FlexLogix controller(1794-L33 -L34)

FlexLogix extended-local IO adapter (1794-FLA)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

radiated RF immunity IEC 61000-4-310Vm with 1kHz sine-wave 80AM from 30MHz to 2000MHz10Vm with 200Hz 50 Pulse 100AM at 900Mhz

EFTB immunity IEC 61000-4-4plusmn4kV at 25kHz on power portsplusmn2kV at 5kHz on communications ports

surge transient immunity IEC 61000-4-5plusmn2kV line-earth (CM) on shielded ports

conducted RF immunity IEC 61000-4-610Vrms with 1kHz sine-wave 80AM from 150kHz to 80MHz

enclosure type rating none (open-style)

Certifications(when product is marked)

UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipmentc-UL-us UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous

Locations certified for US and CanadaCSA CSA Certified Process Control EquipmentCSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class I Division 2

Group ABCD Hazardous Locations

CE(5) European Union 89336EEC EMC Directive compliant withEN 50082-2 Industrial ImmunityEN 61326 MeasControlLab Industrial RequirementsEN 61000-6-2 Industrial ImmunityEN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions

C-Tick(5) Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant withASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions

EEx(5) European Union 949EEC ATEX Directive compliant withEN 50021 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n (Zone 2)

(1) This specification is also known as Power Consumption(2) This specification is also known as Heat Dissipation(3) To maintain these vibration and shock specifications you must use DIN rail locks(4) Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing Refer to Publication 1770-41 Industrial

Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines(5) See the Product Certification link at wwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification

details

Category FlexLogix controller(1794-L33 -L34)

FlexLogix extended-local IO adapter (1794-FLA)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004 PN 957867-01Supersedes Publication 1794-IN002F-EN-P - October 2002 Copyright copy 2004 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

  • 1794-IN002G-EN-P FlexLogix Controller System Installation Instructions
    • Tools That You Need
    • Obtain a User Manual
    • Environment and Enclosure
    • Prevent Electrostatic Discharge
    • European Hazardous Location Approval
    • North American Hazardous Location Approval
    • Removal and Insertion Under Power
    • Other Considerations
    • What You Need to Do
    • Step 1 Verify That You Have All the Components
    • Step 2 Install the Battery
    • Step 3 Install Communication Daughtercards (optional)
    • Step 4 Install the Controller
    • Step 5 Install the Extended-Local Adapter (optional)
    • Make an RS-232 Connection to the Controller
    • Select the Operating Mode of the Controller
    • Monitor the Controller LEDs
    • FLASH Upgrade the Controllerrsquos Firmware Revision
    • Update the Controller
    • FlexLogix Controller Approximate Mounting Dimensions
    • FlexLogix Extended-Local IO Adapter Approximate Mounting Dimensions
    • Approximate Mounting Clearance
    • Other Publications
    • Specifications
      • Back Cover
        • Intro

          ampLRA-QR005B-EN-E 308

          Generic pub print specs

          ampCItem Setup Sheet for Conversion Transfers
          ampLJIT-D-print SpreadsheetampCRA-QR005C-EN-EampRampD ampT

          IN RN pub type specs

          UM RM PM pub type specs

          AP PP pub type specs

          BR pub type specs

          Field definitions

          ampL04032006ampRampP
          PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
          EA = Each
          PK = Pack
          PD = Pad
          RL = Roll
          BK = Book
          CT = Carton
          BX = Box
          ST = Set
          Multiple Order Qty
          Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
          Business Group
          The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
          CorporateBusiness Development
          Finance
          Human Resources
          IT
          Logistics
          Manufacturing
          Marketing Commercial
          Marketing Europe
          Marketing Other
          Operations
          Order Services
          Other
          Process Improvement
          Procurement
          Quality
          Sales
          Max Order Quantity
          Presale items = 100
          Postsale items = 5
          NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
          Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
          Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
          Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
          BindingStitching
          For a Form (F) use
          CARBONLESS
          CUTSHEET
          ENVELOPE
          For a Book (B) use
          LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
          PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
          PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
          SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
          STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
          STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
          STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
          THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
          THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
          WIRE O Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
          Saddle-Stitch Items
          20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
          19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
          18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
          All page quantities must be divisible by 4
          Tape Bound Items
          125 sheets max on 20 no cover
          120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Perfect Bound Items
          475 sheets max on 20 no cover
          470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Double Wire Bound Items
          40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Coil Bound Items
          290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Sides Printed
          Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
          Simplex = Single-sided printing
          Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
          Number of Forms to a Sheet
          Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
          Number of Sheets Required to Print
          Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
          Paper Stock Type
          Description
          PLAIN Bond
          ACNTCVR Accent Cover
          BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
          BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
          C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
          C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
          C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
          C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
          CARD Card Stock
          CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
          CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
          COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
          CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
          CUSTOM Custom
          CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
          ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
          ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
          ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
          GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
          GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
          HOTSTEXT Hots Text
          INDEX Index
          LABEL80 80 Up Label
          MICROPRT Micro Print
          OFFSET Offset
          PART2 2 Part
          PART3 3 Part
          PART4 4 Part
          PART5 5 Part
          PART6 6 Part
          PERF 12 inch Perfed
          PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
          PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
          PREPERF Pre-Perforated
          RECYL Recycled
          SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
          SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
          SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
          TAG Tag
          TEXT Text
          TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
          TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
          TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
          TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
          VELLUM Vellum
          VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
          WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
          WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
          WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
          Paper Stock Color
          Black
          Blue
          Buff
          Canary
          Cherry
          Clear
          Cream
          Custom
          Goldrenrod
          Gray
          Green
          Ivory
          Lavender
          Manilla
          NCRPinkCanary
          NCRWhiteBlue
          NCRWhiteBlueCanary
          NCRWhiteCanary
          NCRWhiteCanaryPink
          NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
          NCRWhiteGreen
          NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
          NCRWhitePink
          NCRWhiteWhite
          Opaque
          Orange
          Orchid
          Peach
          Pink
          Purple
          Salmon
          Tan
          Violet
          White
          Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
          11 x 17
          18 x 24 Poster
          24 x 36 Poster
          3 x 5
          36 x 24 Poster
          4 x 6
          475 x 7
          475 x 775
          55 x 85
          6 x 4
          7 x 9
          7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
          85 x 11
          825 x 10875
          825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
          8375 x 10875
          9 x 12
          A4
          A5
          Other - Custom size listed below
          Drilling Locations
          1CENTER
          1LEFTTOP
          1TOPCENTER
          2LEFT
          2LEFT2TOP
          2TOP
          2TOP2LEFT
          2TOP3LEFT
          2TOP5LEFT
          2TOP5RIGHT
          3BOTTOM
          3LEFT
          3LEFT2TOP
          3LEFT3TOP
          3RIGHT
          3TOP
          3TOP5LEFT
          5BOTTOM
          5CENTER
          5LEFT
          5RIGHT
          5RIGHT2TOP
          5TOP
          For TRI fold - select Z or C type Description
          HALF Half
          C C Fold
          DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
          OFFSETZ Offset Z
          SAMPLE See Sample
          SHORT Short Fold
          V V Fold
          Z Z Fold
          Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
          Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
          77 or more pages 1
          33 to 76 pages 25
          3 to 32 pages 50
          1 or 2 pages 100
          Comments
          CoverText Stock Spine
          100 Gloss Cover If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
          100 Gloss Text
          100 Text
          10pt C1S Cover
          10pt C2S Cover
          10pt C2S Text
          10pt Text Stock
          110 White Index
          12pt C1S Cover
          20 White Opaque Bond
          50 Colored Offset
          50 White Offset
          50 White Opaque
          60 Cover Stock
          60 White Offset
          80 Gloss Cover
          80 Gloss Text
          8pt C1S White
          90 White Index
          CoverText Ink
          Black
          Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
          Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
          4 color
          4 color over black
          4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
          4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
          4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
          4 color + aqueous
          4 color + varnish
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 50 RRD must provide this information
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 RRD must provide this information
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          EA 1 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Black amp White B PERFECT PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 NA 516 3LEFT NA NA NA NA RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          1794-IN002G-EN-P FlexLogix Controller Installation Instructions EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial 19021 01232004 5 Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 4 28 7 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 55 85 NA NA NA NA NA HALF 55 x 85 100 RRD must provide this information Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black 957867-01
          Corp 17501
          Bill To 69
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information
          Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
          This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
          Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
          Generic pub print specs Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
          IN RN pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          UM RM PM pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          AP PP pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          BR pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          Field definitions Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
          Attach Print Specs to PDF
          For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
          RA-QR005C-EN-E 608
Page 2: FlexLogix Controller System - Rockwell Automation...FlexLogix Controller System 3 Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004 Environment and Enclosure Prevent Electrostatic Discharge

2 FlexLogix Controller System

Important User Information

Solid state equipment has operational characteristics differing from those of electromechanical equipment Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls (Publication SGI-11 available from your local Rockwell Automation sales office or online at httpwwwabcommanualsgi) describes some important differences between solid state equipment and hard-wired electromechanical devices Because of this difference and also because of the wide variety of uses for solid state equipment all persons responsible for applying this equipment must satisfy themselves that each intended application of this equipment is acceptable

In no event will Rockwell Automation Inc be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of this equipment

The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes Because of the many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation Rockwell Automation Inc cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams

No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation Inc with respect to use of information circuits equipment or software described in this manual

Reproduction of the contents of this manual in whole or in part without written permission of Rockwell Automation Inc is prohibited

Throughout this manual we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations

WARNINGIdentifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment which may lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss

IMPORTANT Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product

ATTENTION Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss Attentions help you

bull identify a hazard

bull avoid a hazard

bull recognize the consequence

SHOCK HAZARD Labels may be located on or inside the drive to alert people that dangerous voltage may be present

BURN HAZARD Labels may be located on or inside the drive to alert people that surfaces may be dangerous temperatures

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 3

Environment and Enclosure

Prevent Electrostatic Discharge

ATTENTION This equipment is intended for use in a Pollution Degree 2 industrial environment in overvoltage Category II applications (as defined in IEC publication 60664-1) at altitudes up to 2000 meters without derating

This equipment is considered Group 1 Class A industrial equipment according to IECCISPR Publication 11 Without appropriate precautions there may be potential difficulties ensuring electromagnetic compatibility in other environments due to conducted as well as radiated disturbance

This equipment is supplied as open type equipment It must be mounted within an enclosure that is suitably designed for those specific environmental conditions that will be present and appropriately designed to prevent personal injury resulting from accessibility to live parts The interior of the enclosure must be accessible only by the use of a tool Subsequent sections of this publication may contain additional information regarding specific enclosure type ratings that are required to comply with certain product safety certifications

NOTE See NEMA Standards publication 250 and IEC publication 60529 as applicable for explanations of the degrees of protection provided by different types of enclosure Also see the appropriate sections in this publication as well as the Allen-Bradley publication 1770-41 (Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines) for additional installation requirements pertaining to this equipment

ATTENTION This equipment is sensitive to electrostatic discharge which can cause internal damage and affect normal operation Follow these guidelines when you handle this equipment

bull Touch a grounded object to discharge potential static

bull Wear an approved grounding wriststrap

bull Do not touch connectors or pins on component boards

bull Do not touch circuit components inside the equipment

bull If available use a static-safe workstation

bull When not in use store the equipment in appropriate static-safe packaging

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

4 FlexLogix Controller System

European Hazardous Location Approval

European Zone 2 Certification (The following applies when the product bears the EEx Marking)

This equipment is intended for use in potentially explosive atmospheres as defined by European Union Directive 949EC

The LCIE (Laboratoire Central des Industries Electriques) certifies that this equipment has been found to comply with the Essential Health and Safety Requirements relating to the design and construction of Category 3 equipment intended for use in potentially explosive atmospheres given in Annex II to this Directive The examination and test results are recorded in confidential report No 28 682 010

Compliance with the Essential Health and Safety Requirements has been assured by compliance with EN 50021

IMPORTANT When using this product also consider the following

bull This equipment is not resistant to sunlight or other sources of UV radiation

bull The secondary of a current transformer shall not be open-circuited when applied in Class I Zone 2 environments

bull Equipment of lesser Enclosure Type Rating must be installed in an enclosure providing at least IP54 protection when applied in Class I Zone 2 environments

bull This equipment shall be used within its specified ratings defined by Allen-Bradley

bull Provision shall be made to prevent the rated voltage from being exceeded by transient disturbances of more than 40 when applied in Class I Zone 2 environments

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 5

North American Hazardous Location ApprovalThe following information applies when operating this equipment in hazardous locations

Informations sur lrsquoutilisation de cet eacutequipement en environnements dangereux

Products marked ldquoCL I DIV 2 GP A B C Drdquo are suitable for use in Class I Division 2 Groups A B C D Hazardous Locations and nonhazardous locations only Each product is supplied with markings on the rating nameplate indicating the hazardous location temperature code When combining products within a system the most adverse temperature code (lowest ldquoTrdquo number) may be used to help determine the overall temperature code of the system Combinations of equipment in your system are subject to investigation by the local Authority Having Jurisdiction at the time of installation

Les produits marqueacutes CL I DIV 2 GP A B C D ne conviennent qursquoagrave une utilisation en environnements de Classe I Division 2 Groupes A B C D dangereux et non dangereux Chaque produit est livreacute avec des marquages sur sa plaque drsquoidentification qui indiquent le code de tempeacuterature pour les environnements dangereux Lorsque plusieurs produits sont combineacutes dans un systegraveme le code de tempeacuterature le plus deacutefavorable (code de tempeacuterature le plus faible) peut ecirctre utiliseacute pour deacuteterminer le code de tempeacuterature global du systegraveme Les combinaisons drsquoeacutequipements dans le systegraveme sont sujettes agrave inspection par les autoriteacutes locales qualifieacutees au moment de lrsquoinstallation

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

6 FlexLogix Controller System

WARNING EXPLOSION HAZARD

bull Do not disconnect equipment unless power has been removed or the area is known to be nonhazardous

bull Do not disconnect connections to this equipment unless power has been removed or the area is known to be nonhazardous Secure any external connections that mate to this equipment by using screws sliding latches threaded connectors or other means provided with this product

bull Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class I Division 2

bull If this product contains batteries they must only be changed in an area known to be nonhazardous

AVERTISSEMENT RISQUE DrsquoEXPLOSION

bull Couper le courant ou srsquoassurer que lrsquoenvironnement est classeacute non dangereux avant de deacutebrancher leacutequipement

bull Couper le courant ou sassurer que lrsquoenvironnement est classeacute non dangereux avant de deacutebrancher les connecteurs Fixer tous les connecteurs externes relieacutes agrave cet eacutequipement agrave laide de vis loquets coulissants connecteurs fileteacutes ou autres moyens fournis avec ce produit

bull La substitution de composants peut rendre cet eacutequipement inadapteacute agrave une utilisation en environnement de Classe I Division 2

bull Srsquoassurer que lrsquoenvironnement est classeacute non dangereux avant de changer les piles

The following information applies when operating this equipment in hazardous locations

Informations sur lrsquoutilisation de cet eacutequipement en environnements dangereux

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 7

Removal and Insertion Under PowerThe FlexLogix controller the extended-local IO adapter the communication daughtercards and the IO terminal bases cannot be removed or inserted under power

However you can remove and insert FLEX IO modules while backplane power is applied and the system is operating

Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding

Other Considerations

WARNING If you insert or remove the module while backplane power is on an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations

ATTENTION Also consider the following before you install your FlexLogix controller

bull This product is grounded through the DIN rail to chassis ground Use zinc plated yellow-chromate steel DIN rail to assure proper grounding The use of other DIN rail materials (eg aluminum plastic etc) that can corrode oxidize or are poor conductors can result in improper or intermittent grounding

bull Power connection length should be less than 10 meters

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

8 FlexLogix Controller System

What You Need to DoBefore you can install a FlexLogix controller or extended-local adapter you must

Install steel 35 x 755mm DIN rails (A-B part number 199-DR1 46277-3) where you want to place the FlexLogix system components

The DIN rails for all FlexLogix system components including all local and extended-local IO modules must be mounted on a common conductive surface to ensure proper electromagnetic interference (EMI) performance See 24 and 25 for approximate mounting dimensions and mounting clearances

For more information about mounting DIN rails and splitting IO across DIN rails see the FLEX IO Product Data publication 1794-21

Use DIN rail locks (A-B catalog number 1492-EA35) to meet the shock and vibrations specifications listed on 26 A pair of DIN locks comes with the controller

Mount an appropriate power supply on an appropriate DIN rail See the specifications on 26

To install a FlexLogix controller

Step 1 Verify That You Have All the Components see page 9

Step 2 Install the Battery see page 10

Step 3 Install Communication Daughtercards (optional) see page 11

Step 4 Install the Controller see page 12

Step 5 Install the Extended-Local Adapter (optional) see page 15

After you install the FlexLogix controller you can

Make an RS-232 Connection to the Controller see page 18

Select the Operating Mode of the Controller see page 21

Monitor the Controller LEDs see page 22

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 9

Step 1 Verify That You Have All the ComponentsThese components ship with the FlexLogix controller

bull 1756-BA1 battery and label

bull key

bull one spring-clip connector plug for 24V power connection

bull one screw-terminal connector plug for 24V power connection

bull two 1492-EA35 DIN rail locks

The system components you have depend on your application You might have

FlexLogix System Component Description

1788-CNC -CNCR for ControlNet communications1788-CNF -CNFR for ControlNet communications1788-DNBO for DeviceNet communications1788-ENBT for EtherNetIP communications

1756-CP3You can also use the 1747-CP3 cable from the SLC product family

1794-FLA

1794-CE1 (1 foot)1794-CE3 (3 foot)

communication card

serial cable

FlexLogix extended-local adapter

extended- local IO cable

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

10 FlexLogix Controller System

Step 2 Install the Battery

For Safety information on the handling of lithium batteries including handling and disposal of leaking batteries see Guidelines for Handling Lithium Batteries publication AG 5-4

1 Install a 1756-BA1 battery

2 Attach the battery label

a Write on the battery label the date you install the battery

b Attach the label to the inside of the battery compartment

ATTENTION Only install a 1756-BA1 battery If you install a different battery you may damage the controller

WARNING For safety information on the handling of lithium batteries in-cluding the handling and disposal of leaking batteries see Guide-lines for Handling Lithium Batteries publication AG-54Store batteries in a cool dry environment We recommend 25degC with 40 to 60 relative humidity You may store batteries for up to 30 days between -45deg to 85degC such as during transporta-tion To avoid possible leakage do not store batteries above 60degC for more than 30 days

When you connect or disconnect the battery an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location in-stallations Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhaz-ardous before proceeding

Attach battery here

top red lead (+)

middle black lead (-)

bottom no connection

Attach label here

This jumper is for service use only Do not use this jumper

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 11

Step 3 Install Communication Daughtercards (optional)

For specific information about configuring the communication card (such as setting a node address) see the installation instructions for the communication card

1 Turn off power to the controller

2 If necessary remove the blank cover from the communication slot

3 Slide the communication card into the communication slot Be sure to line up the card with the card guides in the controller

4 Record which slot you use for the communication card You need the slot number when you develop your controller application

5 Secure the card with the screws to ensure proper grounding Do not over-tighten the screws The maximum torque for the card screws is 48 to 52 inch pounds (05 to 06 Nm)

6 After the controller is installed (see page 12) connect the network cable

Removing a Communication CardIf you need to remove a communication card from the controller

1 Turn off power to the controller

2 Disconnect all cables from the communication card

3 Loosen the card screws from the communication card

4 Remove the card from the controller

5 Replace the card with a blank cover or a different communication card

WARNING If you insert or remove the card while host power is on an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in haz-ardous location installations

31032-M

slot 1slot 2

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

12 FlexLogix Controller System

Step 4 Install the Controller

1 Position the FlexLogix controller on the DIN rail at a 5deg angle and rotate the controller onto the DIN rail

2 Press the controller down onto the DIN rail until flush The locking tabs will snap into position and lock the controller onto the DIN rail

If the controller does not lock in place use a screwdriver or similar device to move the locking tabs down while pressing the controller onto the DIN rail Release the locking tabs to lock the controller in place If necessary push up on the locking tabs to lock

3 Ground the controller The DIN rail and the common conductive surface behind the DIN rail provide functional ground for the controller Use the grounding stud to meet safety ground requirements

For information about wiring and grounding see the Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41

IMPORTANT You can mount the FlexLogix controller either vertically or horizontally (as shown)

A

A

locking tabs

grounding stud

Equipment grounding conductor (ground lug with 208 sq mm [14 AWG] wire) to ground bus

nuts with captive star washer

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 13

4 Make sure power is not applied to the power supply

5 Connect the power supply to the controller The graphic below and its related instructions describe a 1794-PS13 power supply

a Connect +24V dc input to the top of the controller connector terminal A to the bottom left power connector terminal G

b Connect -24V common to top controller connector terminal B to the top left power connector terminal E

c Use connections C and D on the controller and connection F and H on the power supply to pass 24V dc power and common to the next module in the series if required

Use the screw-terminal connector plug that comes with the controller to meet the requirements for installations in Class I Division 2 locations

WARNING If you connect or disconnect wiring while the field-side power is on an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations Be sure that power is re-moved or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding

+

+

A

B

C

D

FE

HG

_

_

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

14 FlexLogix Controller System

6 Mount the IO terminal bases on the DIN rail

For information about IO terminal bases see the FLEX IO Terminal Base Installation Instructions publication 1794-IN092

7 Install the IO modules

To install an IO module see the installation instructions for that module

Removing the controllerIf you need to remove the controller follow these steps

1 Turn off power to the controller

2 Disconnect all cables from the controller

3 Remove the IO module that is adjacent to the controller

4 On the terminal base adjacent to the controller slide the FLEXBUS connector away from the controller and remove the IO terminal base

5 Remove the controller from the DIN rail

B

A

A

31036-M

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 15

Step 5 Install the Extended-Local Adapter (optional)

1 Position the 1794-FLA extended-local IO adapter on the DIN rail at a 30deg angle and rotate the adapter onto the DIN rail

2 Press the adapter down onto the DIN rail until flush The locking tab will snap into position and lock the adapter onto the DIN rail

If the adapter does not lock in place use a screwdriver or similar device to move the locking tab down while pressing the adapter onto the DIN rail Release the locking tab to lock the adapter in place If necessary push up on the locking tab to lock

3 Ground the adapter The adapter is grounded through the steel DIN rail and the common conductive surface behind the DIN rail Additionally use the grounding stud

grounding stud

Equipment grounding conductor (ground lug with 208 sq mm [14 AWG] wire) to ground bus

nuts with captive star washer

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

16 FlexLogix Controller System

4 Make sure power is not applied to the power supply Connect the power supply to the adapter This diagram and its related instructions describe a 1794-PS13 power supply

a Connect +24V dc input to the left adapter connector terminal A to the bottom left power connector terminal G

b Connect -24V common to left adapter connector terminal B to the top left power connector terminal E

c Use connections C and D on the adapter and connection F and H on the power supply to pass 24V dc power and common to the next module in the series if required

Use the screw-terminal connector plug that comes with the adapter to meet the requirements for installations in Class I Division 2 locations

5 Connect IO terminal bases and IO modules to the adapter the same way you connect them to the controller

6 Remove the plastic spacer from both ends of the extended-local IO cable (1794-CE1 or 1794-CE3)

plastic spacer

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 17

7 Connect the adapter to the controller

The following diagram shows how you can also use the 1794-CE1 -CE3 cable to split a rail of IO You can split each rail only once You can split a rail right after the controller (or adapter) or after any IO module For more information about the 1794-CE1 -CE3 cables see the Interconnect Cable Installation Instructions publication 1794-512

Removing the extended-local adapterIf you need to remove the adapter follow these steps

1 Turn off power to the adapter

2 Disconnect all cables from the adapter

3 Remove the IO module that is adjacent to the adapter

4 On the terminal base adjacent to the adapter slide the FLEXBUS connector away from the adapter and remove the IO terminal base

5 Remove the adapter from the DIN rail

31039-M

1794-CE1 or 1794-CE3 cable

LOCAL rail

LOCAL2 rail

1794-CE1 or 1794-CE3 cable

1794-CE1 or 1794-CE3 cable

1794-CE1 or 1794-CE3 cable

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

18 FlexLogix Controller System

Make an RS-232 Connection to the ControllerThe RS-232 port is a non-isolated serial port built-in to the front of the controller

To connect to the serial port

1 Determine whether you need an optical isolator

If you connect the controller to a device outside of the systemrsquos enclosure consider installing an isolator between the controller and device

One possible isolator is the 1761-NET-AIC interface converter

serial port

port 1 DB-9 RS-232 DTE

baud rate selector switch

port 2 mini-DIN 8 RS-232

dc power source selector switch

terminals for external 24V dc power supply

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 19

2 Select the appropriate cable

Are you using an isolator

Use this cable

no The 1756-CP3 cable attaches the controller directly to the controller

If you make your own cable it must be shielded and the shields must be tied to the metal shell (that surrounds the pins) on both ends of the cableYou can also use a 1747-CP3 cable (from the SLC product family) This cable has a taller right-angle connector housing than the 1756-CP3 cable

yes The 1761-CBL-AP00 cable (right-angle connector to controller) or the 1761-CBL-PM02 cable (straight connector to the controller) attaches the controller to port 2 on the 1761-NET-AIC isolator The mini-DIN connector is not commercially available so you cannot make this cable

2 RDX

3 TXD

4 DTR

COMMON

6 DSR

7 RTS

8 CTS

9

1 CD

2 RDX

3 TXD

4 DTR

COMMON

6 DSR

7 RTS

8 CTS

9

1 CD

DB-9 right-angle or straight cable end 8-pin mini-DIN cable end

Pin DB-9 end Mini-DIN end1 DCD DCD

2 RxD RxD

3 TxD TxD

4 DTR DTR

5 ground ground

6 DSR DSR

7 RTS RTS

8 CTS CTS

9 na na

1 2

34

5

6 7867

8

9

1

2

3

4

5

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

20 FlexLogix Controller System

3 Connect the appropriate cable to the serial port on the controller

Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding

4 If necessary attach the controller to the isolator

WARNING If you connect or disconnect the serial cable with power applied to this module or the serial device on the other end of the cable an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations

modem

1761-NET-AIC isolator

user-supplied modem cable

1761 cable

system enclosure

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 21

Select the Operating Mode of the Controller

1 Use this table to determine the operating mode of the controller

2 Turn the key on the front panel of the controller to select the mode

If you want to Select one of these modes

Run Program Remote

Run Program Test

turn outputs to the state commanded by the logic of the project

YES YES

turn outputs to their configured state for Program mode

YES YES YES

execute (scan) tasks YES YES YES

change the mode of the controller through software

YES YES YES

download a project YES YES

schedule a ControlNet network YES YES

while online edit the project YES YES YES YES

To select Turn the key to

Remote Run RUN and then to REM

Remote Program PROG and then to REM

Remote Test REM and then go online and select Test mode via the programming software

keyswitch

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

22 FlexLogix Controller System

Monitor the Controller LEDs

FLASH Upgrade the Controllerrsquos Firmware RevisionTo update the firmware of a controller first install a firmware upgrade kit

bull An upgrade kit ships on a supplemental CD along with RSLogix 5000 software

bull To download an upgrade kit go to httpsupportrockwellautomationcom Choose Firmware Updates

Indicator Color Description

RUN off bull no task(s) running

bull controller in Program mode

green bull one or more tasks are running

bull controller is in Run mode

OK off no power applied

red flashing after initially installing the controller - the controller requires a FLASH upgrade to the proper firmware revision see belowafter the controller is operating - recoverable fault

red bull controller faulted

bull clear faults clear memory or replace the controller

green controller OK

BATTERY off battery will support memory

red bull battery may not support memory

bull replace battery

IO off bull controller project not downloaded (the condition after power up)

bull no IO or communications configured

green communicating to all devices

green flashing one or more devices are not responding

LOCALandLOCAL2

off rail is inhibited

green communicating to all devices on that rail

green flashing one or more devices on that rail not responding

red flashing no modules exist on that rail

RS232 off no activity

green data being received or transmitted

FORCE off no forces present

amber forces present

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 23

Update the Controller

1 Connect the controller to the same network as your workstation

2 Start ControlFLASH software

3 Choose Next gt

4 Select the catalog number of the controller and choose Next gt

5 Expand the network until you see the controller If the required network is not shown first configure a driver for the network in RSLinx software

6 Select the controller and choose OK

7 Select the revision level to which you want to update the controller and choose Next gt

8 To start the update of the controller choose Finish and then Yes

After the controller is updated the status box displays Update complete

9 Choose OK

10 To close ControlFLASH software choose Cancel and then Yes

TIP RSLogix 5000 software revision 100 or later lets you update controller firmware as part of the download sequence To update the controller download your project and follow the prompts of the software

IMPORTANT If the Revision list is empty download a new upgrade kit Some older upgrade kits do not work with new controllers

42900

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

24 FlexLogix Controller System

FlexLogix Controller Approximate Mounting Dimensions

19949mm (785in)

849mm (334in) 5043mm (199in)

12197mm (481in)

18296mm (7203in)

8857mm (349in)

10596mm (417in)

10149mm (399in)

64mm (025in)

10457mm (412in)

8724mm (343in)

9296mm (366in)

8857mm (349in)

8014mm (316in)

1016mm (400in)

885mm (035in)

1853mm (730in)

135mm (053in)

825mm (033in)

60mm (024in)

6436mm (253in)

centerline of MTG Hole

centerline of DIN rail

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 25

FlexLogix Extended-Local IO Adapter Approximate Mounting Dimensions

Approximate Mounting Clearance

94mm (37in)

69mm (272in)

11712mm (461in)

8894mm (35in)

8106mm (319in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

26 FlexLogix Controller System

Other PublicationsYou can use the following manuals with this product

You can obtain manuals at wwwtheautomationbookstorecom

Specifications

Documents required for installation details Publication number

Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines 1770-41

Flex 1794-PS3 Power Supply Installation Instructions 1794-571

Flex 1794-PS13 Power Supply Installation Instructions 1794-569

Flex IO Terminal Base Installation Instructions 1794-516

1794-CE1 -CE3 Interconnect Cable Installation Instructions 1794-512

FLEX IO and FLEX Integra IO Technical Data 1794-21

Documents available for further reference Publication number

FlexLogix System User Manual 1794-UM001

Logix5000 Controllers Common Procedures Reference Manual 1756-PM001

Logix5000 Controllers General Instruction Set Reference Manual 1756-RM003

Guidelines for Handling Lithium Batteries AG-54

Category FlexLogix controller(1794-L33 -L34)

FlexLogix extended-local IO adapter (1794-FLA)

user memory 1794-L33 64 KBytes1794-L34 512 KBytes

na

input voltagerating (nominal)range

24V dc192V to 312V dc (includes 5 ac ripple)

isolation voltage(continuous-voltage withstand rating)

30V dcQualification tested to withstand 850V dc for 60 seconds

input current(1) 133A maximum at 192V dc085A maximum at 24V dc

039A maximum at 192V dc025A maximum at 24V dc

power dissipation(2) 255W maximum at 192V204W maximum at 24V dc

75W maximum at 192V60W maximum at 24V dc

backplane (FLEXBUS) current output

653mA maximum 51V dc 653mA maximum 51V dc

thermal dissipation 87BTUhour 192V 256BTUhour 192V

weight 1794-L33 71 kg (156 lbs oz)1794-L34 75 g (166 lbs)(no communication cards installed)

28 kg (62 lbs)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 27

power supply 1794-PS3 or 1794-PS13 ndash In applications that must be compliant with CSA requirements use a Separated Extra-Low Voltage (SELV) power supply that is compliant with IEC 610101 Annex H

power conductors 60deg C (140deg F) minimum copper22 to 14 AWG (0324 to 208 sq mm) stranded364 inch (12mm) insulation maximumlength 10m or less

category 3(2)

power connector torque 5 to 7 inch-pounds (06 to 08Nm)

battery 1756-BA1 (AB part number 94194801)059g lithium

na

serial cable 1761-CBLPM02 to 1761-NET-AIC 1761-CBLPA00 to 1761-NET-AIC1756-CP3 directly to controller1747-CP3 directly to controller

category 3(4)

na

extended local IO cable 1794-CE1 cable (1 foot)1794-CE3 cable (3 feet)

category 3(2)

DIN rail steel 35 x 755mm DIN railA-B part number 199-DR1 46277-3 EN 50022

operating temperature IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad Operating Cold)IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd Operating Dry Heat)IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock)0 to 60degC (32 to 140degF)

storage temperature IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab Un-packaged Non-operating Cold)IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb Un-packaged Non-operating Dry Heat)IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na Un-packaged Non-operating Thermal Shock)ndash40 to 85degC (ndash40 to 185degF)

relative humidity IEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db Un-packaged Non-operating Damp Heat)5 to 95 non-condensing

vibration(3) IEC60068-2-6 (Test Fc Operating) 5g 10-500Hz

shock(3)

operatingnon-operating

IEC60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged shock)

30g50g

emissions CISPR 11Group 1 Class A (with appropriate enclosure)

ESD immunity IEC 61000-4-26kV contact discharges8kV air discharges

Category FlexLogix controller(1794-L33 -L34)

FlexLogix extended-local IO adapter (1794-FLA)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

radiated RF immunity IEC 61000-4-310Vm with 1kHz sine-wave 80AM from 30MHz to 2000MHz10Vm with 200Hz 50 Pulse 100AM at 900Mhz

EFTB immunity IEC 61000-4-4plusmn4kV at 25kHz on power portsplusmn2kV at 5kHz on communications ports

surge transient immunity IEC 61000-4-5plusmn2kV line-earth (CM) on shielded ports

conducted RF immunity IEC 61000-4-610Vrms with 1kHz sine-wave 80AM from 150kHz to 80MHz

enclosure type rating none (open-style)

Certifications(when product is marked)

UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipmentc-UL-us UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous

Locations certified for US and CanadaCSA CSA Certified Process Control EquipmentCSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class I Division 2

Group ABCD Hazardous Locations

CE(5) European Union 89336EEC EMC Directive compliant withEN 50082-2 Industrial ImmunityEN 61326 MeasControlLab Industrial RequirementsEN 61000-6-2 Industrial ImmunityEN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions

C-Tick(5) Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant withASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions

EEx(5) European Union 949EEC ATEX Directive compliant withEN 50021 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n (Zone 2)

(1) This specification is also known as Power Consumption(2) This specification is also known as Heat Dissipation(3) To maintain these vibration and shock specifications you must use DIN rail locks(4) Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing Refer to Publication 1770-41 Industrial

Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines(5) See the Product Certification link at wwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification

details

Category FlexLogix controller(1794-L33 -L34)

FlexLogix extended-local IO adapter (1794-FLA)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004 PN 957867-01Supersedes Publication 1794-IN002F-EN-P - October 2002 Copyright copy 2004 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

  • 1794-IN002G-EN-P FlexLogix Controller System Installation Instructions
    • Tools That You Need
    • Obtain a User Manual
    • Environment and Enclosure
    • Prevent Electrostatic Discharge
    • European Hazardous Location Approval
    • North American Hazardous Location Approval
    • Removal and Insertion Under Power
    • Other Considerations
    • What You Need to Do
    • Step 1 Verify That You Have All the Components
    • Step 2 Install the Battery
    • Step 3 Install Communication Daughtercards (optional)
    • Step 4 Install the Controller
    • Step 5 Install the Extended-Local Adapter (optional)
    • Make an RS-232 Connection to the Controller
    • Select the Operating Mode of the Controller
    • Monitor the Controller LEDs
    • FLASH Upgrade the Controllerrsquos Firmware Revision
    • Update the Controller
    • FlexLogix Controller Approximate Mounting Dimensions
    • FlexLogix Extended-Local IO Adapter Approximate Mounting Dimensions
    • Approximate Mounting Clearance
    • Other Publications
    • Specifications
      • Back Cover
        • Intro

          ampLRA-QR005B-EN-E 308

          Generic pub print specs

          ampCItem Setup Sheet for Conversion Transfers
          ampLJIT-D-print SpreadsheetampCRA-QR005C-EN-EampRampD ampT

          IN RN pub type specs

          UM RM PM pub type specs

          AP PP pub type specs

          BR pub type specs

          Field definitions

          ampL04032006ampRampP
          PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
          EA = Each
          PK = Pack
          PD = Pad
          RL = Roll
          BK = Book
          CT = Carton
          BX = Box
          ST = Set
          Multiple Order Qty
          Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
          Business Group
          The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
          CorporateBusiness Development
          Finance
          Human Resources
          IT
          Logistics
          Manufacturing
          Marketing Commercial
          Marketing Europe
          Marketing Other
          Operations
          Order Services
          Other
          Process Improvement
          Procurement
          Quality
          Sales
          Max Order Quantity
          Presale items = 100
          Postsale items = 5
          NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
          Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
          Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
          Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
          BindingStitching
          For a Form (F) use
          CARBONLESS
          CUTSHEET
          ENVELOPE
          For a Book (B) use
          LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
          PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
          PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
          SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
          STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
          STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
          STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
          THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
          THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
          WIRE O Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
          Saddle-Stitch Items
          20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
          19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
          18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
          All page quantities must be divisible by 4
          Tape Bound Items
          125 sheets max on 20 no cover
          120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Perfect Bound Items
          475 sheets max on 20 no cover
          470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Double Wire Bound Items
          40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Coil Bound Items
          290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Sides Printed
          Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
          Simplex = Single-sided printing
          Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
          Number of Forms to a Sheet
          Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
          Number of Sheets Required to Print
          Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
          Paper Stock Type
          Description
          PLAIN Bond
          ACNTCVR Accent Cover
          BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
          BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
          C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
          C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
          C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
          C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
          CARD Card Stock
          CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
          CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
          COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
          CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
          CUSTOM Custom
          CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
          ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
          ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
          ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
          GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
          GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
          HOTSTEXT Hots Text
          INDEX Index
          LABEL80 80 Up Label
          MICROPRT Micro Print
          OFFSET Offset
          PART2 2 Part
          PART3 3 Part
          PART4 4 Part
          PART5 5 Part
          PART6 6 Part
          PERF 12 inch Perfed
          PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
          PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
          PREPERF Pre-Perforated
          RECYL Recycled
          SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
          SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
          SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
          TAG Tag
          TEXT Text
          TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
          TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
          TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
          TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
          VELLUM Vellum
          VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
          WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
          WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
          WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
          Paper Stock Color
          Black
          Blue
          Buff
          Canary
          Cherry
          Clear
          Cream
          Custom
          Goldrenrod
          Gray
          Green
          Ivory
          Lavender
          Manilla
          NCRPinkCanary
          NCRWhiteBlue
          NCRWhiteBlueCanary
          NCRWhiteCanary
          NCRWhiteCanaryPink
          NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
          NCRWhiteGreen
          NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
          NCRWhitePink
          NCRWhiteWhite
          Opaque
          Orange
          Orchid
          Peach
          Pink
          Purple
          Salmon
          Tan
          Violet
          White
          Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
          11 x 17
          18 x 24 Poster
          24 x 36 Poster
          3 x 5
          36 x 24 Poster
          4 x 6
          475 x 7
          475 x 775
          55 x 85
          6 x 4
          7 x 9
          7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
          85 x 11
          825 x 10875
          825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
          8375 x 10875
          9 x 12
          A4
          A5
          Other - Custom size listed below
          Drilling Locations
          1CENTER
          1LEFTTOP
          1TOPCENTER
          2LEFT
          2LEFT2TOP
          2TOP
          2TOP2LEFT
          2TOP3LEFT
          2TOP5LEFT
          2TOP5RIGHT
          3BOTTOM
          3LEFT
          3LEFT2TOP
          3LEFT3TOP
          3RIGHT
          3TOP
          3TOP5LEFT
          5BOTTOM
          5CENTER
          5LEFT
          5RIGHT
          5RIGHT2TOP
          5TOP
          For TRI fold - select Z or C type Description
          HALF Half
          C C Fold
          DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
          OFFSETZ Offset Z
          SAMPLE See Sample
          SHORT Short Fold
          V V Fold
          Z Z Fold
          Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
          Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
          77 or more pages 1
          33 to 76 pages 25
          3 to 32 pages 50
          1 or 2 pages 100
          Comments
          CoverText Stock Spine
          100 Gloss Cover If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
          100 Gloss Text
          100 Text
          10pt C1S Cover
          10pt C2S Cover
          10pt C2S Text
          10pt Text Stock
          110 White Index
          12pt C1S Cover
          20 White Opaque Bond
          50 Colored Offset
          50 White Offset
          50 White Opaque
          60 Cover Stock
          60 White Offset
          80 Gloss Cover
          80 Gloss Text
          8pt C1S White
          90 White Index
          CoverText Ink
          Black
          Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
          Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
          4 color
          4 color over black
          4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
          4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
          4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
          4 color + aqueous
          4 color + varnish
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 50 RRD must provide this information
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 RRD must provide this information
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          EA 1 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Black amp White B PERFECT PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 NA 516 3LEFT NA NA NA NA RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          1794-IN002G-EN-P FlexLogix Controller Installation Instructions EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial 19021 01232004 5 Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 4 28 7 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 55 85 NA NA NA NA NA HALF 55 x 85 100 RRD must provide this information Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black 957867-01
          Corp 17501
          Bill To 69
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information
          Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
          This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
          Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
          Generic pub print specs Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
          IN RN pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          UM RM PM pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          AP PP pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          BR pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          Field definitions Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
          Attach Print Specs to PDF
          For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
          RA-QR005C-EN-E 608
Page 3: FlexLogix Controller System - Rockwell Automation...FlexLogix Controller System 3 Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004 Environment and Enclosure Prevent Electrostatic Discharge

FlexLogix Controller System 3

Environment and Enclosure

Prevent Electrostatic Discharge

ATTENTION This equipment is intended for use in a Pollution Degree 2 industrial environment in overvoltage Category II applications (as defined in IEC publication 60664-1) at altitudes up to 2000 meters without derating

This equipment is considered Group 1 Class A industrial equipment according to IECCISPR Publication 11 Without appropriate precautions there may be potential difficulties ensuring electromagnetic compatibility in other environments due to conducted as well as radiated disturbance

This equipment is supplied as open type equipment It must be mounted within an enclosure that is suitably designed for those specific environmental conditions that will be present and appropriately designed to prevent personal injury resulting from accessibility to live parts The interior of the enclosure must be accessible only by the use of a tool Subsequent sections of this publication may contain additional information regarding specific enclosure type ratings that are required to comply with certain product safety certifications

NOTE See NEMA Standards publication 250 and IEC publication 60529 as applicable for explanations of the degrees of protection provided by different types of enclosure Also see the appropriate sections in this publication as well as the Allen-Bradley publication 1770-41 (Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines) for additional installation requirements pertaining to this equipment

ATTENTION This equipment is sensitive to electrostatic discharge which can cause internal damage and affect normal operation Follow these guidelines when you handle this equipment

bull Touch a grounded object to discharge potential static

bull Wear an approved grounding wriststrap

bull Do not touch connectors or pins on component boards

bull Do not touch circuit components inside the equipment

bull If available use a static-safe workstation

bull When not in use store the equipment in appropriate static-safe packaging

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

4 FlexLogix Controller System

European Hazardous Location Approval

European Zone 2 Certification (The following applies when the product bears the EEx Marking)

This equipment is intended for use in potentially explosive atmospheres as defined by European Union Directive 949EC

The LCIE (Laboratoire Central des Industries Electriques) certifies that this equipment has been found to comply with the Essential Health and Safety Requirements relating to the design and construction of Category 3 equipment intended for use in potentially explosive atmospheres given in Annex II to this Directive The examination and test results are recorded in confidential report No 28 682 010

Compliance with the Essential Health and Safety Requirements has been assured by compliance with EN 50021

IMPORTANT When using this product also consider the following

bull This equipment is not resistant to sunlight or other sources of UV radiation

bull The secondary of a current transformer shall not be open-circuited when applied in Class I Zone 2 environments

bull Equipment of lesser Enclosure Type Rating must be installed in an enclosure providing at least IP54 protection when applied in Class I Zone 2 environments

bull This equipment shall be used within its specified ratings defined by Allen-Bradley

bull Provision shall be made to prevent the rated voltage from being exceeded by transient disturbances of more than 40 when applied in Class I Zone 2 environments

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 5

North American Hazardous Location ApprovalThe following information applies when operating this equipment in hazardous locations

Informations sur lrsquoutilisation de cet eacutequipement en environnements dangereux

Products marked ldquoCL I DIV 2 GP A B C Drdquo are suitable for use in Class I Division 2 Groups A B C D Hazardous Locations and nonhazardous locations only Each product is supplied with markings on the rating nameplate indicating the hazardous location temperature code When combining products within a system the most adverse temperature code (lowest ldquoTrdquo number) may be used to help determine the overall temperature code of the system Combinations of equipment in your system are subject to investigation by the local Authority Having Jurisdiction at the time of installation

Les produits marqueacutes CL I DIV 2 GP A B C D ne conviennent qursquoagrave une utilisation en environnements de Classe I Division 2 Groupes A B C D dangereux et non dangereux Chaque produit est livreacute avec des marquages sur sa plaque drsquoidentification qui indiquent le code de tempeacuterature pour les environnements dangereux Lorsque plusieurs produits sont combineacutes dans un systegraveme le code de tempeacuterature le plus deacutefavorable (code de tempeacuterature le plus faible) peut ecirctre utiliseacute pour deacuteterminer le code de tempeacuterature global du systegraveme Les combinaisons drsquoeacutequipements dans le systegraveme sont sujettes agrave inspection par les autoriteacutes locales qualifieacutees au moment de lrsquoinstallation

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

6 FlexLogix Controller System

WARNING EXPLOSION HAZARD

bull Do not disconnect equipment unless power has been removed or the area is known to be nonhazardous

bull Do not disconnect connections to this equipment unless power has been removed or the area is known to be nonhazardous Secure any external connections that mate to this equipment by using screws sliding latches threaded connectors or other means provided with this product

bull Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class I Division 2

bull If this product contains batteries they must only be changed in an area known to be nonhazardous

AVERTISSEMENT RISQUE DrsquoEXPLOSION

bull Couper le courant ou srsquoassurer que lrsquoenvironnement est classeacute non dangereux avant de deacutebrancher leacutequipement

bull Couper le courant ou sassurer que lrsquoenvironnement est classeacute non dangereux avant de deacutebrancher les connecteurs Fixer tous les connecteurs externes relieacutes agrave cet eacutequipement agrave laide de vis loquets coulissants connecteurs fileteacutes ou autres moyens fournis avec ce produit

bull La substitution de composants peut rendre cet eacutequipement inadapteacute agrave une utilisation en environnement de Classe I Division 2

bull Srsquoassurer que lrsquoenvironnement est classeacute non dangereux avant de changer les piles

The following information applies when operating this equipment in hazardous locations

Informations sur lrsquoutilisation de cet eacutequipement en environnements dangereux

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 7

Removal and Insertion Under PowerThe FlexLogix controller the extended-local IO adapter the communication daughtercards and the IO terminal bases cannot be removed or inserted under power

However you can remove and insert FLEX IO modules while backplane power is applied and the system is operating

Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding

Other Considerations

WARNING If you insert or remove the module while backplane power is on an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations

ATTENTION Also consider the following before you install your FlexLogix controller

bull This product is grounded through the DIN rail to chassis ground Use zinc plated yellow-chromate steel DIN rail to assure proper grounding The use of other DIN rail materials (eg aluminum plastic etc) that can corrode oxidize or are poor conductors can result in improper or intermittent grounding

bull Power connection length should be less than 10 meters

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

8 FlexLogix Controller System

What You Need to DoBefore you can install a FlexLogix controller or extended-local adapter you must

Install steel 35 x 755mm DIN rails (A-B part number 199-DR1 46277-3) where you want to place the FlexLogix system components

The DIN rails for all FlexLogix system components including all local and extended-local IO modules must be mounted on a common conductive surface to ensure proper electromagnetic interference (EMI) performance See 24 and 25 for approximate mounting dimensions and mounting clearances

For more information about mounting DIN rails and splitting IO across DIN rails see the FLEX IO Product Data publication 1794-21

Use DIN rail locks (A-B catalog number 1492-EA35) to meet the shock and vibrations specifications listed on 26 A pair of DIN locks comes with the controller

Mount an appropriate power supply on an appropriate DIN rail See the specifications on 26

To install a FlexLogix controller

Step 1 Verify That You Have All the Components see page 9

Step 2 Install the Battery see page 10

Step 3 Install Communication Daughtercards (optional) see page 11

Step 4 Install the Controller see page 12

Step 5 Install the Extended-Local Adapter (optional) see page 15

After you install the FlexLogix controller you can

Make an RS-232 Connection to the Controller see page 18

Select the Operating Mode of the Controller see page 21

Monitor the Controller LEDs see page 22

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 9

Step 1 Verify That You Have All the ComponentsThese components ship with the FlexLogix controller

bull 1756-BA1 battery and label

bull key

bull one spring-clip connector plug for 24V power connection

bull one screw-terminal connector plug for 24V power connection

bull two 1492-EA35 DIN rail locks

The system components you have depend on your application You might have

FlexLogix System Component Description

1788-CNC -CNCR for ControlNet communications1788-CNF -CNFR for ControlNet communications1788-DNBO for DeviceNet communications1788-ENBT for EtherNetIP communications

1756-CP3You can also use the 1747-CP3 cable from the SLC product family

1794-FLA

1794-CE1 (1 foot)1794-CE3 (3 foot)

communication card

serial cable

FlexLogix extended-local adapter

extended- local IO cable

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

10 FlexLogix Controller System

Step 2 Install the Battery

For Safety information on the handling of lithium batteries including handling and disposal of leaking batteries see Guidelines for Handling Lithium Batteries publication AG 5-4

1 Install a 1756-BA1 battery

2 Attach the battery label

a Write on the battery label the date you install the battery

b Attach the label to the inside of the battery compartment

ATTENTION Only install a 1756-BA1 battery If you install a different battery you may damage the controller

WARNING For safety information on the handling of lithium batteries in-cluding the handling and disposal of leaking batteries see Guide-lines for Handling Lithium Batteries publication AG-54Store batteries in a cool dry environment We recommend 25degC with 40 to 60 relative humidity You may store batteries for up to 30 days between -45deg to 85degC such as during transporta-tion To avoid possible leakage do not store batteries above 60degC for more than 30 days

When you connect or disconnect the battery an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location in-stallations Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhaz-ardous before proceeding

Attach battery here

top red lead (+)

middle black lead (-)

bottom no connection

Attach label here

This jumper is for service use only Do not use this jumper

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 11

Step 3 Install Communication Daughtercards (optional)

For specific information about configuring the communication card (such as setting a node address) see the installation instructions for the communication card

1 Turn off power to the controller

2 If necessary remove the blank cover from the communication slot

3 Slide the communication card into the communication slot Be sure to line up the card with the card guides in the controller

4 Record which slot you use for the communication card You need the slot number when you develop your controller application

5 Secure the card with the screws to ensure proper grounding Do not over-tighten the screws The maximum torque for the card screws is 48 to 52 inch pounds (05 to 06 Nm)

6 After the controller is installed (see page 12) connect the network cable

Removing a Communication CardIf you need to remove a communication card from the controller

1 Turn off power to the controller

2 Disconnect all cables from the communication card

3 Loosen the card screws from the communication card

4 Remove the card from the controller

5 Replace the card with a blank cover or a different communication card

WARNING If you insert or remove the card while host power is on an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in haz-ardous location installations

31032-M

slot 1slot 2

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

12 FlexLogix Controller System

Step 4 Install the Controller

1 Position the FlexLogix controller on the DIN rail at a 5deg angle and rotate the controller onto the DIN rail

2 Press the controller down onto the DIN rail until flush The locking tabs will snap into position and lock the controller onto the DIN rail

If the controller does not lock in place use a screwdriver or similar device to move the locking tabs down while pressing the controller onto the DIN rail Release the locking tabs to lock the controller in place If necessary push up on the locking tabs to lock

3 Ground the controller The DIN rail and the common conductive surface behind the DIN rail provide functional ground for the controller Use the grounding stud to meet safety ground requirements

For information about wiring and grounding see the Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41

IMPORTANT You can mount the FlexLogix controller either vertically or horizontally (as shown)

A

A

locking tabs

grounding stud

Equipment grounding conductor (ground lug with 208 sq mm [14 AWG] wire) to ground bus

nuts with captive star washer

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 13

4 Make sure power is not applied to the power supply

5 Connect the power supply to the controller The graphic below and its related instructions describe a 1794-PS13 power supply

a Connect +24V dc input to the top of the controller connector terminal A to the bottom left power connector terminal G

b Connect -24V common to top controller connector terminal B to the top left power connector terminal E

c Use connections C and D on the controller and connection F and H on the power supply to pass 24V dc power and common to the next module in the series if required

Use the screw-terminal connector plug that comes with the controller to meet the requirements for installations in Class I Division 2 locations

WARNING If you connect or disconnect wiring while the field-side power is on an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations Be sure that power is re-moved or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding

+

+

A

B

C

D

FE

HG

_

_

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

14 FlexLogix Controller System

6 Mount the IO terminal bases on the DIN rail

For information about IO terminal bases see the FLEX IO Terminal Base Installation Instructions publication 1794-IN092

7 Install the IO modules

To install an IO module see the installation instructions for that module

Removing the controllerIf you need to remove the controller follow these steps

1 Turn off power to the controller

2 Disconnect all cables from the controller

3 Remove the IO module that is adjacent to the controller

4 On the terminal base adjacent to the controller slide the FLEXBUS connector away from the controller and remove the IO terminal base

5 Remove the controller from the DIN rail

B

A

A

31036-M

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 15

Step 5 Install the Extended-Local Adapter (optional)

1 Position the 1794-FLA extended-local IO adapter on the DIN rail at a 30deg angle and rotate the adapter onto the DIN rail

2 Press the adapter down onto the DIN rail until flush The locking tab will snap into position and lock the adapter onto the DIN rail

If the adapter does not lock in place use a screwdriver or similar device to move the locking tab down while pressing the adapter onto the DIN rail Release the locking tab to lock the adapter in place If necessary push up on the locking tab to lock

3 Ground the adapter The adapter is grounded through the steel DIN rail and the common conductive surface behind the DIN rail Additionally use the grounding stud

grounding stud

Equipment grounding conductor (ground lug with 208 sq mm [14 AWG] wire) to ground bus

nuts with captive star washer

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

16 FlexLogix Controller System

4 Make sure power is not applied to the power supply Connect the power supply to the adapter This diagram and its related instructions describe a 1794-PS13 power supply

a Connect +24V dc input to the left adapter connector terminal A to the bottom left power connector terminal G

b Connect -24V common to left adapter connector terminal B to the top left power connector terminal E

c Use connections C and D on the adapter and connection F and H on the power supply to pass 24V dc power and common to the next module in the series if required

Use the screw-terminal connector plug that comes with the adapter to meet the requirements for installations in Class I Division 2 locations

5 Connect IO terminal bases and IO modules to the adapter the same way you connect them to the controller

6 Remove the plastic spacer from both ends of the extended-local IO cable (1794-CE1 or 1794-CE3)

plastic spacer

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 17

7 Connect the adapter to the controller

The following diagram shows how you can also use the 1794-CE1 -CE3 cable to split a rail of IO You can split each rail only once You can split a rail right after the controller (or adapter) or after any IO module For more information about the 1794-CE1 -CE3 cables see the Interconnect Cable Installation Instructions publication 1794-512

Removing the extended-local adapterIf you need to remove the adapter follow these steps

1 Turn off power to the adapter

2 Disconnect all cables from the adapter

3 Remove the IO module that is adjacent to the adapter

4 On the terminal base adjacent to the adapter slide the FLEXBUS connector away from the adapter and remove the IO terminal base

5 Remove the adapter from the DIN rail

31039-M

1794-CE1 or 1794-CE3 cable

LOCAL rail

LOCAL2 rail

1794-CE1 or 1794-CE3 cable

1794-CE1 or 1794-CE3 cable

1794-CE1 or 1794-CE3 cable

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

18 FlexLogix Controller System

Make an RS-232 Connection to the ControllerThe RS-232 port is a non-isolated serial port built-in to the front of the controller

To connect to the serial port

1 Determine whether you need an optical isolator

If you connect the controller to a device outside of the systemrsquos enclosure consider installing an isolator between the controller and device

One possible isolator is the 1761-NET-AIC interface converter

serial port

port 1 DB-9 RS-232 DTE

baud rate selector switch

port 2 mini-DIN 8 RS-232

dc power source selector switch

terminals for external 24V dc power supply

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 19

2 Select the appropriate cable

Are you using an isolator

Use this cable

no The 1756-CP3 cable attaches the controller directly to the controller

If you make your own cable it must be shielded and the shields must be tied to the metal shell (that surrounds the pins) on both ends of the cableYou can also use a 1747-CP3 cable (from the SLC product family) This cable has a taller right-angle connector housing than the 1756-CP3 cable

yes The 1761-CBL-AP00 cable (right-angle connector to controller) or the 1761-CBL-PM02 cable (straight connector to the controller) attaches the controller to port 2 on the 1761-NET-AIC isolator The mini-DIN connector is not commercially available so you cannot make this cable

2 RDX

3 TXD

4 DTR

COMMON

6 DSR

7 RTS

8 CTS

9

1 CD

2 RDX

3 TXD

4 DTR

COMMON

6 DSR

7 RTS

8 CTS

9

1 CD

DB-9 right-angle or straight cable end 8-pin mini-DIN cable end

Pin DB-9 end Mini-DIN end1 DCD DCD

2 RxD RxD

3 TxD TxD

4 DTR DTR

5 ground ground

6 DSR DSR

7 RTS RTS

8 CTS CTS

9 na na

1 2

34

5

6 7867

8

9

1

2

3

4

5

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

20 FlexLogix Controller System

3 Connect the appropriate cable to the serial port on the controller

Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding

4 If necessary attach the controller to the isolator

WARNING If you connect or disconnect the serial cable with power applied to this module or the serial device on the other end of the cable an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations

modem

1761-NET-AIC isolator

user-supplied modem cable

1761 cable

system enclosure

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 21

Select the Operating Mode of the Controller

1 Use this table to determine the operating mode of the controller

2 Turn the key on the front panel of the controller to select the mode

If you want to Select one of these modes

Run Program Remote

Run Program Test

turn outputs to the state commanded by the logic of the project

YES YES

turn outputs to their configured state for Program mode

YES YES YES

execute (scan) tasks YES YES YES

change the mode of the controller through software

YES YES YES

download a project YES YES

schedule a ControlNet network YES YES

while online edit the project YES YES YES YES

To select Turn the key to

Remote Run RUN and then to REM

Remote Program PROG and then to REM

Remote Test REM and then go online and select Test mode via the programming software

keyswitch

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

22 FlexLogix Controller System

Monitor the Controller LEDs

FLASH Upgrade the Controllerrsquos Firmware RevisionTo update the firmware of a controller first install a firmware upgrade kit

bull An upgrade kit ships on a supplemental CD along with RSLogix 5000 software

bull To download an upgrade kit go to httpsupportrockwellautomationcom Choose Firmware Updates

Indicator Color Description

RUN off bull no task(s) running

bull controller in Program mode

green bull one or more tasks are running

bull controller is in Run mode

OK off no power applied

red flashing after initially installing the controller - the controller requires a FLASH upgrade to the proper firmware revision see belowafter the controller is operating - recoverable fault

red bull controller faulted

bull clear faults clear memory or replace the controller

green controller OK

BATTERY off battery will support memory

red bull battery may not support memory

bull replace battery

IO off bull controller project not downloaded (the condition after power up)

bull no IO or communications configured

green communicating to all devices

green flashing one or more devices are not responding

LOCALandLOCAL2

off rail is inhibited

green communicating to all devices on that rail

green flashing one or more devices on that rail not responding

red flashing no modules exist on that rail

RS232 off no activity

green data being received or transmitted

FORCE off no forces present

amber forces present

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 23

Update the Controller

1 Connect the controller to the same network as your workstation

2 Start ControlFLASH software

3 Choose Next gt

4 Select the catalog number of the controller and choose Next gt

5 Expand the network until you see the controller If the required network is not shown first configure a driver for the network in RSLinx software

6 Select the controller and choose OK

7 Select the revision level to which you want to update the controller and choose Next gt

8 To start the update of the controller choose Finish and then Yes

After the controller is updated the status box displays Update complete

9 Choose OK

10 To close ControlFLASH software choose Cancel and then Yes

TIP RSLogix 5000 software revision 100 or later lets you update controller firmware as part of the download sequence To update the controller download your project and follow the prompts of the software

IMPORTANT If the Revision list is empty download a new upgrade kit Some older upgrade kits do not work with new controllers

42900

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

24 FlexLogix Controller System

FlexLogix Controller Approximate Mounting Dimensions

19949mm (785in)

849mm (334in) 5043mm (199in)

12197mm (481in)

18296mm (7203in)

8857mm (349in)

10596mm (417in)

10149mm (399in)

64mm (025in)

10457mm (412in)

8724mm (343in)

9296mm (366in)

8857mm (349in)

8014mm (316in)

1016mm (400in)

885mm (035in)

1853mm (730in)

135mm (053in)

825mm (033in)

60mm (024in)

6436mm (253in)

centerline of MTG Hole

centerline of DIN rail

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 25

FlexLogix Extended-Local IO Adapter Approximate Mounting Dimensions

Approximate Mounting Clearance

94mm (37in)

69mm (272in)

11712mm (461in)

8894mm (35in)

8106mm (319in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

26 FlexLogix Controller System

Other PublicationsYou can use the following manuals with this product

You can obtain manuals at wwwtheautomationbookstorecom

Specifications

Documents required for installation details Publication number

Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines 1770-41

Flex 1794-PS3 Power Supply Installation Instructions 1794-571

Flex 1794-PS13 Power Supply Installation Instructions 1794-569

Flex IO Terminal Base Installation Instructions 1794-516

1794-CE1 -CE3 Interconnect Cable Installation Instructions 1794-512

FLEX IO and FLEX Integra IO Technical Data 1794-21

Documents available for further reference Publication number

FlexLogix System User Manual 1794-UM001

Logix5000 Controllers Common Procedures Reference Manual 1756-PM001

Logix5000 Controllers General Instruction Set Reference Manual 1756-RM003

Guidelines for Handling Lithium Batteries AG-54

Category FlexLogix controller(1794-L33 -L34)

FlexLogix extended-local IO adapter (1794-FLA)

user memory 1794-L33 64 KBytes1794-L34 512 KBytes

na

input voltagerating (nominal)range

24V dc192V to 312V dc (includes 5 ac ripple)

isolation voltage(continuous-voltage withstand rating)

30V dcQualification tested to withstand 850V dc for 60 seconds

input current(1) 133A maximum at 192V dc085A maximum at 24V dc

039A maximum at 192V dc025A maximum at 24V dc

power dissipation(2) 255W maximum at 192V204W maximum at 24V dc

75W maximum at 192V60W maximum at 24V dc

backplane (FLEXBUS) current output

653mA maximum 51V dc 653mA maximum 51V dc

thermal dissipation 87BTUhour 192V 256BTUhour 192V

weight 1794-L33 71 kg (156 lbs oz)1794-L34 75 g (166 lbs)(no communication cards installed)

28 kg (62 lbs)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 27

power supply 1794-PS3 or 1794-PS13 ndash In applications that must be compliant with CSA requirements use a Separated Extra-Low Voltage (SELV) power supply that is compliant with IEC 610101 Annex H

power conductors 60deg C (140deg F) minimum copper22 to 14 AWG (0324 to 208 sq mm) stranded364 inch (12mm) insulation maximumlength 10m or less

category 3(2)

power connector torque 5 to 7 inch-pounds (06 to 08Nm)

battery 1756-BA1 (AB part number 94194801)059g lithium

na

serial cable 1761-CBLPM02 to 1761-NET-AIC 1761-CBLPA00 to 1761-NET-AIC1756-CP3 directly to controller1747-CP3 directly to controller

category 3(4)

na

extended local IO cable 1794-CE1 cable (1 foot)1794-CE3 cable (3 feet)

category 3(2)

DIN rail steel 35 x 755mm DIN railA-B part number 199-DR1 46277-3 EN 50022

operating temperature IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad Operating Cold)IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd Operating Dry Heat)IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock)0 to 60degC (32 to 140degF)

storage temperature IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab Un-packaged Non-operating Cold)IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb Un-packaged Non-operating Dry Heat)IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na Un-packaged Non-operating Thermal Shock)ndash40 to 85degC (ndash40 to 185degF)

relative humidity IEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db Un-packaged Non-operating Damp Heat)5 to 95 non-condensing

vibration(3) IEC60068-2-6 (Test Fc Operating) 5g 10-500Hz

shock(3)

operatingnon-operating

IEC60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged shock)

30g50g

emissions CISPR 11Group 1 Class A (with appropriate enclosure)

ESD immunity IEC 61000-4-26kV contact discharges8kV air discharges

Category FlexLogix controller(1794-L33 -L34)

FlexLogix extended-local IO adapter (1794-FLA)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

radiated RF immunity IEC 61000-4-310Vm with 1kHz sine-wave 80AM from 30MHz to 2000MHz10Vm with 200Hz 50 Pulse 100AM at 900Mhz

EFTB immunity IEC 61000-4-4plusmn4kV at 25kHz on power portsplusmn2kV at 5kHz on communications ports

surge transient immunity IEC 61000-4-5plusmn2kV line-earth (CM) on shielded ports

conducted RF immunity IEC 61000-4-610Vrms with 1kHz sine-wave 80AM from 150kHz to 80MHz

enclosure type rating none (open-style)

Certifications(when product is marked)

UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipmentc-UL-us UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous

Locations certified for US and CanadaCSA CSA Certified Process Control EquipmentCSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class I Division 2

Group ABCD Hazardous Locations

CE(5) European Union 89336EEC EMC Directive compliant withEN 50082-2 Industrial ImmunityEN 61326 MeasControlLab Industrial RequirementsEN 61000-6-2 Industrial ImmunityEN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions

C-Tick(5) Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant withASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions

EEx(5) European Union 949EEC ATEX Directive compliant withEN 50021 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n (Zone 2)

(1) This specification is also known as Power Consumption(2) This specification is also known as Heat Dissipation(3) To maintain these vibration and shock specifications you must use DIN rail locks(4) Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing Refer to Publication 1770-41 Industrial

Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines(5) See the Product Certification link at wwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification

details

Category FlexLogix controller(1794-L33 -L34)

FlexLogix extended-local IO adapter (1794-FLA)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004 PN 957867-01Supersedes Publication 1794-IN002F-EN-P - October 2002 Copyright copy 2004 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

  • 1794-IN002G-EN-P FlexLogix Controller System Installation Instructions
    • Tools That You Need
    • Obtain a User Manual
    • Environment and Enclosure
    • Prevent Electrostatic Discharge
    • European Hazardous Location Approval
    • North American Hazardous Location Approval
    • Removal and Insertion Under Power
    • Other Considerations
    • What You Need to Do
    • Step 1 Verify That You Have All the Components
    • Step 2 Install the Battery
    • Step 3 Install Communication Daughtercards (optional)
    • Step 4 Install the Controller
    • Step 5 Install the Extended-Local Adapter (optional)
    • Make an RS-232 Connection to the Controller
    • Select the Operating Mode of the Controller
    • Monitor the Controller LEDs
    • FLASH Upgrade the Controllerrsquos Firmware Revision
    • Update the Controller
    • FlexLogix Controller Approximate Mounting Dimensions
    • FlexLogix Extended-Local IO Adapter Approximate Mounting Dimensions
    • Approximate Mounting Clearance
    • Other Publications
    • Specifications
      • Back Cover
        • Intro

          ampLRA-QR005B-EN-E 308

          Generic pub print specs

          ampCItem Setup Sheet for Conversion Transfers
          ampLJIT-D-print SpreadsheetampCRA-QR005C-EN-EampRampD ampT

          IN RN pub type specs

          UM RM PM pub type specs

          AP PP pub type specs

          BR pub type specs

          Field definitions

          ampL04032006ampRampP
          PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
          EA = Each
          PK = Pack
          PD = Pad
          RL = Roll
          BK = Book
          CT = Carton
          BX = Box
          ST = Set
          Multiple Order Qty
          Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
          Business Group
          The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
          CorporateBusiness Development
          Finance
          Human Resources
          IT
          Logistics
          Manufacturing
          Marketing Commercial
          Marketing Europe
          Marketing Other
          Operations
          Order Services
          Other
          Process Improvement
          Procurement
          Quality
          Sales
          Max Order Quantity
          Presale items = 100
          Postsale items = 5
          NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
          Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
          Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
          Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
          BindingStitching
          For a Form (F) use
          CARBONLESS
          CUTSHEET
          ENVELOPE
          For a Book (B) use
          LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
          PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
          PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
          SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
          STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
          STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
          STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
          THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
          THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
          WIRE O Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
          Saddle-Stitch Items
          20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
          19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
          18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
          All page quantities must be divisible by 4
          Tape Bound Items
          125 sheets max on 20 no cover
          120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Perfect Bound Items
          475 sheets max on 20 no cover
          470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Double Wire Bound Items
          40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Coil Bound Items
          290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Sides Printed
          Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
          Simplex = Single-sided printing
          Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
          Number of Forms to a Sheet
          Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
          Number of Sheets Required to Print
          Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
          Paper Stock Type
          Description
          PLAIN Bond
          ACNTCVR Accent Cover
          BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
          BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
          C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
          C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
          C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
          C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
          CARD Card Stock
          CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
          CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
          COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
          CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
          CUSTOM Custom
          CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
          ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
          ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
          ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
          GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
          GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
          HOTSTEXT Hots Text
          INDEX Index
          LABEL80 80 Up Label
          MICROPRT Micro Print
          OFFSET Offset
          PART2 2 Part
          PART3 3 Part
          PART4 4 Part
          PART5 5 Part
          PART6 6 Part
          PERF 12 inch Perfed
          PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
          PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
          PREPERF Pre-Perforated
          RECYL Recycled
          SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
          SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
          SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
          TAG Tag
          TEXT Text
          TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
          TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
          TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
          TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
          VELLUM Vellum
          VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
          WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
          WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
          WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
          Paper Stock Color
          Black
          Blue
          Buff
          Canary
          Cherry
          Clear
          Cream
          Custom
          Goldrenrod
          Gray
          Green
          Ivory
          Lavender
          Manilla
          NCRPinkCanary
          NCRWhiteBlue
          NCRWhiteBlueCanary
          NCRWhiteCanary
          NCRWhiteCanaryPink
          NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
          NCRWhiteGreen
          NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
          NCRWhitePink
          NCRWhiteWhite
          Opaque
          Orange
          Orchid
          Peach
          Pink
          Purple
          Salmon
          Tan
          Violet
          White
          Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
          11 x 17
          18 x 24 Poster
          24 x 36 Poster
          3 x 5
          36 x 24 Poster
          4 x 6
          475 x 7
          475 x 775
          55 x 85
          6 x 4
          7 x 9
          7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
          85 x 11
          825 x 10875
          825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
          8375 x 10875
          9 x 12
          A4
          A5
          Other - Custom size listed below
          Drilling Locations
          1CENTER
          1LEFTTOP
          1TOPCENTER
          2LEFT
          2LEFT2TOP
          2TOP
          2TOP2LEFT
          2TOP3LEFT
          2TOP5LEFT
          2TOP5RIGHT
          3BOTTOM
          3LEFT
          3LEFT2TOP
          3LEFT3TOP
          3RIGHT
          3TOP
          3TOP5LEFT
          5BOTTOM
          5CENTER
          5LEFT
          5RIGHT
          5RIGHT2TOP
          5TOP
          For TRI fold - select Z or C type Description
          HALF Half
          C C Fold
          DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
          OFFSETZ Offset Z
          SAMPLE See Sample
          SHORT Short Fold
          V V Fold
          Z Z Fold
          Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
          Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
          77 or more pages 1
          33 to 76 pages 25
          3 to 32 pages 50
          1 or 2 pages 100
          Comments
          CoverText Stock Spine
          100 Gloss Cover If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
          100 Gloss Text
          100 Text
          10pt C1S Cover
          10pt C2S Cover
          10pt C2S Text
          10pt Text Stock
          110 White Index
          12pt C1S Cover
          20 White Opaque Bond
          50 Colored Offset
          50 White Offset
          50 White Opaque
          60 Cover Stock
          60 White Offset
          80 Gloss Cover
          80 Gloss Text
          8pt C1S White
          90 White Index
          CoverText Ink
          Black
          Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
          Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
          4 color
          4 color over black
          4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
          4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
          4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
          4 color + aqueous
          4 color + varnish
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 50 RRD must provide this information
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 RRD must provide this information
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          EA 1 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Black amp White B PERFECT PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 NA 516 3LEFT NA NA NA NA RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          1794-IN002G-EN-P FlexLogix Controller Installation Instructions EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial 19021 01232004 5 Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 4 28 7 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 55 85 NA NA NA NA NA HALF 55 x 85 100 RRD must provide this information Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black 957867-01
          Corp 17501
          Bill To 69
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information
          Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
          This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
          Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
          Generic pub print specs Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
          IN RN pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          UM RM PM pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          AP PP pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          BR pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          Field definitions Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
          Attach Print Specs to PDF
          For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
          RA-QR005C-EN-E 608
Page 4: FlexLogix Controller System - Rockwell Automation...FlexLogix Controller System 3 Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004 Environment and Enclosure Prevent Electrostatic Discharge

4 FlexLogix Controller System

European Hazardous Location Approval

European Zone 2 Certification (The following applies when the product bears the EEx Marking)

This equipment is intended for use in potentially explosive atmospheres as defined by European Union Directive 949EC

The LCIE (Laboratoire Central des Industries Electriques) certifies that this equipment has been found to comply with the Essential Health and Safety Requirements relating to the design and construction of Category 3 equipment intended for use in potentially explosive atmospheres given in Annex II to this Directive The examination and test results are recorded in confidential report No 28 682 010

Compliance with the Essential Health and Safety Requirements has been assured by compliance with EN 50021

IMPORTANT When using this product also consider the following

bull This equipment is not resistant to sunlight or other sources of UV radiation

bull The secondary of a current transformer shall not be open-circuited when applied in Class I Zone 2 environments

bull Equipment of lesser Enclosure Type Rating must be installed in an enclosure providing at least IP54 protection when applied in Class I Zone 2 environments

bull This equipment shall be used within its specified ratings defined by Allen-Bradley

bull Provision shall be made to prevent the rated voltage from being exceeded by transient disturbances of more than 40 when applied in Class I Zone 2 environments

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 5

North American Hazardous Location ApprovalThe following information applies when operating this equipment in hazardous locations

Informations sur lrsquoutilisation de cet eacutequipement en environnements dangereux

Products marked ldquoCL I DIV 2 GP A B C Drdquo are suitable for use in Class I Division 2 Groups A B C D Hazardous Locations and nonhazardous locations only Each product is supplied with markings on the rating nameplate indicating the hazardous location temperature code When combining products within a system the most adverse temperature code (lowest ldquoTrdquo number) may be used to help determine the overall temperature code of the system Combinations of equipment in your system are subject to investigation by the local Authority Having Jurisdiction at the time of installation

Les produits marqueacutes CL I DIV 2 GP A B C D ne conviennent qursquoagrave une utilisation en environnements de Classe I Division 2 Groupes A B C D dangereux et non dangereux Chaque produit est livreacute avec des marquages sur sa plaque drsquoidentification qui indiquent le code de tempeacuterature pour les environnements dangereux Lorsque plusieurs produits sont combineacutes dans un systegraveme le code de tempeacuterature le plus deacutefavorable (code de tempeacuterature le plus faible) peut ecirctre utiliseacute pour deacuteterminer le code de tempeacuterature global du systegraveme Les combinaisons drsquoeacutequipements dans le systegraveme sont sujettes agrave inspection par les autoriteacutes locales qualifieacutees au moment de lrsquoinstallation

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

6 FlexLogix Controller System

WARNING EXPLOSION HAZARD

bull Do not disconnect equipment unless power has been removed or the area is known to be nonhazardous

bull Do not disconnect connections to this equipment unless power has been removed or the area is known to be nonhazardous Secure any external connections that mate to this equipment by using screws sliding latches threaded connectors or other means provided with this product

bull Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class I Division 2

bull If this product contains batteries they must only be changed in an area known to be nonhazardous

AVERTISSEMENT RISQUE DrsquoEXPLOSION

bull Couper le courant ou srsquoassurer que lrsquoenvironnement est classeacute non dangereux avant de deacutebrancher leacutequipement

bull Couper le courant ou sassurer que lrsquoenvironnement est classeacute non dangereux avant de deacutebrancher les connecteurs Fixer tous les connecteurs externes relieacutes agrave cet eacutequipement agrave laide de vis loquets coulissants connecteurs fileteacutes ou autres moyens fournis avec ce produit

bull La substitution de composants peut rendre cet eacutequipement inadapteacute agrave une utilisation en environnement de Classe I Division 2

bull Srsquoassurer que lrsquoenvironnement est classeacute non dangereux avant de changer les piles

The following information applies when operating this equipment in hazardous locations

Informations sur lrsquoutilisation de cet eacutequipement en environnements dangereux

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 7

Removal and Insertion Under PowerThe FlexLogix controller the extended-local IO adapter the communication daughtercards and the IO terminal bases cannot be removed or inserted under power

However you can remove and insert FLEX IO modules while backplane power is applied and the system is operating

Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding

Other Considerations

WARNING If you insert or remove the module while backplane power is on an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations

ATTENTION Also consider the following before you install your FlexLogix controller

bull This product is grounded through the DIN rail to chassis ground Use zinc plated yellow-chromate steel DIN rail to assure proper grounding The use of other DIN rail materials (eg aluminum plastic etc) that can corrode oxidize or are poor conductors can result in improper or intermittent grounding

bull Power connection length should be less than 10 meters

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

8 FlexLogix Controller System

What You Need to DoBefore you can install a FlexLogix controller or extended-local adapter you must

Install steel 35 x 755mm DIN rails (A-B part number 199-DR1 46277-3) where you want to place the FlexLogix system components

The DIN rails for all FlexLogix system components including all local and extended-local IO modules must be mounted on a common conductive surface to ensure proper electromagnetic interference (EMI) performance See 24 and 25 for approximate mounting dimensions and mounting clearances

For more information about mounting DIN rails and splitting IO across DIN rails see the FLEX IO Product Data publication 1794-21

Use DIN rail locks (A-B catalog number 1492-EA35) to meet the shock and vibrations specifications listed on 26 A pair of DIN locks comes with the controller

Mount an appropriate power supply on an appropriate DIN rail See the specifications on 26

To install a FlexLogix controller

Step 1 Verify That You Have All the Components see page 9

Step 2 Install the Battery see page 10

Step 3 Install Communication Daughtercards (optional) see page 11

Step 4 Install the Controller see page 12

Step 5 Install the Extended-Local Adapter (optional) see page 15

After you install the FlexLogix controller you can

Make an RS-232 Connection to the Controller see page 18

Select the Operating Mode of the Controller see page 21

Monitor the Controller LEDs see page 22

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 9

Step 1 Verify That You Have All the ComponentsThese components ship with the FlexLogix controller

bull 1756-BA1 battery and label

bull key

bull one spring-clip connector plug for 24V power connection

bull one screw-terminal connector plug for 24V power connection

bull two 1492-EA35 DIN rail locks

The system components you have depend on your application You might have

FlexLogix System Component Description

1788-CNC -CNCR for ControlNet communications1788-CNF -CNFR for ControlNet communications1788-DNBO for DeviceNet communications1788-ENBT for EtherNetIP communications

1756-CP3You can also use the 1747-CP3 cable from the SLC product family

1794-FLA

1794-CE1 (1 foot)1794-CE3 (3 foot)

communication card

serial cable

FlexLogix extended-local adapter

extended- local IO cable

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

10 FlexLogix Controller System

Step 2 Install the Battery

For Safety information on the handling of lithium batteries including handling and disposal of leaking batteries see Guidelines for Handling Lithium Batteries publication AG 5-4

1 Install a 1756-BA1 battery

2 Attach the battery label

a Write on the battery label the date you install the battery

b Attach the label to the inside of the battery compartment

ATTENTION Only install a 1756-BA1 battery If you install a different battery you may damage the controller

WARNING For safety information on the handling of lithium batteries in-cluding the handling and disposal of leaking batteries see Guide-lines for Handling Lithium Batteries publication AG-54Store batteries in a cool dry environment We recommend 25degC with 40 to 60 relative humidity You may store batteries for up to 30 days between -45deg to 85degC such as during transporta-tion To avoid possible leakage do not store batteries above 60degC for more than 30 days

When you connect or disconnect the battery an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location in-stallations Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhaz-ardous before proceeding

Attach battery here

top red lead (+)

middle black lead (-)

bottom no connection

Attach label here

This jumper is for service use only Do not use this jumper

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 11

Step 3 Install Communication Daughtercards (optional)

For specific information about configuring the communication card (such as setting a node address) see the installation instructions for the communication card

1 Turn off power to the controller

2 If necessary remove the blank cover from the communication slot

3 Slide the communication card into the communication slot Be sure to line up the card with the card guides in the controller

4 Record which slot you use for the communication card You need the slot number when you develop your controller application

5 Secure the card with the screws to ensure proper grounding Do not over-tighten the screws The maximum torque for the card screws is 48 to 52 inch pounds (05 to 06 Nm)

6 After the controller is installed (see page 12) connect the network cable

Removing a Communication CardIf you need to remove a communication card from the controller

1 Turn off power to the controller

2 Disconnect all cables from the communication card

3 Loosen the card screws from the communication card

4 Remove the card from the controller

5 Replace the card with a blank cover or a different communication card

WARNING If you insert or remove the card while host power is on an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in haz-ardous location installations

31032-M

slot 1slot 2

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

12 FlexLogix Controller System

Step 4 Install the Controller

1 Position the FlexLogix controller on the DIN rail at a 5deg angle and rotate the controller onto the DIN rail

2 Press the controller down onto the DIN rail until flush The locking tabs will snap into position and lock the controller onto the DIN rail

If the controller does not lock in place use a screwdriver or similar device to move the locking tabs down while pressing the controller onto the DIN rail Release the locking tabs to lock the controller in place If necessary push up on the locking tabs to lock

3 Ground the controller The DIN rail and the common conductive surface behind the DIN rail provide functional ground for the controller Use the grounding stud to meet safety ground requirements

For information about wiring and grounding see the Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41

IMPORTANT You can mount the FlexLogix controller either vertically or horizontally (as shown)

A

A

locking tabs

grounding stud

Equipment grounding conductor (ground lug with 208 sq mm [14 AWG] wire) to ground bus

nuts with captive star washer

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 13

4 Make sure power is not applied to the power supply

5 Connect the power supply to the controller The graphic below and its related instructions describe a 1794-PS13 power supply

a Connect +24V dc input to the top of the controller connector terminal A to the bottom left power connector terminal G

b Connect -24V common to top controller connector terminal B to the top left power connector terminal E

c Use connections C and D on the controller and connection F and H on the power supply to pass 24V dc power and common to the next module in the series if required

Use the screw-terminal connector plug that comes with the controller to meet the requirements for installations in Class I Division 2 locations

WARNING If you connect or disconnect wiring while the field-side power is on an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations Be sure that power is re-moved or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding

+

+

A

B

C

D

FE

HG

_

_

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

14 FlexLogix Controller System

6 Mount the IO terminal bases on the DIN rail

For information about IO terminal bases see the FLEX IO Terminal Base Installation Instructions publication 1794-IN092

7 Install the IO modules

To install an IO module see the installation instructions for that module

Removing the controllerIf you need to remove the controller follow these steps

1 Turn off power to the controller

2 Disconnect all cables from the controller

3 Remove the IO module that is adjacent to the controller

4 On the terminal base adjacent to the controller slide the FLEXBUS connector away from the controller and remove the IO terminal base

5 Remove the controller from the DIN rail

B

A

A

31036-M

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 15

Step 5 Install the Extended-Local Adapter (optional)

1 Position the 1794-FLA extended-local IO adapter on the DIN rail at a 30deg angle and rotate the adapter onto the DIN rail

2 Press the adapter down onto the DIN rail until flush The locking tab will snap into position and lock the adapter onto the DIN rail

If the adapter does not lock in place use a screwdriver or similar device to move the locking tab down while pressing the adapter onto the DIN rail Release the locking tab to lock the adapter in place If necessary push up on the locking tab to lock

3 Ground the adapter The adapter is grounded through the steel DIN rail and the common conductive surface behind the DIN rail Additionally use the grounding stud

grounding stud

Equipment grounding conductor (ground lug with 208 sq mm [14 AWG] wire) to ground bus

nuts with captive star washer

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

16 FlexLogix Controller System

4 Make sure power is not applied to the power supply Connect the power supply to the adapter This diagram and its related instructions describe a 1794-PS13 power supply

a Connect +24V dc input to the left adapter connector terminal A to the bottom left power connector terminal G

b Connect -24V common to left adapter connector terminal B to the top left power connector terminal E

c Use connections C and D on the adapter and connection F and H on the power supply to pass 24V dc power and common to the next module in the series if required

Use the screw-terminal connector plug that comes with the adapter to meet the requirements for installations in Class I Division 2 locations

5 Connect IO terminal bases and IO modules to the adapter the same way you connect them to the controller

6 Remove the plastic spacer from both ends of the extended-local IO cable (1794-CE1 or 1794-CE3)

plastic spacer

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 17

7 Connect the adapter to the controller

The following diagram shows how you can also use the 1794-CE1 -CE3 cable to split a rail of IO You can split each rail only once You can split a rail right after the controller (or adapter) or after any IO module For more information about the 1794-CE1 -CE3 cables see the Interconnect Cable Installation Instructions publication 1794-512

Removing the extended-local adapterIf you need to remove the adapter follow these steps

1 Turn off power to the adapter

2 Disconnect all cables from the adapter

3 Remove the IO module that is adjacent to the adapter

4 On the terminal base adjacent to the adapter slide the FLEXBUS connector away from the adapter and remove the IO terminal base

5 Remove the adapter from the DIN rail

31039-M

1794-CE1 or 1794-CE3 cable

LOCAL rail

LOCAL2 rail

1794-CE1 or 1794-CE3 cable

1794-CE1 or 1794-CE3 cable

1794-CE1 or 1794-CE3 cable

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

18 FlexLogix Controller System

Make an RS-232 Connection to the ControllerThe RS-232 port is a non-isolated serial port built-in to the front of the controller

To connect to the serial port

1 Determine whether you need an optical isolator

If you connect the controller to a device outside of the systemrsquos enclosure consider installing an isolator between the controller and device

One possible isolator is the 1761-NET-AIC interface converter

serial port

port 1 DB-9 RS-232 DTE

baud rate selector switch

port 2 mini-DIN 8 RS-232

dc power source selector switch

terminals for external 24V dc power supply

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 19

2 Select the appropriate cable

Are you using an isolator

Use this cable

no The 1756-CP3 cable attaches the controller directly to the controller

If you make your own cable it must be shielded and the shields must be tied to the metal shell (that surrounds the pins) on both ends of the cableYou can also use a 1747-CP3 cable (from the SLC product family) This cable has a taller right-angle connector housing than the 1756-CP3 cable

yes The 1761-CBL-AP00 cable (right-angle connector to controller) or the 1761-CBL-PM02 cable (straight connector to the controller) attaches the controller to port 2 on the 1761-NET-AIC isolator The mini-DIN connector is not commercially available so you cannot make this cable

2 RDX

3 TXD

4 DTR

COMMON

6 DSR

7 RTS

8 CTS

9

1 CD

2 RDX

3 TXD

4 DTR

COMMON

6 DSR

7 RTS

8 CTS

9

1 CD

DB-9 right-angle or straight cable end 8-pin mini-DIN cable end

Pin DB-9 end Mini-DIN end1 DCD DCD

2 RxD RxD

3 TxD TxD

4 DTR DTR

5 ground ground

6 DSR DSR

7 RTS RTS

8 CTS CTS

9 na na

1 2

34

5

6 7867

8

9

1

2

3

4

5

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

20 FlexLogix Controller System

3 Connect the appropriate cable to the serial port on the controller

Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding

4 If necessary attach the controller to the isolator

WARNING If you connect or disconnect the serial cable with power applied to this module or the serial device on the other end of the cable an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations

modem

1761-NET-AIC isolator

user-supplied modem cable

1761 cable

system enclosure

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 21

Select the Operating Mode of the Controller

1 Use this table to determine the operating mode of the controller

2 Turn the key on the front panel of the controller to select the mode

If you want to Select one of these modes

Run Program Remote

Run Program Test

turn outputs to the state commanded by the logic of the project

YES YES

turn outputs to their configured state for Program mode

YES YES YES

execute (scan) tasks YES YES YES

change the mode of the controller through software

YES YES YES

download a project YES YES

schedule a ControlNet network YES YES

while online edit the project YES YES YES YES

To select Turn the key to

Remote Run RUN and then to REM

Remote Program PROG and then to REM

Remote Test REM and then go online and select Test mode via the programming software

keyswitch

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

22 FlexLogix Controller System

Monitor the Controller LEDs

FLASH Upgrade the Controllerrsquos Firmware RevisionTo update the firmware of a controller first install a firmware upgrade kit

bull An upgrade kit ships on a supplemental CD along with RSLogix 5000 software

bull To download an upgrade kit go to httpsupportrockwellautomationcom Choose Firmware Updates

Indicator Color Description

RUN off bull no task(s) running

bull controller in Program mode

green bull one or more tasks are running

bull controller is in Run mode

OK off no power applied

red flashing after initially installing the controller - the controller requires a FLASH upgrade to the proper firmware revision see belowafter the controller is operating - recoverable fault

red bull controller faulted

bull clear faults clear memory or replace the controller

green controller OK

BATTERY off battery will support memory

red bull battery may not support memory

bull replace battery

IO off bull controller project not downloaded (the condition after power up)

bull no IO or communications configured

green communicating to all devices

green flashing one or more devices are not responding

LOCALandLOCAL2

off rail is inhibited

green communicating to all devices on that rail

green flashing one or more devices on that rail not responding

red flashing no modules exist on that rail

RS232 off no activity

green data being received or transmitted

FORCE off no forces present

amber forces present

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 23

Update the Controller

1 Connect the controller to the same network as your workstation

2 Start ControlFLASH software

3 Choose Next gt

4 Select the catalog number of the controller and choose Next gt

5 Expand the network until you see the controller If the required network is not shown first configure a driver for the network in RSLinx software

6 Select the controller and choose OK

7 Select the revision level to which you want to update the controller and choose Next gt

8 To start the update of the controller choose Finish and then Yes

After the controller is updated the status box displays Update complete

9 Choose OK

10 To close ControlFLASH software choose Cancel and then Yes

TIP RSLogix 5000 software revision 100 or later lets you update controller firmware as part of the download sequence To update the controller download your project and follow the prompts of the software

IMPORTANT If the Revision list is empty download a new upgrade kit Some older upgrade kits do not work with new controllers

42900

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

24 FlexLogix Controller System

FlexLogix Controller Approximate Mounting Dimensions

19949mm (785in)

849mm (334in) 5043mm (199in)

12197mm (481in)

18296mm (7203in)

8857mm (349in)

10596mm (417in)

10149mm (399in)

64mm (025in)

10457mm (412in)

8724mm (343in)

9296mm (366in)

8857mm (349in)

8014mm (316in)

1016mm (400in)

885mm (035in)

1853mm (730in)

135mm (053in)

825mm (033in)

60mm (024in)

6436mm (253in)

centerline of MTG Hole

centerline of DIN rail

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 25

FlexLogix Extended-Local IO Adapter Approximate Mounting Dimensions

Approximate Mounting Clearance

94mm (37in)

69mm (272in)

11712mm (461in)

8894mm (35in)

8106mm (319in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

26 FlexLogix Controller System

Other PublicationsYou can use the following manuals with this product

You can obtain manuals at wwwtheautomationbookstorecom

Specifications

Documents required for installation details Publication number

Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines 1770-41

Flex 1794-PS3 Power Supply Installation Instructions 1794-571

Flex 1794-PS13 Power Supply Installation Instructions 1794-569

Flex IO Terminal Base Installation Instructions 1794-516

1794-CE1 -CE3 Interconnect Cable Installation Instructions 1794-512

FLEX IO and FLEX Integra IO Technical Data 1794-21

Documents available for further reference Publication number

FlexLogix System User Manual 1794-UM001

Logix5000 Controllers Common Procedures Reference Manual 1756-PM001

Logix5000 Controllers General Instruction Set Reference Manual 1756-RM003

Guidelines for Handling Lithium Batteries AG-54

Category FlexLogix controller(1794-L33 -L34)

FlexLogix extended-local IO adapter (1794-FLA)

user memory 1794-L33 64 KBytes1794-L34 512 KBytes

na

input voltagerating (nominal)range

24V dc192V to 312V dc (includes 5 ac ripple)

isolation voltage(continuous-voltage withstand rating)

30V dcQualification tested to withstand 850V dc for 60 seconds

input current(1) 133A maximum at 192V dc085A maximum at 24V dc

039A maximum at 192V dc025A maximum at 24V dc

power dissipation(2) 255W maximum at 192V204W maximum at 24V dc

75W maximum at 192V60W maximum at 24V dc

backplane (FLEXBUS) current output

653mA maximum 51V dc 653mA maximum 51V dc

thermal dissipation 87BTUhour 192V 256BTUhour 192V

weight 1794-L33 71 kg (156 lbs oz)1794-L34 75 g (166 lbs)(no communication cards installed)

28 kg (62 lbs)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 27

power supply 1794-PS3 or 1794-PS13 ndash In applications that must be compliant with CSA requirements use a Separated Extra-Low Voltage (SELV) power supply that is compliant with IEC 610101 Annex H

power conductors 60deg C (140deg F) minimum copper22 to 14 AWG (0324 to 208 sq mm) stranded364 inch (12mm) insulation maximumlength 10m or less

category 3(2)

power connector torque 5 to 7 inch-pounds (06 to 08Nm)

battery 1756-BA1 (AB part number 94194801)059g lithium

na

serial cable 1761-CBLPM02 to 1761-NET-AIC 1761-CBLPA00 to 1761-NET-AIC1756-CP3 directly to controller1747-CP3 directly to controller

category 3(4)

na

extended local IO cable 1794-CE1 cable (1 foot)1794-CE3 cable (3 feet)

category 3(2)

DIN rail steel 35 x 755mm DIN railA-B part number 199-DR1 46277-3 EN 50022

operating temperature IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad Operating Cold)IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd Operating Dry Heat)IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock)0 to 60degC (32 to 140degF)

storage temperature IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab Un-packaged Non-operating Cold)IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb Un-packaged Non-operating Dry Heat)IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na Un-packaged Non-operating Thermal Shock)ndash40 to 85degC (ndash40 to 185degF)

relative humidity IEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db Un-packaged Non-operating Damp Heat)5 to 95 non-condensing

vibration(3) IEC60068-2-6 (Test Fc Operating) 5g 10-500Hz

shock(3)

operatingnon-operating

IEC60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged shock)

30g50g

emissions CISPR 11Group 1 Class A (with appropriate enclosure)

ESD immunity IEC 61000-4-26kV contact discharges8kV air discharges

Category FlexLogix controller(1794-L33 -L34)

FlexLogix extended-local IO adapter (1794-FLA)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

radiated RF immunity IEC 61000-4-310Vm with 1kHz sine-wave 80AM from 30MHz to 2000MHz10Vm with 200Hz 50 Pulse 100AM at 900Mhz

EFTB immunity IEC 61000-4-4plusmn4kV at 25kHz on power portsplusmn2kV at 5kHz on communications ports

surge transient immunity IEC 61000-4-5plusmn2kV line-earth (CM) on shielded ports

conducted RF immunity IEC 61000-4-610Vrms with 1kHz sine-wave 80AM from 150kHz to 80MHz

enclosure type rating none (open-style)

Certifications(when product is marked)

UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipmentc-UL-us UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous

Locations certified for US and CanadaCSA CSA Certified Process Control EquipmentCSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class I Division 2

Group ABCD Hazardous Locations

CE(5) European Union 89336EEC EMC Directive compliant withEN 50082-2 Industrial ImmunityEN 61326 MeasControlLab Industrial RequirementsEN 61000-6-2 Industrial ImmunityEN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions

C-Tick(5) Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant withASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions

EEx(5) European Union 949EEC ATEX Directive compliant withEN 50021 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n (Zone 2)

(1) This specification is also known as Power Consumption(2) This specification is also known as Heat Dissipation(3) To maintain these vibration and shock specifications you must use DIN rail locks(4) Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing Refer to Publication 1770-41 Industrial

Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines(5) See the Product Certification link at wwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification

details

Category FlexLogix controller(1794-L33 -L34)

FlexLogix extended-local IO adapter (1794-FLA)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004 PN 957867-01Supersedes Publication 1794-IN002F-EN-P - October 2002 Copyright copy 2004 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

  • 1794-IN002G-EN-P FlexLogix Controller System Installation Instructions
    • Tools That You Need
    • Obtain a User Manual
    • Environment and Enclosure
    • Prevent Electrostatic Discharge
    • European Hazardous Location Approval
    • North American Hazardous Location Approval
    • Removal and Insertion Under Power
    • Other Considerations
    • What You Need to Do
    • Step 1 Verify That You Have All the Components
    • Step 2 Install the Battery
    • Step 3 Install Communication Daughtercards (optional)
    • Step 4 Install the Controller
    • Step 5 Install the Extended-Local Adapter (optional)
    • Make an RS-232 Connection to the Controller
    • Select the Operating Mode of the Controller
    • Monitor the Controller LEDs
    • FLASH Upgrade the Controllerrsquos Firmware Revision
    • Update the Controller
    • FlexLogix Controller Approximate Mounting Dimensions
    • FlexLogix Extended-Local IO Adapter Approximate Mounting Dimensions
    • Approximate Mounting Clearance
    • Other Publications
    • Specifications
      • Back Cover
        • Intro

          ampLRA-QR005B-EN-E 308

          Generic pub print specs

          ampCItem Setup Sheet for Conversion Transfers
          ampLJIT-D-print SpreadsheetampCRA-QR005C-EN-EampRampD ampT

          IN RN pub type specs

          UM RM PM pub type specs

          AP PP pub type specs

          BR pub type specs

          Field definitions

          ampL04032006ampRampP
          PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
          EA = Each
          PK = Pack
          PD = Pad
          RL = Roll
          BK = Book
          CT = Carton
          BX = Box
          ST = Set
          Multiple Order Qty
          Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
          Business Group
          The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
          CorporateBusiness Development
          Finance
          Human Resources
          IT
          Logistics
          Manufacturing
          Marketing Commercial
          Marketing Europe
          Marketing Other
          Operations
          Order Services
          Other
          Process Improvement
          Procurement
          Quality
          Sales
          Max Order Quantity
          Presale items = 100
          Postsale items = 5
          NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
          Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
          Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
          Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
          BindingStitching
          For a Form (F) use
          CARBONLESS
          CUTSHEET
          ENVELOPE
          For a Book (B) use
          LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
          PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
          PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
          SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
          STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
          STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
          STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
          THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
          THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
          WIRE O Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
          Saddle-Stitch Items
          20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
          19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
          18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
          All page quantities must be divisible by 4
          Tape Bound Items
          125 sheets max on 20 no cover
          120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Perfect Bound Items
          475 sheets max on 20 no cover
          470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Double Wire Bound Items
          40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Coil Bound Items
          290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Sides Printed
          Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
          Simplex = Single-sided printing
          Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
          Number of Forms to a Sheet
          Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
          Number of Sheets Required to Print
          Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
          Paper Stock Type
          Description
          PLAIN Bond
          ACNTCVR Accent Cover
          BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
          BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
          C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
          C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
          C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
          C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
          CARD Card Stock
          CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
          CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
          COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
          CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
          CUSTOM Custom
          CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
          ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
          ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
          ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
          GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
          GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
          HOTSTEXT Hots Text
          INDEX Index
          LABEL80 80 Up Label
          MICROPRT Micro Print
          OFFSET Offset
          PART2 2 Part
          PART3 3 Part
          PART4 4 Part
          PART5 5 Part
          PART6 6 Part
          PERF 12 inch Perfed
          PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
          PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
          PREPERF Pre-Perforated
          RECYL Recycled
          SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
          SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
          SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
          TAG Tag
          TEXT Text
          TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
          TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
          TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
          TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
          VELLUM Vellum
          VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
          WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
          WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
          WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
          Paper Stock Color
          Black
          Blue
          Buff
          Canary
          Cherry
          Clear
          Cream
          Custom
          Goldrenrod
          Gray
          Green
          Ivory
          Lavender
          Manilla
          NCRPinkCanary
          NCRWhiteBlue
          NCRWhiteBlueCanary
          NCRWhiteCanary
          NCRWhiteCanaryPink
          NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
          NCRWhiteGreen
          NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
          NCRWhitePink
          NCRWhiteWhite
          Opaque
          Orange
          Orchid
          Peach
          Pink
          Purple
          Salmon
          Tan
          Violet
          White
          Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
          11 x 17
          18 x 24 Poster
          24 x 36 Poster
          3 x 5
          36 x 24 Poster
          4 x 6
          475 x 7
          475 x 775
          55 x 85
          6 x 4
          7 x 9
          7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
          85 x 11
          825 x 10875
          825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
          8375 x 10875
          9 x 12
          A4
          A5
          Other - Custom size listed below
          Drilling Locations
          1CENTER
          1LEFTTOP
          1TOPCENTER
          2LEFT
          2LEFT2TOP
          2TOP
          2TOP2LEFT
          2TOP3LEFT
          2TOP5LEFT
          2TOP5RIGHT
          3BOTTOM
          3LEFT
          3LEFT2TOP
          3LEFT3TOP
          3RIGHT
          3TOP
          3TOP5LEFT
          5BOTTOM
          5CENTER
          5LEFT
          5RIGHT
          5RIGHT2TOP
          5TOP
          For TRI fold - select Z or C type Description
          HALF Half
          C C Fold
          DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
          OFFSETZ Offset Z
          SAMPLE See Sample
          SHORT Short Fold
          V V Fold
          Z Z Fold
          Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
          Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
          77 or more pages 1
          33 to 76 pages 25
          3 to 32 pages 50
          1 or 2 pages 100
          Comments
          CoverText Stock Spine
          100 Gloss Cover If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
          100 Gloss Text
          100 Text
          10pt C1S Cover
          10pt C2S Cover
          10pt C2S Text
          10pt Text Stock
          110 White Index
          12pt C1S Cover
          20 White Opaque Bond
          50 Colored Offset
          50 White Offset
          50 White Opaque
          60 Cover Stock
          60 White Offset
          80 Gloss Cover
          80 Gloss Text
          8pt C1S White
          90 White Index
          CoverText Ink
          Black
          Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
          Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
          4 color
          4 color over black
          4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
          4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
          4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
          4 color + aqueous
          4 color + varnish
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 50 RRD must provide this information
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 RRD must provide this information
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          EA 1 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Black amp White B PERFECT PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 NA 516 3LEFT NA NA NA NA RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          1794-IN002G-EN-P FlexLogix Controller Installation Instructions EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial 19021 01232004 5 Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 4 28 7 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 55 85 NA NA NA NA NA HALF 55 x 85 100 RRD must provide this information Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black 957867-01
          Corp 17501
          Bill To 69
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information
          Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
          This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
          Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
          Generic pub print specs Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
          IN RN pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          UM RM PM pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          AP PP pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          BR pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          Field definitions Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
          Attach Print Specs to PDF
          For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
          RA-QR005C-EN-E 608
Page 5: FlexLogix Controller System - Rockwell Automation...FlexLogix Controller System 3 Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004 Environment and Enclosure Prevent Electrostatic Discharge

FlexLogix Controller System 5

North American Hazardous Location ApprovalThe following information applies when operating this equipment in hazardous locations

Informations sur lrsquoutilisation de cet eacutequipement en environnements dangereux

Products marked ldquoCL I DIV 2 GP A B C Drdquo are suitable for use in Class I Division 2 Groups A B C D Hazardous Locations and nonhazardous locations only Each product is supplied with markings on the rating nameplate indicating the hazardous location temperature code When combining products within a system the most adverse temperature code (lowest ldquoTrdquo number) may be used to help determine the overall temperature code of the system Combinations of equipment in your system are subject to investigation by the local Authority Having Jurisdiction at the time of installation

Les produits marqueacutes CL I DIV 2 GP A B C D ne conviennent qursquoagrave une utilisation en environnements de Classe I Division 2 Groupes A B C D dangereux et non dangereux Chaque produit est livreacute avec des marquages sur sa plaque drsquoidentification qui indiquent le code de tempeacuterature pour les environnements dangereux Lorsque plusieurs produits sont combineacutes dans un systegraveme le code de tempeacuterature le plus deacutefavorable (code de tempeacuterature le plus faible) peut ecirctre utiliseacute pour deacuteterminer le code de tempeacuterature global du systegraveme Les combinaisons drsquoeacutequipements dans le systegraveme sont sujettes agrave inspection par les autoriteacutes locales qualifieacutees au moment de lrsquoinstallation

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

6 FlexLogix Controller System

WARNING EXPLOSION HAZARD

bull Do not disconnect equipment unless power has been removed or the area is known to be nonhazardous

bull Do not disconnect connections to this equipment unless power has been removed or the area is known to be nonhazardous Secure any external connections that mate to this equipment by using screws sliding latches threaded connectors or other means provided with this product

bull Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class I Division 2

bull If this product contains batteries they must only be changed in an area known to be nonhazardous

AVERTISSEMENT RISQUE DrsquoEXPLOSION

bull Couper le courant ou srsquoassurer que lrsquoenvironnement est classeacute non dangereux avant de deacutebrancher leacutequipement

bull Couper le courant ou sassurer que lrsquoenvironnement est classeacute non dangereux avant de deacutebrancher les connecteurs Fixer tous les connecteurs externes relieacutes agrave cet eacutequipement agrave laide de vis loquets coulissants connecteurs fileteacutes ou autres moyens fournis avec ce produit

bull La substitution de composants peut rendre cet eacutequipement inadapteacute agrave une utilisation en environnement de Classe I Division 2

bull Srsquoassurer que lrsquoenvironnement est classeacute non dangereux avant de changer les piles

The following information applies when operating this equipment in hazardous locations

Informations sur lrsquoutilisation de cet eacutequipement en environnements dangereux

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 7

Removal and Insertion Under PowerThe FlexLogix controller the extended-local IO adapter the communication daughtercards and the IO terminal bases cannot be removed or inserted under power

However you can remove and insert FLEX IO modules while backplane power is applied and the system is operating

Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding

Other Considerations

WARNING If you insert or remove the module while backplane power is on an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations

ATTENTION Also consider the following before you install your FlexLogix controller

bull This product is grounded through the DIN rail to chassis ground Use zinc plated yellow-chromate steel DIN rail to assure proper grounding The use of other DIN rail materials (eg aluminum plastic etc) that can corrode oxidize or are poor conductors can result in improper or intermittent grounding

bull Power connection length should be less than 10 meters

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

8 FlexLogix Controller System

What You Need to DoBefore you can install a FlexLogix controller or extended-local adapter you must

Install steel 35 x 755mm DIN rails (A-B part number 199-DR1 46277-3) where you want to place the FlexLogix system components

The DIN rails for all FlexLogix system components including all local and extended-local IO modules must be mounted on a common conductive surface to ensure proper electromagnetic interference (EMI) performance See 24 and 25 for approximate mounting dimensions and mounting clearances

For more information about mounting DIN rails and splitting IO across DIN rails see the FLEX IO Product Data publication 1794-21

Use DIN rail locks (A-B catalog number 1492-EA35) to meet the shock and vibrations specifications listed on 26 A pair of DIN locks comes with the controller

Mount an appropriate power supply on an appropriate DIN rail See the specifications on 26

To install a FlexLogix controller

Step 1 Verify That You Have All the Components see page 9

Step 2 Install the Battery see page 10

Step 3 Install Communication Daughtercards (optional) see page 11

Step 4 Install the Controller see page 12

Step 5 Install the Extended-Local Adapter (optional) see page 15

After you install the FlexLogix controller you can

Make an RS-232 Connection to the Controller see page 18

Select the Operating Mode of the Controller see page 21

Monitor the Controller LEDs see page 22

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 9

Step 1 Verify That You Have All the ComponentsThese components ship with the FlexLogix controller

bull 1756-BA1 battery and label

bull key

bull one spring-clip connector plug for 24V power connection

bull one screw-terminal connector plug for 24V power connection

bull two 1492-EA35 DIN rail locks

The system components you have depend on your application You might have

FlexLogix System Component Description

1788-CNC -CNCR for ControlNet communications1788-CNF -CNFR for ControlNet communications1788-DNBO for DeviceNet communications1788-ENBT for EtherNetIP communications

1756-CP3You can also use the 1747-CP3 cable from the SLC product family

1794-FLA

1794-CE1 (1 foot)1794-CE3 (3 foot)

communication card

serial cable

FlexLogix extended-local adapter

extended- local IO cable

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

10 FlexLogix Controller System

Step 2 Install the Battery

For Safety information on the handling of lithium batteries including handling and disposal of leaking batteries see Guidelines for Handling Lithium Batteries publication AG 5-4

1 Install a 1756-BA1 battery

2 Attach the battery label

a Write on the battery label the date you install the battery

b Attach the label to the inside of the battery compartment

ATTENTION Only install a 1756-BA1 battery If you install a different battery you may damage the controller

WARNING For safety information on the handling of lithium batteries in-cluding the handling and disposal of leaking batteries see Guide-lines for Handling Lithium Batteries publication AG-54Store batteries in a cool dry environment We recommend 25degC with 40 to 60 relative humidity You may store batteries for up to 30 days between -45deg to 85degC such as during transporta-tion To avoid possible leakage do not store batteries above 60degC for more than 30 days

When you connect or disconnect the battery an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location in-stallations Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhaz-ardous before proceeding

Attach battery here

top red lead (+)

middle black lead (-)

bottom no connection

Attach label here

This jumper is for service use only Do not use this jumper

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 11

Step 3 Install Communication Daughtercards (optional)

For specific information about configuring the communication card (such as setting a node address) see the installation instructions for the communication card

1 Turn off power to the controller

2 If necessary remove the blank cover from the communication slot

3 Slide the communication card into the communication slot Be sure to line up the card with the card guides in the controller

4 Record which slot you use for the communication card You need the slot number when you develop your controller application

5 Secure the card with the screws to ensure proper grounding Do not over-tighten the screws The maximum torque for the card screws is 48 to 52 inch pounds (05 to 06 Nm)

6 After the controller is installed (see page 12) connect the network cable

Removing a Communication CardIf you need to remove a communication card from the controller

1 Turn off power to the controller

2 Disconnect all cables from the communication card

3 Loosen the card screws from the communication card

4 Remove the card from the controller

5 Replace the card with a blank cover or a different communication card

WARNING If you insert or remove the card while host power is on an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in haz-ardous location installations

31032-M

slot 1slot 2

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

12 FlexLogix Controller System

Step 4 Install the Controller

1 Position the FlexLogix controller on the DIN rail at a 5deg angle and rotate the controller onto the DIN rail

2 Press the controller down onto the DIN rail until flush The locking tabs will snap into position and lock the controller onto the DIN rail

If the controller does not lock in place use a screwdriver or similar device to move the locking tabs down while pressing the controller onto the DIN rail Release the locking tabs to lock the controller in place If necessary push up on the locking tabs to lock

3 Ground the controller The DIN rail and the common conductive surface behind the DIN rail provide functional ground for the controller Use the grounding stud to meet safety ground requirements

For information about wiring and grounding see the Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41

IMPORTANT You can mount the FlexLogix controller either vertically or horizontally (as shown)

A

A

locking tabs

grounding stud

Equipment grounding conductor (ground lug with 208 sq mm [14 AWG] wire) to ground bus

nuts with captive star washer

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 13

4 Make sure power is not applied to the power supply

5 Connect the power supply to the controller The graphic below and its related instructions describe a 1794-PS13 power supply

a Connect +24V dc input to the top of the controller connector terminal A to the bottom left power connector terminal G

b Connect -24V common to top controller connector terminal B to the top left power connector terminal E

c Use connections C and D on the controller and connection F and H on the power supply to pass 24V dc power and common to the next module in the series if required

Use the screw-terminal connector plug that comes with the controller to meet the requirements for installations in Class I Division 2 locations

WARNING If you connect or disconnect wiring while the field-side power is on an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations Be sure that power is re-moved or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding

+

+

A

B

C

D

FE

HG

_

_

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

14 FlexLogix Controller System

6 Mount the IO terminal bases on the DIN rail

For information about IO terminal bases see the FLEX IO Terminal Base Installation Instructions publication 1794-IN092

7 Install the IO modules

To install an IO module see the installation instructions for that module

Removing the controllerIf you need to remove the controller follow these steps

1 Turn off power to the controller

2 Disconnect all cables from the controller

3 Remove the IO module that is adjacent to the controller

4 On the terminal base adjacent to the controller slide the FLEXBUS connector away from the controller and remove the IO terminal base

5 Remove the controller from the DIN rail

B

A

A

31036-M

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 15

Step 5 Install the Extended-Local Adapter (optional)

1 Position the 1794-FLA extended-local IO adapter on the DIN rail at a 30deg angle and rotate the adapter onto the DIN rail

2 Press the adapter down onto the DIN rail until flush The locking tab will snap into position and lock the adapter onto the DIN rail

If the adapter does not lock in place use a screwdriver or similar device to move the locking tab down while pressing the adapter onto the DIN rail Release the locking tab to lock the adapter in place If necessary push up on the locking tab to lock

3 Ground the adapter The adapter is grounded through the steel DIN rail and the common conductive surface behind the DIN rail Additionally use the grounding stud

grounding stud

Equipment grounding conductor (ground lug with 208 sq mm [14 AWG] wire) to ground bus

nuts with captive star washer

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

16 FlexLogix Controller System

4 Make sure power is not applied to the power supply Connect the power supply to the adapter This diagram and its related instructions describe a 1794-PS13 power supply

a Connect +24V dc input to the left adapter connector terminal A to the bottom left power connector terminal G

b Connect -24V common to left adapter connector terminal B to the top left power connector terminal E

c Use connections C and D on the adapter and connection F and H on the power supply to pass 24V dc power and common to the next module in the series if required

Use the screw-terminal connector plug that comes with the adapter to meet the requirements for installations in Class I Division 2 locations

5 Connect IO terminal bases and IO modules to the adapter the same way you connect them to the controller

6 Remove the plastic spacer from both ends of the extended-local IO cable (1794-CE1 or 1794-CE3)

plastic spacer

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 17

7 Connect the adapter to the controller

The following diagram shows how you can also use the 1794-CE1 -CE3 cable to split a rail of IO You can split each rail only once You can split a rail right after the controller (or adapter) or after any IO module For more information about the 1794-CE1 -CE3 cables see the Interconnect Cable Installation Instructions publication 1794-512

Removing the extended-local adapterIf you need to remove the adapter follow these steps

1 Turn off power to the adapter

2 Disconnect all cables from the adapter

3 Remove the IO module that is adjacent to the adapter

4 On the terminal base adjacent to the adapter slide the FLEXBUS connector away from the adapter and remove the IO terminal base

5 Remove the adapter from the DIN rail

31039-M

1794-CE1 or 1794-CE3 cable

LOCAL rail

LOCAL2 rail

1794-CE1 or 1794-CE3 cable

1794-CE1 or 1794-CE3 cable

1794-CE1 or 1794-CE3 cable

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

18 FlexLogix Controller System

Make an RS-232 Connection to the ControllerThe RS-232 port is a non-isolated serial port built-in to the front of the controller

To connect to the serial port

1 Determine whether you need an optical isolator

If you connect the controller to a device outside of the systemrsquos enclosure consider installing an isolator between the controller and device

One possible isolator is the 1761-NET-AIC interface converter

serial port

port 1 DB-9 RS-232 DTE

baud rate selector switch

port 2 mini-DIN 8 RS-232

dc power source selector switch

terminals for external 24V dc power supply

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 19

2 Select the appropriate cable

Are you using an isolator

Use this cable

no The 1756-CP3 cable attaches the controller directly to the controller

If you make your own cable it must be shielded and the shields must be tied to the metal shell (that surrounds the pins) on both ends of the cableYou can also use a 1747-CP3 cable (from the SLC product family) This cable has a taller right-angle connector housing than the 1756-CP3 cable

yes The 1761-CBL-AP00 cable (right-angle connector to controller) or the 1761-CBL-PM02 cable (straight connector to the controller) attaches the controller to port 2 on the 1761-NET-AIC isolator The mini-DIN connector is not commercially available so you cannot make this cable

2 RDX

3 TXD

4 DTR

COMMON

6 DSR

7 RTS

8 CTS

9

1 CD

2 RDX

3 TXD

4 DTR

COMMON

6 DSR

7 RTS

8 CTS

9

1 CD

DB-9 right-angle or straight cable end 8-pin mini-DIN cable end

Pin DB-9 end Mini-DIN end1 DCD DCD

2 RxD RxD

3 TxD TxD

4 DTR DTR

5 ground ground

6 DSR DSR

7 RTS RTS

8 CTS CTS

9 na na

1 2

34

5

6 7867

8

9

1

2

3

4

5

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

20 FlexLogix Controller System

3 Connect the appropriate cable to the serial port on the controller

Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding

4 If necessary attach the controller to the isolator

WARNING If you connect or disconnect the serial cable with power applied to this module or the serial device on the other end of the cable an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations

modem

1761-NET-AIC isolator

user-supplied modem cable

1761 cable

system enclosure

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 21

Select the Operating Mode of the Controller

1 Use this table to determine the operating mode of the controller

2 Turn the key on the front panel of the controller to select the mode

If you want to Select one of these modes

Run Program Remote

Run Program Test

turn outputs to the state commanded by the logic of the project

YES YES

turn outputs to their configured state for Program mode

YES YES YES

execute (scan) tasks YES YES YES

change the mode of the controller through software

YES YES YES

download a project YES YES

schedule a ControlNet network YES YES

while online edit the project YES YES YES YES

To select Turn the key to

Remote Run RUN and then to REM

Remote Program PROG and then to REM

Remote Test REM and then go online and select Test mode via the programming software

keyswitch

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

22 FlexLogix Controller System

Monitor the Controller LEDs

FLASH Upgrade the Controllerrsquos Firmware RevisionTo update the firmware of a controller first install a firmware upgrade kit

bull An upgrade kit ships on a supplemental CD along with RSLogix 5000 software

bull To download an upgrade kit go to httpsupportrockwellautomationcom Choose Firmware Updates

Indicator Color Description

RUN off bull no task(s) running

bull controller in Program mode

green bull one or more tasks are running

bull controller is in Run mode

OK off no power applied

red flashing after initially installing the controller - the controller requires a FLASH upgrade to the proper firmware revision see belowafter the controller is operating - recoverable fault

red bull controller faulted

bull clear faults clear memory or replace the controller

green controller OK

BATTERY off battery will support memory

red bull battery may not support memory

bull replace battery

IO off bull controller project not downloaded (the condition after power up)

bull no IO or communications configured

green communicating to all devices

green flashing one or more devices are not responding

LOCALandLOCAL2

off rail is inhibited

green communicating to all devices on that rail

green flashing one or more devices on that rail not responding

red flashing no modules exist on that rail

RS232 off no activity

green data being received or transmitted

FORCE off no forces present

amber forces present

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 23

Update the Controller

1 Connect the controller to the same network as your workstation

2 Start ControlFLASH software

3 Choose Next gt

4 Select the catalog number of the controller and choose Next gt

5 Expand the network until you see the controller If the required network is not shown first configure a driver for the network in RSLinx software

6 Select the controller and choose OK

7 Select the revision level to which you want to update the controller and choose Next gt

8 To start the update of the controller choose Finish and then Yes

After the controller is updated the status box displays Update complete

9 Choose OK

10 To close ControlFLASH software choose Cancel and then Yes

TIP RSLogix 5000 software revision 100 or later lets you update controller firmware as part of the download sequence To update the controller download your project and follow the prompts of the software

IMPORTANT If the Revision list is empty download a new upgrade kit Some older upgrade kits do not work with new controllers

42900

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

24 FlexLogix Controller System

FlexLogix Controller Approximate Mounting Dimensions

19949mm (785in)

849mm (334in) 5043mm (199in)

12197mm (481in)

18296mm (7203in)

8857mm (349in)

10596mm (417in)

10149mm (399in)

64mm (025in)

10457mm (412in)

8724mm (343in)

9296mm (366in)

8857mm (349in)

8014mm (316in)

1016mm (400in)

885mm (035in)

1853mm (730in)

135mm (053in)

825mm (033in)

60mm (024in)

6436mm (253in)

centerline of MTG Hole

centerline of DIN rail

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 25

FlexLogix Extended-Local IO Adapter Approximate Mounting Dimensions

Approximate Mounting Clearance

94mm (37in)

69mm (272in)

11712mm (461in)

8894mm (35in)

8106mm (319in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

26 FlexLogix Controller System

Other PublicationsYou can use the following manuals with this product

You can obtain manuals at wwwtheautomationbookstorecom

Specifications

Documents required for installation details Publication number

Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines 1770-41

Flex 1794-PS3 Power Supply Installation Instructions 1794-571

Flex 1794-PS13 Power Supply Installation Instructions 1794-569

Flex IO Terminal Base Installation Instructions 1794-516

1794-CE1 -CE3 Interconnect Cable Installation Instructions 1794-512

FLEX IO and FLEX Integra IO Technical Data 1794-21

Documents available for further reference Publication number

FlexLogix System User Manual 1794-UM001

Logix5000 Controllers Common Procedures Reference Manual 1756-PM001

Logix5000 Controllers General Instruction Set Reference Manual 1756-RM003

Guidelines for Handling Lithium Batteries AG-54

Category FlexLogix controller(1794-L33 -L34)

FlexLogix extended-local IO adapter (1794-FLA)

user memory 1794-L33 64 KBytes1794-L34 512 KBytes

na

input voltagerating (nominal)range

24V dc192V to 312V dc (includes 5 ac ripple)

isolation voltage(continuous-voltage withstand rating)

30V dcQualification tested to withstand 850V dc for 60 seconds

input current(1) 133A maximum at 192V dc085A maximum at 24V dc

039A maximum at 192V dc025A maximum at 24V dc

power dissipation(2) 255W maximum at 192V204W maximum at 24V dc

75W maximum at 192V60W maximum at 24V dc

backplane (FLEXBUS) current output

653mA maximum 51V dc 653mA maximum 51V dc

thermal dissipation 87BTUhour 192V 256BTUhour 192V

weight 1794-L33 71 kg (156 lbs oz)1794-L34 75 g (166 lbs)(no communication cards installed)

28 kg (62 lbs)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 27

power supply 1794-PS3 or 1794-PS13 ndash In applications that must be compliant with CSA requirements use a Separated Extra-Low Voltage (SELV) power supply that is compliant with IEC 610101 Annex H

power conductors 60deg C (140deg F) minimum copper22 to 14 AWG (0324 to 208 sq mm) stranded364 inch (12mm) insulation maximumlength 10m or less

category 3(2)

power connector torque 5 to 7 inch-pounds (06 to 08Nm)

battery 1756-BA1 (AB part number 94194801)059g lithium

na

serial cable 1761-CBLPM02 to 1761-NET-AIC 1761-CBLPA00 to 1761-NET-AIC1756-CP3 directly to controller1747-CP3 directly to controller

category 3(4)

na

extended local IO cable 1794-CE1 cable (1 foot)1794-CE3 cable (3 feet)

category 3(2)

DIN rail steel 35 x 755mm DIN railA-B part number 199-DR1 46277-3 EN 50022

operating temperature IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad Operating Cold)IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd Operating Dry Heat)IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock)0 to 60degC (32 to 140degF)

storage temperature IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab Un-packaged Non-operating Cold)IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb Un-packaged Non-operating Dry Heat)IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na Un-packaged Non-operating Thermal Shock)ndash40 to 85degC (ndash40 to 185degF)

relative humidity IEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db Un-packaged Non-operating Damp Heat)5 to 95 non-condensing

vibration(3) IEC60068-2-6 (Test Fc Operating) 5g 10-500Hz

shock(3)

operatingnon-operating

IEC60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged shock)

30g50g

emissions CISPR 11Group 1 Class A (with appropriate enclosure)

ESD immunity IEC 61000-4-26kV contact discharges8kV air discharges

Category FlexLogix controller(1794-L33 -L34)

FlexLogix extended-local IO adapter (1794-FLA)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

radiated RF immunity IEC 61000-4-310Vm with 1kHz sine-wave 80AM from 30MHz to 2000MHz10Vm with 200Hz 50 Pulse 100AM at 900Mhz

EFTB immunity IEC 61000-4-4plusmn4kV at 25kHz on power portsplusmn2kV at 5kHz on communications ports

surge transient immunity IEC 61000-4-5plusmn2kV line-earth (CM) on shielded ports

conducted RF immunity IEC 61000-4-610Vrms with 1kHz sine-wave 80AM from 150kHz to 80MHz

enclosure type rating none (open-style)

Certifications(when product is marked)

UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipmentc-UL-us UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous

Locations certified for US and CanadaCSA CSA Certified Process Control EquipmentCSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class I Division 2

Group ABCD Hazardous Locations

CE(5) European Union 89336EEC EMC Directive compliant withEN 50082-2 Industrial ImmunityEN 61326 MeasControlLab Industrial RequirementsEN 61000-6-2 Industrial ImmunityEN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions

C-Tick(5) Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant withASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions

EEx(5) European Union 949EEC ATEX Directive compliant withEN 50021 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n (Zone 2)

(1) This specification is also known as Power Consumption(2) This specification is also known as Heat Dissipation(3) To maintain these vibration and shock specifications you must use DIN rail locks(4) Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing Refer to Publication 1770-41 Industrial

Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines(5) See the Product Certification link at wwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification

details

Category FlexLogix controller(1794-L33 -L34)

FlexLogix extended-local IO adapter (1794-FLA)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004 PN 957867-01Supersedes Publication 1794-IN002F-EN-P - October 2002 Copyright copy 2004 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

  • 1794-IN002G-EN-P FlexLogix Controller System Installation Instructions
    • Tools That You Need
    • Obtain a User Manual
    • Environment and Enclosure
    • Prevent Electrostatic Discharge
    • European Hazardous Location Approval
    • North American Hazardous Location Approval
    • Removal and Insertion Under Power
    • Other Considerations
    • What You Need to Do
    • Step 1 Verify That You Have All the Components
    • Step 2 Install the Battery
    • Step 3 Install Communication Daughtercards (optional)
    • Step 4 Install the Controller
    • Step 5 Install the Extended-Local Adapter (optional)
    • Make an RS-232 Connection to the Controller
    • Select the Operating Mode of the Controller
    • Monitor the Controller LEDs
    • FLASH Upgrade the Controllerrsquos Firmware Revision
    • Update the Controller
    • FlexLogix Controller Approximate Mounting Dimensions
    • FlexLogix Extended-Local IO Adapter Approximate Mounting Dimensions
    • Approximate Mounting Clearance
    • Other Publications
    • Specifications
      • Back Cover
        • Intro

          ampLRA-QR005B-EN-E 308

          Generic pub print specs

          ampCItem Setup Sheet for Conversion Transfers
          ampLJIT-D-print SpreadsheetampCRA-QR005C-EN-EampRampD ampT

          IN RN pub type specs

          UM RM PM pub type specs

          AP PP pub type specs

          BR pub type specs

          Field definitions

          ampL04032006ampRampP
          PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
          EA = Each
          PK = Pack
          PD = Pad
          RL = Roll
          BK = Book
          CT = Carton
          BX = Box
          ST = Set
          Multiple Order Qty
          Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
          Business Group
          The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
          CorporateBusiness Development
          Finance
          Human Resources
          IT
          Logistics
          Manufacturing
          Marketing Commercial
          Marketing Europe
          Marketing Other
          Operations
          Order Services
          Other
          Process Improvement
          Procurement
          Quality
          Sales
          Max Order Quantity
          Presale items = 100
          Postsale items = 5
          NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
          Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
          Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
          Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
          BindingStitching
          For a Form (F) use
          CARBONLESS
          CUTSHEET
          ENVELOPE
          For a Book (B) use
          LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
          PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
          PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
          SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
          STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
          STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
          STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
          THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
          THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
          WIRE O Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
          Saddle-Stitch Items
          20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
          19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
          18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
          All page quantities must be divisible by 4
          Tape Bound Items
          125 sheets max on 20 no cover
          120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Perfect Bound Items
          475 sheets max on 20 no cover
          470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Double Wire Bound Items
          40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Coil Bound Items
          290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Sides Printed
          Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
          Simplex = Single-sided printing
          Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
          Number of Forms to a Sheet
          Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
          Number of Sheets Required to Print
          Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
          Paper Stock Type
          Description
          PLAIN Bond
          ACNTCVR Accent Cover
          BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
          BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
          C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
          C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
          C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
          C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
          CARD Card Stock
          CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
          CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
          COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
          CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
          CUSTOM Custom
          CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
          ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
          ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
          ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
          GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
          GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
          HOTSTEXT Hots Text
          INDEX Index
          LABEL80 80 Up Label
          MICROPRT Micro Print
          OFFSET Offset
          PART2 2 Part
          PART3 3 Part
          PART4 4 Part
          PART5 5 Part
          PART6 6 Part
          PERF 12 inch Perfed
          PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
          PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
          PREPERF Pre-Perforated
          RECYL Recycled
          SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
          SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
          SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
          TAG Tag
          TEXT Text
          TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
          TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
          TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
          TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
          VELLUM Vellum
          VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
          WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
          WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
          WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
          Paper Stock Color
          Black
          Blue
          Buff
          Canary
          Cherry
          Clear
          Cream
          Custom
          Goldrenrod
          Gray
          Green
          Ivory
          Lavender
          Manilla
          NCRPinkCanary
          NCRWhiteBlue
          NCRWhiteBlueCanary
          NCRWhiteCanary
          NCRWhiteCanaryPink
          NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
          NCRWhiteGreen
          NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
          NCRWhitePink
          NCRWhiteWhite
          Opaque
          Orange
          Orchid
          Peach
          Pink
          Purple
          Salmon
          Tan
          Violet
          White
          Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
          11 x 17
          18 x 24 Poster
          24 x 36 Poster
          3 x 5
          36 x 24 Poster
          4 x 6
          475 x 7
          475 x 775
          55 x 85
          6 x 4
          7 x 9
          7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
          85 x 11
          825 x 10875
          825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
          8375 x 10875
          9 x 12
          A4
          A5
          Other - Custom size listed below
          Drilling Locations
          1CENTER
          1LEFTTOP
          1TOPCENTER
          2LEFT
          2LEFT2TOP
          2TOP
          2TOP2LEFT
          2TOP3LEFT
          2TOP5LEFT
          2TOP5RIGHT
          3BOTTOM
          3LEFT
          3LEFT2TOP
          3LEFT3TOP
          3RIGHT
          3TOP
          3TOP5LEFT
          5BOTTOM
          5CENTER
          5LEFT
          5RIGHT
          5RIGHT2TOP
          5TOP
          For TRI fold - select Z or C type Description
          HALF Half
          C C Fold
          DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
          OFFSETZ Offset Z
          SAMPLE See Sample
          SHORT Short Fold
          V V Fold
          Z Z Fold
          Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
          Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
          77 or more pages 1
          33 to 76 pages 25
          3 to 32 pages 50
          1 or 2 pages 100
          Comments
          CoverText Stock Spine
          100 Gloss Cover If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
          100 Gloss Text
          100 Text
          10pt C1S Cover
          10pt C2S Cover
          10pt C2S Text
          10pt Text Stock
          110 White Index
          12pt C1S Cover
          20 White Opaque Bond
          50 Colored Offset
          50 White Offset
          50 White Opaque
          60 Cover Stock
          60 White Offset
          80 Gloss Cover
          80 Gloss Text
          8pt C1S White
          90 White Index
          CoverText Ink
          Black
          Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
          Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
          4 color
          4 color over black
          4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
          4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
          4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
          4 color + aqueous
          4 color + varnish
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 50 RRD must provide this information
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 RRD must provide this information
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          EA 1 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Black amp White B PERFECT PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 NA 516 3LEFT NA NA NA NA RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          1794-IN002G-EN-P FlexLogix Controller Installation Instructions EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial 19021 01232004 5 Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 4 28 7 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 55 85 NA NA NA NA NA HALF 55 x 85 100 RRD must provide this information Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black 957867-01
          Corp 17501
          Bill To 69
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information
          Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
          This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
          Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
          Generic pub print specs Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
          IN RN pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          UM RM PM pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          AP PP pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          BR pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          Field definitions Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
          Attach Print Specs to PDF
          For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
          RA-QR005C-EN-E 608
Page 6: FlexLogix Controller System - Rockwell Automation...FlexLogix Controller System 3 Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004 Environment and Enclosure Prevent Electrostatic Discharge

6 FlexLogix Controller System

WARNING EXPLOSION HAZARD

bull Do not disconnect equipment unless power has been removed or the area is known to be nonhazardous

bull Do not disconnect connections to this equipment unless power has been removed or the area is known to be nonhazardous Secure any external connections that mate to this equipment by using screws sliding latches threaded connectors or other means provided with this product

bull Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class I Division 2

bull If this product contains batteries they must only be changed in an area known to be nonhazardous

AVERTISSEMENT RISQUE DrsquoEXPLOSION

bull Couper le courant ou srsquoassurer que lrsquoenvironnement est classeacute non dangereux avant de deacutebrancher leacutequipement

bull Couper le courant ou sassurer que lrsquoenvironnement est classeacute non dangereux avant de deacutebrancher les connecteurs Fixer tous les connecteurs externes relieacutes agrave cet eacutequipement agrave laide de vis loquets coulissants connecteurs fileteacutes ou autres moyens fournis avec ce produit

bull La substitution de composants peut rendre cet eacutequipement inadapteacute agrave une utilisation en environnement de Classe I Division 2

bull Srsquoassurer que lrsquoenvironnement est classeacute non dangereux avant de changer les piles

The following information applies when operating this equipment in hazardous locations

Informations sur lrsquoutilisation de cet eacutequipement en environnements dangereux

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 7

Removal and Insertion Under PowerThe FlexLogix controller the extended-local IO adapter the communication daughtercards and the IO terminal bases cannot be removed or inserted under power

However you can remove and insert FLEX IO modules while backplane power is applied and the system is operating

Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding

Other Considerations

WARNING If you insert or remove the module while backplane power is on an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations

ATTENTION Also consider the following before you install your FlexLogix controller

bull This product is grounded through the DIN rail to chassis ground Use zinc plated yellow-chromate steel DIN rail to assure proper grounding The use of other DIN rail materials (eg aluminum plastic etc) that can corrode oxidize or are poor conductors can result in improper or intermittent grounding

bull Power connection length should be less than 10 meters

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

8 FlexLogix Controller System

What You Need to DoBefore you can install a FlexLogix controller or extended-local adapter you must

Install steel 35 x 755mm DIN rails (A-B part number 199-DR1 46277-3) where you want to place the FlexLogix system components

The DIN rails for all FlexLogix system components including all local and extended-local IO modules must be mounted on a common conductive surface to ensure proper electromagnetic interference (EMI) performance See 24 and 25 for approximate mounting dimensions and mounting clearances

For more information about mounting DIN rails and splitting IO across DIN rails see the FLEX IO Product Data publication 1794-21

Use DIN rail locks (A-B catalog number 1492-EA35) to meet the shock and vibrations specifications listed on 26 A pair of DIN locks comes with the controller

Mount an appropriate power supply on an appropriate DIN rail See the specifications on 26

To install a FlexLogix controller

Step 1 Verify That You Have All the Components see page 9

Step 2 Install the Battery see page 10

Step 3 Install Communication Daughtercards (optional) see page 11

Step 4 Install the Controller see page 12

Step 5 Install the Extended-Local Adapter (optional) see page 15

After you install the FlexLogix controller you can

Make an RS-232 Connection to the Controller see page 18

Select the Operating Mode of the Controller see page 21

Monitor the Controller LEDs see page 22

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 9

Step 1 Verify That You Have All the ComponentsThese components ship with the FlexLogix controller

bull 1756-BA1 battery and label

bull key

bull one spring-clip connector plug for 24V power connection

bull one screw-terminal connector plug for 24V power connection

bull two 1492-EA35 DIN rail locks

The system components you have depend on your application You might have

FlexLogix System Component Description

1788-CNC -CNCR for ControlNet communications1788-CNF -CNFR for ControlNet communications1788-DNBO for DeviceNet communications1788-ENBT for EtherNetIP communications

1756-CP3You can also use the 1747-CP3 cable from the SLC product family

1794-FLA

1794-CE1 (1 foot)1794-CE3 (3 foot)

communication card

serial cable

FlexLogix extended-local adapter

extended- local IO cable

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

10 FlexLogix Controller System

Step 2 Install the Battery

For Safety information on the handling of lithium batteries including handling and disposal of leaking batteries see Guidelines for Handling Lithium Batteries publication AG 5-4

1 Install a 1756-BA1 battery

2 Attach the battery label

a Write on the battery label the date you install the battery

b Attach the label to the inside of the battery compartment

ATTENTION Only install a 1756-BA1 battery If you install a different battery you may damage the controller

WARNING For safety information on the handling of lithium batteries in-cluding the handling and disposal of leaking batteries see Guide-lines for Handling Lithium Batteries publication AG-54Store batteries in a cool dry environment We recommend 25degC with 40 to 60 relative humidity You may store batteries for up to 30 days between -45deg to 85degC such as during transporta-tion To avoid possible leakage do not store batteries above 60degC for more than 30 days

When you connect or disconnect the battery an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location in-stallations Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhaz-ardous before proceeding

Attach battery here

top red lead (+)

middle black lead (-)

bottom no connection

Attach label here

This jumper is for service use only Do not use this jumper

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 11

Step 3 Install Communication Daughtercards (optional)

For specific information about configuring the communication card (such as setting a node address) see the installation instructions for the communication card

1 Turn off power to the controller

2 If necessary remove the blank cover from the communication slot

3 Slide the communication card into the communication slot Be sure to line up the card with the card guides in the controller

4 Record which slot you use for the communication card You need the slot number when you develop your controller application

5 Secure the card with the screws to ensure proper grounding Do not over-tighten the screws The maximum torque for the card screws is 48 to 52 inch pounds (05 to 06 Nm)

6 After the controller is installed (see page 12) connect the network cable

Removing a Communication CardIf you need to remove a communication card from the controller

1 Turn off power to the controller

2 Disconnect all cables from the communication card

3 Loosen the card screws from the communication card

4 Remove the card from the controller

5 Replace the card with a blank cover or a different communication card

WARNING If you insert or remove the card while host power is on an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in haz-ardous location installations

31032-M

slot 1slot 2

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

12 FlexLogix Controller System

Step 4 Install the Controller

1 Position the FlexLogix controller on the DIN rail at a 5deg angle and rotate the controller onto the DIN rail

2 Press the controller down onto the DIN rail until flush The locking tabs will snap into position and lock the controller onto the DIN rail

If the controller does not lock in place use a screwdriver or similar device to move the locking tabs down while pressing the controller onto the DIN rail Release the locking tabs to lock the controller in place If necessary push up on the locking tabs to lock

3 Ground the controller The DIN rail and the common conductive surface behind the DIN rail provide functional ground for the controller Use the grounding stud to meet safety ground requirements

For information about wiring and grounding see the Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41

IMPORTANT You can mount the FlexLogix controller either vertically or horizontally (as shown)

A

A

locking tabs

grounding stud

Equipment grounding conductor (ground lug with 208 sq mm [14 AWG] wire) to ground bus

nuts with captive star washer

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 13

4 Make sure power is not applied to the power supply

5 Connect the power supply to the controller The graphic below and its related instructions describe a 1794-PS13 power supply

a Connect +24V dc input to the top of the controller connector terminal A to the bottom left power connector terminal G

b Connect -24V common to top controller connector terminal B to the top left power connector terminal E

c Use connections C and D on the controller and connection F and H on the power supply to pass 24V dc power and common to the next module in the series if required

Use the screw-terminal connector plug that comes with the controller to meet the requirements for installations in Class I Division 2 locations

WARNING If you connect or disconnect wiring while the field-side power is on an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations Be sure that power is re-moved or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding

+

+

A

B

C

D

FE

HG

_

_

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

14 FlexLogix Controller System

6 Mount the IO terminal bases on the DIN rail

For information about IO terminal bases see the FLEX IO Terminal Base Installation Instructions publication 1794-IN092

7 Install the IO modules

To install an IO module see the installation instructions for that module

Removing the controllerIf you need to remove the controller follow these steps

1 Turn off power to the controller

2 Disconnect all cables from the controller

3 Remove the IO module that is adjacent to the controller

4 On the terminal base adjacent to the controller slide the FLEXBUS connector away from the controller and remove the IO terminal base

5 Remove the controller from the DIN rail

B

A

A

31036-M

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 15

Step 5 Install the Extended-Local Adapter (optional)

1 Position the 1794-FLA extended-local IO adapter on the DIN rail at a 30deg angle and rotate the adapter onto the DIN rail

2 Press the adapter down onto the DIN rail until flush The locking tab will snap into position and lock the adapter onto the DIN rail

If the adapter does not lock in place use a screwdriver or similar device to move the locking tab down while pressing the adapter onto the DIN rail Release the locking tab to lock the adapter in place If necessary push up on the locking tab to lock

3 Ground the adapter The adapter is grounded through the steel DIN rail and the common conductive surface behind the DIN rail Additionally use the grounding stud

grounding stud

Equipment grounding conductor (ground lug with 208 sq mm [14 AWG] wire) to ground bus

nuts with captive star washer

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

16 FlexLogix Controller System

4 Make sure power is not applied to the power supply Connect the power supply to the adapter This diagram and its related instructions describe a 1794-PS13 power supply

a Connect +24V dc input to the left adapter connector terminal A to the bottom left power connector terminal G

b Connect -24V common to left adapter connector terminal B to the top left power connector terminal E

c Use connections C and D on the adapter and connection F and H on the power supply to pass 24V dc power and common to the next module in the series if required

Use the screw-terminal connector plug that comes with the adapter to meet the requirements for installations in Class I Division 2 locations

5 Connect IO terminal bases and IO modules to the adapter the same way you connect them to the controller

6 Remove the plastic spacer from both ends of the extended-local IO cable (1794-CE1 or 1794-CE3)

plastic spacer

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 17

7 Connect the adapter to the controller

The following diagram shows how you can also use the 1794-CE1 -CE3 cable to split a rail of IO You can split each rail only once You can split a rail right after the controller (or adapter) or after any IO module For more information about the 1794-CE1 -CE3 cables see the Interconnect Cable Installation Instructions publication 1794-512

Removing the extended-local adapterIf you need to remove the adapter follow these steps

1 Turn off power to the adapter

2 Disconnect all cables from the adapter

3 Remove the IO module that is adjacent to the adapter

4 On the terminal base adjacent to the adapter slide the FLEXBUS connector away from the adapter and remove the IO terminal base

5 Remove the adapter from the DIN rail

31039-M

1794-CE1 or 1794-CE3 cable

LOCAL rail

LOCAL2 rail

1794-CE1 or 1794-CE3 cable

1794-CE1 or 1794-CE3 cable

1794-CE1 or 1794-CE3 cable

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

18 FlexLogix Controller System

Make an RS-232 Connection to the ControllerThe RS-232 port is a non-isolated serial port built-in to the front of the controller

To connect to the serial port

1 Determine whether you need an optical isolator

If you connect the controller to a device outside of the systemrsquos enclosure consider installing an isolator between the controller and device

One possible isolator is the 1761-NET-AIC interface converter

serial port

port 1 DB-9 RS-232 DTE

baud rate selector switch

port 2 mini-DIN 8 RS-232

dc power source selector switch

terminals for external 24V dc power supply

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 19

2 Select the appropriate cable

Are you using an isolator

Use this cable

no The 1756-CP3 cable attaches the controller directly to the controller

If you make your own cable it must be shielded and the shields must be tied to the metal shell (that surrounds the pins) on both ends of the cableYou can also use a 1747-CP3 cable (from the SLC product family) This cable has a taller right-angle connector housing than the 1756-CP3 cable

yes The 1761-CBL-AP00 cable (right-angle connector to controller) or the 1761-CBL-PM02 cable (straight connector to the controller) attaches the controller to port 2 on the 1761-NET-AIC isolator The mini-DIN connector is not commercially available so you cannot make this cable

2 RDX

3 TXD

4 DTR

COMMON

6 DSR

7 RTS

8 CTS

9

1 CD

2 RDX

3 TXD

4 DTR

COMMON

6 DSR

7 RTS

8 CTS

9

1 CD

DB-9 right-angle or straight cable end 8-pin mini-DIN cable end

Pin DB-9 end Mini-DIN end1 DCD DCD

2 RxD RxD

3 TxD TxD

4 DTR DTR

5 ground ground

6 DSR DSR

7 RTS RTS

8 CTS CTS

9 na na

1 2

34

5

6 7867

8

9

1

2

3

4

5

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

20 FlexLogix Controller System

3 Connect the appropriate cable to the serial port on the controller

Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding

4 If necessary attach the controller to the isolator

WARNING If you connect or disconnect the serial cable with power applied to this module or the serial device on the other end of the cable an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations

modem

1761-NET-AIC isolator

user-supplied modem cable

1761 cable

system enclosure

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 21

Select the Operating Mode of the Controller

1 Use this table to determine the operating mode of the controller

2 Turn the key on the front panel of the controller to select the mode

If you want to Select one of these modes

Run Program Remote

Run Program Test

turn outputs to the state commanded by the logic of the project

YES YES

turn outputs to their configured state for Program mode

YES YES YES

execute (scan) tasks YES YES YES

change the mode of the controller through software

YES YES YES

download a project YES YES

schedule a ControlNet network YES YES

while online edit the project YES YES YES YES

To select Turn the key to

Remote Run RUN and then to REM

Remote Program PROG and then to REM

Remote Test REM and then go online and select Test mode via the programming software

keyswitch

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

22 FlexLogix Controller System

Monitor the Controller LEDs

FLASH Upgrade the Controllerrsquos Firmware RevisionTo update the firmware of a controller first install a firmware upgrade kit

bull An upgrade kit ships on a supplemental CD along with RSLogix 5000 software

bull To download an upgrade kit go to httpsupportrockwellautomationcom Choose Firmware Updates

Indicator Color Description

RUN off bull no task(s) running

bull controller in Program mode

green bull one or more tasks are running

bull controller is in Run mode

OK off no power applied

red flashing after initially installing the controller - the controller requires a FLASH upgrade to the proper firmware revision see belowafter the controller is operating - recoverable fault

red bull controller faulted

bull clear faults clear memory or replace the controller

green controller OK

BATTERY off battery will support memory

red bull battery may not support memory

bull replace battery

IO off bull controller project not downloaded (the condition after power up)

bull no IO or communications configured

green communicating to all devices

green flashing one or more devices are not responding

LOCALandLOCAL2

off rail is inhibited

green communicating to all devices on that rail

green flashing one or more devices on that rail not responding

red flashing no modules exist on that rail

RS232 off no activity

green data being received or transmitted

FORCE off no forces present

amber forces present

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 23

Update the Controller

1 Connect the controller to the same network as your workstation

2 Start ControlFLASH software

3 Choose Next gt

4 Select the catalog number of the controller and choose Next gt

5 Expand the network until you see the controller If the required network is not shown first configure a driver for the network in RSLinx software

6 Select the controller and choose OK

7 Select the revision level to which you want to update the controller and choose Next gt

8 To start the update of the controller choose Finish and then Yes

After the controller is updated the status box displays Update complete

9 Choose OK

10 To close ControlFLASH software choose Cancel and then Yes

TIP RSLogix 5000 software revision 100 or later lets you update controller firmware as part of the download sequence To update the controller download your project and follow the prompts of the software

IMPORTANT If the Revision list is empty download a new upgrade kit Some older upgrade kits do not work with new controllers

42900

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

24 FlexLogix Controller System

FlexLogix Controller Approximate Mounting Dimensions

19949mm (785in)

849mm (334in) 5043mm (199in)

12197mm (481in)

18296mm (7203in)

8857mm (349in)

10596mm (417in)

10149mm (399in)

64mm (025in)

10457mm (412in)

8724mm (343in)

9296mm (366in)

8857mm (349in)

8014mm (316in)

1016mm (400in)

885mm (035in)

1853mm (730in)

135mm (053in)

825mm (033in)

60mm (024in)

6436mm (253in)

centerline of MTG Hole

centerline of DIN rail

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 25

FlexLogix Extended-Local IO Adapter Approximate Mounting Dimensions

Approximate Mounting Clearance

94mm (37in)

69mm (272in)

11712mm (461in)

8894mm (35in)

8106mm (319in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

26 FlexLogix Controller System

Other PublicationsYou can use the following manuals with this product

You can obtain manuals at wwwtheautomationbookstorecom

Specifications

Documents required for installation details Publication number

Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines 1770-41

Flex 1794-PS3 Power Supply Installation Instructions 1794-571

Flex 1794-PS13 Power Supply Installation Instructions 1794-569

Flex IO Terminal Base Installation Instructions 1794-516

1794-CE1 -CE3 Interconnect Cable Installation Instructions 1794-512

FLEX IO and FLEX Integra IO Technical Data 1794-21

Documents available for further reference Publication number

FlexLogix System User Manual 1794-UM001

Logix5000 Controllers Common Procedures Reference Manual 1756-PM001

Logix5000 Controllers General Instruction Set Reference Manual 1756-RM003

Guidelines for Handling Lithium Batteries AG-54

Category FlexLogix controller(1794-L33 -L34)

FlexLogix extended-local IO adapter (1794-FLA)

user memory 1794-L33 64 KBytes1794-L34 512 KBytes

na

input voltagerating (nominal)range

24V dc192V to 312V dc (includes 5 ac ripple)

isolation voltage(continuous-voltage withstand rating)

30V dcQualification tested to withstand 850V dc for 60 seconds

input current(1) 133A maximum at 192V dc085A maximum at 24V dc

039A maximum at 192V dc025A maximum at 24V dc

power dissipation(2) 255W maximum at 192V204W maximum at 24V dc

75W maximum at 192V60W maximum at 24V dc

backplane (FLEXBUS) current output

653mA maximum 51V dc 653mA maximum 51V dc

thermal dissipation 87BTUhour 192V 256BTUhour 192V

weight 1794-L33 71 kg (156 lbs oz)1794-L34 75 g (166 lbs)(no communication cards installed)

28 kg (62 lbs)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 27

power supply 1794-PS3 or 1794-PS13 ndash In applications that must be compliant with CSA requirements use a Separated Extra-Low Voltage (SELV) power supply that is compliant with IEC 610101 Annex H

power conductors 60deg C (140deg F) minimum copper22 to 14 AWG (0324 to 208 sq mm) stranded364 inch (12mm) insulation maximumlength 10m or less

category 3(2)

power connector torque 5 to 7 inch-pounds (06 to 08Nm)

battery 1756-BA1 (AB part number 94194801)059g lithium

na

serial cable 1761-CBLPM02 to 1761-NET-AIC 1761-CBLPA00 to 1761-NET-AIC1756-CP3 directly to controller1747-CP3 directly to controller

category 3(4)

na

extended local IO cable 1794-CE1 cable (1 foot)1794-CE3 cable (3 feet)

category 3(2)

DIN rail steel 35 x 755mm DIN railA-B part number 199-DR1 46277-3 EN 50022

operating temperature IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad Operating Cold)IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd Operating Dry Heat)IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock)0 to 60degC (32 to 140degF)

storage temperature IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab Un-packaged Non-operating Cold)IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb Un-packaged Non-operating Dry Heat)IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na Un-packaged Non-operating Thermal Shock)ndash40 to 85degC (ndash40 to 185degF)

relative humidity IEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db Un-packaged Non-operating Damp Heat)5 to 95 non-condensing

vibration(3) IEC60068-2-6 (Test Fc Operating) 5g 10-500Hz

shock(3)

operatingnon-operating

IEC60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged shock)

30g50g

emissions CISPR 11Group 1 Class A (with appropriate enclosure)

ESD immunity IEC 61000-4-26kV contact discharges8kV air discharges

Category FlexLogix controller(1794-L33 -L34)

FlexLogix extended-local IO adapter (1794-FLA)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

radiated RF immunity IEC 61000-4-310Vm with 1kHz sine-wave 80AM from 30MHz to 2000MHz10Vm with 200Hz 50 Pulse 100AM at 900Mhz

EFTB immunity IEC 61000-4-4plusmn4kV at 25kHz on power portsplusmn2kV at 5kHz on communications ports

surge transient immunity IEC 61000-4-5plusmn2kV line-earth (CM) on shielded ports

conducted RF immunity IEC 61000-4-610Vrms with 1kHz sine-wave 80AM from 150kHz to 80MHz

enclosure type rating none (open-style)

Certifications(when product is marked)

UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipmentc-UL-us UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous

Locations certified for US and CanadaCSA CSA Certified Process Control EquipmentCSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class I Division 2

Group ABCD Hazardous Locations

CE(5) European Union 89336EEC EMC Directive compliant withEN 50082-2 Industrial ImmunityEN 61326 MeasControlLab Industrial RequirementsEN 61000-6-2 Industrial ImmunityEN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions

C-Tick(5) Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant withASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions

EEx(5) European Union 949EEC ATEX Directive compliant withEN 50021 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n (Zone 2)

(1) This specification is also known as Power Consumption(2) This specification is also known as Heat Dissipation(3) To maintain these vibration and shock specifications you must use DIN rail locks(4) Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing Refer to Publication 1770-41 Industrial

Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines(5) See the Product Certification link at wwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification

details

Category FlexLogix controller(1794-L33 -L34)

FlexLogix extended-local IO adapter (1794-FLA)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004 PN 957867-01Supersedes Publication 1794-IN002F-EN-P - October 2002 Copyright copy 2004 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

  • 1794-IN002G-EN-P FlexLogix Controller System Installation Instructions
    • Tools That You Need
    • Obtain a User Manual
    • Environment and Enclosure
    • Prevent Electrostatic Discharge
    • European Hazardous Location Approval
    • North American Hazardous Location Approval
    • Removal and Insertion Under Power
    • Other Considerations
    • What You Need to Do
    • Step 1 Verify That You Have All the Components
    • Step 2 Install the Battery
    • Step 3 Install Communication Daughtercards (optional)
    • Step 4 Install the Controller
    • Step 5 Install the Extended-Local Adapter (optional)
    • Make an RS-232 Connection to the Controller
    • Select the Operating Mode of the Controller
    • Monitor the Controller LEDs
    • FLASH Upgrade the Controllerrsquos Firmware Revision
    • Update the Controller
    • FlexLogix Controller Approximate Mounting Dimensions
    • FlexLogix Extended-Local IO Adapter Approximate Mounting Dimensions
    • Approximate Mounting Clearance
    • Other Publications
    • Specifications
      • Back Cover
        • Intro

          ampLRA-QR005B-EN-E 308

          Generic pub print specs

          ampCItem Setup Sheet for Conversion Transfers
          ampLJIT-D-print SpreadsheetampCRA-QR005C-EN-EampRampD ampT

          IN RN pub type specs

          UM RM PM pub type specs

          AP PP pub type specs

          BR pub type specs

          Field definitions

          ampL04032006ampRampP
          PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
          EA = Each
          PK = Pack
          PD = Pad
          RL = Roll
          BK = Book
          CT = Carton
          BX = Box
          ST = Set
          Multiple Order Qty
          Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
          Business Group
          The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
          CorporateBusiness Development
          Finance
          Human Resources
          IT
          Logistics
          Manufacturing
          Marketing Commercial
          Marketing Europe
          Marketing Other
          Operations
          Order Services
          Other
          Process Improvement
          Procurement
          Quality
          Sales
          Max Order Quantity
          Presale items = 100
          Postsale items = 5
          NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
          Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
          Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
          Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
          BindingStitching
          For a Form (F) use
          CARBONLESS
          CUTSHEET
          ENVELOPE
          For a Book (B) use
          LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
          PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
          PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
          SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
          STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
          STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
          STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
          THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
          THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
          WIRE O Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
          Saddle-Stitch Items
          20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
          19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
          18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
          All page quantities must be divisible by 4
          Tape Bound Items
          125 sheets max on 20 no cover
          120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Perfect Bound Items
          475 sheets max on 20 no cover
          470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Double Wire Bound Items
          40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Coil Bound Items
          290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Sides Printed
          Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
          Simplex = Single-sided printing
          Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
          Number of Forms to a Sheet
          Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
          Number of Sheets Required to Print
          Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
          Paper Stock Type
          Description
          PLAIN Bond
          ACNTCVR Accent Cover
          BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
          BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
          C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
          C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
          C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
          C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
          CARD Card Stock
          CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
          CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
          COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
          CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
          CUSTOM Custom
          CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
          ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
          ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
          ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
          GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
          GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
          HOTSTEXT Hots Text
          INDEX Index
          LABEL80 80 Up Label
          MICROPRT Micro Print
          OFFSET Offset
          PART2 2 Part
          PART3 3 Part
          PART4 4 Part
          PART5 5 Part
          PART6 6 Part
          PERF 12 inch Perfed
          PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
          PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
          PREPERF Pre-Perforated
          RECYL Recycled
          SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
          SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
          SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
          TAG Tag
          TEXT Text
          TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
          TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
          TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
          TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
          VELLUM Vellum
          VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
          WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
          WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
          WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
          Paper Stock Color
          Black
          Blue
          Buff
          Canary
          Cherry
          Clear
          Cream
          Custom
          Goldrenrod
          Gray
          Green
          Ivory
          Lavender
          Manilla
          NCRPinkCanary
          NCRWhiteBlue
          NCRWhiteBlueCanary
          NCRWhiteCanary
          NCRWhiteCanaryPink
          NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
          NCRWhiteGreen
          NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
          NCRWhitePink
          NCRWhiteWhite
          Opaque
          Orange
          Orchid
          Peach
          Pink
          Purple
          Salmon
          Tan
          Violet
          White
          Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
          11 x 17
          18 x 24 Poster
          24 x 36 Poster
          3 x 5
          36 x 24 Poster
          4 x 6
          475 x 7
          475 x 775
          55 x 85
          6 x 4
          7 x 9
          7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
          85 x 11
          825 x 10875
          825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
          8375 x 10875
          9 x 12
          A4
          A5
          Other - Custom size listed below
          Drilling Locations
          1CENTER
          1LEFTTOP
          1TOPCENTER
          2LEFT
          2LEFT2TOP
          2TOP
          2TOP2LEFT
          2TOP3LEFT
          2TOP5LEFT
          2TOP5RIGHT
          3BOTTOM
          3LEFT
          3LEFT2TOP
          3LEFT3TOP
          3RIGHT
          3TOP
          3TOP5LEFT
          5BOTTOM
          5CENTER
          5LEFT
          5RIGHT
          5RIGHT2TOP
          5TOP
          For TRI fold - select Z or C type Description
          HALF Half
          C C Fold
          DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
          OFFSETZ Offset Z
          SAMPLE See Sample
          SHORT Short Fold
          V V Fold
          Z Z Fold
          Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
          Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
          77 or more pages 1
          33 to 76 pages 25
          3 to 32 pages 50
          1 or 2 pages 100
          Comments
          CoverText Stock Spine
          100 Gloss Cover If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
          100 Gloss Text
          100 Text
          10pt C1S Cover
          10pt C2S Cover
          10pt C2S Text
          10pt Text Stock
          110 White Index
          12pt C1S Cover
          20 White Opaque Bond
          50 Colored Offset
          50 White Offset
          50 White Opaque
          60 Cover Stock
          60 White Offset
          80 Gloss Cover
          80 Gloss Text
          8pt C1S White
          90 White Index
          CoverText Ink
          Black
          Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
          Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
          4 color
          4 color over black
          4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
          4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
          4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
          4 color + aqueous
          4 color + varnish
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 50 RRD must provide this information
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 RRD must provide this information
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          EA 1 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Black amp White B PERFECT PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 NA 516 3LEFT NA NA NA NA RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          1794-IN002G-EN-P FlexLogix Controller Installation Instructions EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial 19021 01232004 5 Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 4 28 7 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 55 85 NA NA NA NA NA HALF 55 x 85 100 RRD must provide this information Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black 957867-01
          Corp 17501
          Bill To 69
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information
          Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
          This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
          Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
          Generic pub print specs Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
          IN RN pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          UM RM PM pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          AP PP pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          BR pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          Field definitions Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
          Attach Print Specs to PDF
          For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
          RA-QR005C-EN-E 608
Page 7: FlexLogix Controller System - Rockwell Automation...FlexLogix Controller System 3 Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004 Environment and Enclosure Prevent Electrostatic Discharge

FlexLogix Controller System 7

Removal and Insertion Under PowerThe FlexLogix controller the extended-local IO adapter the communication daughtercards and the IO terminal bases cannot be removed or inserted under power

However you can remove and insert FLEX IO modules while backplane power is applied and the system is operating

Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding

Other Considerations

WARNING If you insert or remove the module while backplane power is on an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations

ATTENTION Also consider the following before you install your FlexLogix controller

bull This product is grounded through the DIN rail to chassis ground Use zinc plated yellow-chromate steel DIN rail to assure proper grounding The use of other DIN rail materials (eg aluminum plastic etc) that can corrode oxidize or are poor conductors can result in improper or intermittent grounding

bull Power connection length should be less than 10 meters

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

8 FlexLogix Controller System

What You Need to DoBefore you can install a FlexLogix controller or extended-local adapter you must

Install steel 35 x 755mm DIN rails (A-B part number 199-DR1 46277-3) where you want to place the FlexLogix system components

The DIN rails for all FlexLogix system components including all local and extended-local IO modules must be mounted on a common conductive surface to ensure proper electromagnetic interference (EMI) performance See 24 and 25 for approximate mounting dimensions and mounting clearances

For more information about mounting DIN rails and splitting IO across DIN rails see the FLEX IO Product Data publication 1794-21

Use DIN rail locks (A-B catalog number 1492-EA35) to meet the shock and vibrations specifications listed on 26 A pair of DIN locks comes with the controller

Mount an appropriate power supply on an appropriate DIN rail See the specifications on 26

To install a FlexLogix controller

Step 1 Verify That You Have All the Components see page 9

Step 2 Install the Battery see page 10

Step 3 Install Communication Daughtercards (optional) see page 11

Step 4 Install the Controller see page 12

Step 5 Install the Extended-Local Adapter (optional) see page 15

After you install the FlexLogix controller you can

Make an RS-232 Connection to the Controller see page 18

Select the Operating Mode of the Controller see page 21

Monitor the Controller LEDs see page 22

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 9

Step 1 Verify That You Have All the ComponentsThese components ship with the FlexLogix controller

bull 1756-BA1 battery and label

bull key

bull one spring-clip connector plug for 24V power connection

bull one screw-terminal connector plug for 24V power connection

bull two 1492-EA35 DIN rail locks

The system components you have depend on your application You might have

FlexLogix System Component Description

1788-CNC -CNCR for ControlNet communications1788-CNF -CNFR for ControlNet communications1788-DNBO for DeviceNet communications1788-ENBT for EtherNetIP communications

1756-CP3You can also use the 1747-CP3 cable from the SLC product family

1794-FLA

1794-CE1 (1 foot)1794-CE3 (3 foot)

communication card

serial cable

FlexLogix extended-local adapter

extended- local IO cable

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

10 FlexLogix Controller System

Step 2 Install the Battery

For Safety information on the handling of lithium batteries including handling and disposal of leaking batteries see Guidelines for Handling Lithium Batteries publication AG 5-4

1 Install a 1756-BA1 battery

2 Attach the battery label

a Write on the battery label the date you install the battery

b Attach the label to the inside of the battery compartment

ATTENTION Only install a 1756-BA1 battery If you install a different battery you may damage the controller

WARNING For safety information on the handling of lithium batteries in-cluding the handling and disposal of leaking batteries see Guide-lines for Handling Lithium Batteries publication AG-54Store batteries in a cool dry environment We recommend 25degC with 40 to 60 relative humidity You may store batteries for up to 30 days between -45deg to 85degC such as during transporta-tion To avoid possible leakage do not store batteries above 60degC for more than 30 days

When you connect or disconnect the battery an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location in-stallations Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhaz-ardous before proceeding

Attach battery here

top red lead (+)

middle black lead (-)

bottom no connection

Attach label here

This jumper is for service use only Do not use this jumper

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 11

Step 3 Install Communication Daughtercards (optional)

For specific information about configuring the communication card (such as setting a node address) see the installation instructions for the communication card

1 Turn off power to the controller

2 If necessary remove the blank cover from the communication slot

3 Slide the communication card into the communication slot Be sure to line up the card with the card guides in the controller

4 Record which slot you use for the communication card You need the slot number when you develop your controller application

5 Secure the card with the screws to ensure proper grounding Do not over-tighten the screws The maximum torque for the card screws is 48 to 52 inch pounds (05 to 06 Nm)

6 After the controller is installed (see page 12) connect the network cable

Removing a Communication CardIf you need to remove a communication card from the controller

1 Turn off power to the controller

2 Disconnect all cables from the communication card

3 Loosen the card screws from the communication card

4 Remove the card from the controller

5 Replace the card with a blank cover or a different communication card

WARNING If you insert or remove the card while host power is on an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in haz-ardous location installations

31032-M

slot 1slot 2

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

12 FlexLogix Controller System

Step 4 Install the Controller

1 Position the FlexLogix controller on the DIN rail at a 5deg angle and rotate the controller onto the DIN rail

2 Press the controller down onto the DIN rail until flush The locking tabs will snap into position and lock the controller onto the DIN rail

If the controller does not lock in place use a screwdriver or similar device to move the locking tabs down while pressing the controller onto the DIN rail Release the locking tabs to lock the controller in place If necessary push up on the locking tabs to lock

3 Ground the controller The DIN rail and the common conductive surface behind the DIN rail provide functional ground for the controller Use the grounding stud to meet safety ground requirements

For information about wiring and grounding see the Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41

IMPORTANT You can mount the FlexLogix controller either vertically or horizontally (as shown)

A

A

locking tabs

grounding stud

Equipment grounding conductor (ground lug with 208 sq mm [14 AWG] wire) to ground bus

nuts with captive star washer

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 13

4 Make sure power is not applied to the power supply

5 Connect the power supply to the controller The graphic below and its related instructions describe a 1794-PS13 power supply

a Connect +24V dc input to the top of the controller connector terminal A to the bottom left power connector terminal G

b Connect -24V common to top controller connector terminal B to the top left power connector terminal E

c Use connections C and D on the controller and connection F and H on the power supply to pass 24V dc power and common to the next module in the series if required

Use the screw-terminal connector plug that comes with the controller to meet the requirements for installations in Class I Division 2 locations

WARNING If you connect or disconnect wiring while the field-side power is on an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations Be sure that power is re-moved or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding

+

+

A

B

C

D

FE

HG

_

_

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

14 FlexLogix Controller System

6 Mount the IO terminal bases on the DIN rail

For information about IO terminal bases see the FLEX IO Terminal Base Installation Instructions publication 1794-IN092

7 Install the IO modules

To install an IO module see the installation instructions for that module

Removing the controllerIf you need to remove the controller follow these steps

1 Turn off power to the controller

2 Disconnect all cables from the controller

3 Remove the IO module that is adjacent to the controller

4 On the terminal base adjacent to the controller slide the FLEXBUS connector away from the controller and remove the IO terminal base

5 Remove the controller from the DIN rail

B

A

A

31036-M

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 15

Step 5 Install the Extended-Local Adapter (optional)

1 Position the 1794-FLA extended-local IO adapter on the DIN rail at a 30deg angle and rotate the adapter onto the DIN rail

2 Press the adapter down onto the DIN rail until flush The locking tab will snap into position and lock the adapter onto the DIN rail

If the adapter does not lock in place use a screwdriver or similar device to move the locking tab down while pressing the adapter onto the DIN rail Release the locking tab to lock the adapter in place If necessary push up on the locking tab to lock

3 Ground the adapter The adapter is grounded through the steel DIN rail and the common conductive surface behind the DIN rail Additionally use the grounding stud

grounding stud

Equipment grounding conductor (ground lug with 208 sq mm [14 AWG] wire) to ground bus

nuts with captive star washer

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

16 FlexLogix Controller System

4 Make sure power is not applied to the power supply Connect the power supply to the adapter This diagram and its related instructions describe a 1794-PS13 power supply

a Connect +24V dc input to the left adapter connector terminal A to the bottom left power connector terminal G

b Connect -24V common to left adapter connector terminal B to the top left power connector terminal E

c Use connections C and D on the adapter and connection F and H on the power supply to pass 24V dc power and common to the next module in the series if required

Use the screw-terminal connector plug that comes with the adapter to meet the requirements for installations in Class I Division 2 locations

5 Connect IO terminal bases and IO modules to the adapter the same way you connect them to the controller

6 Remove the plastic spacer from both ends of the extended-local IO cable (1794-CE1 or 1794-CE3)

plastic spacer

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 17

7 Connect the adapter to the controller

The following diagram shows how you can also use the 1794-CE1 -CE3 cable to split a rail of IO You can split each rail only once You can split a rail right after the controller (or adapter) or after any IO module For more information about the 1794-CE1 -CE3 cables see the Interconnect Cable Installation Instructions publication 1794-512

Removing the extended-local adapterIf you need to remove the adapter follow these steps

1 Turn off power to the adapter

2 Disconnect all cables from the adapter

3 Remove the IO module that is adjacent to the adapter

4 On the terminal base adjacent to the adapter slide the FLEXBUS connector away from the adapter and remove the IO terminal base

5 Remove the adapter from the DIN rail

31039-M

1794-CE1 or 1794-CE3 cable

LOCAL rail

LOCAL2 rail

1794-CE1 or 1794-CE3 cable

1794-CE1 or 1794-CE3 cable

1794-CE1 or 1794-CE3 cable

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

18 FlexLogix Controller System

Make an RS-232 Connection to the ControllerThe RS-232 port is a non-isolated serial port built-in to the front of the controller

To connect to the serial port

1 Determine whether you need an optical isolator

If you connect the controller to a device outside of the systemrsquos enclosure consider installing an isolator between the controller and device

One possible isolator is the 1761-NET-AIC interface converter

serial port

port 1 DB-9 RS-232 DTE

baud rate selector switch

port 2 mini-DIN 8 RS-232

dc power source selector switch

terminals for external 24V dc power supply

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 19

2 Select the appropriate cable

Are you using an isolator

Use this cable

no The 1756-CP3 cable attaches the controller directly to the controller

If you make your own cable it must be shielded and the shields must be tied to the metal shell (that surrounds the pins) on both ends of the cableYou can also use a 1747-CP3 cable (from the SLC product family) This cable has a taller right-angle connector housing than the 1756-CP3 cable

yes The 1761-CBL-AP00 cable (right-angle connector to controller) or the 1761-CBL-PM02 cable (straight connector to the controller) attaches the controller to port 2 on the 1761-NET-AIC isolator The mini-DIN connector is not commercially available so you cannot make this cable

2 RDX

3 TXD

4 DTR

COMMON

6 DSR

7 RTS

8 CTS

9

1 CD

2 RDX

3 TXD

4 DTR

COMMON

6 DSR

7 RTS

8 CTS

9

1 CD

DB-9 right-angle or straight cable end 8-pin mini-DIN cable end

Pin DB-9 end Mini-DIN end1 DCD DCD

2 RxD RxD

3 TxD TxD

4 DTR DTR

5 ground ground

6 DSR DSR

7 RTS RTS

8 CTS CTS

9 na na

1 2

34

5

6 7867

8

9

1

2

3

4

5

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

20 FlexLogix Controller System

3 Connect the appropriate cable to the serial port on the controller

Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding

4 If necessary attach the controller to the isolator

WARNING If you connect or disconnect the serial cable with power applied to this module or the serial device on the other end of the cable an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations

modem

1761-NET-AIC isolator

user-supplied modem cable

1761 cable

system enclosure

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 21

Select the Operating Mode of the Controller

1 Use this table to determine the operating mode of the controller

2 Turn the key on the front panel of the controller to select the mode

If you want to Select one of these modes

Run Program Remote

Run Program Test

turn outputs to the state commanded by the logic of the project

YES YES

turn outputs to their configured state for Program mode

YES YES YES

execute (scan) tasks YES YES YES

change the mode of the controller through software

YES YES YES

download a project YES YES

schedule a ControlNet network YES YES

while online edit the project YES YES YES YES

To select Turn the key to

Remote Run RUN and then to REM

Remote Program PROG and then to REM

Remote Test REM and then go online and select Test mode via the programming software

keyswitch

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

22 FlexLogix Controller System

Monitor the Controller LEDs

FLASH Upgrade the Controllerrsquos Firmware RevisionTo update the firmware of a controller first install a firmware upgrade kit

bull An upgrade kit ships on a supplemental CD along with RSLogix 5000 software

bull To download an upgrade kit go to httpsupportrockwellautomationcom Choose Firmware Updates

Indicator Color Description

RUN off bull no task(s) running

bull controller in Program mode

green bull one or more tasks are running

bull controller is in Run mode

OK off no power applied

red flashing after initially installing the controller - the controller requires a FLASH upgrade to the proper firmware revision see belowafter the controller is operating - recoverable fault

red bull controller faulted

bull clear faults clear memory or replace the controller

green controller OK

BATTERY off battery will support memory

red bull battery may not support memory

bull replace battery

IO off bull controller project not downloaded (the condition after power up)

bull no IO or communications configured

green communicating to all devices

green flashing one or more devices are not responding

LOCALandLOCAL2

off rail is inhibited

green communicating to all devices on that rail

green flashing one or more devices on that rail not responding

red flashing no modules exist on that rail

RS232 off no activity

green data being received or transmitted

FORCE off no forces present

amber forces present

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 23

Update the Controller

1 Connect the controller to the same network as your workstation

2 Start ControlFLASH software

3 Choose Next gt

4 Select the catalog number of the controller and choose Next gt

5 Expand the network until you see the controller If the required network is not shown first configure a driver for the network in RSLinx software

6 Select the controller and choose OK

7 Select the revision level to which you want to update the controller and choose Next gt

8 To start the update of the controller choose Finish and then Yes

After the controller is updated the status box displays Update complete

9 Choose OK

10 To close ControlFLASH software choose Cancel and then Yes

TIP RSLogix 5000 software revision 100 or later lets you update controller firmware as part of the download sequence To update the controller download your project and follow the prompts of the software

IMPORTANT If the Revision list is empty download a new upgrade kit Some older upgrade kits do not work with new controllers

42900

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

24 FlexLogix Controller System

FlexLogix Controller Approximate Mounting Dimensions

19949mm (785in)

849mm (334in) 5043mm (199in)

12197mm (481in)

18296mm (7203in)

8857mm (349in)

10596mm (417in)

10149mm (399in)

64mm (025in)

10457mm (412in)

8724mm (343in)

9296mm (366in)

8857mm (349in)

8014mm (316in)

1016mm (400in)

885mm (035in)

1853mm (730in)

135mm (053in)

825mm (033in)

60mm (024in)

6436mm (253in)

centerline of MTG Hole

centerline of DIN rail

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 25

FlexLogix Extended-Local IO Adapter Approximate Mounting Dimensions

Approximate Mounting Clearance

94mm (37in)

69mm (272in)

11712mm (461in)

8894mm (35in)

8106mm (319in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

26 FlexLogix Controller System

Other PublicationsYou can use the following manuals with this product

You can obtain manuals at wwwtheautomationbookstorecom

Specifications

Documents required for installation details Publication number

Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines 1770-41

Flex 1794-PS3 Power Supply Installation Instructions 1794-571

Flex 1794-PS13 Power Supply Installation Instructions 1794-569

Flex IO Terminal Base Installation Instructions 1794-516

1794-CE1 -CE3 Interconnect Cable Installation Instructions 1794-512

FLEX IO and FLEX Integra IO Technical Data 1794-21

Documents available for further reference Publication number

FlexLogix System User Manual 1794-UM001

Logix5000 Controllers Common Procedures Reference Manual 1756-PM001

Logix5000 Controllers General Instruction Set Reference Manual 1756-RM003

Guidelines for Handling Lithium Batteries AG-54

Category FlexLogix controller(1794-L33 -L34)

FlexLogix extended-local IO adapter (1794-FLA)

user memory 1794-L33 64 KBytes1794-L34 512 KBytes

na

input voltagerating (nominal)range

24V dc192V to 312V dc (includes 5 ac ripple)

isolation voltage(continuous-voltage withstand rating)

30V dcQualification tested to withstand 850V dc for 60 seconds

input current(1) 133A maximum at 192V dc085A maximum at 24V dc

039A maximum at 192V dc025A maximum at 24V dc

power dissipation(2) 255W maximum at 192V204W maximum at 24V dc

75W maximum at 192V60W maximum at 24V dc

backplane (FLEXBUS) current output

653mA maximum 51V dc 653mA maximum 51V dc

thermal dissipation 87BTUhour 192V 256BTUhour 192V

weight 1794-L33 71 kg (156 lbs oz)1794-L34 75 g (166 lbs)(no communication cards installed)

28 kg (62 lbs)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 27

power supply 1794-PS3 or 1794-PS13 ndash In applications that must be compliant with CSA requirements use a Separated Extra-Low Voltage (SELV) power supply that is compliant with IEC 610101 Annex H

power conductors 60deg C (140deg F) minimum copper22 to 14 AWG (0324 to 208 sq mm) stranded364 inch (12mm) insulation maximumlength 10m or less

category 3(2)

power connector torque 5 to 7 inch-pounds (06 to 08Nm)

battery 1756-BA1 (AB part number 94194801)059g lithium

na

serial cable 1761-CBLPM02 to 1761-NET-AIC 1761-CBLPA00 to 1761-NET-AIC1756-CP3 directly to controller1747-CP3 directly to controller

category 3(4)

na

extended local IO cable 1794-CE1 cable (1 foot)1794-CE3 cable (3 feet)

category 3(2)

DIN rail steel 35 x 755mm DIN railA-B part number 199-DR1 46277-3 EN 50022

operating temperature IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad Operating Cold)IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd Operating Dry Heat)IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock)0 to 60degC (32 to 140degF)

storage temperature IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab Un-packaged Non-operating Cold)IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb Un-packaged Non-operating Dry Heat)IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na Un-packaged Non-operating Thermal Shock)ndash40 to 85degC (ndash40 to 185degF)

relative humidity IEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db Un-packaged Non-operating Damp Heat)5 to 95 non-condensing

vibration(3) IEC60068-2-6 (Test Fc Operating) 5g 10-500Hz

shock(3)

operatingnon-operating

IEC60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged shock)

30g50g

emissions CISPR 11Group 1 Class A (with appropriate enclosure)

ESD immunity IEC 61000-4-26kV contact discharges8kV air discharges

Category FlexLogix controller(1794-L33 -L34)

FlexLogix extended-local IO adapter (1794-FLA)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

radiated RF immunity IEC 61000-4-310Vm with 1kHz sine-wave 80AM from 30MHz to 2000MHz10Vm with 200Hz 50 Pulse 100AM at 900Mhz

EFTB immunity IEC 61000-4-4plusmn4kV at 25kHz on power portsplusmn2kV at 5kHz on communications ports

surge transient immunity IEC 61000-4-5plusmn2kV line-earth (CM) on shielded ports

conducted RF immunity IEC 61000-4-610Vrms with 1kHz sine-wave 80AM from 150kHz to 80MHz

enclosure type rating none (open-style)

Certifications(when product is marked)

UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipmentc-UL-us UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous

Locations certified for US and CanadaCSA CSA Certified Process Control EquipmentCSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class I Division 2

Group ABCD Hazardous Locations

CE(5) European Union 89336EEC EMC Directive compliant withEN 50082-2 Industrial ImmunityEN 61326 MeasControlLab Industrial RequirementsEN 61000-6-2 Industrial ImmunityEN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions

C-Tick(5) Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant withASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions

EEx(5) European Union 949EEC ATEX Directive compliant withEN 50021 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n (Zone 2)

(1) This specification is also known as Power Consumption(2) This specification is also known as Heat Dissipation(3) To maintain these vibration and shock specifications you must use DIN rail locks(4) Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing Refer to Publication 1770-41 Industrial

Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines(5) See the Product Certification link at wwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification

details

Category FlexLogix controller(1794-L33 -L34)

FlexLogix extended-local IO adapter (1794-FLA)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004 PN 957867-01Supersedes Publication 1794-IN002F-EN-P - October 2002 Copyright copy 2004 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

  • 1794-IN002G-EN-P FlexLogix Controller System Installation Instructions
    • Tools That You Need
    • Obtain a User Manual
    • Environment and Enclosure
    • Prevent Electrostatic Discharge
    • European Hazardous Location Approval
    • North American Hazardous Location Approval
    • Removal and Insertion Under Power
    • Other Considerations
    • What You Need to Do
    • Step 1 Verify That You Have All the Components
    • Step 2 Install the Battery
    • Step 3 Install Communication Daughtercards (optional)
    • Step 4 Install the Controller
    • Step 5 Install the Extended-Local Adapter (optional)
    • Make an RS-232 Connection to the Controller
    • Select the Operating Mode of the Controller
    • Monitor the Controller LEDs
    • FLASH Upgrade the Controllerrsquos Firmware Revision
    • Update the Controller
    • FlexLogix Controller Approximate Mounting Dimensions
    • FlexLogix Extended-Local IO Adapter Approximate Mounting Dimensions
    • Approximate Mounting Clearance
    • Other Publications
    • Specifications
      • Back Cover
        • Intro

          ampLRA-QR005B-EN-E 308

          Generic pub print specs

          ampCItem Setup Sheet for Conversion Transfers
          ampLJIT-D-print SpreadsheetampCRA-QR005C-EN-EampRampD ampT

          IN RN pub type specs

          UM RM PM pub type specs

          AP PP pub type specs

          BR pub type specs

          Field definitions

          ampL04032006ampRampP
          PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
          EA = Each
          PK = Pack
          PD = Pad
          RL = Roll
          BK = Book
          CT = Carton
          BX = Box
          ST = Set
          Multiple Order Qty
          Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
          Business Group
          The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
          CorporateBusiness Development
          Finance
          Human Resources
          IT
          Logistics
          Manufacturing
          Marketing Commercial
          Marketing Europe
          Marketing Other
          Operations
          Order Services
          Other
          Process Improvement
          Procurement
          Quality
          Sales
          Max Order Quantity
          Presale items = 100
          Postsale items = 5
          NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
          Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
          Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
          Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
          BindingStitching
          For a Form (F) use
          CARBONLESS
          CUTSHEET
          ENVELOPE
          For a Book (B) use
          LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
          PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
          PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
          SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
          STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
          STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
          STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
          THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
          THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
          WIRE O Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
          Saddle-Stitch Items
          20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
          19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
          18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
          All page quantities must be divisible by 4
          Tape Bound Items
          125 sheets max on 20 no cover
          120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Perfect Bound Items
          475 sheets max on 20 no cover
          470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Double Wire Bound Items
          40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Coil Bound Items
          290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Sides Printed
          Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
          Simplex = Single-sided printing
          Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
          Number of Forms to a Sheet
          Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
          Number of Sheets Required to Print
          Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
          Paper Stock Type
          Description
          PLAIN Bond
          ACNTCVR Accent Cover
          BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
          BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
          C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
          C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
          C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
          C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
          CARD Card Stock
          CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
          CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
          COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
          CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
          CUSTOM Custom
          CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
          ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
          ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
          ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
          GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
          GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
          HOTSTEXT Hots Text
          INDEX Index
          LABEL80 80 Up Label
          MICROPRT Micro Print
          OFFSET Offset
          PART2 2 Part
          PART3 3 Part
          PART4 4 Part
          PART5 5 Part
          PART6 6 Part
          PERF 12 inch Perfed
          PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
          PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
          PREPERF Pre-Perforated
          RECYL Recycled
          SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
          SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
          SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
          TAG Tag
          TEXT Text
          TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
          TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
          TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
          TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
          VELLUM Vellum
          VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
          WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
          WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
          WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
          Paper Stock Color
          Black
          Blue
          Buff
          Canary
          Cherry
          Clear
          Cream
          Custom
          Goldrenrod
          Gray
          Green
          Ivory
          Lavender
          Manilla
          NCRPinkCanary
          NCRWhiteBlue
          NCRWhiteBlueCanary
          NCRWhiteCanary
          NCRWhiteCanaryPink
          NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
          NCRWhiteGreen
          NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
          NCRWhitePink
          NCRWhiteWhite
          Opaque
          Orange
          Orchid
          Peach
          Pink
          Purple
          Salmon
          Tan
          Violet
          White
          Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
          11 x 17
          18 x 24 Poster
          24 x 36 Poster
          3 x 5
          36 x 24 Poster
          4 x 6
          475 x 7
          475 x 775
          55 x 85
          6 x 4
          7 x 9
          7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
          85 x 11
          825 x 10875
          825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
          8375 x 10875
          9 x 12
          A4
          A5
          Other - Custom size listed below
          Drilling Locations
          1CENTER
          1LEFTTOP
          1TOPCENTER
          2LEFT
          2LEFT2TOP
          2TOP
          2TOP2LEFT
          2TOP3LEFT
          2TOP5LEFT
          2TOP5RIGHT
          3BOTTOM
          3LEFT
          3LEFT2TOP
          3LEFT3TOP
          3RIGHT
          3TOP
          3TOP5LEFT
          5BOTTOM
          5CENTER
          5LEFT
          5RIGHT
          5RIGHT2TOP
          5TOP
          For TRI fold - select Z or C type Description
          HALF Half
          C C Fold
          DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
          OFFSETZ Offset Z
          SAMPLE See Sample
          SHORT Short Fold
          V V Fold
          Z Z Fold
          Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
          Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
          77 or more pages 1
          33 to 76 pages 25
          3 to 32 pages 50
          1 or 2 pages 100
          Comments
          CoverText Stock Spine
          100 Gloss Cover If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
          100 Gloss Text
          100 Text
          10pt C1S Cover
          10pt C2S Cover
          10pt C2S Text
          10pt Text Stock
          110 White Index
          12pt C1S Cover
          20 White Opaque Bond
          50 Colored Offset
          50 White Offset
          50 White Opaque
          60 Cover Stock
          60 White Offset
          80 Gloss Cover
          80 Gloss Text
          8pt C1S White
          90 White Index
          CoverText Ink
          Black
          Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
          Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
          4 color
          4 color over black
          4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
          4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
          4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
          4 color + aqueous
          4 color + varnish
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 50 RRD must provide this information
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 RRD must provide this information
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          EA 1 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Black amp White B PERFECT PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 NA 516 3LEFT NA NA NA NA RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          1794-IN002G-EN-P FlexLogix Controller Installation Instructions EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial 19021 01232004 5 Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 4 28 7 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 55 85 NA NA NA NA NA HALF 55 x 85 100 RRD must provide this information Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black 957867-01
          Corp 17501
          Bill To 69
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information
          Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
          This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
          Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
          Generic pub print specs Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
          IN RN pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          UM RM PM pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          AP PP pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          BR pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          Field definitions Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
          Attach Print Specs to PDF
          For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
          RA-QR005C-EN-E 608
Page 8: FlexLogix Controller System - Rockwell Automation...FlexLogix Controller System 3 Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004 Environment and Enclosure Prevent Electrostatic Discharge

8 FlexLogix Controller System

What You Need to DoBefore you can install a FlexLogix controller or extended-local adapter you must

Install steel 35 x 755mm DIN rails (A-B part number 199-DR1 46277-3) where you want to place the FlexLogix system components

The DIN rails for all FlexLogix system components including all local and extended-local IO modules must be mounted on a common conductive surface to ensure proper electromagnetic interference (EMI) performance See 24 and 25 for approximate mounting dimensions and mounting clearances

For more information about mounting DIN rails and splitting IO across DIN rails see the FLEX IO Product Data publication 1794-21

Use DIN rail locks (A-B catalog number 1492-EA35) to meet the shock and vibrations specifications listed on 26 A pair of DIN locks comes with the controller

Mount an appropriate power supply on an appropriate DIN rail See the specifications on 26

To install a FlexLogix controller

Step 1 Verify That You Have All the Components see page 9

Step 2 Install the Battery see page 10

Step 3 Install Communication Daughtercards (optional) see page 11

Step 4 Install the Controller see page 12

Step 5 Install the Extended-Local Adapter (optional) see page 15

After you install the FlexLogix controller you can

Make an RS-232 Connection to the Controller see page 18

Select the Operating Mode of the Controller see page 21

Monitor the Controller LEDs see page 22

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 9

Step 1 Verify That You Have All the ComponentsThese components ship with the FlexLogix controller

bull 1756-BA1 battery and label

bull key

bull one spring-clip connector plug for 24V power connection

bull one screw-terminal connector plug for 24V power connection

bull two 1492-EA35 DIN rail locks

The system components you have depend on your application You might have

FlexLogix System Component Description

1788-CNC -CNCR for ControlNet communications1788-CNF -CNFR for ControlNet communications1788-DNBO for DeviceNet communications1788-ENBT for EtherNetIP communications

1756-CP3You can also use the 1747-CP3 cable from the SLC product family

1794-FLA

1794-CE1 (1 foot)1794-CE3 (3 foot)

communication card

serial cable

FlexLogix extended-local adapter

extended- local IO cable

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

10 FlexLogix Controller System

Step 2 Install the Battery

For Safety information on the handling of lithium batteries including handling and disposal of leaking batteries see Guidelines for Handling Lithium Batteries publication AG 5-4

1 Install a 1756-BA1 battery

2 Attach the battery label

a Write on the battery label the date you install the battery

b Attach the label to the inside of the battery compartment

ATTENTION Only install a 1756-BA1 battery If you install a different battery you may damage the controller

WARNING For safety information on the handling of lithium batteries in-cluding the handling and disposal of leaking batteries see Guide-lines for Handling Lithium Batteries publication AG-54Store batteries in a cool dry environment We recommend 25degC with 40 to 60 relative humidity You may store batteries for up to 30 days between -45deg to 85degC such as during transporta-tion To avoid possible leakage do not store batteries above 60degC for more than 30 days

When you connect or disconnect the battery an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location in-stallations Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhaz-ardous before proceeding

Attach battery here

top red lead (+)

middle black lead (-)

bottom no connection

Attach label here

This jumper is for service use only Do not use this jumper

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 11

Step 3 Install Communication Daughtercards (optional)

For specific information about configuring the communication card (such as setting a node address) see the installation instructions for the communication card

1 Turn off power to the controller

2 If necessary remove the blank cover from the communication slot

3 Slide the communication card into the communication slot Be sure to line up the card with the card guides in the controller

4 Record which slot you use for the communication card You need the slot number when you develop your controller application

5 Secure the card with the screws to ensure proper grounding Do not over-tighten the screws The maximum torque for the card screws is 48 to 52 inch pounds (05 to 06 Nm)

6 After the controller is installed (see page 12) connect the network cable

Removing a Communication CardIf you need to remove a communication card from the controller

1 Turn off power to the controller

2 Disconnect all cables from the communication card

3 Loosen the card screws from the communication card

4 Remove the card from the controller

5 Replace the card with a blank cover or a different communication card

WARNING If you insert or remove the card while host power is on an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in haz-ardous location installations

31032-M

slot 1slot 2

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

12 FlexLogix Controller System

Step 4 Install the Controller

1 Position the FlexLogix controller on the DIN rail at a 5deg angle and rotate the controller onto the DIN rail

2 Press the controller down onto the DIN rail until flush The locking tabs will snap into position and lock the controller onto the DIN rail

If the controller does not lock in place use a screwdriver or similar device to move the locking tabs down while pressing the controller onto the DIN rail Release the locking tabs to lock the controller in place If necessary push up on the locking tabs to lock

3 Ground the controller The DIN rail and the common conductive surface behind the DIN rail provide functional ground for the controller Use the grounding stud to meet safety ground requirements

For information about wiring and grounding see the Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41

IMPORTANT You can mount the FlexLogix controller either vertically or horizontally (as shown)

A

A

locking tabs

grounding stud

Equipment grounding conductor (ground lug with 208 sq mm [14 AWG] wire) to ground bus

nuts with captive star washer

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 13

4 Make sure power is not applied to the power supply

5 Connect the power supply to the controller The graphic below and its related instructions describe a 1794-PS13 power supply

a Connect +24V dc input to the top of the controller connector terminal A to the bottom left power connector terminal G

b Connect -24V common to top controller connector terminal B to the top left power connector terminal E

c Use connections C and D on the controller and connection F and H on the power supply to pass 24V dc power and common to the next module in the series if required

Use the screw-terminal connector plug that comes with the controller to meet the requirements for installations in Class I Division 2 locations

WARNING If you connect or disconnect wiring while the field-side power is on an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations Be sure that power is re-moved or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding

+

+

A

B

C

D

FE

HG

_

_

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

14 FlexLogix Controller System

6 Mount the IO terminal bases on the DIN rail

For information about IO terminal bases see the FLEX IO Terminal Base Installation Instructions publication 1794-IN092

7 Install the IO modules

To install an IO module see the installation instructions for that module

Removing the controllerIf you need to remove the controller follow these steps

1 Turn off power to the controller

2 Disconnect all cables from the controller

3 Remove the IO module that is adjacent to the controller

4 On the terminal base adjacent to the controller slide the FLEXBUS connector away from the controller and remove the IO terminal base

5 Remove the controller from the DIN rail

B

A

A

31036-M

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 15

Step 5 Install the Extended-Local Adapter (optional)

1 Position the 1794-FLA extended-local IO adapter on the DIN rail at a 30deg angle and rotate the adapter onto the DIN rail

2 Press the adapter down onto the DIN rail until flush The locking tab will snap into position and lock the adapter onto the DIN rail

If the adapter does not lock in place use a screwdriver or similar device to move the locking tab down while pressing the adapter onto the DIN rail Release the locking tab to lock the adapter in place If necessary push up on the locking tab to lock

3 Ground the adapter The adapter is grounded through the steel DIN rail and the common conductive surface behind the DIN rail Additionally use the grounding stud

grounding stud

Equipment grounding conductor (ground lug with 208 sq mm [14 AWG] wire) to ground bus

nuts with captive star washer

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

16 FlexLogix Controller System

4 Make sure power is not applied to the power supply Connect the power supply to the adapter This diagram and its related instructions describe a 1794-PS13 power supply

a Connect +24V dc input to the left adapter connector terminal A to the bottom left power connector terminal G

b Connect -24V common to left adapter connector terminal B to the top left power connector terminal E

c Use connections C and D on the adapter and connection F and H on the power supply to pass 24V dc power and common to the next module in the series if required

Use the screw-terminal connector plug that comes with the adapter to meet the requirements for installations in Class I Division 2 locations

5 Connect IO terminal bases and IO modules to the adapter the same way you connect them to the controller

6 Remove the plastic spacer from both ends of the extended-local IO cable (1794-CE1 or 1794-CE3)

plastic spacer

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 17

7 Connect the adapter to the controller

The following diagram shows how you can also use the 1794-CE1 -CE3 cable to split a rail of IO You can split each rail only once You can split a rail right after the controller (or adapter) or after any IO module For more information about the 1794-CE1 -CE3 cables see the Interconnect Cable Installation Instructions publication 1794-512

Removing the extended-local adapterIf you need to remove the adapter follow these steps

1 Turn off power to the adapter

2 Disconnect all cables from the adapter

3 Remove the IO module that is adjacent to the adapter

4 On the terminal base adjacent to the adapter slide the FLEXBUS connector away from the adapter and remove the IO terminal base

5 Remove the adapter from the DIN rail

31039-M

1794-CE1 or 1794-CE3 cable

LOCAL rail

LOCAL2 rail

1794-CE1 or 1794-CE3 cable

1794-CE1 or 1794-CE3 cable

1794-CE1 or 1794-CE3 cable

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

18 FlexLogix Controller System

Make an RS-232 Connection to the ControllerThe RS-232 port is a non-isolated serial port built-in to the front of the controller

To connect to the serial port

1 Determine whether you need an optical isolator

If you connect the controller to a device outside of the systemrsquos enclosure consider installing an isolator between the controller and device

One possible isolator is the 1761-NET-AIC interface converter

serial port

port 1 DB-9 RS-232 DTE

baud rate selector switch

port 2 mini-DIN 8 RS-232

dc power source selector switch

terminals for external 24V dc power supply

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 19

2 Select the appropriate cable

Are you using an isolator

Use this cable

no The 1756-CP3 cable attaches the controller directly to the controller

If you make your own cable it must be shielded and the shields must be tied to the metal shell (that surrounds the pins) on both ends of the cableYou can also use a 1747-CP3 cable (from the SLC product family) This cable has a taller right-angle connector housing than the 1756-CP3 cable

yes The 1761-CBL-AP00 cable (right-angle connector to controller) or the 1761-CBL-PM02 cable (straight connector to the controller) attaches the controller to port 2 on the 1761-NET-AIC isolator The mini-DIN connector is not commercially available so you cannot make this cable

2 RDX

3 TXD

4 DTR

COMMON

6 DSR

7 RTS

8 CTS

9

1 CD

2 RDX

3 TXD

4 DTR

COMMON

6 DSR

7 RTS

8 CTS

9

1 CD

DB-9 right-angle or straight cable end 8-pin mini-DIN cable end

Pin DB-9 end Mini-DIN end1 DCD DCD

2 RxD RxD

3 TxD TxD

4 DTR DTR

5 ground ground

6 DSR DSR

7 RTS RTS

8 CTS CTS

9 na na

1 2

34

5

6 7867

8

9

1

2

3

4

5

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

20 FlexLogix Controller System

3 Connect the appropriate cable to the serial port on the controller

Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding

4 If necessary attach the controller to the isolator

WARNING If you connect or disconnect the serial cable with power applied to this module or the serial device on the other end of the cable an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations

modem

1761-NET-AIC isolator

user-supplied modem cable

1761 cable

system enclosure

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 21

Select the Operating Mode of the Controller

1 Use this table to determine the operating mode of the controller

2 Turn the key on the front panel of the controller to select the mode

If you want to Select one of these modes

Run Program Remote

Run Program Test

turn outputs to the state commanded by the logic of the project

YES YES

turn outputs to their configured state for Program mode

YES YES YES

execute (scan) tasks YES YES YES

change the mode of the controller through software

YES YES YES

download a project YES YES

schedule a ControlNet network YES YES

while online edit the project YES YES YES YES

To select Turn the key to

Remote Run RUN and then to REM

Remote Program PROG and then to REM

Remote Test REM and then go online and select Test mode via the programming software

keyswitch

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

22 FlexLogix Controller System

Monitor the Controller LEDs

FLASH Upgrade the Controllerrsquos Firmware RevisionTo update the firmware of a controller first install a firmware upgrade kit

bull An upgrade kit ships on a supplemental CD along with RSLogix 5000 software

bull To download an upgrade kit go to httpsupportrockwellautomationcom Choose Firmware Updates

Indicator Color Description

RUN off bull no task(s) running

bull controller in Program mode

green bull one or more tasks are running

bull controller is in Run mode

OK off no power applied

red flashing after initially installing the controller - the controller requires a FLASH upgrade to the proper firmware revision see belowafter the controller is operating - recoverable fault

red bull controller faulted

bull clear faults clear memory or replace the controller

green controller OK

BATTERY off battery will support memory

red bull battery may not support memory

bull replace battery

IO off bull controller project not downloaded (the condition after power up)

bull no IO or communications configured

green communicating to all devices

green flashing one or more devices are not responding

LOCALandLOCAL2

off rail is inhibited

green communicating to all devices on that rail

green flashing one or more devices on that rail not responding

red flashing no modules exist on that rail

RS232 off no activity

green data being received or transmitted

FORCE off no forces present

amber forces present

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 23

Update the Controller

1 Connect the controller to the same network as your workstation

2 Start ControlFLASH software

3 Choose Next gt

4 Select the catalog number of the controller and choose Next gt

5 Expand the network until you see the controller If the required network is not shown first configure a driver for the network in RSLinx software

6 Select the controller and choose OK

7 Select the revision level to which you want to update the controller and choose Next gt

8 To start the update of the controller choose Finish and then Yes

After the controller is updated the status box displays Update complete

9 Choose OK

10 To close ControlFLASH software choose Cancel and then Yes

TIP RSLogix 5000 software revision 100 or later lets you update controller firmware as part of the download sequence To update the controller download your project and follow the prompts of the software

IMPORTANT If the Revision list is empty download a new upgrade kit Some older upgrade kits do not work with new controllers

42900

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

24 FlexLogix Controller System

FlexLogix Controller Approximate Mounting Dimensions

19949mm (785in)

849mm (334in) 5043mm (199in)

12197mm (481in)

18296mm (7203in)

8857mm (349in)

10596mm (417in)

10149mm (399in)

64mm (025in)

10457mm (412in)

8724mm (343in)

9296mm (366in)

8857mm (349in)

8014mm (316in)

1016mm (400in)

885mm (035in)

1853mm (730in)

135mm (053in)

825mm (033in)

60mm (024in)

6436mm (253in)

centerline of MTG Hole

centerline of DIN rail

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 25

FlexLogix Extended-Local IO Adapter Approximate Mounting Dimensions

Approximate Mounting Clearance

94mm (37in)

69mm (272in)

11712mm (461in)

8894mm (35in)

8106mm (319in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

26 FlexLogix Controller System

Other PublicationsYou can use the following manuals with this product

You can obtain manuals at wwwtheautomationbookstorecom

Specifications

Documents required for installation details Publication number

Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines 1770-41

Flex 1794-PS3 Power Supply Installation Instructions 1794-571

Flex 1794-PS13 Power Supply Installation Instructions 1794-569

Flex IO Terminal Base Installation Instructions 1794-516

1794-CE1 -CE3 Interconnect Cable Installation Instructions 1794-512

FLEX IO and FLEX Integra IO Technical Data 1794-21

Documents available for further reference Publication number

FlexLogix System User Manual 1794-UM001

Logix5000 Controllers Common Procedures Reference Manual 1756-PM001

Logix5000 Controllers General Instruction Set Reference Manual 1756-RM003

Guidelines for Handling Lithium Batteries AG-54

Category FlexLogix controller(1794-L33 -L34)

FlexLogix extended-local IO adapter (1794-FLA)

user memory 1794-L33 64 KBytes1794-L34 512 KBytes

na

input voltagerating (nominal)range

24V dc192V to 312V dc (includes 5 ac ripple)

isolation voltage(continuous-voltage withstand rating)

30V dcQualification tested to withstand 850V dc for 60 seconds

input current(1) 133A maximum at 192V dc085A maximum at 24V dc

039A maximum at 192V dc025A maximum at 24V dc

power dissipation(2) 255W maximum at 192V204W maximum at 24V dc

75W maximum at 192V60W maximum at 24V dc

backplane (FLEXBUS) current output

653mA maximum 51V dc 653mA maximum 51V dc

thermal dissipation 87BTUhour 192V 256BTUhour 192V

weight 1794-L33 71 kg (156 lbs oz)1794-L34 75 g (166 lbs)(no communication cards installed)

28 kg (62 lbs)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 27

power supply 1794-PS3 or 1794-PS13 ndash In applications that must be compliant with CSA requirements use a Separated Extra-Low Voltage (SELV) power supply that is compliant with IEC 610101 Annex H

power conductors 60deg C (140deg F) minimum copper22 to 14 AWG (0324 to 208 sq mm) stranded364 inch (12mm) insulation maximumlength 10m or less

category 3(2)

power connector torque 5 to 7 inch-pounds (06 to 08Nm)

battery 1756-BA1 (AB part number 94194801)059g lithium

na

serial cable 1761-CBLPM02 to 1761-NET-AIC 1761-CBLPA00 to 1761-NET-AIC1756-CP3 directly to controller1747-CP3 directly to controller

category 3(4)

na

extended local IO cable 1794-CE1 cable (1 foot)1794-CE3 cable (3 feet)

category 3(2)

DIN rail steel 35 x 755mm DIN railA-B part number 199-DR1 46277-3 EN 50022

operating temperature IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad Operating Cold)IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd Operating Dry Heat)IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock)0 to 60degC (32 to 140degF)

storage temperature IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab Un-packaged Non-operating Cold)IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb Un-packaged Non-operating Dry Heat)IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na Un-packaged Non-operating Thermal Shock)ndash40 to 85degC (ndash40 to 185degF)

relative humidity IEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db Un-packaged Non-operating Damp Heat)5 to 95 non-condensing

vibration(3) IEC60068-2-6 (Test Fc Operating) 5g 10-500Hz

shock(3)

operatingnon-operating

IEC60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged shock)

30g50g

emissions CISPR 11Group 1 Class A (with appropriate enclosure)

ESD immunity IEC 61000-4-26kV contact discharges8kV air discharges

Category FlexLogix controller(1794-L33 -L34)

FlexLogix extended-local IO adapter (1794-FLA)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

radiated RF immunity IEC 61000-4-310Vm with 1kHz sine-wave 80AM from 30MHz to 2000MHz10Vm with 200Hz 50 Pulse 100AM at 900Mhz

EFTB immunity IEC 61000-4-4plusmn4kV at 25kHz on power portsplusmn2kV at 5kHz on communications ports

surge transient immunity IEC 61000-4-5plusmn2kV line-earth (CM) on shielded ports

conducted RF immunity IEC 61000-4-610Vrms with 1kHz sine-wave 80AM from 150kHz to 80MHz

enclosure type rating none (open-style)

Certifications(when product is marked)

UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipmentc-UL-us UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous

Locations certified for US and CanadaCSA CSA Certified Process Control EquipmentCSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class I Division 2

Group ABCD Hazardous Locations

CE(5) European Union 89336EEC EMC Directive compliant withEN 50082-2 Industrial ImmunityEN 61326 MeasControlLab Industrial RequirementsEN 61000-6-2 Industrial ImmunityEN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions

C-Tick(5) Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant withASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions

EEx(5) European Union 949EEC ATEX Directive compliant withEN 50021 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n (Zone 2)

(1) This specification is also known as Power Consumption(2) This specification is also known as Heat Dissipation(3) To maintain these vibration and shock specifications you must use DIN rail locks(4) Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing Refer to Publication 1770-41 Industrial

Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines(5) See the Product Certification link at wwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification

details

Category FlexLogix controller(1794-L33 -L34)

FlexLogix extended-local IO adapter (1794-FLA)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004 PN 957867-01Supersedes Publication 1794-IN002F-EN-P - October 2002 Copyright copy 2004 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

  • 1794-IN002G-EN-P FlexLogix Controller System Installation Instructions
    • Tools That You Need
    • Obtain a User Manual
    • Environment and Enclosure
    • Prevent Electrostatic Discharge
    • European Hazardous Location Approval
    • North American Hazardous Location Approval
    • Removal and Insertion Under Power
    • Other Considerations
    • What You Need to Do
    • Step 1 Verify That You Have All the Components
    • Step 2 Install the Battery
    • Step 3 Install Communication Daughtercards (optional)
    • Step 4 Install the Controller
    • Step 5 Install the Extended-Local Adapter (optional)
    • Make an RS-232 Connection to the Controller
    • Select the Operating Mode of the Controller
    • Monitor the Controller LEDs
    • FLASH Upgrade the Controllerrsquos Firmware Revision
    • Update the Controller
    • FlexLogix Controller Approximate Mounting Dimensions
    • FlexLogix Extended-Local IO Adapter Approximate Mounting Dimensions
    • Approximate Mounting Clearance
    • Other Publications
    • Specifications
      • Back Cover
        • Intro

          ampLRA-QR005B-EN-E 308

          Generic pub print specs

          ampCItem Setup Sheet for Conversion Transfers
          ampLJIT-D-print SpreadsheetampCRA-QR005C-EN-EampRampD ampT

          IN RN pub type specs

          UM RM PM pub type specs

          AP PP pub type specs

          BR pub type specs

          Field definitions

          ampL04032006ampRampP
          PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
          EA = Each
          PK = Pack
          PD = Pad
          RL = Roll
          BK = Book
          CT = Carton
          BX = Box
          ST = Set
          Multiple Order Qty
          Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
          Business Group
          The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
          CorporateBusiness Development
          Finance
          Human Resources
          IT
          Logistics
          Manufacturing
          Marketing Commercial
          Marketing Europe
          Marketing Other
          Operations
          Order Services
          Other
          Process Improvement
          Procurement
          Quality
          Sales
          Max Order Quantity
          Presale items = 100
          Postsale items = 5
          NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
          Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
          Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
          Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
          BindingStitching
          For a Form (F) use
          CARBONLESS
          CUTSHEET
          ENVELOPE
          For a Book (B) use
          LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
          PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
          PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
          SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
          STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
          STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
          STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
          THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
          THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
          WIRE O Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
          Saddle-Stitch Items
          20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
          19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
          18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
          All page quantities must be divisible by 4
          Tape Bound Items
          125 sheets max on 20 no cover
          120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Perfect Bound Items
          475 sheets max on 20 no cover
          470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Double Wire Bound Items
          40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Coil Bound Items
          290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Sides Printed
          Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
          Simplex = Single-sided printing
          Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
          Number of Forms to a Sheet
          Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
          Number of Sheets Required to Print
          Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
          Paper Stock Type
          Description
          PLAIN Bond
          ACNTCVR Accent Cover
          BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
          BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
          C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
          C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
          C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
          C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
          CARD Card Stock
          CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
          CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
          COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
          CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
          CUSTOM Custom
          CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
          ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
          ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
          ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
          GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
          GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
          HOTSTEXT Hots Text
          INDEX Index
          LABEL80 80 Up Label
          MICROPRT Micro Print
          OFFSET Offset
          PART2 2 Part
          PART3 3 Part
          PART4 4 Part
          PART5 5 Part
          PART6 6 Part
          PERF 12 inch Perfed
          PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
          PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
          PREPERF Pre-Perforated
          RECYL Recycled
          SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
          SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
          SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
          TAG Tag
          TEXT Text
          TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
          TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
          TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
          TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
          VELLUM Vellum
          VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
          WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
          WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
          WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
          Paper Stock Color
          Black
          Blue
          Buff
          Canary
          Cherry
          Clear
          Cream
          Custom
          Goldrenrod
          Gray
          Green
          Ivory
          Lavender
          Manilla
          NCRPinkCanary
          NCRWhiteBlue
          NCRWhiteBlueCanary
          NCRWhiteCanary
          NCRWhiteCanaryPink
          NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
          NCRWhiteGreen
          NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
          NCRWhitePink
          NCRWhiteWhite
          Opaque
          Orange
          Orchid
          Peach
          Pink
          Purple
          Salmon
          Tan
          Violet
          White
          Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
          11 x 17
          18 x 24 Poster
          24 x 36 Poster
          3 x 5
          36 x 24 Poster
          4 x 6
          475 x 7
          475 x 775
          55 x 85
          6 x 4
          7 x 9
          7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
          85 x 11
          825 x 10875
          825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
          8375 x 10875
          9 x 12
          A4
          A5
          Other - Custom size listed below
          Drilling Locations
          1CENTER
          1LEFTTOP
          1TOPCENTER
          2LEFT
          2LEFT2TOP
          2TOP
          2TOP2LEFT
          2TOP3LEFT
          2TOP5LEFT
          2TOP5RIGHT
          3BOTTOM
          3LEFT
          3LEFT2TOP
          3LEFT3TOP
          3RIGHT
          3TOP
          3TOP5LEFT
          5BOTTOM
          5CENTER
          5LEFT
          5RIGHT
          5RIGHT2TOP
          5TOP
          For TRI fold - select Z or C type Description
          HALF Half
          C C Fold
          DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
          OFFSETZ Offset Z
          SAMPLE See Sample
          SHORT Short Fold
          V V Fold
          Z Z Fold
          Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
          Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
          77 or more pages 1
          33 to 76 pages 25
          3 to 32 pages 50
          1 or 2 pages 100
          Comments
          CoverText Stock Spine
          100 Gloss Cover If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
          100 Gloss Text
          100 Text
          10pt C1S Cover
          10pt C2S Cover
          10pt C2S Text
          10pt Text Stock
          110 White Index
          12pt C1S Cover
          20 White Opaque Bond
          50 Colored Offset
          50 White Offset
          50 White Opaque
          60 Cover Stock
          60 White Offset
          80 Gloss Cover
          80 Gloss Text
          8pt C1S White
          90 White Index
          CoverText Ink
          Black
          Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
          Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
          4 color
          4 color over black
          4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
          4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
          4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
          4 color + aqueous
          4 color + varnish
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 50 RRD must provide this information
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 RRD must provide this information
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          EA 1 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Black amp White B PERFECT PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 NA 516 3LEFT NA NA NA NA RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          1794-IN002G-EN-P FlexLogix Controller Installation Instructions EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial 19021 01232004 5 Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 4 28 7 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 55 85 NA NA NA NA NA HALF 55 x 85 100 RRD must provide this information Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black 957867-01
          Corp 17501
          Bill To 69
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information
          Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
          This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
          Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
          Generic pub print specs Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
          IN RN pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          UM RM PM pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          AP PP pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          BR pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          Field definitions Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
          Attach Print Specs to PDF
          For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
          RA-QR005C-EN-E 608
Page 9: FlexLogix Controller System - Rockwell Automation...FlexLogix Controller System 3 Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004 Environment and Enclosure Prevent Electrostatic Discharge

FlexLogix Controller System 9

Step 1 Verify That You Have All the ComponentsThese components ship with the FlexLogix controller

bull 1756-BA1 battery and label

bull key

bull one spring-clip connector plug for 24V power connection

bull one screw-terminal connector plug for 24V power connection

bull two 1492-EA35 DIN rail locks

The system components you have depend on your application You might have

FlexLogix System Component Description

1788-CNC -CNCR for ControlNet communications1788-CNF -CNFR for ControlNet communications1788-DNBO for DeviceNet communications1788-ENBT for EtherNetIP communications

1756-CP3You can also use the 1747-CP3 cable from the SLC product family

1794-FLA

1794-CE1 (1 foot)1794-CE3 (3 foot)

communication card

serial cable

FlexLogix extended-local adapter

extended- local IO cable

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

10 FlexLogix Controller System

Step 2 Install the Battery

For Safety information on the handling of lithium batteries including handling and disposal of leaking batteries see Guidelines for Handling Lithium Batteries publication AG 5-4

1 Install a 1756-BA1 battery

2 Attach the battery label

a Write on the battery label the date you install the battery

b Attach the label to the inside of the battery compartment

ATTENTION Only install a 1756-BA1 battery If you install a different battery you may damage the controller

WARNING For safety information on the handling of lithium batteries in-cluding the handling and disposal of leaking batteries see Guide-lines for Handling Lithium Batteries publication AG-54Store batteries in a cool dry environment We recommend 25degC with 40 to 60 relative humidity You may store batteries for up to 30 days between -45deg to 85degC such as during transporta-tion To avoid possible leakage do not store batteries above 60degC for more than 30 days

When you connect or disconnect the battery an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location in-stallations Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhaz-ardous before proceeding

Attach battery here

top red lead (+)

middle black lead (-)

bottom no connection

Attach label here

This jumper is for service use only Do not use this jumper

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 11

Step 3 Install Communication Daughtercards (optional)

For specific information about configuring the communication card (such as setting a node address) see the installation instructions for the communication card

1 Turn off power to the controller

2 If necessary remove the blank cover from the communication slot

3 Slide the communication card into the communication slot Be sure to line up the card with the card guides in the controller

4 Record which slot you use for the communication card You need the slot number when you develop your controller application

5 Secure the card with the screws to ensure proper grounding Do not over-tighten the screws The maximum torque for the card screws is 48 to 52 inch pounds (05 to 06 Nm)

6 After the controller is installed (see page 12) connect the network cable

Removing a Communication CardIf you need to remove a communication card from the controller

1 Turn off power to the controller

2 Disconnect all cables from the communication card

3 Loosen the card screws from the communication card

4 Remove the card from the controller

5 Replace the card with a blank cover or a different communication card

WARNING If you insert or remove the card while host power is on an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in haz-ardous location installations

31032-M

slot 1slot 2

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

12 FlexLogix Controller System

Step 4 Install the Controller

1 Position the FlexLogix controller on the DIN rail at a 5deg angle and rotate the controller onto the DIN rail

2 Press the controller down onto the DIN rail until flush The locking tabs will snap into position and lock the controller onto the DIN rail

If the controller does not lock in place use a screwdriver or similar device to move the locking tabs down while pressing the controller onto the DIN rail Release the locking tabs to lock the controller in place If necessary push up on the locking tabs to lock

3 Ground the controller The DIN rail and the common conductive surface behind the DIN rail provide functional ground for the controller Use the grounding stud to meet safety ground requirements

For information about wiring and grounding see the Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41

IMPORTANT You can mount the FlexLogix controller either vertically or horizontally (as shown)

A

A

locking tabs

grounding stud

Equipment grounding conductor (ground lug with 208 sq mm [14 AWG] wire) to ground bus

nuts with captive star washer

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 13

4 Make sure power is not applied to the power supply

5 Connect the power supply to the controller The graphic below and its related instructions describe a 1794-PS13 power supply

a Connect +24V dc input to the top of the controller connector terminal A to the bottom left power connector terminal G

b Connect -24V common to top controller connector terminal B to the top left power connector terminal E

c Use connections C and D on the controller and connection F and H on the power supply to pass 24V dc power and common to the next module in the series if required

Use the screw-terminal connector plug that comes with the controller to meet the requirements for installations in Class I Division 2 locations

WARNING If you connect or disconnect wiring while the field-side power is on an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations Be sure that power is re-moved or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding

+

+

A

B

C

D

FE

HG

_

_

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

14 FlexLogix Controller System

6 Mount the IO terminal bases on the DIN rail

For information about IO terminal bases see the FLEX IO Terminal Base Installation Instructions publication 1794-IN092

7 Install the IO modules

To install an IO module see the installation instructions for that module

Removing the controllerIf you need to remove the controller follow these steps

1 Turn off power to the controller

2 Disconnect all cables from the controller

3 Remove the IO module that is adjacent to the controller

4 On the terminal base adjacent to the controller slide the FLEXBUS connector away from the controller and remove the IO terminal base

5 Remove the controller from the DIN rail

B

A

A

31036-M

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 15

Step 5 Install the Extended-Local Adapter (optional)

1 Position the 1794-FLA extended-local IO adapter on the DIN rail at a 30deg angle and rotate the adapter onto the DIN rail

2 Press the adapter down onto the DIN rail until flush The locking tab will snap into position and lock the adapter onto the DIN rail

If the adapter does not lock in place use a screwdriver or similar device to move the locking tab down while pressing the adapter onto the DIN rail Release the locking tab to lock the adapter in place If necessary push up on the locking tab to lock

3 Ground the adapter The adapter is grounded through the steel DIN rail and the common conductive surface behind the DIN rail Additionally use the grounding stud

grounding stud

Equipment grounding conductor (ground lug with 208 sq mm [14 AWG] wire) to ground bus

nuts with captive star washer

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

16 FlexLogix Controller System

4 Make sure power is not applied to the power supply Connect the power supply to the adapter This diagram and its related instructions describe a 1794-PS13 power supply

a Connect +24V dc input to the left adapter connector terminal A to the bottom left power connector terminal G

b Connect -24V common to left adapter connector terminal B to the top left power connector terminal E

c Use connections C and D on the adapter and connection F and H on the power supply to pass 24V dc power and common to the next module in the series if required

Use the screw-terminal connector plug that comes with the adapter to meet the requirements for installations in Class I Division 2 locations

5 Connect IO terminal bases and IO modules to the adapter the same way you connect them to the controller

6 Remove the plastic spacer from both ends of the extended-local IO cable (1794-CE1 or 1794-CE3)

plastic spacer

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 17

7 Connect the adapter to the controller

The following diagram shows how you can also use the 1794-CE1 -CE3 cable to split a rail of IO You can split each rail only once You can split a rail right after the controller (or adapter) or after any IO module For more information about the 1794-CE1 -CE3 cables see the Interconnect Cable Installation Instructions publication 1794-512

Removing the extended-local adapterIf you need to remove the adapter follow these steps

1 Turn off power to the adapter

2 Disconnect all cables from the adapter

3 Remove the IO module that is adjacent to the adapter

4 On the terminal base adjacent to the adapter slide the FLEXBUS connector away from the adapter and remove the IO terminal base

5 Remove the adapter from the DIN rail

31039-M

1794-CE1 or 1794-CE3 cable

LOCAL rail

LOCAL2 rail

1794-CE1 or 1794-CE3 cable

1794-CE1 or 1794-CE3 cable

1794-CE1 or 1794-CE3 cable

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

18 FlexLogix Controller System

Make an RS-232 Connection to the ControllerThe RS-232 port is a non-isolated serial port built-in to the front of the controller

To connect to the serial port

1 Determine whether you need an optical isolator

If you connect the controller to a device outside of the systemrsquos enclosure consider installing an isolator between the controller and device

One possible isolator is the 1761-NET-AIC interface converter

serial port

port 1 DB-9 RS-232 DTE

baud rate selector switch

port 2 mini-DIN 8 RS-232

dc power source selector switch

terminals for external 24V dc power supply

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 19

2 Select the appropriate cable

Are you using an isolator

Use this cable

no The 1756-CP3 cable attaches the controller directly to the controller

If you make your own cable it must be shielded and the shields must be tied to the metal shell (that surrounds the pins) on both ends of the cableYou can also use a 1747-CP3 cable (from the SLC product family) This cable has a taller right-angle connector housing than the 1756-CP3 cable

yes The 1761-CBL-AP00 cable (right-angle connector to controller) or the 1761-CBL-PM02 cable (straight connector to the controller) attaches the controller to port 2 on the 1761-NET-AIC isolator The mini-DIN connector is not commercially available so you cannot make this cable

2 RDX

3 TXD

4 DTR

COMMON

6 DSR

7 RTS

8 CTS

9

1 CD

2 RDX

3 TXD

4 DTR

COMMON

6 DSR

7 RTS

8 CTS

9

1 CD

DB-9 right-angle or straight cable end 8-pin mini-DIN cable end

Pin DB-9 end Mini-DIN end1 DCD DCD

2 RxD RxD

3 TxD TxD

4 DTR DTR

5 ground ground

6 DSR DSR

7 RTS RTS

8 CTS CTS

9 na na

1 2

34

5

6 7867

8

9

1

2

3

4

5

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

20 FlexLogix Controller System

3 Connect the appropriate cable to the serial port on the controller

Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding

4 If necessary attach the controller to the isolator

WARNING If you connect or disconnect the serial cable with power applied to this module or the serial device on the other end of the cable an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations

modem

1761-NET-AIC isolator

user-supplied modem cable

1761 cable

system enclosure

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 21

Select the Operating Mode of the Controller

1 Use this table to determine the operating mode of the controller

2 Turn the key on the front panel of the controller to select the mode

If you want to Select one of these modes

Run Program Remote

Run Program Test

turn outputs to the state commanded by the logic of the project

YES YES

turn outputs to their configured state for Program mode

YES YES YES

execute (scan) tasks YES YES YES

change the mode of the controller through software

YES YES YES

download a project YES YES

schedule a ControlNet network YES YES

while online edit the project YES YES YES YES

To select Turn the key to

Remote Run RUN and then to REM

Remote Program PROG and then to REM

Remote Test REM and then go online and select Test mode via the programming software

keyswitch

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

22 FlexLogix Controller System

Monitor the Controller LEDs

FLASH Upgrade the Controllerrsquos Firmware RevisionTo update the firmware of a controller first install a firmware upgrade kit

bull An upgrade kit ships on a supplemental CD along with RSLogix 5000 software

bull To download an upgrade kit go to httpsupportrockwellautomationcom Choose Firmware Updates

Indicator Color Description

RUN off bull no task(s) running

bull controller in Program mode

green bull one or more tasks are running

bull controller is in Run mode

OK off no power applied

red flashing after initially installing the controller - the controller requires a FLASH upgrade to the proper firmware revision see belowafter the controller is operating - recoverable fault

red bull controller faulted

bull clear faults clear memory or replace the controller

green controller OK

BATTERY off battery will support memory

red bull battery may not support memory

bull replace battery

IO off bull controller project not downloaded (the condition after power up)

bull no IO or communications configured

green communicating to all devices

green flashing one or more devices are not responding

LOCALandLOCAL2

off rail is inhibited

green communicating to all devices on that rail

green flashing one or more devices on that rail not responding

red flashing no modules exist on that rail

RS232 off no activity

green data being received or transmitted

FORCE off no forces present

amber forces present

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 23

Update the Controller

1 Connect the controller to the same network as your workstation

2 Start ControlFLASH software

3 Choose Next gt

4 Select the catalog number of the controller and choose Next gt

5 Expand the network until you see the controller If the required network is not shown first configure a driver for the network in RSLinx software

6 Select the controller and choose OK

7 Select the revision level to which you want to update the controller and choose Next gt

8 To start the update of the controller choose Finish and then Yes

After the controller is updated the status box displays Update complete

9 Choose OK

10 To close ControlFLASH software choose Cancel and then Yes

TIP RSLogix 5000 software revision 100 or later lets you update controller firmware as part of the download sequence To update the controller download your project and follow the prompts of the software

IMPORTANT If the Revision list is empty download a new upgrade kit Some older upgrade kits do not work with new controllers

42900

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

24 FlexLogix Controller System

FlexLogix Controller Approximate Mounting Dimensions

19949mm (785in)

849mm (334in) 5043mm (199in)

12197mm (481in)

18296mm (7203in)

8857mm (349in)

10596mm (417in)

10149mm (399in)

64mm (025in)

10457mm (412in)

8724mm (343in)

9296mm (366in)

8857mm (349in)

8014mm (316in)

1016mm (400in)

885mm (035in)

1853mm (730in)

135mm (053in)

825mm (033in)

60mm (024in)

6436mm (253in)

centerline of MTG Hole

centerline of DIN rail

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 25

FlexLogix Extended-Local IO Adapter Approximate Mounting Dimensions

Approximate Mounting Clearance

94mm (37in)

69mm (272in)

11712mm (461in)

8894mm (35in)

8106mm (319in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

26 FlexLogix Controller System

Other PublicationsYou can use the following manuals with this product

You can obtain manuals at wwwtheautomationbookstorecom

Specifications

Documents required for installation details Publication number

Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines 1770-41

Flex 1794-PS3 Power Supply Installation Instructions 1794-571

Flex 1794-PS13 Power Supply Installation Instructions 1794-569

Flex IO Terminal Base Installation Instructions 1794-516

1794-CE1 -CE3 Interconnect Cable Installation Instructions 1794-512

FLEX IO and FLEX Integra IO Technical Data 1794-21

Documents available for further reference Publication number

FlexLogix System User Manual 1794-UM001

Logix5000 Controllers Common Procedures Reference Manual 1756-PM001

Logix5000 Controllers General Instruction Set Reference Manual 1756-RM003

Guidelines for Handling Lithium Batteries AG-54

Category FlexLogix controller(1794-L33 -L34)

FlexLogix extended-local IO adapter (1794-FLA)

user memory 1794-L33 64 KBytes1794-L34 512 KBytes

na

input voltagerating (nominal)range

24V dc192V to 312V dc (includes 5 ac ripple)

isolation voltage(continuous-voltage withstand rating)

30V dcQualification tested to withstand 850V dc for 60 seconds

input current(1) 133A maximum at 192V dc085A maximum at 24V dc

039A maximum at 192V dc025A maximum at 24V dc

power dissipation(2) 255W maximum at 192V204W maximum at 24V dc

75W maximum at 192V60W maximum at 24V dc

backplane (FLEXBUS) current output

653mA maximum 51V dc 653mA maximum 51V dc

thermal dissipation 87BTUhour 192V 256BTUhour 192V

weight 1794-L33 71 kg (156 lbs oz)1794-L34 75 g (166 lbs)(no communication cards installed)

28 kg (62 lbs)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 27

power supply 1794-PS3 or 1794-PS13 ndash In applications that must be compliant with CSA requirements use a Separated Extra-Low Voltage (SELV) power supply that is compliant with IEC 610101 Annex H

power conductors 60deg C (140deg F) minimum copper22 to 14 AWG (0324 to 208 sq mm) stranded364 inch (12mm) insulation maximumlength 10m or less

category 3(2)

power connector torque 5 to 7 inch-pounds (06 to 08Nm)

battery 1756-BA1 (AB part number 94194801)059g lithium

na

serial cable 1761-CBLPM02 to 1761-NET-AIC 1761-CBLPA00 to 1761-NET-AIC1756-CP3 directly to controller1747-CP3 directly to controller

category 3(4)

na

extended local IO cable 1794-CE1 cable (1 foot)1794-CE3 cable (3 feet)

category 3(2)

DIN rail steel 35 x 755mm DIN railA-B part number 199-DR1 46277-3 EN 50022

operating temperature IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad Operating Cold)IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd Operating Dry Heat)IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock)0 to 60degC (32 to 140degF)

storage temperature IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab Un-packaged Non-operating Cold)IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb Un-packaged Non-operating Dry Heat)IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na Un-packaged Non-operating Thermal Shock)ndash40 to 85degC (ndash40 to 185degF)

relative humidity IEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db Un-packaged Non-operating Damp Heat)5 to 95 non-condensing

vibration(3) IEC60068-2-6 (Test Fc Operating) 5g 10-500Hz

shock(3)

operatingnon-operating

IEC60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged shock)

30g50g

emissions CISPR 11Group 1 Class A (with appropriate enclosure)

ESD immunity IEC 61000-4-26kV contact discharges8kV air discharges

Category FlexLogix controller(1794-L33 -L34)

FlexLogix extended-local IO adapter (1794-FLA)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

radiated RF immunity IEC 61000-4-310Vm with 1kHz sine-wave 80AM from 30MHz to 2000MHz10Vm with 200Hz 50 Pulse 100AM at 900Mhz

EFTB immunity IEC 61000-4-4plusmn4kV at 25kHz on power portsplusmn2kV at 5kHz on communications ports

surge transient immunity IEC 61000-4-5plusmn2kV line-earth (CM) on shielded ports

conducted RF immunity IEC 61000-4-610Vrms with 1kHz sine-wave 80AM from 150kHz to 80MHz

enclosure type rating none (open-style)

Certifications(when product is marked)

UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipmentc-UL-us UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous

Locations certified for US and CanadaCSA CSA Certified Process Control EquipmentCSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class I Division 2

Group ABCD Hazardous Locations

CE(5) European Union 89336EEC EMC Directive compliant withEN 50082-2 Industrial ImmunityEN 61326 MeasControlLab Industrial RequirementsEN 61000-6-2 Industrial ImmunityEN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions

C-Tick(5) Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant withASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions

EEx(5) European Union 949EEC ATEX Directive compliant withEN 50021 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n (Zone 2)

(1) This specification is also known as Power Consumption(2) This specification is also known as Heat Dissipation(3) To maintain these vibration and shock specifications you must use DIN rail locks(4) Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing Refer to Publication 1770-41 Industrial

Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines(5) See the Product Certification link at wwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification

details

Category FlexLogix controller(1794-L33 -L34)

FlexLogix extended-local IO adapter (1794-FLA)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004 PN 957867-01Supersedes Publication 1794-IN002F-EN-P - October 2002 Copyright copy 2004 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

  • 1794-IN002G-EN-P FlexLogix Controller System Installation Instructions
    • Tools That You Need
    • Obtain a User Manual
    • Environment and Enclosure
    • Prevent Electrostatic Discharge
    • European Hazardous Location Approval
    • North American Hazardous Location Approval
    • Removal and Insertion Under Power
    • Other Considerations
    • What You Need to Do
    • Step 1 Verify That You Have All the Components
    • Step 2 Install the Battery
    • Step 3 Install Communication Daughtercards (optional)
    • Step 4 Install the Controller
    • Step 5 Install the Extended-Local Adapter (optional)
    • Make an RS-232 Connection to the Controller
    • Select the Operating Mode of the Controller
    • Monitor the Controller LEDs
    • FLASH Upgrade the Controllerrsquos Firmware Revision
    • Update the Controller
    • FlexLogix Controller Approximate Mounting Dimensions
    • FlexLogix Extended-Local IO Adapter Approximate Mounting Dimensions
    • Approximate Mounting Clearance
    • Other Publications
    • Specifications
      • Back Cover
        • Intro

          ampLRA-QR005B-EN-E 308

          Generic pub print specs

          ampCItem Setup Sheet for Conversion Transfers
          ampLJIT-D-print SpreadsheetampCRA-QR005C-EN-EampRampD ampT

          IN RN pub type specs

          UM RM PM pub type specs

          AP PP pub type specs

          BR pub type specs

          Field definitions

          ampL04032006ampRampP
          PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
          EA = Each
          PK = Pack
          PD = Pad
          RL = Roll
          BK = Book
          CT = Carton
          BX = Box
          ST = Set
          Multiple Order Qty
          Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
          Business Group
          The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
          CorporateBusiness Development
          Finance
          Human Resources
          IT
          Logistics
          Manufacturing
          Marketing Commercial
          Marketing Europe
          Marketing Other
          Operations
          Order Services
          Other
          Process Improvement
          Procurement
          Quality
          Sales
          Max Order Quantity
          Presale items = 100
          Postsale items = 5
          NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
          Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
          Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
          Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
          BindingStitching
          For a Form (F) use
          CARBONLESS
          CUTSHEET
          ENVELOPE
          For a Book (B) use
          LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
          PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
          PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
          SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
          STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
          STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
          STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
          THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
          THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
          WIRE O Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
          Saddle-Stitch Items
          20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
          19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
          18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
          All page quantities must be divisible by 4
          Tape Bound Items
          125 sheets max on 20 no cover
          120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Perfect Bound Items
          475 sheets max on 20 no cover
          470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Double Wire Bound Items
          40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Coil Bound Items
          290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Sides Printed
          Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
          Simplex = Single-sided printing
          Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
          Number of Forms to a Sheet
          Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
          Number of Sheets Required to Print
          Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
          Paper Stock Type
          Description
          PLAIN Bond
          ACNTCVR Accent Cover
          BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
          BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
          C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
          C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
          C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
          C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
          CARD Card Stock
          CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
          CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
          COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
          CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
          CUSTOM Custom
          CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
          ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
          ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
          ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
          GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
          GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
          HOTSTEXT Hots Text
          INDEX Index
          LABEL80 80 Up Label
          MICROPRT Micro Print
          OFFSET Offset
          PART2 2 Part
          PART3 3 Part
          PART4 4 Part
          PART5 5 Part
          PART6 6 Part
          PERF 12 inch Perfed
          PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
          PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
          PREPERF Pre-Perforated
          RECYL Recycled
          SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
          SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
          SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
          TAG Tag
          TEXT Text
          TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
          TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
          TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
          TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
          VELLUM Vellum
          VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
          WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
          WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
          WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
          Paper Stock Color
          Black
          Blue
          Buff
          Canary
          Cherry
          Clear
          Cream
          Custom
          Goldrenrod
          Gray
          Green
          Ivory
          Lavender
          Manilla
          NCRPinkCanary
          NCRWhiteBlue
          NCRWhiteBlueCanary
          NCRWhiteCanary
          NCRWhiteCanaryPink
          NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
          NCRWhiteGreen
          NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
          NCRWhitePink
          NCRWhiteWhite
          Opaque
          Orange
          Orchid
          Peach
          Pink
          Purple
          Salmon
          Tan
          Violet
          White
          Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
          11 x 17
          18 x 24 Poster
          24 x 36 Poster
          3 x 5
          36 x 24 Poster
          4 x 6
          475 x 7
          475 x 775
          55 x 85
          6 x 4
          7 x 9
          7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
          85 x 11
          825 x 10875
          825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
          8375 x 10875
          9 x 12
          A4
          A5
          Other - Custom size listed below
          Drilling Locations
          1CENTER
          1LEFTTOP
          1TOPCENTER
          2LEFT
          2LEFT2TOP
          2TOP
          2TOP2LEFT
          2TOP3LEFT
          2TOP5LEFT
          2TOP5RIGHT
          3BOTTOM
          3LEFT
          3LEFT2TOP
          3LEFT3TOP
          3RIGHT
          3TOP
          3TOP5LEFT
          5BOTTOM
          5CENTER
          5LEFT
          5RIGHT
          5RIGHT2TOP
          5TOP
          For TRI fold - select Z or C type Description
          HALF Half
          C C Fold
          DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
          OFFSETZ Offset Z
          SAMPLE See Sample
          SHORT Short Fold
          V V Fold
          Z Z Fold
          Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
          Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
          77 or more pages 1
          33 to 76 pages 25
          3 to 32 pages 50
          1 or 2 pages 100
          Comments
          CoverText Stock Spine
          100 Gloss Cover If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
          100 Gloss Text
          100 Text
          10pt C1S Cover
          10pt C2S Cover
          10pt C2S Text
          10pt Text Stock
          110 White Index
          12pt C1S Cover
          20 White Opaque Bond
          50 Colored Offset
          50 White Offset
          50 White Opaque
          60 Cover Stock
          60 White Offset
          80 Gloss Cover
          80 Gloss Text
          8pt C1S White
          90 White Index
          CoverText Ink
          Black
          Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
          Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
          4 color
          4 color over black
          4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
          4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
          4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
          4 color + aqueous
          4 color + varnish
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 50 RRD must provide this information
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 RRD must provide this information
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          EA 1 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Black amp White B PERFECT PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 NA 516 3LEFT NA NA NA NA RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          1794-IN002G-EN-P FlexLogix Controller Installation Instructions EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial 19021 01232004 5 Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 4 28 7 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 55 85 NA NA NA NA NA HALF 55 x 85 100 RRD must provide this information Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black 957867-01
          Corp 17501
          Bill To 69
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information
          Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
          This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
          Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
          Generic pub print specs Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
          IN RN pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          UM RM PM pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          AP PP pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          BR pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          Field definitions Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
          Attach Print Specs to PDF
          For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
          RA-QR005C-EN-E 608
Page 10: FlexLogix Controller System - Rockwell Automation...FlexLogix Controller System 3 Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004 Environment and Enclosure Prevent Electrostatic Discharge

10 FlexLogix Controller System

Step 2 Install the Battery

For Safety information on the handling of lithium batteries including handling and disposal of leaking batteries see Guidelines for Handling Lithium Batteries publication AG 5-4

1 Install a 1756-BA1 battery

2 Attach the battery label

a Write on the battery label the date you install the battery

b Attach the label to the inside of the battery compartment

ATTENTION Only install a 1756-BA1 battery If you install a different battery you may damage the controller

WARNING For safety information on the handling of lithium batteries in-cluding the handling and disposal of leaking batteries see Guide-lines for Handling Lithium Batteries publication AG-54Store batteries in a cool dry environment We recommend 25degC with 40 to 60 relative humidity You may store batteries for up to 30 days between -45deg to 85degC such as during transporta-tion To avoid possible leakage do not store batteries above 60degC for more than 30 days

When you connect or disconnect the battery an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location in-stallations Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhaz-ardous before proceeding

Attach battery here

top red lead (+)

middle black lead (-)

bottom no connection

Attach label here

This jumper is for service use only Do not use this jumper

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 11

Step 3 Install Communication Daughtercards (optional)

For specific information about configuring the communication card (such as setting a node address) see the installation instructions for the communication card

1 Turn off power to the controller

2 If necessary remove the blank cover from the communication slot

3 Slide the communication card into the communication slot Be sure to line up the card with the card guides in the controller

4 Record which slot you use for the communication card You need the slot number when you develop your controller application

5 Secure the card with the screws to ensure proper grounding Do not over-tighten the screws The maximum torque for the card screws is 48 to 52 inch pounds (05 to 06 Nm)

6 After the controller is installed (see page 12) connect the network cable

Removing a Communication CardIf you need to remove a communication card from the controller

1 Turn off power to the controller

2 Disconnect all cables from the communication card

3 Loosen the card screws from the communication card

4 Remove the card from the controller

5 Replace the card with a blank cover or a different communication card

WARNING If you insert or remove the card while host power is on an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in haz-ardous location installations

31032-M

slot 1slot 2

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

12 FlexLogix Controller System

Step 4 Install the Controller

1 Position the FlexLogix controller on the DIN rail at a 5deg angle and rotate the controller onto the DIN rail

2 Press the controller down onto the DIN rail until flush The locking tabs will snap into position and lock the controller onto the DIN rail

If the controller does not lock in place use a screwdriver or similar device to move the locking tabs down while pressing the controller onto the DIN rail Release the locking tabs to lock the controller in place If necessary push up on the locking tabs to lock

3 Ground the controller The DIN rail and the common conductive surface behind the DIN rail provide functional ground for the controller Use the grounding stud to meet safety ground requirements

For information about wiring and grounding see the Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41

IMPORTANT You can mount the FlexLogix controller either vertically or horizontally (as shown)

A

A

locking tabs

grounding stud

Equipment grounding conductor (ground lug with 208 sq mm [14 AWG] wire) to ground bus

nuts with captive star washer

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 13

4 Make sure power is not applied to the power supply

5 Connect the power supply to the controller The graphic below and its related instructions describe a 1794-PS13 power supply

a Connect +24V dc input to the top of the controller connector terminal A to the bottom left power connector terminal G

b Connect -24V common to top controller connector terminal B to the top left power connector terminal E

c Use connections C and D on the controller and connection F and H on the power supply to pass 24V dc power and common to the next module in the series if required

Use the screw-terminal connector plug that comes with the controller to meet the requirements for installations in Class I Division 2 locations

WARNING If you connect or disconnect wiring while the field-side power is on an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations Be sure that power is re-moved or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding

+

+

A

B

C

D

FE

HG

_

_

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

14 FlexLogix Controller System

6 Mount the IO terminal bases on the DIN rail

For information about IO terminal bases see the FLEX IO Terminal Base Installation Instructions publication 1794-IN092

7 Install the IO modules

To install an IO module see the installation instructions for that module

Removing the controllerIf you need to remove the controller follow these steps

1 Turn off power to the controller

2 Disconnect all cables from the controller

3 Remove the IO module that is adjacent to the controller

4 On the terminal base adjacent to the controller slide the FLEXBUS connector away from the controller and remove the IO terminal base

5 Remove the controller from the DIN rail

B

A

A

31036-M

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 15

Step 5 Install the Extended-Local Adapter (optional)

1 Position the 1794-FLA extended-local IO adapter on the DIN rail at a 30deg angle and rotate the adapter onto the DIN rail

2 Press the adapter down onto the DIN rail until flush The locking tab will snap into position and lock the adapter onto the DIN rail

If the adapter does not lock in place use a screwdriver or similar device to move the locking tab down while pressing the adapter onto the DIN rail Release the locking tab to lock the adapter in place If necessary push up on the locking tab to lock

3 Ground the adapter The adapter is grounded through the steel DIN rail and the common conductive surface behind the DIN rail Additionally use the grounding stud

grounding stud

Equipment grounding conductor (ground lug with 208 sq mm [14 AWG] wire) to ground bus

nuts with captive star washer

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

16 FlexLogix Controller System

4 Make sure power is not applied to the power supply Connect the power supply to the adapter This diagram and its related instructions describe a 1794-PS13 power supply

a Connect +24V dc input to the left adapter connector terminal A to the bottom left power connector terminal G

b Connect -24V common to left adapter connector terminal B to the top left power connector terminal E

c Use connections C and D on the adapter and connection F and H on the power supply to pass 24V dc power and common to the next module in the series if required

Use the screw-terminal connector plug that comes with the adapter to meet the requirements for installations in Class I Division 2 locations

5 Connect IO terminal bases and IO modules to the adapter the same way you connect them to the controller

6 Remove the plastic spacer from both ends of the extended-local IO cable (1794-CE1 or 1794-CE3)

plastic spacer

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 17

7 Connect the adapter to the controller

The following diagram shows how you can also use the 1794-CE1 -CE3 cable to split a rail of IO You can split each rail only once You can split a rail right after the controller (or adapter) or after any IO module For more information about the 1794-CE1 -CE3 cables see the Interconnect Cable Installation Instructions publication 1794-512

Removing the extended-local adapterIf you need to remove the adapter follow these steps

1 Turn off power to the adapter

2 Disconnect all cables from the adapter

3 Remove the IO module that is adjacent to the adapter

4 On the terminal base adjacent to the adapter slide the FLEXBUS connector away from the adapter and remove the IO terminal base

5 Remove the adapter from the DIN rail

31039-M

1794-CE1 or 1794-CE3 cable

LOCAL rail

LOCAL2 rail

1794-CE1 or 1794-CE3 cable

1794-CE1 or 1794-CE3 cable

1794-CE1 or 1794-CE3 cable

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

18 FlexLogix Controller System

Make an RS-232 Connection to the ControllerThe RS-232 port is a non-isolated serial port built-in to the front of the controller

To connect to the serial port

1 Determine whether you need an optical isolator

If you connect the controller to a device outside of the systemrsquos enclosure consider installing an isolator between the controller and device

One possible isolator is the 1761-NET-AIC interface converter

serial port

port 1 DB-9 RS-232 DTE

baud rate selector switch

port 2 mini-DIN 8 RS-232

dc power source selector switch

terminals for external 24V dc power supply

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 19

2 Select the appropriate cable

Are you using an isolator

Use this cable

no The 1756-CP3 cable attaches the controller directly to the controller

If you make your own cable it must be shielded and the shields must be tied to the metal shell (that surrounds the pins) on both ends of the cableYou can also use a 1747-CP3 cable (from the SLC product family) This cable has a taller right-angle connector housing than the 1756-CP3 cable

yes The 1761-CBL-AP00 cable (right-angle connector to controller) or the 1761-CBL-PM02 cable (straight connector to the controller) attaches the controller to port 2 on the 1761-NET-AIC isolator The mini-DIN connector is not commercially available so you cannot make this cable

2 RDX

3 TXD

4 DTR

COMMON

6 DSR

7 RTS

8 CTS

9

1 CD

2 RDX

3 TXD

4 DTR

COMMON

6 DSR

7 RTS

8 CTS

9

1 CD

DB-9 right-angle or straight cable end 8-pin mini-DIN cable end

Pin DB-9 end Mini-DIN end1 DCD DCD

2 RxD RxD

3 TxD TxD

4 DTR DTR

5 ground ground

6 DSR DSR

7 RTS RTS

8 CTS CTS

9 na na

1 2

34

5

6 7867

8

9

1

2

3

4

5

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

20 FlexLogix Controller System

3 Connect the appropriate cable to the serial port on the controller

Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding

4 If necessary attach the controller to the isolator

WARNING If you connect or disconnect the serial cable with power applied to this module or the serial device on the other end of the cable an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations

modem

1761-NET-AIC isolator

user-supplied modem cable

1761 cable

system enclosure

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 21

Select the Operating Mode of the Controller

1 Use this table to determine the operating mode of the controller

2 Turn the key on the front panel of the controller to select the mode

If you want to Select one of these modes

Run Program Remote

Run Program Test

turn outputs to the state commanded by the logic of the project

YES YES

turn outputs to their configured state for Program mode

YES YES YES

execute (scan) tasks YES YES YES

change the mode of the controller through software

YES YES YES

download a project YES YES

schedule a ControlNet network YES YES

while online edit the project YES YES YES YES

To select Turn the key to

Remote Run RUN and then to REM

Remote Program PROG and then to REM

Remote Test REM and then go online and select Test mode via the programming software

keyswitch

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

22 FlexLogix Controller System

Monitor the Controller LEDs

FLASH Upgrade the Controllerrsquos Firmware RevisionTo update the firmware of a controller first install a firmware upgrade kit

bull An upgrade kit ships on a supplemental CD along with RSLogix 5000 software

bull To download an upgrade kit go to httpsupportrockwellautomationcom Choose Firmware Updates

Indicator Color Description

RUN off bull no task(s) running

bull controller in Program mode

green bull one or more tasks are running

bull controller is in Run mode

OK off no power applied

red flashing after initially installing the controller - the controller requires a FLASH upgrade to the proper firmware revision see belowafter the controller is operating - recoverable fault

red bull controller faulted

bull clear faults clear memory or replace the controller

green controller OK

BATTERY off battery will support memory

red bull battery may not support memory

bull replace battery

IO off bull controller project not downloaded (the condition after power up)

bull no IO or communications configured

green communicating to all devices

green flashing one or more devices are not responding

LOCALandLOCAL2

off rail is inhibited

green communicating to all devices on that rail

green flashing one or more devices on that rail not responding

red flashing no modules exist on that rail

RS232 off no activity

green data being received or transmitted

FORCE off no forces present

amber forces present

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 23

Update the Controller

1 Connect the controller to the same network as your workstation

2 Start ControlFLASH software

3 Choose Next gt

4 Select the catalog number of the controller and choose Next gt

5 Expand the network until you see the controller If the required network is not shown first configure a driver for the network in RSLinx software

6 Select the controller and choose OK

7 Select the revision level to which you want to update the controller and choose Next gt

8 To start the update of the controller choose Finish and then Yes

After the controller is updated the status box displays Update complete

9 Choose OK

10 To close ControlFLASH software choose Cancel and then Yes

TIP RSLogix 5000 software revision 100 or later lets you update controller firmware as part of the download sequence To update the controller download your project and follow the prompts of the software

IMPORTANT If the Revision list is empty download a new upgrade kit Some older upgrade kits do not work with new controllers

42900

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

24 FlexLogix Controller System

FlexLogix Controller Approximate Mounting Dimensions

19949mm (785in)

849mm (334in) 5043mm (199in)

12197mm (481in)

18296mm (7203in)

8857mm (349in)

10596mm (417in)

10149mm (399in)

64mm (025in)

10457mm (412in)

8724mm (343in)

9296mm (366in)

8857mm (349in)

8014mm (316in)

1016mm (400in)

885mm (035in)

1853mm (730in)

135mm (053in)

825mm (033in)

60mm (024in)

6436mm (253in)

centerline of MTG Hole

centerline of DIN rail

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 25

FlexLogix Extended-Local IO Adapter Approximate Mounting Dimensions

Approximate Mounting Clearance

94mm (37in)

69mm (272in)

11712mm (461in)

8894mm (35in)

8106mm (319in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

26 FlexLogix Controller System

Other PublicationsYou can use the following manuals with this product

You can obtain manuals at wwwtheautomationbookstorecom

Specifications

Documents required for installation details Publication number

Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines 1770-41

Flex 1794-PS3 Power Supply Installation Instructions 1794-571

Flex 1794-PS13 Power Supply Installation Instructions 1794-569

Flex IO Terminal Base Installation Instructions 1794-516

1794-CE1 -CE3 Interconnect Cable Installation Instructions 1794-512

FLEX IO and FLEX Integra IO Technical Data 1794-21

Documents available for further reference Publication number

FlexLogix System User Manual 1794-UM001

Logix5000 Controllers Common Procedures Reference Manual 1756-PM001

Logix5000 Controllers General Instruction Set Reference Manual 1756-RM003

Guidelines for Handling Lithium Batteries AG-54

Category FlexLogix controller(1794-L33 -L34)

FlexLogix extended-local IO adapter (1794-FLA)

user memory 1794-L33 64 KBytes1794-L34 512 KBytes

na

input voltagerating (nominal)range

24V dc192V to 312V dc (includes 5 ac ripple)

isolation voltage(continuous-voltage withstand rating)

30V dcQualification tested to withstand 850V dc for 60 seconds

input current(1) 133A maximum at 192V dc085A maximum at 24V dc

039A maximum at 192V dc025A maximum at 24V dc

power dissipation(2) 255W maximum at 192V204W maximum at 24V dc

75W maximum at 192V60W maximum at 24V dc

backplane (FLEXBUS) current output

653mA maximum 51V dc 653mA maximum 51V dc

thermal dissipation 87BTUhour 192V 256BTUhour 192V

weight 1794-L33 71 kg (156 lbs oz)1794-L34 75 g (166 lbs)(no communication cards installed)

28 kg (62 lbs)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 27

power supply 1794-PS3 or 1794-PS13 ndash In applications that must be compliant with CSA requirements use a Separated Extra-Low Voltage (SELV) power supply that is compliant with IEC 610101 Annex H

power conductors 60deg C (140deg F) minimum copper22 to 14 AWG (0324 to 208 sq mm) stranded364 inch (12mm) insulation maximumlength 10m or less

category 3(2)

power connector torque 5 to 7 inch-pounds (06 to 08Nm)

battery 1756-BA1 (AB part number 94194801)059g lithium

na

serial cable 1761-CBLPM02 to 1761-NET-AIC 1761-CBLPA00 to 1761-NET-AIC1756-CP3 directly to controller1747-CP3 directly to controller

category 3(4)

na

extended local IO cable 1794-CE1 cable (1 foot)1794-CE3 cable (3 feet)

category 3(2)

DIN rail steel 35 x 755mm DIN railA-B part number 199-DR1 46277-3 EN 50022

operating temperature IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad Operating Cold)IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd Operating Dry Heat)IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock)0 to 60degC (32 to 140degF)

storage temperature IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab Un-packaged Non-operating Cold)IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb Un-packaged Non-operating Dry Heat)IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na Un-packaged Non-operating Thermal Shock)ndash40 to 85degC (ndash40 to 185degF)

relative humidity IEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db Un-packaged Non-operating Damp Heat)5 to 95 non-condensing

vibration(3) IEC60068-2-6 (Test Fc Operating) 5g 10-500Hz

shock(3)

operatingnon-operating

IEC60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged shock)

30g50g

emissions CISPR 11Group 1 Class A (with appropriate enclosure)

ESD immunity IEC 61000-4-26kV contact discharges8kV air discharges

Category FlexLogix controller(1794-L33 -L34)

FlexLogix extended-local IO adapter (1794-FLA)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

radiated RF immunity IEC 61000-4-310Vm with 1kHz sine-wave 80AM from 30MHz to 2000MHz10Vm with 200Hz 50 Pulse 100AM at 900Mhz

EFTB immunity IEC 61000-4-4plusmn4kV at 25kHz on power portsplusmn2kV at 5kHz on communications ports

surge transient immunity IEC 61000-4-5plusmn2kV line-earth (CM) on shielded ports

conducted RF immunity IEC 61000-4-610Vrms with 1kHz sine-wave 80AM from 150kHz to 80MHz

enclosure type rating none (open-style)

Certifications(when product is marked)

UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipmentc-UL-us UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous

Locations certified for US and CanadaCSA CSA Certified Process Control EquipmentCSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class I Division 2

Group ABCD Hazardous Locations

CE(5) European Union 89336EEC EMC Directive compliant withEN 50082-2 Industrial ImmunityEN 61326 MeasControlLab Industrial RequirementsEN 61000-6-2 Industrial ImmunityEN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions

C-Tick(5) Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant withASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions

EEx(5) European Union 949EEC ATEX Directive compliant withEN 50021 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n (Zone 2)

(1) This specification is also known as Power Consumption(2) This specification is also known as Heat Dissipation(3) To maintain these vibration and shock specifications you must use DIN rail locks(4) Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing Refer to Publication 1770-41 Industrial

Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines(5) See the Product Certification link at wwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification

details

Category FlexLogix controller(1794-L33 -L34)

FlexLogix extended-local IO adapter (1794-FLA)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004 PN 957867-01Supersedes Publication 1794-IN002F-EN-P - October 2002 Copyright copy 2004 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

  • 1794-IN002G-EN-P FlexLogix Controller System Installation Instructions
    • Tools That You Need
    • Obtain a User Manual
    • Environment and Enclosure
    • Prevent Electrostatic Discharge
    • European Hazardous Location Approval
    • North American Hazardous Location Approval
    • Removal and Insertion Under Power
    • Other Considerations
    • What You Need to Do
    • Step 1 Verify That You Have All the Components
    • Step 2 Install the Battery
    • Step 3 Install Communication Daughtercards (optional)
    • Step 4 Install the Controller
    • Step 5 Install the Extended-Local Adapter (optional)
    • Make an RS-232 Connection to the Controller
    • Select the Operating Mode of the Controller
    • Monitor the Controller LEDs
    • FLASH Upgrade the Controllerrsquos Firmware Revision
    • Update the Controller
    • FlexLogix Controller Approximate Mounting Dimensions
    • FlexLogix Extended-Local IO Adapter Approximate Mounting Dimensions
    • Approximate Mounting Clearance
    • Other Publications
    • Specifications
      • Back Cover
        • Intro

          ampLRA-QR005B-EN-E 308

          Generic pub print specs

          ampCItem Setup Sheet for Conversion Transfers
          ampLJIT-D-print SpreadsheetampCRA-QR005C-EN-EampRampD ampT

          IN RN pub type specs

          UM RM PM pub type specs

          AP PP pub type specs

          BR pub type specs

          Field definitions

          ampL04032006ampRampP
          PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
          EA = Each
          PK = Pack
          PD = Pad
          RL = Roll
          BK = Book
          CT = Carton
          BX = Box
          ST = Set
          Multiple Order Qty
          Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
          Business Group
          The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
          CorporateBusiness Development
          Finance
          Human Resources
          IT
          Logistics
          Manufacturing
          Marketing Commercial
          Marketing Europe
          Marketing Other
          Operations
          Order Services
          Other
          Process Improvement
          Procurement
          Quality
          Sales
          Max Order Quantity
          Presale items = 100
          Postsale items = 5
          NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
          Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
          Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
          Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
          BindingStitching
          For a Form (F) use
          CARBONLESS
          CUTSHEET
          ENVELOPE
          For a Book (B) use
          LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
          PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
          PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
          SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
          STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
          STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
          STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
          THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
          THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
          WIRE O Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
          Saddle-Stitch Items
          20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
          19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
          18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
          All page quantities must be divisible by 4
          Tape Bound Items
          125 sheets max on 20 no cover
          120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Perfect Bound Items
          475 sheets max on 20 no cover
          470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Double Wire Bound Items
          40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Coil Bound Items
          290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Sides Printed
          Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
          Simplex = Single-sided printing
          Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
          Number of Forms to a Sheet
          Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
          Number of Sheets Required to Print
          Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
          Paper Stock Type
          Description
          PLAIN Bond
          ACNTCVR Accent Cover
          BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
          BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
          C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
          C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
          C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
          C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
          CARD Card Stock
          CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
          CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
          COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
          CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
          CUSTOM Custom
          CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
          ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
          ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
          ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
          GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
          GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
          HOTSTEXT Hots Text
          INDEX Index
          LABEL80 80 Up Label
          MICROPRT Micro Print
          OFFSET Offset
          PART2 2 Part
          PART3 3 Part
          PART4 4 Part
          PART5 5 Part
          PART6 6 Part
          PERF 12 inch Perfed
          PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
          PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
          PREPERF Pre-Perforated
          RECYL Recycled
          SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
          SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
          SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
          TAG Tag
          TEXT Text
          TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
          TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
          TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
          TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
          VELLUM Vellum
          VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
          WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
          WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
          WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
          Paper Stock Color
          Black
          Blue
          Buff
          Canary
          Cherry
          Clear
          Cream
          Custom
          Goldrenrod
          Gray
          Green
          Ivory
          Lavender
          Manilla
          NCRPinkCanary
          NCRWhiteBlue
          NCRWhiteBlueCanary
          NCRWhiteCanary
          NCRWhiteCanaryPink
          NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
          NCRWhiteGreen
          NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
          NCRWhitePink
          NCRWhiteWhite
          Opaque
          Orange
          Orchid
          Peach
          Pink
          Purple
          Salmon
          Tan
          Violet
          White
          Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
          11 x 17
          18 x 24 Poster
          24 x 36 Poster
          3 x 5
          36 x 24 Poster
          4 x 6
          475 x 7
          475 x 775
          55 x 85
          6 x 4
          7 x 9
          7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
          85 x 11
          825 x 10875
          825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
          8375 x 10875
          9 x 12
          A4
          A5
          Other - Custom size listed below
          Drilling Locations
          1CENTER
          1LEFTTOP
          1TOPCENTER
          2LEFT
          2LEFT2TOP
          2TOP
          2TOP2LEFT
          2TOP3LEFT
          2TOP5LEFT
          2TOP5RIGHT
          3BOTTOM
          3LEFT
          3LEFT2TOP
          3LEFT3TOP
          3RIGHT
          3TOP
          3TOP5LEFT
          5BOTTOM
          5CENTER
          5LEFT
          5RIGHT
          5RIGHT2TOP
          5TOP
          For TRI fold - select Z or C type Description
          HALF Half
          C C Fold
          DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
          OFFSETZ Offset Z
          SAMPLE See Sample
          SHORT Short Fold
          V V Fold
          Z Z Fold
          Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
          Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
          77 or more pages 1
          33 to 76 pages 25
          3 to 32 pages 50
          1 or 2 pages 100
          Comments
          CoverText Stock Spine
          100 Gloss Cover If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
          100 Gloss Text
          100 Text
          10pt C1S Cover
          10pt C2S Cover
          10pt C2S Text
          10pt Text Stock
          110 White Index
          12pt C1S Cover
          20 White Opaque Bond
          50 Colored Offset
          50 White Offset
          50 White Opaque
          60 Cover Stock
          60 White Offset
          80 Gloss Cover
          80 Gloss Text
          8pt C1S White
          90 White Index
          CoverText Ink
          Black
          Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
          Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
          4 color
          4 color over black
          4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
          4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
          4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
          4 color + aqueous
          4 color + varnish
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 50 RRD must provide this information
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 RRD must provide this information
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          EA 1 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Black amp White B PERFECT PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 NA 516 3LEFT NA NA NA NA RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          1794-IN002G-EN-P FlexLogix Controller Installation Instructions EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial 19021 01232004 5 Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 4 28 7 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 55 85 NA NA NA NA NA HALF 55 x 85 100 RRD must provide this information Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black 957867-01
          Corp 17501
          Bill To 69
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information
          Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
          This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
          Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
          Generic pub print specs Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
          IN RN pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          UM RM PM pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          AP PP pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          BR pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          Field definitions Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
          Attach Print Specs to PDF
          For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
          RA-QR005C-EN-E 608
Page 11: FlexLogix Controller System - Rockwell Automation...FlexLogix Controller System 3 Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004 Environment and Enclosure Prevent Electrostatic Discharge

FlexLogix Controller System 11

Step 3 Install Communication Daughtercards (optional)

For specific information about configuring the communication card (such as setting a node address) see the installation instructions for the communication card

1 Turn off power to the controller

2 If necessary remove the blank cover from the communication slot

3 Slide the communication card into the communication slot Be sure to line up the card with the card guides in the controller

4 Record which slot you use for the communication card You need the slot number when you develop your controller application

5 Secure the card with the screws to ensure proper grounding Do not over-tighten the screws The maximum torque for the card screws is 48 to 52 inch pounds (05 to 06 Nm)

6 After the controller is installed (see page 12) connect the network cable

Removing a Communication CardIf you need to remove a communication card from the controller

1 Turn off power to the controller

2 Disconnect all cables from the communication card

3 Loosen the card screws from the communication card

4 Remove the card from the controller

5 Replace the card with a blank cover or a different communication card

WARNING If you insert or remove the card while host power is on an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in haz-ardous location installations

31032-M

slot 1slot 2

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

12 FlexLogix Controller System

Step 4 Install the Controller

1 Position the FlexLogix controller on the DIN rail at a 5deg angle and rotate the controller onto the DIN rail

2 Press the controller down onto the DIN rail until flush The locking tabs will snap into position and lock the controller onto the DIN rail

If the controller does not lock in place use a screwdriver or similar device to move the locking tabs down while pressing the controller onto the DIN rail Release the locking tabs to lock the controller in place If necessary push up on the locking tabs to lock

3 Ground the controller The DIN rail and the common conductive surface behind the DIN rail provide functional ground for the controller Use the grounding stud to meet safety ground requirements

For information about wiring and grounding see the Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41

IMPORTANT You can mount the FlexLogix controller either vertically or horizontally (as shown)

A

A

locking tabs

grounding stud

Equipment grounding conductor (ground lug with 208 sq mm [14 AWG] wire) to ground bus

nuts with captive star washer

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 13

4 Make sure power is not applied to the power supply

5 Connect the power supply to the controller The graphic below and its related instructions describe a 1794-PS13 power supply

a Connect +24V dc input to the top of the controller connector terminal A to the bottom left power connector terminal G

b Connect -24V common to top controller connector terminal B to the top left power connector terminal E

c Use connections C and D on the controller and connection F and H on the power supply to pass 24V dc power and common to the next module in the series if required

Use the screw-terminal connector plug that comes with the controller to meet the requirements for installations in Class I Division 2 locations

WARNING If you connect or disconnect wiring while the field-side power is on an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations Be sure that power is re-moved or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding

+

+

A

B

C

D

FE

HG

_

_

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

14 FlexLogix Controller System

6 Mount the IO terminal bases on the DIN rail

For information about IO terminal bases see the FLEX IO Terminal Base Installation Instructions publication 1794-IN092

7 Install the IO modules

To install an IO module see the installation instructions for that module

Removing the controllerIf you need to remove the controller follow these steps

1 Turn off power to the controller

2 Disconnect all cables from the controller

3 Remove the IO module that is adjacent to the controller

4 On the terminal base adjacent to the controller slide the FLEXBUS connector away from the controller and remove the IO terminal base

5 Remove the controller from the DIN rail

B

A

A

31036-M

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 15

Step 5 Install the Extended-Local Adapter (optional)

1 Position the 1794-FLA extended-local IO adapter on the DIN rail at a 30deg angle and rotate the adapter onto the DIN rail

2 Press the adapter down onto the DIN rail until flush The locking tab will snap into position and lock the adapter onto the DIN rail

If the adapter does not lock in place use a screwdriver or similar device to move the locking tab down while pressing the adapter onto the DIN rail Release the locking tab to lock the adapter in place If necessary push up on the locking tab to lock

3 Ground the adapter The adapter is grounded through the steel DIN rail and the common conductive surface behind the DIN rail Additionally use the grounding stud

grounding stud

Equipment grounding conductor (ground lug with 208 sq mm [14 AWG] wire) to ground bus

nuts with captive star washer

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

16 FlexLogix Controller System

4 Make sure power is not applied to the power supply Connect the power supply to the adapter This diagram and its related instructions describe a 1794-PS13 power supply

a Connect +24V dc input to the left adapter connector terminal A to the bottom left power connector terminal G

b Connect -24V common to left adapter connector terminal B to the top left power connector terminal E

c Use connections C and D on the adapter and connection F and H on the power supply to pass 24V dc power and common to the next module in the series if required

Use the screw-terminal connector plug that comes with the adapter to meet the requirements for installations in Class I Division 2 locations

5 Connect IO terminal bases and IO modules to the adapter the same way you connect them to the controller

6 Remove the plastic spacer from both ends of the extended-local IO cable (1794-CE1 or 1794-CE3)

plastic spacer

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 17

7 Connect the adapter to the controller

The following diagram shows how you can also use the 1794-CE1 -CE3 cable to split a rail of IO You can split each rail only once You can split a rail right after the controller (or adapter) or after any IO module For more information about the 1794-CE1 -CE3 cables see the Interconnect Cable Installation Instructions publication 1794-512

Removing the extended-local adapterIf you need to remove the adapter follow these steps

1 Turn off power to the adapter

2 Disconnect all cables from the adapter

3 Remove the IO module that is adjacent to the adapter

4 On the terminal base adjacent to the adapter slide the FLEXBUS connector away from the adapter and remove the IO terminal base

5 Remove the adapter from the DIN rail

31039-M

1794-CE1 or 1794-CE3 cable

LOCAL rail

LOCAL2 rail

1794-CE1 or 1794-CE3 cable

1794-CE1 or 1794-CE3 cable

1794-CE1 or 1794-CE3 cable

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

18 FlexLogix Controller System

Make an RS-232 Connection to the ControllerThe RS-232 port is a non-isolated serial port built-in to the front of the controller

To connect to the serial port

1 Determine whether you need an optical isolator

If you connect the controller to a device outside of the systemrsquos enclosure consider installing an isolator between the controller and device

One possible isolator is the 1761-NET-AIC interface converter

serial port

port 1 DB-9 RS-232 DTE

baud rate selector switch

port 2 mini-DIN 8 RS-232

dc power source selector switch

terminals for external 24V dc power supply

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 19

2 Select the appropriate cable

Are you using an isolator

Use this cable

no The 1756-CP3 cable attaches the controller directly to the controller

If you make your own cable it must be shielded and the shields must be tied to the metal shell (that surrounds the pins) on both ends of the cableYou can also use a 1747-CP3 cable (from the SLC product family) This cable has a taller right-angle connector housing than the 1756-CP3 cable

yes The 1761-CBL-AP00 cable (right-angle connector to controller) or the 1761-CBL-PM02 cable (straight connector to the controller) attaches the controller to port 2 on the 1761-NET-AIC isolator The mini-DIN connector is not commercially available so you cannot make this cable

2 RDX

3 TXD

4 DTR

COMMON

6 DSR

7 RTS

8 CTS

9

1 CD

2 RDX

3 TXD

4 DTR

COMMON

6 DSR

7 RTS

8 CTS

9

1 CD

DB-9 right-angle or straight cable end 8-pin mini-DIN cable end

Pin DB-9 end Mini-DIN end1 DCD DCD

2 RxD RxD

3 TxD TxD

4 DTR DTR

5 ground ground

6 DSR DSR

7 RTS RTS

8 CTS CTS

9 na na

1 2

34

5

6 7867

8

9

1

2

3

4

5

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

20 FlexLogix Controller System

3 Connect the appropriate cable to the serial port on the controller

Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding

4 If necessary attach the controller to the isolator

WARNING If you connect or disconnect the serial cable with power applied to this module or the serial device on the other end of the cable an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations

modem

1761-NET-AIC isolator

user-supplied modem cable

1761 cable

system enclosure

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 21

Select the Operating Mode of the Controller

1 Use this table to determine the operating mode of the controller

2 Turn the key on the front panel of the controller to select the mode

If you want to Select one of these modes

Run Program Remote

Run Program Test

turn outputs to the state commanded by the logic of the project

YES YES

turn outputs to their configured state for Program mode

YES YES YES

execute (scan) tasks YES YES YES

change the mode of the controller through software

YES YES YES

download a project YES YES

schedule a ControlNet network YES YES

while online edit the project YES YES YES YES

To select Turn the key to

Remote Run RUN and then to REM

Remote Program PROG and then to REM

Remote Test REM and then go online and select Test mode via the programming software

keyswitch

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

22 FlexLogix Controller System

Monitor the Controller LEDs

FLASH Upgrade the Controllerrsquos Firmware RevisionTo update the firmware of a controller first install a firmware upgrade kit

bull An upgrade kit ships on a supplemental CD along with RSLogix 5000 software

bull To download an upgrade kit go to httpsupportrockwellautomationcom Choose Firmware Updates

Indicator Color Description

RUN off bull no task(s) running

bull controller in Program mode

green bull one or more tasks are running

bull controller is in Run mode

OK off no power applied

red flashing after initially installing the controller - the controller requires a FLASH upgrade to the proper firmware revision see belowafter the controller is operating - recoverable fault

red bull controller faulted

bull clear faults clear memory or replace the controller

green controller OK

BATTERY off battery will support memory

red bull battery may not support memory

bull replace battery

IO off bull controller project not downloaded (the condition after power up)

bull no IO or communications configured

green communicating to all devices

green flashing one or more devices are not responding

LOCALandLOCAL2

off rail is inhibited

green communicating to all devices on that rail

green flashing one or more devices on that rail not responding

red flashing no modules exist on that rail

RS232 off no activity

green data being received or transmitted

FORCE off no forces present

amber forces present

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 23

Update the Controller

1 Connect the controller to the same network as your workstation

2 Start ControlFLASH software

3 Choose Next gt

4 Select the catalog number of the controller and choose Next gt

5 Expand the network until you see the controller If the required network is not shown first configure a driver for the network in RSLinx software

6 Select the controller and choose OK

7 Select the revision level to which you want to update the controller and choose Next gt

8 To start the update of the controller choose Finish and then Yes

After the controller is updated the status box displays Update complete

9 Choose OK

10 To close ControlFLASH software choose Cancel and then Yes

TIP RSLogix 5000 software revision 100 or later lets you update controller firmware as part of the download sequence To update the controller download your project and follow the prompts of the software

IMPORTANT If the Revision list is empty download a new upgrade kit Some older upgrade kits do not work with new controllers

42900

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

24 FlexLogix Controller System

FlexLogix Controller Approximate Mounting Dimensions

19949mm (785in)

849mm (334in) 5043mm (199in)

12197mm (481in)

18296mm (7203in)

8857mm (349in)

10596mm (417in)

10149mm (399in)

64mm (025in)

10457mm (412in)

8724mm (343in)

9296mm (366in)

8857mm (349in)

8014mm (316in)

1016mm (400in)

885mm (035in)

1853mm (730in)

135mm (053in)

825mm (033in)

60mm (024in)

6436mm (253in)

centerline of MTG Hole

centerline of DIN rail

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 25

FlexLogix Extended-Local IO Adapter Approximate Mounting Dimensions

Approximate Mounting Clearance

94mm (37in)

69mm (272in)

11712mm (461in)

8894mm (35in)

8106mm (319in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

26 FlexLogix Controller System

Other PublicationsYou can use the following manuals with this product

You can obtain manuals at wwwtheautomationbookstorecom

Specifications

Documents required for installation details Publication number

Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines 1770-41

Flex 1794-PS3 Power Supply Installation Instructions 1794-571

Flex 1794-PS13 Power Supply Installation Instructions 1794-569

Flex IO Terminal Base Installation Instructions 1794-516

1794-CE1 -CE3 Interconnect Cable Installation Instructions 1794-512

FLEX IO and FLEX Integra IO Technical Data 1794-21

Documents available for further reference Publication number

FlexLogix System User Manual 1794-UM001

Logix5000 Controllers Common Procedures Reference Manual 1756-PM001

Logix5000 Controllers General Instruction Set Reference Manual 1756-RM003

Guidelines for Handling Lithium Batteries AG-54

Category FlexLogix controller(1794-L33 -L34)

FlexLogix extended-local IO adapter (1794-FLA)

user memory 1794-L33 64 KBytes1794-L34 512 KBytes

na

input voltagerating (nominal)range

24V dc192V to 312V dc (includes 5 ac ripple)

isolation voltage(continuous-voltage withstand rating)

30V dcQualification tested to withstand 850V dc for 60 seconds

input current(1) 133A maximum at 192V dc085A maximum at 24V dc

039A maximum at 192V dc025A maximum at 24V dc

power dissipation(2) 255W maximum at 192V204W maximum at 24V dc

75W maximum at 192V60W maximum at 24V dc

backplane (FLEXBUS) current output

653mA maximum 51V dc 653mA maximum 51V dc

thermal dissipation 87BTUhour 192V 256BTUhour 192V

weight 1794-L33 71 kg (156 lbs oz)1794-L34 75 g (166 lbs)(no communication cards installed)

28 kg (62 lbs)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 27

power supply 1794-PS3 or 1794-PS13 ndash In applications that must be compliant with CSA requirements use a Separated Extra-Low Voltage (SELV) power supply that is compliant with IEC 610101 Annex H

power conductors 60deg C (140deg F) minimum copper22 to 14 AWG (0324 to 208 sq mm) stranded364 inch (12mm) insulation maximumlength 10m or less

category 3(2)

power connector torque 5 to 7 inch-pounds (06 to 08Nm)

battery 1756-BA1 (AB part number 94194801)059g lithium

na

serial cable 1761-CBLPM02 to 1761-NET-AIC 1761-CBLPA00 to 1761-NET-AIC1756-CP3 directly to controller1747-CP3 directly to controller

category 3(4)

na

extended local IO cable 1794-CE1 cable (1 foot)1794-CE3 cable (3 feet)

category 3(2)

DIN rail steel 35 x 755mm DIN railA-B part number 199-DR1 46277-3 EN 50022

operating temperature IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad Operating Cold)IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd Operating Dry Heat)IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock)0 to 60degC (32 to 140degF)

storage temperature IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab Un-packaged Non-operating Cold)IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb Un-packaged Non-operating Dry Heat)IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na Un-packaged Non-operating Thermal Shock)ndash40 to 85degC (ndash40 to 185degF)

relative humidity IEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db Un-packaged Non-operating Damp Heat)5 to 95 non-condensing

vibration(3) IEC60068-2-6 (Test Fc Operating) 5g 10-500Hz

shock(3)

operatingnon-operating

IEC60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged shock)

30g50g

emissions CISPR 11Group 1 Class A (with appropriate enclosure)

ESD immunity IEC 61000-4-26kV contact discharges8kV air discharges

Category FlexLogix controller(1794-L33 -L34)

FlexLogix extended-local IO adapter (1794-FLA)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

radiated RF immunity IEC 61000-4-310Vm with 1kHz sine-wave 80AM from 30MHz to 2000MHz10Vm with 200Hz 50 Pulse 100AM at 900Mhz

EFTB immunity IEC 61000-4-4plusmn4kV at 25kHz on power portsplusmn2kV at 5kHz on communications ports

surge transient immunity IEC 61000-4-5plusmn2kV line-earth (CM) on shielded ports

conducted RF immunity IEC 61000-4-610Vrms with 1kHz sine-wave 80AM from 150kHz to 80MHz

enclosure type rating none (open-style)

Certifications(when product is marked)

UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipmentc-UL-us UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous

Locations certified for US and CanadaCSA CSA Certified Process Control EquipmentCSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class I Division 2

Group ABCD Hazardous Locations

CE(5) European Union 89336EEC EMC Directive compliant withEN 50082-2 Industrial ImmunityEN 61326 MeasControlLab Industrial RequirementsEN 61000-6-2 Industrial ImmunityEN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions

C-Tick(5) Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant withASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions

EEx(5) European Union 949EEC ATEX Directive compliant withEN 50021 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n (Zone 2)

(1) This specification is also known as Power Consumption(2) This specification is also known as Heat Dissipation(3) To maintain these vibration and shock specifications you must use DIN rail locks(4) Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing Refer to Publication 1770-41 Industrial

Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines(5) See the Product Certification link at wwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification

details

Category FlexLogix controller(1794-L33 -L34)

FlexLogix extended-local IO adapter (1794-FLA)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004 PN 957867-01Supersedes Publication 1794-IN002F-EN-P - October 2002 Copyright copy 2004 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

  • 1794-IN002G-EN-P FlexLogix Controller System Installation Instructions
    • Tools That You Need
    • Obtain a User Manual
    • Environment and Enclosure
    • Prevent Electrostatic Discharge
    • European Hazardous Location Approval
    • North American Hazardous Location Approval
    • Removal and Insertion Under Power
    • Other Considerations
    • What You Need to Do
    • Step 1 Verify That You Have All the Components
    • Step 2 Install the Battery
    • Step 3 Install Communication Daughtercards (optional)
    • Step 4 Install the Controller
    • Step 5 Install the Extended-Local Adapter (optional)
    • Make an RS-232 Connection to the Controller
    • Select the Operating Mode of the Controller
    • Monitor the Controller LEDs
    • FLASH Upgrade the Controllerrsquos Firmware Revision
    • Update the Controller
    • FlexLogix Controller Approximate Mounting Dimensions
    • FlexLogix Extended-Local IO Adapter Approximate Mounting Dimensions
    • Approximate Mounting Clearance
    • Other Publications
    • Specifications
      • Back Cover
        • Intro

          ampLRA-QR005B-EN-E 308

          Generic pub print specs

          ampCItem Setup Sheet for Conversion Transfers
          ampLJIT-D-print SpreadsheetampCRA-QR005C-EN-EampRampD ampT

          IN RN pub type specs

          UM RM PM pub type specs

          AP PP pub type specs

          BR pub type specs

          Field definitions

          ampL04032006ampRampP
          PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
          EA = Each
          PK = Pack
          PD = Pad
          RL = Roll
          BK = Book
          CT = Carton
          BX = Box
          ST = Set
          Multiple Order Qty
          Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
          Business Group
          The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
          CorporateBusiness Development
          Finance
          Human Resources
          IT
          Logistics
          Manufacturing
          Marketing Commercial
          Marketing Europe
          Marketing Other
          Operations
          Order Services
          Other
          Process Improvement
          Procurement
          Quality
          Sales
          Max Order Quantity
          Presale items = 100
          Postsale items = 5
          NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
          Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
          Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
          Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
          BindingStitching
          For a Form (F) use
          CARBONLESS
          CUTSHEET
          ENVELOPE
          For a Book (B) use
          LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
          PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
          PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
          SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
          STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
          STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
          STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
          THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
          THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
          WIRE O Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
          Saddle-Stitch Items
          20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
          19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
          18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
          All page quantities must be divisible by 4
          Tape Bound Items
          125 sheets max on 20 no cover
          120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Perfect Bound Items
          475 sheets max on 20 no cover
          470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Double Wire Bound Items
          40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Coil Bound Items
          290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Sides Printed
          Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
          Simplex = Single-sided printing
          Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
          Number of Forms to a Sheet
          Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
          Number of Sheets Required to Print
          Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
          Paper Stock Type
          Description
          PLAIN Bond
          ACNTCVR Accent Cover
          BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
          BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
          C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
          C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
          C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
          C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
          CARD Card Stock
          CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
          CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
          COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
          CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
          CUSTOM Custom
          CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
          ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
          ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
          ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
          GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
          GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
          HOTSTEXT Hots Text
          INDEX Index
          LABEL80 80 Up Label
          MICROPRT Micro Print
          OFFSET Offset
          PART2 2 Part
          PART3 3 Part
          PART4 4 Part
          PART5 5 Part
          PART6 6 Part
          PERF 12 inch Perfed
          PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
          PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
          PREPERF Pre-Perforated
          RECYL Recycled
          SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
          SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
          SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
          TAG Tag
          TEXT Text
          TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
          TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
          TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
          TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
          VELLUM Vellum
          VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
          WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
          WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
          WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
          Paper Stock Color
          Black
          Blue
          Buff
          Canary
          Cherry
          Clear
          Cream
          Custom
          Goldrenrod
          Gray
          Green
          Ivory
          Lavender
          Manilla
          NCRPinkCanary
          NCRWhiteBlue
          NCRWhiteBlueCanary
          NCRWhiteCanary
          NCRWhiteCanaryPink
          NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
          NCRWhiteGreen
          NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
          NCRWhitePink
          NCRWhiteWhite
          Opaque
          Orange
          Orchid
          Peach
          Pink
          Purple
          Salmon
          Tan
          Violet
          White
          Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
          11 x 17
          18 x 24 Poster
          24 x 36 Poster
          3 x 5
          36 x 24 Poster
          4 x 6
          475 x 7
          475 x 775
          55 x 85
          6 x 4
          7 x 9
          7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
          85 x 11
          825 x 10875
          825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
          8375 x 10875
          9 x 12
          A4
          A5
          Other - Custom size listed below
          Drilling Locations
          1CENTER
          1LEFTTOP
          1TOPCENTER
          2LEFT
          2LEFT2TOP
          2TOP
          2TOP2LEFT
          2TOP3LEFT
          2TOP5LEFT
          2TOP5RIGHT
          3BOTTOM
          3LEFT
          3LEFT2TOP
          3LEFT3TOP
          3RIGHT
          3TOP
          3TOP5LEFT
          5BOTTOM
          5CENTER
          5LEFT
          5RIGHT
          5RIGHT2TOP
          5TOP
          For TRI fold - select Z or C type Description
          HALF Half
          C C Fold
          DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
          OFFSETZ Offset Z
          SAMPLE See Sample
          SHORT Short Fold
          V V Fold
          Z Z Fold
          Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
          Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
          77 or more pages 1
          33 to 76 pages 25
          3 to 32 pages 50
          1 or 2 pages 100
          Comments
          CoverText Stock Spine
          100 Gloss Cover If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
          100 Gloss Text
          100 Text
          10pt C1S Cover
          10pt C2S Cover
          10pt C2S Text
          10pt Text Stock
          110 White Index
          12pt C1S Cover
          20 White Opaque Bond
          50 Colored Offset
          50 White Offset
          50 White Opaque
          60 Cover Stock
          60 White Offset
          80 Gloss Cover
          80 Gloss Text
          8pt C1S White
          90 White Index
          CoverText Ink
          Black
          Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
          Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
          4 color
          4 color over black
          4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
          4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
          4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
          4 color + aqueous
          4 color + varnish
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 50 RRD must provide this information
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 RRD must provide this information
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          EA 1 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Black amp White B PERFECT PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 NA 516 3LEFT NA NA NA NA RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          1794-IN002G-EN-P FlexLogix Controller Installation Instructions EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial 19021 01232004 5 Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 4 28 7 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 55 85 NA NA NA NA NA HALF 55 x 85 100 RRD must provide this information Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black 957867-01
          Corp 17501
          Bill To 69
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information
          Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
          This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
          Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
          Generic pub print specs Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
          IN RN pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          UM RM PM pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          AP PP pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          BR pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          Field definitions Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
          Attach Print Specs to PDF
          For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
          RA-QR005C-EN-E 608
Page 12: FlexLogix Controller System - Rockwell Automation...FlexLogix Controller System 3 Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004 Environment and Enclosure Prevent Electrostatic Discharge

12 FlexLogix Controller System

Step 4 Install the Controller

1 Position the FlexLogix controller on the DIN rail at a 5deg angle and rotate the controller onto the DIN rail

2 Press the controller down onto the DIN rail until flush The locking tabs will snap into position and lock the controller onto the DIN rail

If the controller does not lock in place use a screwdriver or similar device to move the locking tabs down while pressing the controller onto the DIN rail Release the locking tabs to lock the controller in place If necessary push up on the locking tabs to lock

3 Ground the controller The DIN rail and the common conductive surface behind the DIN rail provide functional ground for the controller Use the grounding stud to meet safety ground requirements

For information about wiring and grounding see the Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770-41

IMPORTANT You can mount the FlexLogix controller either vertically or horizontally (as shown)

A

A

locking tabs

grounding stud

Equipment grounding conductor (ground lug with 208 sq mm [14 AWG] wire) to ground bus

nuts with captive star washer

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 13

4 Make sure power is not applied to the power supply

5 Connect the power supply to the controller The graphic below and its related instructions describe a 1794-PS13 power supply

a Connect +24V dc input to the top of the controller connector terminal A to the bottom left power connector terminal G

b Connect -24V common to top controller connector terminal B to the top left power connector terminal E

c Use connections C and D on the controller and connection F and H on the power supply to pass 24V dc power and common to the next module in the series if required

Use the screw-terminal connector plug that comes with the controller to meet the requirements for installations in Class I Division 2 locations

WARNING If you connect or disconnect wiring while the field-side power is on an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations Be sure that power is re-moved or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding

+

+

A

B

C

D

FE

HG

_

_

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

14 FlexLogix Controller System

6 Mount the IO terminal bases on the DIN rail

For information about IO terminal bases see the FLEX IO Terminal Base Installation Instructions publication 1794-IN092

7 Install the IO modules

To install an IO module see the installation instructions for that module

Removing the controllerIf you need to remove the controller follow these steps

1 Turn off power to the controller

2 Disconnect all cables from the controller

3 Remove the IO module that is adjacent to the controller

4 On the terminal base adjacent to the controller slide the FLEXBUS connector away from the controller and remove the IO terminal base

5 Remove the controller from the DIN rail

B

A

A

31036-M

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 15

Step 5 Install the Extended-Local Adapter (optional)

1 Position the 1794-FLA extended-local IO adapter on the DIN rail at a 30deg angle and rotate the adapter onto the DIN rail

2 Press the adapter down onto the DIN rail until flush The locking tab will snap into position and lock the adapter onto the DIN rail

If the adapter does not lock in place use a screwdriver or similar device to move the locking tab down while pressing the adapter onto the DIN rail Release the locking tab to lock the adapter in place If necessary push up on the locking tab to lock

3 Ground the adapter The adapter is grounded through the steel DIN rail and the common conductive surface behind the DIN rail Additionally use the grounding stud

grounding stud

Equipment grounding conductor (ground lug with 208 sq mm [14 AWG] wire) to ground bus

nuts with captive star washer

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

16 FlexLogix Controller System

4 Make sure power is not applied to the power supply Connect the power supply to the adapter This diagram and its related instructions describe a 1794-PS13 power supply

a Connect +24V dc input to the left adapter connector terminal A to the bottom left power connector terminal G

b Connect -24V common to left adapter connector terminal B to the top left power connector terminal E

c Use connections C and D on the adapter and connection F and H on the power supply to pass 24V dc power and common to the next module in the series if required

Use the screw-terminal connector plug that comes with the adapter to meet the requirements for installations in Class I Division 2 locations

5 Connect IO terminal bases and IO modules to the adapter the same way you connect them to the controller

6 Remove the plastic spacer from both ends of the extended-local IO cable (1794-CE1 or 1794-CE3)

plastic spacer

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 17

7 Connect the adapter to the controller

The following diagram shows how you can also use the 1794-CE1 -CE3 cable to split a rail of IO You can split each rail only once You can split a rail right after the controller (or adapter) or after any IO module For more information about the 1794-CE1 -CE3 cables see the Interconnect Cable Installation Instructions publication 1794-512

Removing the extended-local adapterIf you need to remove the adapter follow these steps

1 Turn off power to the adapter

2 Disconnect all cables from the adapter

3 Remove the IO module that is adjacent to the adapter

4 On the terminal base adjacent to the adapter slide the FLEXBUS connector away from the adapter and remove the IO terminal base

5 Remove the adapter from the DIN rail

31039-M

1794-CE1 or 1794-CE3 cable

LOCAL rail

LOCAL2 rail

1794-CE1 or 1794-CE3 cable

1794-CE1 or 1794-CE3 cable

1794-CE1 or 1794-CE3 cable

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

18 FlexLogix Controller System

Make an RS-232 Connection to the ControllerThe RS-232 port is a non-isolated serial port built-in to the front of the controller

To connect to the serial port

1 Determine whether you need an optical isolator

If you connect the controller to a device outside of the systemrsquos enclosure consider installing an isolator between the controller and device

One possible isolator is the 1761-NET-AIC interface converter

serial port

port 1 DB-9 RS-232 DTE

baud rate selector switch

port 2 mini-DIN 8 RS-232

dc power source selector switch

terminals for external 24V dc power supply

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 19

2 Select the appropriate cable

Are you using an isolator

Use this cable

no The 1756-CP3 cable attaches the controller directly to the controller

If you make your own cable it must be shielded and the shields must be tied to the metal shell (that surrounds the pins) on both ends of the cableYou can also use a 1747-CP3 cable (from the SLC product family) This cable has a taller right-angle connector housing than the 1756-CP3 cable

yes The 1761-CBL-AP00 cable (right-angle connector to controller) or the 1761-CBL-PM02 cable (straight connector to the controller) attaches the controller to port 2 on the 1761-NET-AIC isolator The mini-DIN connector is not commercially available so you cannot make this cable

2 RDX

3 TXD

4 DTR

COMMON

6 DSR

7 RTS

8 CTS

9

1 CD

2 RDX

3 TXD

4 DTR

COMMON

6 DSR

7 RTS

8 CTS

9

1 CD

DB-9 right-angle or straight cable end 8-pin mini-DIN cable end

Pin DB-9 end Mini-DIN end1 DCD DCD

2 RxD RxD

3 TxD TxD

4 DTR DTR

5 ground ground

6 DSR DSR

7 RTS RTS

8 CTS CTS

9 na na

1 2

34

5

6 7867

8

9

1

2

3

4

5

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

20 FlexLogix Controller System

3 Connect the appropriate cable to the serial port on the controller

Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding

4 If necessary attach the controller to the isolator

WARNING If you connect or disconnect the serial cable with power applied to this module or the serial device on the other end of the cable an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations

modem

1761-NET-AIC isolator

user-supplied modem cable

1761 cable

system enclosure

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 21

Select the Operating Mode of the Controller

1 Use this table to determine the operating mode of the controller

2 Turn the key on the front panel of the controller to select the mode

If you want to Select one of these modes

Run Program Remote

Run Program Test

turn outputs to the state commanded by the logic of the project

YES YES

turn outputs to their configured state for Program mode

YES YES YES

execute (scan) tasks YES YES YES

change the mode of the controller through software

YES YES YES

download a project YES YES

schedule a ControlNet network YES YES

while online edit the project YES YES YES YES

To select Turn the key to

Remote Run RUN and then to REM

Remote Program PROG and then to REM

Remote Test REM and then go online and select Test mode via the programming software

keyswitch

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

22 FlexLogix Controller System

Monitor the Controller LEDs

FLASH Upgrade the Controllerrsquos Firmware RevisionTo update the firmware of a controller first install a firmware upgrade kit

bull An upgrade kit ships on a supplemental CD along with RSLogix 5000 software

bull To download an upgrade kit go to httpsupportrockwellautomationcom Choose Firmware Updates

Indicator Color Description

RUN off bull no task(s) running

bull controller in Program mode

green bull one or more tasks are running

bull controller is in Run mode

OK off no power applied

red flashing after initially installing the controller - the controller requires a FLASH upgrade to the proper firmware revision see belowafter the controller is operating - recoverable fault

red bull controller faulted

bull clear faults clear memory or replace the controller

green controller OK

BATTERY off battery will support memory

red bull battery may not support memory

bull replace battery

IO off bull controller project not downloaded (the condition after power up)

bull no IO or communications configured

green communicating to all devices

green flashing one or more devices are not responding

LOCALandLOCAL2

off rail is inhibited

green communicating to all devices on that rail

green flashing one or more devices on that rail not responding

red flashing no modules exist on that rail

RS232 off no activity

green data being received or transmitted

FORCE off no forces present

amber forces present

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 23

Update the Controller

1 Connect the controller to the same network as your workstation

2 Start ControlFLASH software

3 Choose Next gt

4 Select the catalog number of the controller and choose Next gt

5 Expand the network until you see the controller If the required network is not shown first configure a driver for the network in RSLinx software

6 Select the controller and choose OK

7 Select the revision level to which you want to update the controller and choose Next gt

8 To start the update of the controller choose Finish and then Yes

After the controller is updated the status box displays Update complete

9 Choose OK

10 To close ControlFLASH software choose Cancel and then Yes

TIP RSLogix 5000 software revision 100 or later lets you update controller firmware as part of the download sequence To update the controller download your project and follow the prompts of the software

IMPORTANT If the Revision list is empty download a new upgrade kit Some older upgrade kits do not work with new controllers

42900

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

24 FlexLogix Controller System

FlexLogix Controller Approximate Mounting Dimensions

19949mm (785in)

849mm (334in) 5043mm (199in)

12197mm (481in)

18296mm (7203in)

8857mm (349in)

10596mm (417in)

10149mm (399in)

64mm (025in)

10457mm (412in)

8724mm (343in)

9296mm (366in)

8857mm (349in)

8014mm (316in)

1016mm (400in)

885mm (035in)

1853mm (730in)

135mm (053in)

825mm (033in)

60mm (024in)

6436mm (253in)

centerline of MTG Hole

centerline of DIN rail

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 25

FlexLogix Extended-Local IO Adapter Approximate Mounting Dimensions

Approximate Mounting Clearance

94mm (37in)

69mm (272in)

11712mm (461in)

8894mm (35in)

8106mm (319in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

26 FlexLogix Controller System

Other PublicationsYou can use the following manuals with this product

You can obtain manuals at wwwtheautomationbookstorecom

Specifications

Documents required for installation details Publication number

Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines 1770-41

Flex 1794-PS3 Power Supply Installation Instructions 1794-571

Flex 1794-PS13 Power Supply Installation Instructions 1794-569

Flex IO Terminal Base Installation Instructions 1794-516

1794-CE1 -CE3 Interconnect Cable Installation Instructions 1794-512

FLEX IO and FLEX Integra IO Technical Data 1794-21

Documents available for further reference Publication number

FlexLogix System User Manual 1794-UM001

Logix5000 Controllers Common Procedures Reference Manual 1756-PM001

Logix5000 Controllers General Instruction Set Reference Manual 1756-RM003

Guidelines for Handling Lithium Batteries AG-54

Category FlexLogix controller(1794-L33 -L34)

FlexLogix extended-local IO adapter (1794-FLA)

user memory 1794-L33 64 KBytes1794-L34 512 KBytes

na

input voltagerating (nominal)range

24V dc192V to 312V dc (includes 5 ac ripple)

isolation voltage(continuous-voltage withstand rating)

30V dcQualification tested to withstand 850V dc for 60 seconds

input current(1) 133A maximum at 192V dc085A maximum at 24V dc

039A maximum at 192V dc025A maximum at 24V dc

power dissipation(2) 255W maximum at 192V204W maximum at 24V dc

75W maximum at 192V60W maximum at 24V dc

backplane (FLEXBUS) current output

653mA maximum 51V dc 653mA maximum 51V dc

thermal dissipation 87BTUhour 192V 256BTUhour 192V

weight 1794-L33 71 kg (156 lbs oz)1794-L34 75 g (166 lbs)(no communication cards installed)

28 kg (62 lbs)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 27

power supply 1794-PS3 or 1794-PS13 ndash In applications that must be compliant with CSA requirements use a Separated Extra-Low Voltage (SELV) power supply that is compliant with IEC 610101 Annex H

power conductors 60deg C (140deg F) minimum copper22 to 14 AWG (0324 to 208 sq mm) stranded364 inch (12mm) insulation maximumlength 10m or less

category 3(2)

power connector torque 5 to 7 inch-pounds (06 to 08Nm)

battery 1756-BA1 (AB part number 94194801)059g lithium

na

serial cable 1761-CBLPM02 to 1761-NET-AIC 1761-CBLPA00 to 1761-NET-AIC1756-CP3 directly to controller1747-CP3 directly to controller

category 3(4)

na

extended local IO cable 1794-CE1 cable (1 foot)1794-CE3 cable (3 feet)

category 3(2)

DIN rail steel 35 x 755mm DIN railA-B part number 199-DR1 46277-3 EN 50022

operating temperature IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad Operating Cold)IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd Operating Dry Heat)IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock)0 to 60degC (32 to 140degF)

storage temperature IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab Un-packaged Non-operating Cold)IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb Un-packaged Non-operating Dry Heat)IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na Un-packaged Non-operating Thermal Shock)ndash40 to 85degC (ndash40 to 185degF)

relative humidity IEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db Un-packaged Non-operating Damp Heat)5 to 95 non-condensing

vibration(3) IEC60068-2-6 (Test Fc Operating) 5g 10-500Hz

shock(3)

operatingnon-operating

IEC60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged shock)

30g50g

emissions CISPR 11Group 1 Class A (with appropriate enclosure)

ESD immunity IEC 61000-4-26kV contact discharges8kV air discharges

Category FlexLogix controller(1794-L33 -L34)

FlexLogix extended-local IO adapter (1794-FLA)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

radiated RF immunity IEC 61000-4-310Vm with 1kHz sine-wave 80AM from 30MHz to 2000MHz10Vm with 200Hz 50 Pulse 100AM at 900Mhz

EFTB immunity IEC 61000-4-4plusmn4kV at 25kHz on power portsplusmn2kV at 5kHz on communications ports

surge transient immunity IEC 61000-4-5plusmn2kV line-earth (CM) on shielded ports

conducted RF immunity IEC 61000-4-610Vrms with 1kHz sine-wave 80AM from 150kHz to 80MHz

enclosure type rating none (open-style)

Certifications(when product is marked)

UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipmentc-UL-us UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous

Locations certified for US and CanadaCSA CSA Certified Process Control EquipmentCSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class I Division 2

Group ABCD Hazardous Locations

CE(5) European Union 89336EEC EMC Directive compliant withEN 50082-2 Industrial ImmunityEN 61326 MeasControlLab Industrial RequirementsEN 61000-6-2 Industrial ImmunityEN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions

C-Tick(5) Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant withASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions

EEx(5) European Union 949EEC ATEX Directive compliant withEN 50021 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n (Zone 2)

(1) This specification is also known as Power Consumption(2) This specification is also known as Heat Dissipation(3) To maintain these vibration and shock specifications you must use DIN rail locks(4) Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing Refer to Publication 1770-41 Industrial

Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines(5) See the Product Certification link at wwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification

details

Category FlexLogix controller(1794-L33 -L34)

FlexLogix extended-local IO adapter (1794-FLA)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004 PN 957867-01Supersedes Publication 1794-IN002F-EN-P - October 2002 Copyright copy 2004 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

  • 1794-IN002G-EN-P FlexLogix Controller System Installation Instructions
    • Tools That You Need
    • Obtain a User Manual
    • Environment and Enclosure
    • Prevent Electrostatic Discharge
    • European Hazardous Location Approval
    • North American Hazardous Location Approval
    • Removal and Insertion Under Power
    • Other Considerations
    • What You Need to Do
    • Step 1 Verify That You Have All the Components
    • Step 2 Install the Battery
    • Step 3 Install Communication Daughtercards (optional)
    • Step 4 Install the Controller
    • Step 5 Install the Extended-Local Adapter (optional)
    • Make an RS-232 Connection to the Controller
    • Select the Operating Mode of the Controller
    • Monitor the Controller LEDs
    • FLASH Upgrade the Controllerrsquos Firmware Revision
    • Update the Controller
    • FlexLogix Controller Approximate Mounting Dimensions
    • FlexLogix Extended-Local IO Adapter Approximate Mounting Dimensions
    • Approximate Mounting Clearance
    • Other Publications
    • Specifications
      • Back Cover
        • Intro

          ampLRA-QR005B-EN-E 308

          Generic pub print specs

          ampCItem Setup Sheet for Conversion Transfers
          ampLJIT-D-print SpreadsheetampCRA-QR005C-EN-EampRampD ampT

          IN RN pub type specs

          UM RM PM pub type specs

          AP PP pub type specs

          BR pub type specs

          Field definitions

          ampL04032006ampRampP
          PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
          EA = Each
          PK = Pack
          PD = Pad
          RL = Roll
          BK = Book
          CT = Carton
          BX = Box
          ST = Set
          Multiple Order Qty
          Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
          Business Group
          The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
          CorporateBusiness Development
          Finance
          Human Resources
          IT
          Logistics
          Manufacturing
          Marketing Commercial
          Marketing Europe
          Marketing Other
          Operations
          Order Services
          Other
          Process Improvement
          Procurement
          Quality
          Sales
          Max Order Quantity
          Presale items = 100
          Postsale items = 5
          NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
          Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
          Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
          Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
          BindingStitching
          For a Form (F) use
          CARBONLESS
          CUTSHEET
          ENVELOPE
          For a Book (B) use
          LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
          PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
          PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
          SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
          STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
          STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
          STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
          THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
          THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
          WIRE O Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
          Saddle-Stitch Items
          20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
          19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
          18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
          All page quantities must be divisible by 4
          Tape Bound Items
          125 sheets max on 20 no cover
          120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Perfect Bound Items
          475 sheets max on 20 no cover
          470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Double Wire Bound Items
          40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Coil Bound Items
          290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Sides Printed
          Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
          Simplex = Single-sided printing
          Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
          Number of Forms to a Sheet
          Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
          Number of Sheets Required to Print
          Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
          Paper Stock Type
          Description
          PLAIN Bond
          ACNTCVR Accent Cover
          BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
          BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
          C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
          C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
          C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
          C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
          CARD Card Stock
          CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
          CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
          COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
          CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
          CUSTOM Custom
          CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
          ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
          ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
          ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
          GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
          GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
          HOTSTEXT Hots Text
          INDEX Index
          LABEL80 80 Up Label
          MICROPRT Micro Print
          OFFSET Offset
          PART2 2 Part
          PART3 3 Part
          PART4 4 Part
          PART5 5 Part
          PART6 6 Part
          PERF 12 inch Perfed
          PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
          PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
          PREPERF Pre-Perforated
          RECYL Recycled
          SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
          SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
          SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
          TAG Tag
          TEXT Text
          TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
          TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
          TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
          TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
          VELLUM Vellum
          VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
          WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
          WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
          WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
          Paper Stock Color
          Black
          Blue
          Buff
          Canary
          Cherry
          Clear
          Cream
          Custom
          Goldrenrod
          Gray
          Green
          Ivory
          Lavender
          Manilla
          NCRPinkCanary
          NCRWhiteBlue
          NCRWhiteBlueCanary
          NCRWhiteCanary
          NCRWhiteCanaryPink
          NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
          NCRWhiteGreen
          NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
          NCRWhitePink
          NCRWhiteWhite
          Opaque
          Orange
          Orchid
          Peach
          Pink
          Purple
          Salmon
          Tan
          Violet
          White
          Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
          11 x 17
          18 x 24 Poster
          24 x 36 Poster
          3 x 5
          36 x 24 Poster
          4 x 6
          475 x 7
          475 x 775
          55 x 85
          6 x 4
          7 x 9
          7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
          85 x 11
          825 x 10875
          825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
          8375 x 10875
          9 x 12
          A4
          A5
          Other - Custom size listed below
          Drilling Locations
          1CENTER
          1LEFTTOP
          1TOPCENTER
          2LEFT
          2LEFT2TOP
          2TOP
          2TOP2LEFT
          2TOP3LEFT
          2TOP5LEFT
          2TOP5RIGHT
          3BOTTOM
          3LEFT
          3LEFT2TOP
          3LEFT3TOP
          3RIGHT
          3TOP
          3TOP5LEFT
          5BOTTOM
          5CENTER
          5LEFT
          5RIGHT
          5RIGHT2TOP
          5TOP
          For TRI fold - select Z or C type Description
          HALF Half
          C C Fold
          DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
          OFFSETZ Offset Z
          SAMPLE See Sample
          SHORT Short Fold
          V V Fold
          Z Z Fold
          Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
          Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
          77 or more pages 1
          33 to 76 pages 25
          3 to 32 pages 50
          1 or 2 pages 100
          Comments
          CoverText Stock Spine
          100 Gloss Cover If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
          100 Gloss Text
          100 Text
          10pt C1S Cover
          10pt C2S Cover
          10pt C2S Text
          10pt Text Stock
          110 White Index
          12pt C1S Cover
          20 White Opaque Bond
          50 Colored Offset
          50 White Offset
          50 White Opaque
          60 Cover Stock
          60 White Offset
          80 Gloss Cover
          80 Gloss Text
          8pt C1S White
          90 White Index
          CoverText Ink
          Black
          Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
          Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
          4 color
          4 color over black
          4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
          4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
          4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
          4 color + aqueous
          4 color + varnish
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 50 RRD must provide this information
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 RRD must provide this information
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          EA 1 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Black amp White B PERFECT PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 NA 516 3LEFT NA NA NA NA RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          1794-IN002G-EN-P FlexLogix Controller Installation Instructions EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial 19021 01232004 5 Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 4 28 7 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 55 85 NA NA NA NA NA HALF 55 x 85 100 RRD must provide this information Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black 957867-01
          Corp 17501
          Bill To 69
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information
          Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
          This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
          Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
          Generic pub print specs Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
          IN RN pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          UM RM PM pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          AP PP pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          BR pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          Field definitions Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
          Attach Print Specs to PDF
          For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
          RA-QR005C-EN-E 608
Page 13: FlexLogix Controller System - Rockwell Automation...FlexLogix Controller System 3 Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004 Environment and Enclosure Prevent Electrostatic Discharge

FlexLogix Controller System 13

4 Make sure power is not applied to the power supply

5 Connect the power supply to the controller The graphic below and its related instructions describe a 1794-PS13 power supply

a Connect +24V dc input to the top of the controller connector terminal A to the bottom left power connector terminal G

b Connect -24V common to top controller connector terminal B to the top left power connector terminal E

c Use connections C and D on the controller and connection F and H on the power supply to pass 24V dc power and common to the next module in the series if required

Use the screw-terminal connector plug that comes with the controller to meet the requirements for installations in Class I Division 2 locations

WARNING If you connect or disconnect wiring while the field-side power is on an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations Be sure that power is re-moved or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding

+

+

A

B

C

D

FE

HG

_

_

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

14 FlexLogix Controller System

6 Mount the IO terminal bases on the DIN rail

For information about IO terminal bases see the FLEX IO Terminal Base Installation Instructions publication 1794-IN092

7 Install the IO modules

To install an IO module see the installation instructions for that module

Removing the controllerIf you need to remove the controller follow these steps

1 Turn off power to the controller

2 Disconnect all cables from the controller

3 Remove the IO module that is adjacent to the controller

4 On the terminal base adjacent to the controller slide the FLEXBUS connector away from the controller and remove the IO terminal base

5 Remove the controller from the DIN rail

B

A

A

31036-M

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 15

Step 5 Install the Extended-Local Adapter (optional)

1 Position the 1794-FLA extended-local IO adapter on the DIN rail at a 30deg angle and rotate the adapter onto the DIN rail

2 Press the adapter down onto the DIN rail until flush The locking tab will snap into position and lock the adapter onto the DIN rail

If the adapter does not lock in place use a screwdriver or similar device to move the locking tab down while pressing the adapter onto the DIN rail Release the locking tab to lock the adapter in place If necessary push up on the locking tab to lock

3 Ground the adapter The adapter is grounded through the steel DIN rail and the common conductive surface behind the DIN rail Additionally use the grounding stud

grounding stud

Equipment grounding conductor (ground lug with 208 sq mm [14 AWG] wire) to ground bus

nuts with captive star washer

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

16 FlexLogix Controller System

4 Make sure power is not applied to the power supply Connect the power supply to the adapter This diagram and its related instructions describe a 1794-PS13 power supply

a Connect +24V dc input to the left adapter connector terminal A to the bottom left power connector terminal G

b Connect -24V common to left adapter connector terminal B to the top left power connector terminal E

c Use connections C and D on the adapter and connection F and H on the power supply to pass 24V dc power and common to the next module in the series if required

Use the screw-terminal connector plug that comes with the adapter to meet the requirements for installations in Class I Division 2 locations

5 Connect IO terminal bases and IO modules to the adapter the same way you connect them to the controller

6 Remove the plastic spacer from both ends of the extended-local IO cable (1794-CE1 or 1794-CE3)

plastic spacer

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 17

7 Connect the adapter to the controller

The following diagram shows how you can also use the 1794-CE1 -CE3 cable to split a rail of IO You can split each rail only once You can split a rail right after the controller (or adapter) or after any IO module For more information about the 1794-CE1 -CE3 cables see the Interconnect Cable Installation Instructions publication 1794-512

Removing the extended-local adapterIf you need to remove the adapter follow these steps

1 Turn off power to the adapter

2 Disconnect all cables from the adapter

3 Remove the IO module that is adjacent to the adapter

4 On the terminal base adjacent to the adapter slide the FLEXBUS connector away from the adapter and remove the IO terminal base

5 Remove the adapter from the DIN rail

31039-M

1794-CE1 or 1794-CE3 cable

LOCAL rail

LOCAL2 rail

1794-CE1 or 1794-CE3 cable

1794-CE1 or 1794-CE3 cable

1794-CE1 or 1794-CE3 cable

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

18 FlexLogix Controller System

Make an RS-232 Connection to the ControllerThe RS-232 port is a non-isolated serial port built-in to the front of the controller

To connect to the serial port

1 Determine whether you need an optical isolator

If you connect the controller to a device outside of the systemrsquos enclosure consider installing an isolator between the controller and device

One possible isolator is the 1761-NET-AIC interface converter

serial port

port 1 DB-9 RS-232 DTE

baud rate selector switch

port 2 mini-DIN 8 RS-232

dc power source selector switch

terminals for external 24V dc power supply

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 19

2 Select the appropriate cable

Are you using an isolator

Use this cable

no The 1756-CP3 cable attaches the controller directly to the controller

If you make your own cable it must be shielded and the shields must be tied to the metal shell (that surrounds the pins) on both ends of the cableYou can also use a 1747-CP3 cable (from the SLC product family) This cable has a taller right-angle connector housing than the 1756-CP3 cable

yes The 1761-CBL-AP00 cable (right-angle connector to controller) or the 1761-CBL-PM02 cable (straight connector to the controller) attaches the controller to port 2 on the 1761-NET-AIC isolator The mini-DIN connector is not commercially available so you cannot make this cable

2 RDX

3 TXD

4 DTR

COMMON

6 DSR

7 RTS

8 CTS

9

1 CD

2 RDX

3 TXD

4 DTR

COMMON

6 DSR

7 RTS

8 CTS

9

1 CD

DB-9 right-angle or straight cable end 8-pin mini-DIN cable end

Pin DB-9 end Mini-DIN end1 DCD DCD

2 RxD RxD

3 TxD TxD

4 DTR DTR

5 ground ground

6 DSR DSR

7 RTS RTS

8 CTS CTS

9 na na

1 2

34

5

6 7867

8

9

1

2

3

4

5

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

20 FlexLogix Controller System

3 Connect the appropriate cable to the serial port on the controller

Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding

4 If necessary attach the controller to the isolator

WARNING If you connect or disconnect the serial cable with power applied to this module or the serial device on the other end of the cable an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations

modem

1761-NET-AIC isolator

user-supplied modem cable

1761 cable

system enclosure

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 21

Select the Operating Mode of the Controller

1 Use this table to determine the operating mode of the controller

2 Turn the key on the front panel of the controller to select the mode

If you want to Select one of these modes

Run Program Remote

Run Program Test

turn outputs to the state commanded by the logic of the project

YES YES

turn outputs to their configured state for Program mode

YES YES YES

execute (scan) tasks YES YES YES

change the mode of the controller through software

YES YES YES

download a project YES YES

schedule a ControlNet network YES YES

while online edit the project YES YES YES YES

To select Turn the key to

Remote Run RUN and then to REM

Remote Program PROG and then to REM

Remote Test REM and then go online and select Test mode via the programming software

keyswitch

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

22 FlexLogix Controller System

Monitor the Controller LEDs

FLASH Upgrade the Controllerrsquos Firmware RevisionTo update the firmware of a controller first install a firmware upgrade kit

bull An upgrade kit ships on a supplemental CD along with RSLogix 5000 software

bull To download an upgrade kit go to httpsupportrockwellautomationcom Choose Firmware Updates

Indicator Color Description

RUN off bull no task(s) running

bull controller in Program mode

green bull one or more tasks are running

bull controller is in Run mode

OK off no power applied

red flashing after initially installing the controller - the controller requires a FLASH upgrade to the proper firmware revision see belowafter the controller is operating - recoverable fault

red bull controller faulted

bull clear faults clear memory or replace the controller

green controller OK

BATTERY off battery will support memory

red bull battery may not support memory

bull replace battery

IO off bull controller project not downloaded (the condition after power up)

bull no IO or communications configured

green communicating to all devices

green flashing one or more devices are not responding

LOCALandLOCAL2

off rail is inhibited

green communicating to all devices on that rail

green flashing one or more devices on that rail not responding

red flashing no modules exist on that rail

RS232 off no activity

green data being received or transmitted

FORCE off no forces present

amber forces present

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 23

Update the Controller

1 Connect the controller to the same network as your workstation

2 Start ControlFLASH software

3 Choose Next gt

4 Select the catalog number of the controller and choose Next gt

5 Expand the network until you see the controller If the required network is not shown first configure a driver for the network in RSLinx software

6 Select the controller and choose OK

7 Select the revision level to which you want to update the controller and choose Next gt

8 To start the update of the controller choose Finish and then Yes

After the controller is updated the status box displays Update complete

9 Choose OK

10 To close ControlFLASH software choose Cancel and then Yes

TIP RSLogix 5000 software revision 100 or later lets you update controller firmware as part of the download sequence To update the controller download your project and follow the prompts of the software

IMPORTANT If the Revision list is empty download a new upgrade kit Some older upgrade kits do not work with new controllers

42900

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

24 FlexLogix Controller System

FlexLogix Controller Approximate Mounting Dimensions

19949mm (785in)

849mm (334in) 5043mm (199in)

12197mm (481in)

18296mm (7203in)

8857mm (349in)

10596mm (417in)

10149mm (399in)

64mm (025in)

10457mm (412in)

8724mm (343in)

9296mm (366in)

8857mm (349in)

8014mm (316in)

1016mm (400in)

885mm (035in)

1853mm (730in)

135mm (053in)

825mm (033in)

60mm (024in)

6436mm (253in)

centerline of MTG Hole

centerline of DIN rail

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 25

FlexLogix Extended-Local IO Adapter Approximate Mounting Dimensions

Approximate Mounting Clearance

94mm (37in)

69mm (272in)

11712mm (461in)

8894mm (35in)

8106mm (319in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

26 FlexLogix Controller System

Other PublicationsYou can use the following manuals with this product

You can obtain manuals at wwwtheautomationbookstorecom

Specifications

Documents required for installation details Publication number

Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines 1770-41

Flex 1794-PS3 Power Supply Installation Instructions 1794-571

Flex 1794-PS13 Power Supply Installation Instructions 1794-569

Flex IO Terminal Base Installation Instructions 1794-516

1794-CE1 -CE3 Interconnect Cable Installation Instructions 1794-512

FLEX IO and FLEX Integra IO Technical Data 1794-21

Documents available for further reference Publication number

FlexLogix System User Manual 1794-UM001

Logix5000 Controllers Common Procedures Reference Manual 1756-PM001

Logix5000 Controllers General Instruction Set Reference Manual 1756-RM003

Guidelines for Handling Lithium Batteries AG-54

Category FlexLogix controller(1794-L33 -L34)

FlexLogix extended-local IO adapter (1794-FLA)

user memory 1794-L33 64 KBytes1794-L34 512 KBytes

na

input voltagerating (nominal)range

24V dc192V to 312V dc (includes 5 ac ripple)

isolation voltage(continuous-voltage withstand rating)

30V dcQualification tested to withstand 850V dc for 60 seconds

input current(1) 133A maximum at 192V dc085A maximum at 24V dc

039A maximum at 192V dc025A maximum at 24V dc

power dissipation(2) 255W maximum at 192V204W maximum at 24V dc

75W maximum at 192V60W maximum at 24V dc

backplane (FLEXBUS) current output

653mA maximum 51V dc 653mA maximum 51V dc

thermal dissipation 87BTUhour 192V 256BTUhour 192V

weight 1794-L33 71 kg (156 lbs oz)1794-L34 75 g (166 lbs)(no communication cards installed)

28 kg (62 lbs)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 27

power supply 1794-PS3 or 1794-PS13 ndash In applications that must be compliant with CSA requirements use a Separated Extra-Low Voltage (SELV) power supply that is compliant with IEC 610101 Annex H

power conductors 60deg C (140deg F) minimum copper22 to 14 AWG (0324 to 208 sq mm) stranded364 inch (12mm) insulation maximumlength 10m or less

category 3(2)

power connector torque 5 to 7 inch-pounds (06 to 08Nm)

battery 1756-BA1 (AB part number 94194801)059g lithium

na

serial cable 1761-CBLPM02 to 1761-NET-AIC 1761-CBLPA00 to 1761-NET-AIC1756-CP3 directly to controller1747-CP3 directly to controller

category 3(4)

na

extended local IO cable 1794-CE1 cable (1 foot)1794-CE3 cable (3 feet)

category 3(2)

DIN rail steel 35 x 755mm DIN railA-B part number 199-DR1 46277-3 EN 50022

operating temperature IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad Operating Cold)IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd Operating Dry Heat)IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock)0 to 60degC (32 to 140degF)

storage temperature IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab Un-packaged Non-operating Cold)IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb Un-packaged Non-operating Dry Heat)IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na Un-packaged Non-operating Thermal Shock)ndash40 to 85degC (ndash40 to 185degF)

relative humidity IEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db Un-packaged Non-operating Damp Heat)5 to 95 non-condensing

vibration(3) IEC60068-2-6 (Test Fc Operating) 5g 10-500Hz

shock(3)

operatingnon-operating

IEC60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged shock)

30g50g

emissions CISPR 11Group 1 Class A (with appropriate enclosure)

ESD immunity IEC 61000-4-26kV contact discharges8kV air discharges

Category FlexLogix controller(1794-L33 -L34)

FlexLogix extended-local IO adapter (1794-FLA)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

radiated RF immunity IEC 61000-4-310Vm with 1kHz sine-wave 80AM from 30MHz to 2000MHz10Vm with 200Hz 50 Pulse 100AM at 900Mhz

EFTB immunity IEC 61000-4-4plusmn4kV at 25kHz on power portsplusmn2kV at 5kHz on communications ports

surge transient immunity IEC 61000-4-5plusmn2kV line-earth (CM) on shielded ports

conducted RF immunity IEC 61000-4-610Vrms with 1kHz sine-wave 80AM from 150kHz to 80MHz

enclosure type rating none (open-style)

Certifications(when product is marked)

UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipmentc-UL-us UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous

Locations certified for US and CanadaCSA CSA Certified Process Control EquipmentCSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class I Division 2

Group ABCD Hazardous Locations

CE(5) European Union 89336EEC EMC Directive compliant withEN 50082-2 Industrial ImmunityEN 61326 MeasControlLab Industrial RequirementsEN 61000-6-2 Industrial ImmunityEN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions

C-Tick(5) Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant withASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions

EEx(5) European Union 949EEC ATEX Directive compliant withEN 50021 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n (Zone 2)

(1) This specification is also known as Power Consumption(2) This specification is also known as Heat Dissipation(3) To maintain these vibration and shock specifications you must use DIN rail locks(4) Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing Refer to Publication 1770-41 Industrial

Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines(5) See the Product Certification link at wwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification

details

Category FlexLogix controller(1794-L33 -L34)

FlexLogix extended-local IO adapter (1794-FLA)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004 PN 957867-01Supersedes Publication 1794-IN002F-EN-P - October 2002 Copyright copy 2004 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

  • 1794-IN002G-EN-P FlexLogix Controller System Installation Instructions
    • Tools That You Need
    • Obtain a User Manual
    • Environment and Enclosure
    • Prevent Electrostatic Discharge
    • European Hazardous Location Approval
    • North American Hazardous Location Approval
    • Removal and Insertion Under Power
    • Other Considerations
    • What You Need to Do
    • Step 1 Verify That You Have All the Components
    • Step 2 Install the Battery
    • Step 3 Install Communication Daughtercards (optional)
    • Step 4 Install the Controller
    • Step 5 Install the Extended-Local Adapter (optional)
    • Make an RS-232 Connection to the Controller
    • Select the Operating Mode of the Controller
    • Monitor the Controller LEDs
    • FLASH Upgrade the Controllerrsquos Firmware Revision
    • Update the Controller
    • FlexLogix Controller Approximate Mounting Dimensions
    • FlexLogix Extended-Local IO Adapter Approximate Mounting Dimensions
    • Approximate Mounting Clearance
    • Other Publications
    • Specifications
      • Back Cover
        • Intro

          ampLRA-QR005B-EN-E 308

          Generic pub print specs

          ampCItem Setup Sheet for Conversion Transfers
          ampLJIT-D-print SpreadsheetampCRA-QR005C-EN-EampRampD ampT

          IN RN pub type specs

          UM RM PM pub type specs

          AP PP pub type specs

          BR pub type specs

          Field definitions

          ampL04032006ampRampP
          PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
          EA = Each
          PK = Pack
          PD = Pad
          RL = Roll
          BK = Book
          CT = Carton
          BX = Box
          ST = Set
          Multiple Order Qty
          Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
          Business Group
          The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
          CorporateBusiness Development
          Finance
          Human Resources
          IT
          Logistics
          Manufacturing
          Marketing Commercial
          Marketing Europe
          Marketing Other
          Operations
          Order Services
          Other
          Process Improvement
          Procurement
          Quality
          Sales
          Max Order Quantity
          Presale items = 100
          Postsale items = 5
          NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
          Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
          Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
          Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
          BindingStitching
          For a Form (F) use
          CARBONLESS
          CUTSHEET
          ENVELOPE
          For a Book (B) use
          LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
          PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
          PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
          SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
          STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
          STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
          STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
          THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
          THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
          WIRE O Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
          Saddle-Stitch Items
          20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
          19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
          18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
          All page quantities must be divisible by 4
          Tape Bound Items
          125 sheets max on 20 no cover
          120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Perfect Bound Items
          475 sheets max on 20 no cover
          470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Double Wire Bound Items
          40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Coil Bound Items
          290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Sides Printed
          Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
          Simplex = Single-sided printing
          Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
          Number of Forms to a Sheet
          Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
          Number of Sheets Required to Print
          Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
          Paper Stock Type
          Description
          PLAIN Bond
          ACNTCVR Accent Cover
          BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
          BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
          C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
          C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
          C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
          C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
          CARD Card Stock
          CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
          CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
          COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
          CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
          CUSTOM Custom
          CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
          ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
          ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
          ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
          GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
          GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
          HOTSTEXT Hots Text
          INDEX Index
          LABEL80 80 Up Label
          MICROPRT Micro Print
          OFFSET Offset
          PART2 2 Part
          PART3 3 Part
          PART4 4 Part
          PART5 5 Part
          PART6 6 Part
          PERF 12 inch Perfed
          PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
          PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
          PREPERF Pre-Perforated
          RECYL Recycled
          SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
          SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
          SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
          TAG Tag
          TEXT Text
          TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
          TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
          TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
          TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
          VELLUM Vellum
          VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
          WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
          WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
          WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
          Paper Stock Color
          Black
          Blue
          Buff
          Canary
          Cherry
          Clear
          Cream
          Custom
          Goldrenrod
          Gray
          Green
          Ivory
          Lavender
          Manilla
          NCRPinkCanary
          NCRWhiteBlue
          NCRWhiteBlueCanary
          NCRWhiteCanary
          NCRWhiteCanaryPink
          NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
          NCRWhiteGreen
          NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
          NCRWhitePink
          NCRWhiteWhite
          Opaque
          Orange
          Orchid
          Peach
          Pink
          Purple
          Salmon
          Tan
          Violet
          White
          Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
          11 x 17
          18 x 24 Poster
          24 x 36 Poster
          3 x 5
          36 x 24 Poster
          4 x 6
          475 x 7
          475 x 775
          55 x 85
          6 x 4
          7 x 9
          7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
          85 x 11
          825 x 10875
          825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
          8375 x 10875
          9 x 12
          A4
          A5
          Other - Custom size listed below
          Drilling Locations
          1CENTER
          1LEFTTOP
          1TOPCENTER
          2LEFT
          2LEFT2TOP
          2TOP
          2TOP2LEFT
          2TOP3LEFT
          2TOP5LEFT
          2TOP5RIGHT
          3BOTTOM
          3LEFT
          3LEFT2TOP
          3LEFT3TOP
          3RIGHT
          3TOP
          3TOP5LEFT
          5BOTTOM
          5CENTER
          5LEFT
          5RIGHT
          5RIGHT2TOP
          5TOP
          For TRI fold - select Z or C type Description
          HALF Half
          C C Fold
          DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
          OFFSETZ Offset Z
          SAMPLE See Sample
          SHORT Short Fold
          V V Fold
          Z Z Fold
          Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
          Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
          77 or more pages 1
          33 to 76 pages 25
          3 to 32 pages 50
          1 or 2 pages 100
          Comments
          CoverText Stock Spine
          100 Gloss Cover If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
          100 Gloss Text
          100 Text
          10pt C1S Cover
          10pt C2S Cover
          10pt C2S Text
          10pt Text Stock
          110 White Index
          12pt C1S Cover
          20 White Opaque Bond
          50 Colored Offset
          50 White Offset
          50 White Opaque
          60 Cover Stock
          60 White Offset
          80 Gloss Cover
          80 Gloss Text
          8pt C1S White
          90 White Index
          CoverText Ink
          Black
          Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
          Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
          4 color
          4 color over black
          4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
          4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
          4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
          4 color + aqueous
          4 color + varnish
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 50 RRD must provide this information
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 RRD must provide this information
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          EA 1 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Black amp White B PERFECT PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 NA 516 3LEFT NA NA NA NA RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          1794-IN002G-EN-P FlexLogix Controller Installation Instructions EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial 19021 01232004 5 Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 4 28 7 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 55 85 NA NA NA NA NA HALF 55 x 85 100 RRD must provide this information Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black 957867-01
          Corp 17501
          Bill To 69
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information
          Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
          This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
          Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
          Generic pub print specs Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
          IN RN pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          UM RM PM pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          AP PP pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          BR pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          Field definitions Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
          Attach Print Specs to PDF
          For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
          RA-QR005C-EN-E 608
Page 14: FlexLogix Controller System - Rockwell Automation...FlexLogix Controller System 3 Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004 Environment and Enclosure Prevent Electrostatic Discharge

14 FlexLogix Controller System

6 Mount the IO terminal bases on the DIN rail

For information about IO terminal bases see the FLEX IO Terminal Base Installation Instructions publication 1794-IN092

7 Install the IO modules

To install an IO module see the installation instructions for that module

Removing the controllerIf you need to remove the controller follow these steps

1 Turn off power to the controller

2 Disconnect all cables from the controller

3 Remove the IO module that is adjacent to the controller

4 On the terminal base adjacent to the controller slide the FLEXBUS connector away from the controller and remove the IO terminal base

5 Remove the controller from the DIN rail

B

A

A

31036-M

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 15

Step 5 Install the Extended-Local Adapter (optional)

1 Position the 1794-FLA extended-local IO adapter on the DIN rail at a 30deg angle and rotate the adapter onto the DIN rail

2 Press the adapter down onto the DIN rail until flush The locking tab will snap into position and lock the adapter onto the DIN rail

If the adapter does not lock in place use a screwdriver or similar device to move the locking tab down while pressing the adapter onto the DIN rail Release the locking tab to lock the adapter in place If necessary push up on the locking tab to lock

3 Ground the adapter The adapter is grounded through the steel DIN rail and the common conductive surface behind the DIN rail Additionally use the grounding stud

grounding stud

Equipment grounding conductor (ground lug with 208 sq mm [14 AWG] wire) to ground bus

nuts with captive star washer

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

16 FlexLogix Controller System

4 Make sure power is not applied to the power supply Connect the power supply to the adapter This diagram and its related instructions describe a 1794-PS13 power supply

a Connect +24V dc input to the left adapter connector terminal A to the bottom left power connector terminal G

b Connect -24V common to left adapter connector terminal B to the top left power connector terminal E

c Use connections C and D on the adapter and connection F and H on the power supply to pass 24V dc power and common to the next module in the series if required

Use the screw-terminal connector plug that comes with the adapter to meet the requirements for installations in Class I Division 2 locations

5 Connect IO terminal bases and IO modules to the adapter the same way you connect them to the controller

6 Remove the plastic spacer from both ends of the extended-local IO cable (1794-CE1 or 1794-CE3)

plastic spacer

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 17

7 Connect the adapter to the controller

The following diagram shows how you can also use the 1794-CE1 -CE3 cable to split a rail of IO You can split each rail only once You can split a rail right after the controller (or adapter) or after any IO module For more information about the 1794-CE1 -CE3 cables see the Interconnect Cable Installation Instructions publication 1794-512

Removing the extended-local adapterIf you need to remove the adapter follow these steps

1 Turn off power to the adapter

2 Disconnect all cables from the adapter

3 Remove the IO module that is adjacent to the adapter

4 On the terminal base adjacent to the adapter slide the FLEXBUS connector away from the adapter and remove the IO terminal base

5 Remove the adapter from the DIN rail

31039-M

1794-CE1 or 1794-CE3 cable

LOCAL rail

LOCAL2 rail

1794-CE1 or 1794-CE3 cable

1794-CE1 or 1794-CE3 cable

1794-CE1 or 1794-CE3 cable

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

18 FlexLogix Controller System

Make an RS-232 Connection to the ControllerThe RS-232 port is a non-isolated serial port built-in to the front of the controller

To connect to the serial port

1 Determine whether you need an optical isolator

If you connect the controller to a device outside of the systemrsquos enclosure consider installing an isolator between the controller and device

One possible isolator is the 1761-NET-AIC interface converter

serial port

port 1 DB-9 RS-232 DTE

baud rate selector switch

port 2 mini-DIN 8 RS-232

dc power source selector switch

terminals for external 24V dc power supply

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 19

2 Select the appropriate cable

Are you using an isolator

Use this cable

no The 1756-CP3 cable attaches the controller directly to the controller

If you make your own cable it must be shielded and the shields must be tied to the metal shell (that surrounds the pins) on both ends of the cableYou can also use a 1747-CP3 cable (from the SLC product family) This cable has a taller right-angle connector housing than the 1756-CP3 cable

yes The 1761-CBL-AP00 cable (right-angle connector to controller) or the 1761-CBL-PM02 cable (straight connector to the controller) attaches the controller to port 2 on the 1761-NET-AIC isolator The mini-DIN connector is not commercially available so you cannot make this cable

2 RDX

3 TXD

4 DTR

COMMON

6 DSR

7 RTS

8 CTS

9

1 CD

2 RDX

3 TXD

4 DTR

COMMON

6 DSR

7 RTS

8 CTS

9

1 CD

DB-9 right-angle or straight cable end 8-pin mini-DIN cable end

Pin DB-9 end Mini-DIN end1 DCD DCD

2 RxD RxD

3 TxD TxD

4 DTR DTR

5 ground ground

6 DSR DSR

7 RTS RTS

8 CTS CTS

9 na na

1 2

34

5

6 7867

8

9

1

2

3

4

5

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

20 FlexLogix Controller System

3 Connect the appropriate cable to the serial port on the controller

Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding

4 If necessary attach the controller to the isolator

WARNING If you connect or disconnect the serial cable with power applied to this module or the serial device on the other end of the cable an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations

modem

1761-NET-AIC isolator

user-supplied modem cable

1761 cable

system enclosure

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 21

Select the Operating Mode of the Controller

1 Use this table to determine the operating mode of the controller

2 Turn the key on the front panel of the controller to select the mode

If you want to Select one of these modes

Run Program Remote

Run Program Test

turn outputs to the state commanded by the logic of the project

YES YES

turn outputs to their configured state for Program mode

YES YES YES

execute (scan) tasks YES YES YES

change the mode of the controller through software

YES YES YES

download a project YES YES

schedule a ControlNet network YES YES

while online edit the project YES YES YES YES

To select Turn the key to

Remote Run RUN and then to REM

Remote Program PROG and then to REM

Remote Test REM and then go online and select Test mode via the programming software

keyswitch

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

22 FlexLogix Controller System

Monitor the Controller LEDs

FLASH Upgrade the Controllerrsquos Firmware RevisionTo update the firmware of a controller first install a firmware upgrade kit

bull An upgrade kit ships on a supplemental CD along with RSLogix 5000 software

bull To download an upgrade kit go to httpsupportrockwellautomationcom Choose Firmware Updates

Indicator Color Description

RUN off bull no task(s) running

bull controller in Program mode

green bull one or more tasks are running

bull controller is in Run mode

OK off no power applied

red flashing after initially installing the controller - the controller requires a FLASH upgrade to the proper firmware revision see belowafter the controller is operating - recoverable fault

red bull controller faulted

bull clear faults clear memory or replace the controller

green controller OK

BATTERY off battery will support memory

red bull battery may not support memory

bull replace battery

IO off bull controller project not downloaded (the condition after power up)

bull no IO or communications configured

green communicating to all devices

green flashing one or more devices are not responding

LOCALandLOCAL2

off rail is inhibited

green communicating to all devices on that rail

green flashing one or more devices on that rail not responding

red flashing no modules exist on that rail

RS232 off no activity

green data being received or transmitted

FORCE off no forces present

amber forces present

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 23

Update the Controller

1 Connect the controller to the same network as your workstation

2 Start ControlFLASH software

3 Choose Next gt

4 Select the catalog number of the controller and choose Next gt

5 Expand the network until you see the controller If the required network is not shown first configure a driver for the network in RSLinx software

6 Select the controller and choose OK

7 Select the revision level to which you want to update the controller and choose Next gt

8 To start the update of the controller choose Finish and then Yes

After the controller is updated the status box displays Update complete

9 Choose OK

10 To close ControlFLASH software choose Cancel and then Yes

TIP RSLogix 5000 software revision 100 or later lets you update controller firmware as part of the download sequence To update the controller download your project and follow the prompts of the software

IMPORTANT If the Revision list is empty download a new upgrade kit Some older upgrade kits do not work with new controllers

42900

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

24 FlexLogix Controller System

FlexLogix Controller Approximate Mounting Dimensions

19949mm (785in)

849mm (334in) 5043mm (199in)

12197mm (481in)

18296mm (7203in)

8857mm (349in)

10596mm (417in)

10149mm (399in)

64mm (025in)

10457mm (412in)

8724mm (343in)

9296mm (366in)

8857mm (349in)

8014mm (316in)

1016mm (400in)

885mm (035in)

1853mm (730in)

135mm (053in)

825mm (033in)

60mm (024in)

6436mm (253in)

centerline of MTG Hole

centerline of DIN rail

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 25

FlexLogix Extended-Local IO Adapter Approximate Mounting Dimensions

Approximate Mounting Clearance

94mm (37in)

69mm (272in)

11712mm (461in)

8894mm (35in)

8106mm (319in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

26 FlexLogix Controller System

Other PublicationsYou can use the following manuals with this product

You can obtain manuals at wwwtheautomationbookstorecom

Specifications

Documents required for installation details Publication number

Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines 1770-41

Flex 1794-PS3 Power Supply Installation Instructions 1794-571

Flex 1794-PS13 Power Supply Installation Instructions 1794-569

Flex IO Terminal Base Installation Instructions 1794-516

1794-CE1 -CE3 Interconnect Cable Installation Instructions 1794-512

FLEX IO and FLEX Integra IO Technical Data 1794-21

Documents available for further reference Publication number

FlexLogix System User Manual 1794-UM001

Logix5000 Controllers Common Procedures Reference Manual 1756-PM001

Logix5000 Controllers General Instruction Set Reference Manual 1756-RM003

Guidelines for Handling Lithium Batteries AG-54

Category FlexLogix controller(1794-L33 -L34)

FlexLogix extended-local IO adapter (1794-FLA)

user memory 1794-L33 64 KBytes1794-L34 512 KBytes

na

input voltagerating (nominal)range

24V dc192V to 312V dc (includes 5 ac ripple)

isolation voltage(continuous-voltage withstand rating)

30V dcQualification tested to withstand 850V dc for 60 seconds

input current(1) 133A maximum at 192V dc085A maximum at 24V dc

039A maximum at 192V dc025A maximum at 24V dc

power dissipation(2) 255W maximum at 192V204W maximum at 24V dc

75W maximum at 192V60W maximum at 24V dc

backplane (FLEXBUS) current output

653mA maximum 51V dc 653mA maximum 51V dc

thermal dissipation 87BTUhour 192V 256BTUhour 192V

weight 1794-L33 71 kg (156 lbs oz)1794-L34 75 g (166 lbs)(no communication cards installed)

28 kg (62 lbs)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 27

power supply 1794-PS3 or 1794-PS13 ndash In applications that must be compliant with CSA requirements use a Separated Extra-Low Voltage (SELV) power supply that is compliant with IEC 610101 Annex H

power conductors 60deg C (140deg F) minimum copper22 to 14 AWG (0324 to 208 sq mm) stranded364 inch (12mm) insulation maximumlength 10m or less

category 3(2)

power connector torque 5 to 7 inch-pounds (06 to 08Nm)

battery 1756-BA1 (AB part number 94194801)059g lithium

na

serial cable 1761-CBLPM02 to 1761-NET-AIC 1761-CBLPA00 to 1761-NET-AIC1756-CP3 directly to controller1747-CP3 directly to controller

category 3(4)

na

extended local IO cable 1794-CE1 cable (1 foot)1794-CE3 cable (3 feet)

category 3(2)

DIN rail steel 35 x 755mm DIN railA-B part number 199-DR1 46277-3 EN 50022

operating temperature IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad Operating Cold)IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd Operating Dry Heat)IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock)0 to 60degC (32 to 140degF)

storage temperature IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab Un-packaged Non-operating Cold)IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb Un-packaged Non-operating Dry Heat)IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na Un-packaged Non-operating Thermal Shock)ndash40 to 85degC (ndash40 to 185degF)

relative humidity IEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db Un-packaged Non-operating Damp Heat)5 to 95 non-condensing

vibration(3) IEC60068-2-6 (Test Fc Operating) 5g 10-500Hz

shock(3)

operatingnon-operating

IEC60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged shock)

30g50g

emissions CISPR 11Group 1 Class A (with appropriate enclosure)

ESD immunity IEC 61000-4-26kV contact discharges8kV air discharges

Category FlexLogix controller(1794-L33 -L34)

FlexLogix extended-local IO adapter (1794-FLA)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

radiated RF immunity IEC 61000-4-310Vm with 1kHz sine-wave 80AM from 30MHz to 2000MHz10Vm with 200Hz 50 Pulse 100AM at 900Mhz

EFTB immunity IEC 61000-4-4plusmn4kV at 25kHz on power portsplusmn2kV at 5kHz on communications ports

surge transient immunity IEC 61000-4-5plusmn2kV line-earth (CM) on shielded ports

conducted RF immunity IEC 61000-4-610Vrms with 1kHz sine-wave 80AM from 150kHz to 80MHz

enclosure type rating none (open-style)

Certifications(when product is marked)

UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipmentc-UL-us UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous

Locations certified for US and CanadaCSA CSA Certified Process Control EquipmentCSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class I Division 2

Group ABCD Hazardous Locations

CE(5) European Union 89336EEC EMC Directive compliant withEN 50082-2 Industrial ImmunityEN 61326 MeasControlLab Industrial RequirementsEN 61000-6-2 Industrial ImmunityEN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions

C-Tick(5) Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant withASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions

EEx(5) European Union 949EEC ATEX Directive compliant withEN 50021 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n (Zone 2)

(1) This specification is also known as Power Consumption(2) This specification is also known as Heat Dissipation(3) To maintain these vibration and shock specifications you must use DIN rail locks(4) Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing Refer to Publication 1770-41 Industrial

Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines(5) See the Product Certification link at wwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification

details

Category FlexLogix controller(1794-L33 -L34)

FlexLogix extended-local IO adapter (1794-FLA)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004 PN 957867-01Supersedes Publication 1794-IN002F-EN-P - October 2002 Copyright copy 2004 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

  • 1794-IN002G-EN-P FlexLogix Controller System Installation Instructions
    • Tools That You Need
    • Obtain a User Manual
    • Environment and Enclosure
    • Prevent Electrostatic Discharge
    • European Hazardous Location Approval
    • North American Hazardous Location Approval
    • Removal and Insertion Under Power
    • Other Considerations
    • What You Need to Do
    • Step 1 Verify That You Have All the Components
    • Step 2 Install the Battery
    • Step 3 Install Communication Daughtercards (optional)
    • Step 4 Install the Controller
    • Step 5 Install the Extended-Local Adapter (optional)
    • Make an RS-232 Connection to the Controller
    • Select the Operating Mode of the Controller
    • Monitor the Controller LEDs
    • FLASH Upgrade the Controllerrsquos Firmware Revision
    • Update the Controller
    • FlexLogix Controller Approximate Mounting Dimensions
    • FlexLogix Extended-Local IO Adapter Approximate Mounting Dimensions
    • Approximate Mounting Clearance
    • Other Publications
    • Specifications
      • Back Cover
        • Intro

          ampLRA-QR005B-EN-E 308

          Generic pub print specs

          ampCItem Setup Sheet for Conversion Transfers
          ampLJIT-D-print SpreadsheetampCRA-QR005C-EN-EampRampD ampT

          IN RN pub type specs

          UM RM PM pub type specs

          AP PP pub type specs

          BR pub type specs

          Field definitions

          ampL04032006ampRampP
          PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
          EA = Each
          PK = Pack
          PD = Pad
          RL = Roll
          BK = Book
          CT = Carton
          BX = Box
          ST = Set
          Multiple Order Qty
          Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
          Business Group
          The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
          CorporateBusiness Development
          Finance
          Human Resources
          IT
          Logistics
          Manufacturing
          Marketing Commercial
          Marketing Europe
          Marketing Other
          Operations
          Order Services
          Other
          Process Improvement
          Procurement
          Quality
          Sales
          Max Order Quantity
          Presale items = 100
          Postsale items = 5
          NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
          Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
          Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
          Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
          BindingStitching
          For a Form (F) use
          CARBONLESS
          CUTSHEET
          ENVELOPE
          For a Book (B) use
          LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
          PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
          PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
          SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
          STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
          STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
          STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
          THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
          THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
          WIRE O Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
          Saddle-Stitch Items
          20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
          19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
          18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
          All page quantities must be divisible by 4
          Tape Bound Items
          125 sheets max on 20 no cover
          120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Perfect Bound Items
          475 sheets max on 20 no cover
          470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Double Wire Bound Items
          40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Coil Bound Items
          290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Sides Printed
          Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
          Simplex = Single-sided printing
          Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
          Number of Forms to a Sheet
          Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
          Number of Sheets Required to Print
          Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
          Paper Stock Type
          Description
          PLAIN Bond
          ACNTCVR Accent Cover
          BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
          BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
          C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
          C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
          C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
          C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
          CARD Card Stock
          CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
          CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
          COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
          CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
          CUSTOM Custom
          CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
          ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
          ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
          ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
          GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
          GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
          HOTSTEXT Hots Text
          INDEX Index
          LABEL80 80 Up Label
          MICROPRT Micro Print
          OFFSET Offset
          PART2 2 Part
          PART3 3 Part
          PART4 4 Part
          PART5 5 Part
          PART6 6 Part
          PERF 12 inch Perfed
          PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
          PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
          PREPERF Pre-Perforated
          RECYL Recycled
          SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
          SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
          SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
          TAG Tag
          TEXT Text
          TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
          TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
          TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
          TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
          VELLUM Vellum
          VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
          WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
          WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
          WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
          Paper Stock Color
          Black
          Blue
          Buff
          Canary
          Cherry
          Clear
          Cream
          Custom
          Goldrenrod
          Gray
          Green
          Ivory
          Lavender
          Manilla
          NCRPinkCanary
          NCRWhiteBlue
          NCRWhiteBlueCanary
          NCRWhiteCanary
          NCRWhiteCanaryPink
          NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
          NCRWhiteGreen
          NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
          NCRWhitePink
          NCRWhiteWhite
          Opaque
          Orange
          Orchid
          Peach
          Pink
          Purple
          Salmon
          Tan
          Violet
          White
          Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
          11 x 17
          18 x 24 Poster
          24 x 36 Poster
          3 x 5
          36 x 24 Poster
          4 x 6
          475 x 7
          475 x 775
          55 x 85
          6 x 4
          7 x 9
          7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
          85 x 11
          825 x 10875
          825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
          8375 x 10875
          9 x 12
          A4
          A5
          Other - Custom size listed below
          Drilling Locations
          1CENTER
          1LEFTTOP
          1TOPCENTER
          2LEFT
          2LEFT2TOP
          2TOP
          2TOP2LEFT
          2TOP3LEFT
          2TOP5LEFT
          2TOP5RIGHT
          3BOTTOM
          3LEFT
          3LEFT2TOP
          3LEFT3TOP
          3RIGHT
          3TOP
          3TOP5LEFT
          5BOTTOM
          5CENTER
          5LEFT
          5RIGHT
          5RIGHT2TOP
          5TOP
          For TRI fold - select Z or C type Description
          HALF Half
          C C Fold
          DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
          OFFSETZ Offset Z
          SAMPLE See Sample
          SHORT Short Fold
          V V Fold
          Z Z Fold
          Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
          Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
          77 or more pages 1
          33 to 76 pages 25
          3 to 32 pages 50
          1 or 2 pages 100
          Comments
          CoverText Stock Spine
          100 Gloss Cover If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
          100 Gloss Text
          100 Text
          10pt C1S Cover
          10pt C2S Cover
          10pt C2S Text
          10pt Text Stock
          110 White Index
          12pt C1S Cover
          20 White Opaque Bond
          50 Colored Offset
          50 White Offset
          50 White Opaque
          60 Cover Stock
          60 White Offset
          80 Gloss Cover
          80 Gloss Text
          8pt C1S White
          90 White Index
          CoverText Ink
          Black
          Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
          Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
          4 color
          4 color over black
          4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
          4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
          4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
          4 color + aqueous
          4 color + varnish
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 50 RRD must provide this information
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 RRD must provide this information
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          EA 1 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Black amp White B PERFECT PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 NA 516 3LEFT NA NA NA NA RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          1794-IN002G-EN-P FlexLogix Controller Installation Instructions EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial 19021 01232004 5 Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 4 28 7 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 55 85 NA NA NA NA NA HALF 55 x 85 100 RRD must provide this information Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black 957867-01
          Corp 17501
          Bill To 69
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information
          Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
          This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
          Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
          Generic pub print specs Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
          IN RN pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          UM RM PM pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          AP PP pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          BR pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          Field definitions Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
          Attach Print Specs to PDF
          For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
          RA-QR005C-EN-E 608
Page 15: FlexLogix Controller System - Rockwell Automation...FlexLogix Controller System 3 Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004 Environment and Enclosure Prevent Electrostatic Discharge

FlexLogix Controller System 15

Step 5 Install the Extended-Local Adapter (optional)

1 Position the 1794-FLA extended-local IO adapter on the DIN rail at a 30deg angle and rotate the adapter onto the DIN rail

2 Press the adapter down onto the DIN rail until flush The locking tab will snap into position and lock the adapter onto the DIN rail

If the adapter does not lock in place use a screwdriver or similar device to move the locking tab down while pressing the adapter onto the DIN rail Release the locking tab to lock the adapter in place If necessary push up on the locking tab to lock

3 Ground the adapter The adapter is grounded through the steel DIN rail and the common conductive surface behind the DIN rail Additionally use the grounding stud

grounding stud

Equipment grounding conductor (ground lug with 208 sq mm [14 AWG] wire) to ground bus

nuts with captive star washer

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

16 FlexLogix Controller System

4 Make sure power is not applied to the power supply Connect the power supply to the adapter This diagram and its related instructions describe a 1794-PS13 power supply

a Connect +24V dc input to the left adapter connector terminal A to the bottom left power connector terminal G

b Connect -24V common to left adapter connector terminal B to the top left power connector terminal E

c Use connections C and D on the adapter and connection F and H on the power supply to pass 24V dc power and common to the next module in the series if required

Use the screw-terminal connector plug that comes with the adapter to meet the requirements for installations in Class I Division 2 locations

5 Connect IO terminal bases and IO modules to the adapter the same way you connect them to the controller

6 Remove the plastic spacer from both ends of the extended-local IO cable (1794-CE1 or 1794-CE3)

plastic spacer

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 17

7 Connect the adapter to the controller

The following diagram shows how you can also use the 1794-CE1 -CE3 cable to split a rail of IO You can split each rail only once You can split a rail right after the controller (or adapter) or after any IO module For more information about the 1794-CE1 -CE3 cables see the Interconnect Cable Installation Instructions publication 1794-512

Removing the extended-local adapterIf you need to remove the adapter follow these steps

1 Turn off power to the adapter

2 Disconnect all cables from the adapter

3 Remove the IO module that is adjacent to the adapter

4 On the terminal base adjacent to the adapter slide the FLEXBUS connector away from the adapter and remove the IO terminal base

5 Remove the adapter from the DIN rail

31039-M

1794-CE1 or 1794-CE3 cable

LOCAL rail

LOCAL2 rail

1794-CE1 or 1794-CE3 cable

1794-CE1 or 1794-CE3 cable

1794-CE1 or 1794-CE3 cable

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

18 FlexLogix Controller System

Make an RS-232 Connection to the ControllerThe RS-232 port is a non-isolated serial port built-in to the front of the controller

To connect to the serial port

1 Determine whether you need an optical isolator

If you connect the controller to a device outside of the systemrsquos enclosure consider installing an isolator between the controller and device

One possible isolator is the 1761-NET-AIC interface converter

serial port

port 1 DB-9 RS-232 DTE

baud rate selector switch

port 2 mini-DIN 8 RS-232

dc power source selector switch

terminals for external 24V dc power supply

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 19

2 Select the appropriate cable

Are you using an isolator

Use this cable

no The 1756-CP3 cable attaches the controller directly to the controller

If you make your own cable it must be shielded and the shields must be tied to the metal shell (that surrounds the pins) on both ends of the cableYou can also use a 1747-CP3 cable (from the SLC product family) This cable has a taller right-angle connector housing than the 1756-CP3 cable

yes The 1761-CBL-AP00 cable (right-angle connector to controller) or the 1761-CBL-PM02 cable (straight connector to the controller) attaches the controller to port 2 on the 1761-NET-AIC isolator The mini-DIN connector is not commercially available so you cannot make this cable

2 RDX

3 TXD

4 DTR

COMMON

6 DSR

7 RTS

8 CTS

9

1 CD

2 RDX

3 TXD

4 DTR

COMMON

6 DSR

7 RTS

8 CTS

9

1 CD

DB-9 right-angle or straight cable end 8-pin mini-DIN cable end

Pin DB-9 end Mini-DIN end1 DCD DCD

2 RxD RxD

3 TxD TxD

4 DTR DTR

5 ground ground

6 DSR DSR

7 RTS RTS

8 CTS CTS

9 na na

1 2

34

5

6 7867

8

9

1

2

3

4

5

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

20 FlexLogix Controller System

3 Connect the appropriate cable to the serial port on the controller

Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding

4 If necessary attach the controller to the isolator

WARNING If you connect or disconnect the serial cable with power applied to this module or the serial device on the other end of the cable an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations

modem

1761-NET-AIC isolator

user-supplied modem cable

1761 cable

system enclosure

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 21

Select the Operating Mode of the Controller

1 Use this table to determine the operating mode of the controller

2 Turn the key on the front panel of the controller to select the mode

If you want to Select one of these modes

Run Program Remote

Run Program Test

turn outputs to the state commanded by the logic of the project

YES YES

turn outputs to their configured state for Program mode

YES YES YES

execute (scan) tasks YES YES YES

change the mode of the controller through software

YES YES YES

download a project YES YES

schedule a ControlNet network YES YES

while online edit the project YES YES YES YES

To select Turn the key to

Remote Run RUN and then to REM

Remote Program PROG and then to REM

Remote Test REM and then go online and select Test mode via the programming software

keyswitch

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

22 FlexLogix Controller System

Monitor the Controller LEDs

FLASH Upgrade the Controllerrsquos Firmware RevisionTo update the firmware of a controller first install a firmware upgrade kit

bull An upgrade kit ships on a supplemental CD along with RSLogix 5000 software

bull To download an upgrade kit go to httpsupportrockwellautomationcom Choose Firmware Updates

Indicator Color Description

RUN off bull no task(s) running

bull controller in Program mode

green bull one or more tasks are running

bull controller is in Run mode

OK off no power applied

red flashing after initially installing the controller - the controller requires a FLASH upgrade to the proper firmware revision see belowafter the controller is operating - recoverable fault

red bull controller faulted

bull clear faults clear memory or replace the controller

green controller OK

BATTERY off battery will support memory

red bull battery may not support memory

bull replace battery

IO off bull controller project not downloaded (the condition after power up)

bull no IO or communications configured

green communicating to all devices

green flashing one or more devices are not responding

LOCALandLOCAL2

off rail is inhibited

green communicating to all devices on that rail

green flashing one or more devices on that rail not responding

red flashing no modules exist on that rail

RS232 off no activity

green data being received or transmitted

FORCE off no forces present

amber forces present

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 23

Update the Controller

1 Connect the controller to the same network as your workstation

2 Start ControlFLASH software

3 Choose Next gt

4 Select the catalog number of the controller and choose Next gt

5 Expand the network until you see the controller If the required network is not shown first configure a driver for the network in RSLinx software

6 Select the controller and choose OK

7 Select the revision level to which you want to update the controller and choose Next gt

8 To start the update of the controller choose Finish and then Yes

After the controller is updated the status box displays Update complete

9 Choose OK

10 To close ControlFLASH software choose Cancel and then Yes

TIP RSLogix 5000 software revision 100 or later lets you update controller firmware as part of the download sequence To update the controller download your project and follow the prompts of the software

IMPORTANT If the Revision list is empty download a new upgrade kit Some older upgrade kits do not work with new controllers

42900

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

24 FlexLogix Controller System

FlexLogix Controller Approximate Mounting Dimensions

19949mm (785in)

849mm (334in) 5043mm (199in)

12197mm (481in)

18296mm (7203in)

8857mm (349in)

10596mm (417in)

10149mm (399in)

64mm (025in)

10457mm (412in)

8724mm (343in)

9296mm (366in)

8857mm (349in)

8014mm (316in)

1016mm (400in)

885mm (035in)

1853mm (730in)

135mm (053in)

825mm (033in)

60mm (024in)

6436mm (253in)

centerline of MTG Hole

centerline of DIN rail

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 25

FlexLogix Extended-Local IO Adapter Approximate Mounting Dimensions

Approximate Mounting Clearance

94mm (37in)

69mm (272in)

11712mm (461in)

8894mm (35in)

8106mm (319in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

26 FlexLogix Controller System

Other PublicationsYou can use the following manuals with this product

You can obtain manuals at wwwtheautomationbookstorecom

Specifications

Documents required for installation details Publication number

Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines 1770-41

Flex 1794-PS3 Power Supply Installation Instructions 1794-571

Flex 1794-PS13 Power Supply Installation Instructions 1794-569

Flex IO Terminal Base Installation Instructions 1794-516

1794-CE1 -CE3 Interconnect Cable Installation Instructions 1794-512

FLEX IO and FLEX Integra IO Technical Data 1794-21

Documents available for further reference Publication number

FlexLogix System User Manual 1794-UM001

Logix5000 Controllers Common Procedures Reference Manual 1756-PM001

Logix5000 Controllers General Instruction Set Reference Manual 1756-RM003

Guidelines for Handling Lithium Batteries AG-54

Category FlexLogix controller(1794-L33 -L34)

FlexLogix extended-local IO adapter (1794-FLA)

user memory 1794-L33 64 KBytes1794-L34 512 KBytes

na

input voltagerating (nominal)range

24V dc192V to 312V dc (includes 5 ac ripple)

isolation voltage(continuous-voltage withstand rating)

30V dcQualification tested to withstand 850V dc for 60 seconds

input current(1) 133A maximum at 192V dc085A maximum at 24V dc

039A maximum at 192V dc025A maximum at 24V dc

power dissipation(2) 255W maximum at 192V204W maximum at 24V dc

75W maximum at 192V60W maximum at 24V dc

backplane (FLEXBUS) current output

653mA maximum 51V dc 653mA maximum 51V dc

thermal dissipation 87BTUhour 192V 256BTUhour 192V

weight 1794-L33 71 kg (156 lbs oz)1794-L34 75 g (166 lbs)(no communication cards installed)

28 kg (62 lbs)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 27

power supply 1794-PS3 or 1794-PS13 ndash In applications that must be compliant with CSA requirements use a Separated Extra-Low Voltage (SELV) power supply that is compliant with IEC 610101 Annex H

power conductors 60deg C (140deg F) minimum copper22 to 14 AWG (0324 to 208 sq mm) stranded364 inch (12mm) insulation maximumlength 10m or less

category 3(2)

power connector torque 5 to 7 inch-pounds (06 to 08Nm)

battery 1756-BA1 (AB part number 94194801)059g lithium

na

serial cable 1761-CBLPM02 to 1761-NET-AIC 1761-CBLPA00 to 1761-NET-AIC1756-CP3 directly to controller1747-CP3 directly to controller

category 3(4)

na

extended local IO cable 1794-CE1 cable (1 foot)1794-CE3 cable (3 feet)

category 3(2)

DIN rail steel 35 x 755mm DIN railA-B part number 199-DR1 46277-3 EN 50022

operating temperature IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad Operating Cold)IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd Operating Dry Heat)IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock)0 to 60degC (32 to 140degF)

storage temperature IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab Un-packaged Non-operating Cold)IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb Un-packaged Non-operating Dry Heat)IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na Un-packaged Non-operating Thermal Shock)ndash40 to 85degC (ndash40 to 185degF)

relative humidity IEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db Un-packaged Non-operating Damp Heat)5 to 95 non-condensing

vibration(3) IEC60068-2-6 (Test Fc Operating) 5g 10-500Hz

shock(3)

operatingnon-operating

IEC60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged shock)

30g50g

emissions CISPR 11Group 1 Class A (with appropriate enclosure)

ESD immunity IEC 61000-4-26kV contact discharges8kV air discharges

Category FlexLogix controller(1794-L33 -L34)

FlexLogix extended-local IO adapter (1794-FLA)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

radiated RF immunity IEC 61000-4-310Vm with 1kHz sine-wave 80AM from 30MHz to 2000MHz10Vm with 200Hz 50 Pulse 100AM at 900Mhz

EFTB immunity IEC 61000-4-4plusmn4kV at 25kHz on power portsplusmn2kV at 5kHz on communications ports

surge transient immunity IEC 61000-4-5plusmn2kV line-earth (CM) on shielded ports

conducted RF immunity IEC 61000-4-610Vrms with 1kHz sine-wave 80AM from 150kHz to 80MHz

enclosure type rating none (open-style)

Certifications(when product is marked)

UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipmentc-UL-us UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous

Locations certified for US and CanadaCSA CSA Certified Process Control EquipmentCSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class I Division 2

Group ABCD Hazardous Locations

CE(5) European Union 89336EEC EMC Directive compliant withEN 50082-2 Industrial ImmunityEN 61326 MeasControlLab Industrial RequirementsEN 61000-6-2 Industrial ImmunityEN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions

C-Tick(5) Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant withASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions

EEx(5) European Union 949EEC ATEX Directive compliant withEN 50021 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n (Zone 2)

(1) This specification is also known as Power Consumption(2) This specification is also known as Heat Dissipation(3) To maintain these vibration and shock specifications you must use DIN rail locks(4) Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing Refer to Publication 1770-41 Industrial

Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines(5) See the Product Certification link at wwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification

details

Category FlexLogix controller(1794-L33 -L34)

FlexLogix extended-local IO adapter (1794-FLA)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004 PN 957867-01Supersedes Publication 1794-IN002F-EN-P - October 2002 Copyright copy 2004 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

  • 1794-IN002G-EN-P FlexLogix Controller System Installation Instructions
    • Tools That You Need
    • Obtain a User Manual
    • Environment and Enclosure
    • Prevent Electrostatic Discharge
    • European Hazardous Location Approval
    • North American Hazardous Location Approval
    • Removal and Insertion Under Power
    • Other Considerations
    • What You Need to Do
    • Step 1 Verify That You Have All the Components
    • Step 2 Install the Battery
    • Step 3 Install Communication Daughtercards (optional)
    • Step 4 Install the Controller
    • Step 5 Install the Extended-Local Adapter (optional)
    • Make an RS-232 Connection to the Controller
    • Select the Operating Mode of the Controller
    • Monitor the Controller LEDs
    • FLASH Upgrade the Controllerrsquos Firmware Revision
    • Update the Controller
    • FlexLogix Controller Approximate Mounting Dimensions
    • FlexLogix Extended-Local IO Adapter Approximate Mounting Dimensions
    • Approximate Mounting Clearance
    • Other Publications
    • Specifications
      • Back Cover
        • Intro

          ampLRA-QR005B-EN-E 308

          Generic pub print specs

          ampCItem Setup Sheet for Conversion Transfers
          ampLJIT-D-print SpreadsheetampCRA-QR005C-EN-EampRampD ampT

          IN RN pub type specs

          UM RM PM pub type specs

          AP PP pub type specs

          BR pub type specs

          Field definitions

          ampL04032006ampRampP
          PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
          EA = Each
          PK = Pack
          PD = Pad
          RL = Roll
          BK = Book
          CT = Carton
          BX = Box
          ST = Set
          Multiple Order Qty
          Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
          Business Group
          The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
          CorporateBusiness Development
          Finance
          Human Resources
          IT
          Logistics
          Manufacturing
          Marketing Commercial
          Marketing Europe
          Marketing Other
          Operations
          Order Services
          Other
          Process Improvement
          Procurement
          Quality
          Sales
          Max Order Quantity
          Presale items = 100
          Postsale items = 5
          NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
          Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
          Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
          Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
          BindingStitching
          For a Form (F) use
          CARBONLESS
          CUTSHEET
          ENVELOPE
          For a Book (B) use
          LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
          PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
          PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
          SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
          STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
          STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
          STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
          THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
          THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
          WIRE O Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
          Saddle-Stitch Items
          20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
          19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
          18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
          All page quantities must be divisible by 4
          Tape Bound Items
          125 sheets max on 20 no cover
          120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Perfect Bound Items
          475 sheets max on 20 no cover
          470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Double Wire Bound Items
          40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Coil Bound Items
          290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Sides Printed
          Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
          Simplex = Single-sided printing
          Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
          Number of Forms to a Sheet
          Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
          Number of Sheets Required to Print
          Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
          Paper Stock Type
          Description
          PLAIN Bond
          ACNTCVR Accent Cover
          BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
          BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
          C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
          C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
          C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
          C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
          CARD Card Stock
          CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
          CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
          COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
          CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
          CUSTOM Custom
          CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
          ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
          ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
          ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
          GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
          GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
          HOTSTEXT Hots Text
          INDEX Index
          LABEL80 80 Up Label
          MICROPRT Micro Print
          OFFSET Offset
          PART2 2 Part
          PART3 3 Part
          PART4 4 Part
          PART5 5 Part
          PART6 6 Part
          PERF 12 inch Perfed
          PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
          PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
          PREPERF Pre-Perforated
          RECYL Recycled
          SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
          SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
          SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
          TAG Tag
          TEXT Text
          TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
          TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
          TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
          TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
          VELLUM Vellum
          VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
          WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
          WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
          WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
          Paper Stock Color
          Black
          Blue
          Buff
          Canary
          Cherry
          Clear
          Cream
          Custom
          Goldrenrod
          Gray
          Green
          Ivory
          Lavender
          Manilla
          NCRPinkCanary
          NCRWhiteBlue
          NCRWhiteBlueCanary
          NCRWhiteCanary
          NCRWhiteCanaryPink
          NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
          NCRWhiteGreen
          NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
          NCRWhitePink
          NCRWhiteWhite
          Opaque
          Orange
          Orchid
          Peach
          Pink
          Purple
          Salmon
          Tan
          Violet
          White
          Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
          11 x 17
          18 x 24 Poster
          24 x 36 Poster
          3 x 5
          36 x 24 Poster
          4 x 6
          475 x 7
          475 x 775
          55 x 85
          6 x 4
          7 x 9
          7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
          85 x 11
          825 x 10875
          825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
          8375 x 10875
          9 x 12
          A4
          A5
          Other - Custom size listed below
          Drilling Locations
          1CENTER
          1LEFTTOP
          1TOPCENTER
          2LEFT
          2LEFT2TOP
          2TOP
          2TOP2LEFT
          2TOP3LEFT
          2TOP5LEFT
          2TOP5RIGHT
          3BOTTOM
          3LEFT
          3LEFT2TOP
          3LEFT3TOP
          3RIGHT
          3TOP
          3TOP5LEFT
          5BOTTOM
          5CENTER
          5LEFT
          5RIGHT
          5RIGHT2TOP
          5TOP
          For TRI fold - select Z or C type Description
          HALF Half
          C C Fold
          DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
          OFFSETZ Offset Z
          SAMPLE See Sample
          SHORT Short Fold
          V V Fold
          Z Z Fold
          Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
          Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
          77 or more pages 1
          33 to 76 pages 25
          3 to 32 pages 50
          1 or 2 pages 100
          Comments
          CoverText Stock Spine
          100 Gloss Cover If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
          100 Gloss Text
          100 Text
          10pt C1S Cover
          10pt C2S Cover
          10pt C2S Text
          10pt Text Stock
          110 White Index
          12pt C1S Cover
          20 White Opaque Bond
          50 Colored Offset
          50 White Offset
          50 White Opaque
          60 Cover Stock
          60 White Offset
          80 Gloss Cover
          80 Gloss Text
          8pt C1S White
          90 White Index
          CoverText Ink
          Black
          Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
          Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
          4 color
          4 color over black
          4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
          4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
          4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
          4 color + aqueous
          4 color + varnish
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 50 RRD must provide this information
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 RRD must provide this information
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          EA 1 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Black amp White B PERFECT PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 NA 516 3LEFT NA NA NA NA RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          1794-IN002G-EN-P FlexLogix Controller Installation Instructions EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial 19021 01232004 5 Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 4 28 7 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 55 85 NA NA NA NA NA HALF 55 x 85 100 RRD must provide this information Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black 957867-01
          Corp 17501
          Bill To 69
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information
          Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
          This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
          Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
          Generic pub print specs Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
          IN RN pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          UM RM PM pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          AP PP pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          BR pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          Field definitions Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
          Attach Print Specs to PDF
          For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
          RA-QR005C-EN-E 608
Page 16: FlexLogix Controller System - Rockwell Automation...FlexLogix Controller System 3 Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004 Environment and Enclosure Prevent Electrostatic Discharge

16 FlexLogix Controller System

4 Make sure power is not applied to the power supply Connect the power supply to the adapter This diagram and its related instructions describe a 1794-PS13 power supply

a Connect +24V dc input to the left adapter connector terminal A to the bottom left power connector terminal G

b Connect -24V common to left adapter connector terminal B to the top left power connector terminal E

c Use connections C and D on the adapter and connection F and H on the power supply to pass 24V dc power and common to the next module in the series if required

Use the screw-terminal connector plug that comes with the adapter to meet the requirements for installations in Class I Division 2 locations

5 Connect IO terminal bases and IO modules to the adapter the same way you connect them to the controller

6 Remove the plastic spacer from both ends of the extended-local IO cable (1794-CE1 or 1794-CE3)

plastic spacer

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 17

7 Connect the adapter to the controller

The following diagram shows how you can also use the 1794-CE1 -CE3 cable to split a rail of IO You can split each rail only once You can split a rail right after the controller (or adapter) or after any IO module For more information about the 1794-CE1 -CE3 cables see the Interconnect Cable Installation Instructions publication 1794-512

Removing the extended-local adapterIf you need to remove the adapter follow these steps

1 Turn off power to the adapter

2 Disconnect all cables from the adapter

3 Remove the IO module that is adjacent to the adapter

4 On the terminal base adjacent to the adapter slide the FLEXBUS connector away from the adapter and remove the IO terminal base

5 Remove the adapter from the DIN rail

31039-M

1794-CE1 or 1794-CE3 cable

LOCAL rail

LOCAL2 rail

1794-CE1 or 1794-CE3 cable

1794-CE1 or 1794-CE3 cable

1794-CE1 or 1794-CE3 cable

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

18 FlexLogix Controller System

Make an RS-232 Connection to the ControllerThe RS-232 port is a non-isolated serial port built-in to the front of the controller

To connect to the serial port

1 Determine whether you need an optical isolator

If you connect the controller to a device outside of the systemrsquos enclosure consider installing an isolator between the controller and device

One possible isolator is the 1761-NET-AIC interface converter

serial port

port 1 DB-9 RS-232 DTE

baud rate selector switch

port 2 mini-DIN 8 RS-232

dc power source selector switch

terminals for external 24V dc power supply

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 19

2 Select the appropriate cable

Are you using an isolator

Use this cable

no The 1756-CP3 cable attaches the controller directly to the controller

If you make your own cable it must be shielded and the shields must be tied to the metal shell (that surrounds the pins) on both ends of the cableYou can also use a 1747-CP3 cable (from the SLC product family) This cable has a taller right-angle connector housing than the 1756-CP3 cable

yes The 1761-CBL-AP00 cable (right-angle connector to controller) or the 1761-CBL-PM02 cable (straight connector to the controller) attaches the controller to port 2 on the 1761-NET-AIC isolator The mini-DIN connector is not commercially available so you cannot make this cable

2 RDX

3 TXD

4 DTR

COMMON

6 DSR

7 RTS

8 CTS

9

1 CD

2 RDX

3 TXD

4 DTR

COMMON

6 DSR

7 RTS

8 CTS

9

1 CD

DB-9 right-angle or straight cable end 8-pin mini-DIN cable end

Pin DB-9 end Mini-DIN end1 DCD DCD

2 RxD RxD

3 TxD TxD

4 DTR DTR

5 ground ground

6 DSR DSR

7 RTS RTS

8 CTS CTS

9 na na

1 2

34

5

6 7867

8

9

1

2

3

4

5

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

20 FlexLogix Controller System

3 Connect the appropriate cable to the serial port on the controller

Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding

4 If necessary attach the controller to the isolator

WARNING If you connect or disconnect the serial cable with power applied to this module or the serial device on the other end of the cable an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations

modem

1761-NET-AIC isolator

user-supplied modem cable

1761 cable

system enclosure

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 21

Select the Operating Mode of the Controller

1 Use this table to determine the operating mode of the controller

2 Turn the key on the front panel of the controller to select the mode

If you want to Select one of these modes

Run Program Remote

Run Program Test

turn outputs to the state commanded by the logic of the project

YES YES

turn outputs to their configured state for Program mode

YES YES YES

execute (scan) tasks YES YES YES

change the mode of the controller through software

YES YES YES

download a project YES YES

schedule a ControlNet network YES YES

while online edit the project YES YES YES YES

To select Turn the key to

Remote Run RUN and then to REM

Remote Program PROG and then to REM

Remote Test REM and then go online and select Test mode via the programming software

keyswitch

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

22 FlexLogix Controller System

Monitor the Controller LEDs

FLASH Upgrade the Controllerrsquos Firmware RevisionTo update the firmware of a controller first install a firmware upgrade kit

bull An upgrade kit ships on a supplemental CD along with RSLogix 5000 software

bull To download an upgrade kit go to httpsupportrockwellautomationcom Choose Firmware Updates

Indicator Color Description

RUN off bull no task(s) running

bull controller in Program mode

green bull one or more tasks are running

bull controller is in Run mode

OK off no power applied

red flashing after initially installing the controller - the controller requires a FLASH upgrade to the proper firmware revision see belowafter the controller is operating - recoverable fault

red bull controller faulted

bull clear faults clear memory or replace the controller

green controller OK

BATTERY off battery will support memory

red bull battery may not support memory

bull replace battery

IO off bull controller project not downloaded (the condition after power up)

bull no IO or communications configured

green communicating to all devices

green flashing one or more devices are not responding

LOCALandLOCAL2

off rail is inhibited

green communicating to all devices on that rail

green flashing one or more devices on that rail not responding

red flashing no modules exist on that rail

RS232 off no activity

green data being received or transmitted

FORCE off no forces present

amber forces present

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 23

Update the Controller

1 Connect the controller to the same network as your workstation

2 Start ControlFLASH software

3 Choose Next gt

4 Select the catalog number of the controller and choose Next gt

5 Expand the network until you see the controller If the required network is not shown first configure a driver for the network in RSLinx software

6 Select the controller and choose OK

7 Select the revision level to which you want to update the controller and choose Next gt

8 To start the update of the controller choose Finish and then Yes

After the controller is updated the status box displays Update complete

9 Choose OK

10 To close ControlFLASH software choose Cancel and then Yes

TIP RSLogix 5000 software revision 100 or later lets you update controller firmware as part of the download sequence To update the controller download your project and follow the prompts of the software

IMPORTANT If the Revision list is empty download a new upgrade kit Some older upgrade kits do not work with new controllers

42900

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

24 FlexLogix Controller System

FlexLogix Controller Approximate Mounting Dimensions

19949mm (785in)

849mm (334in) 5043mm (199in)

12197mm (481in)

18296mm (7203in)

8857mm (349in)

10596mm (417in)

10149mm (399in)

64mm (025in)

10457mm (412in)

8724mm (343in)

9296mm (366in)

8857mm (349in)

8014mm (316in)

1016mm (400in)

885mm (035in)

1853mm (730in)

135mm (053in)

825mm (033in)

60mm (024in)

6436mm (253in)

centerline of MTG Hole

centerline of DIN rail

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 25

FlexLogix Extended-Local IO Adapter Approximate Mounting Dimensions

Approximate Mounting Clearance

94mm (37in)

69mm (272in)

11712mm (461in)

8894mm (35in)

8106mm (319in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

26 FlexLogix Controller System

Other PublicationsYou can use the following manuals with this product

You can obtain manuals at wwwtheautomationbookstorecom

Specifications

Documents required for installation details Publication number

Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines 1770-41

Flex 1794-PS3 Power Supply Installation Instructions 1794-571

Flex 1794-PS13 Power Supply Installation Instructions 1794-569

Flex IO Terminal Base Installation Instructions 1794-516

1794-CE1 -CE3 Interconnect Cable Installation Instructions 1794-512

FLEX IO and FLEX Integra IO Technical Data 1794-21

Documents available for further reference Publication number

FlexLogix System User Manual 1794-UM001

Logix5000 Controllers Common Procedures Reference Manual 1756-PM001

Logix5000 Controllers General Instruction Set Reference Manual 1756-RM003

Guidelines for Handling Lithium Batteries AG-54

Category FlexLogix controller(1794-L33 -L34)

FlexLogix extended-local IO adapter (1794-FLA)

user memory 1794-L33 64 KBytes1794-L34 512 KBytes

na

input voltagerating (nominal)range

24V dc192V to 312V dc (includes 5 ac ripple)

isolation voltage(continuous-voltage withstand rating)

30V dcQualification tested to withstand 850V dc for 60 seconds

input current(1) 133A maximum at 192V dc085A maximum at 24V dc

039A maximum at 192V dc025A maximum at 24V dc

power dissipation(2) 255W maximum at 192V204W maximum at 24V dc

75W maximum at 192V60W maximum at 24V dc

backplane (FLEXBUS) current output

653mA maximum 51V dc 653mA maximum 51V dc

thermal dissipation 87BTUhour 192V 256BTUhour 192V

weight 1794-L33 71 kg (156 lbs oz)1794-L34 75 g (166 lbs)(no communication cards installed)

28 kg (62 lbs)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 27

power supply 1794-PS3 or 1794-PS13 ndash In applications that must be compliant with CSA requirements use a Separated Extra-Low Voltage (SELV) power supply that is compliant with IEC 610101 Annex H

power conductors 60deg C (140deg F) minimum copper22 to 14 AWG (0324 to 208 sq mm) stranded364 inch (12mm) insulation maximumlength 10m or less

category 3(2)

power connector torque 5 to 7 inch-pounds (06 to 08Nm)

battery 1756-BA1 (AB part number 94194801)059g lithium

na

serial cable 1761-CBLPM02 to 1761-NET-AIC 1761-CBLPA00 to 1761-NET-AIC1756-CP3 directly to controller1747-CP3 directly to controller

category 3(4)

na

extended local IO cable 1794-CE1 cable (1 foot)1794-CE3 cable (3 feet)

category 3(2)

DIN rail steel 35 x 755mm DIN railA-B part number 199-DR1 46277-3 EN 50022

operating temperature IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad Operating Cold)IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd Operating Dry Heat)IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock)0 to 60degC (32 to 140degF)

storage temperature IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab Un-packaged Non-operating Cold)IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb Un-packaged Non-operating Dry Heat)IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na Un-packaged Non-operating Thermal Shock)ndash40 to 85degC (ndash40 to 185degF)

relative humidity IEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db Un-packaged Non-operating Damp Heat)5 to 95 non-condensing

vibration(3) IEC60068-2-6 (Test Fc Operating) 5g 10-500Hz

shock(3)

operatingnon-operating

IEC60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged shock)

30g50g

emissions CISPR 11Group 1 Class A (with appropriate enclosure)

ESD immunity IEC 61000-4-26kV contact discharges8kV air discharges

Category FlexLogix controller(1794-L33 -L34)

FlexLogix extended-local IO adapter (1794-FLA)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

radiated RF immunity IEC 61000-4-310Vm with 1kHz sine-wave 80AM from 30MHz to 2000MHz10Vm with 200Hz 50 Pulse 100AM at 900Mhz

EFTB immunity IEC 61000-4-4plusmn4kV at 25kHz on power portsplusmn2kV at 5kHz on communications ports

surge transient immunity IEC 61000-4-5plusmn2kV line-earth (CM) on shielded ports

conducted RF immunity IEC 61000-4-610Vrms with 1kHz sine-wave 80AM from 150kHz to 80MHz

enclosure type rating none (open-style)

Certifications(when product is marked)

UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipmentc-UL-us UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous

Locations certified for US and CanadaCSA CSA Certified Process Control EquipmentCSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class I Division 2

Group ABCD Hazardous Locations

CE(5) European Union 89336EEC EMC Directive compliant withEN 50082-2 Industrial ImmunityEN 61326 MeasControlLab Industrial RequirementsEN 61000-6-2 Industrial ImmunityEN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions

C-Tick(5) Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant withASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions

EEx(5) European Union 949EEC ATEX Directive compliant withEN 50021 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n (Zone 2)

(1) This specification is also known as Power Consumption(2) This specification is also known as Heat Dissipation(3) To maintain these vibration and shock specifications you must use DIN rail locks(4) Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing Refer to Publication 1770-41 Industrial

Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines(5) See the Product Certification link at wwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification

details

Category FlexLogix controller(1794-L33 -L34)

FlexLogix extended-local IO adapter (1794-FLA)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004 PN 957867-01Supersedes Publication 1794-IN002F-EN-P - October 2002 Copyright copy 2004 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

  • 1794-IN002G-EN-P FlexLogix Controller System Installation Instructions
    • Tools That You Need
    • Obtain a User Manual
    • Environment and Enclosure
    • Prevent Electrostatic Discharge
    • European Hazardous Location Approval
    • North American Hazardous Location Approval
    • Removal and Insertion Under Power
    • Other Considerations
    • What You Need to Do
    • Step 1 Verify That You Have All the Components
    • Step 2 Install the Battery
    • Step 3 Install Communication Daughtercards (optional)
    • Step 4 Install the Controller
    • Step 5 Install the Extended-Local Adapter (optional)
    • Make an RS-232 Connection to the Controller
    • Select the Operating Mode of the Controller
    • Monitor the Controller LEDs
    • FLASH Upgrade the Controllerrsquos Firmware Revision
    • Update the Controller
    • FlexLogix Controller Approximate Mounting Dimensions
    • FlexLogix Extended-Local IO Adapter Approximate Mounting Dimensions
    • Approximate Mounting Clearance
    • Other Publications
    • Specifications
      • Back Cover
        • Intro

          ampLRA-QR005B-EN-E 308

          Generic pub print specs

          ampCItem Setup Sheet for Conversion Transfers
          ampLJIT-D-print SpreadsheetampCRA-QR005C-EN-EampRampD ampT

          IN RN pub type specs

          UM RM PM pub type specs

          AP PP pub type specs

          BR pub type specs

          Field definitions

          ampL04032006ampRampP
          PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
          EA = Each
          PK = Pack
          PD = Pad
          RL = Roll
          BK = Book
          CT = Carton
          BX = Box
          ST = Set
          Multiple Order Qty
          Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
          Business Group
          The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
          CorporateBusiness Development
          Finance
          Human Resources
          IT
          Logistics
          Manufacturing
          Marketing Commercial
          Marketing Europe
          Marketing Other
          Operations
          Order Services
          Other
          Process Improvement
          Procurement
          Quality
          Sales
          Max Order Quantity
          Presale items = 100
          Postsale items = 5
          NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
          Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
          Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
          Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
          BindingStitching
          For a Form (F) use
          CARBONLESS
          CUTSHEET
          ENVELOPE
          For a Book (B) use
          LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
          PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
          PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
          SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
          STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
          STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
          STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
          THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
          THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
          WIRE O Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
          Saddle-Stitch Items
          20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
          19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
          18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
          All page quantities must be divisible by 4
          Tape Bound Items
          125 sheets max on 20 no cover
          120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Perfect Bound Items
          475 sheets max on 20 no cover
          470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Double Wire Bound Items
          40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Coil Bound Items
          290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Sides Printed
          Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
          Simplex = Single-sided printing
          Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
          Number of Forms to a Sheet
          Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
          Number of Sheets Required to Print
          Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
          Paper Stock Type
          Description
          PLAIN Bond
          ACNTCVR Accent Cover
          BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
          BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
          C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
          C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
          C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
          C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
          CARD Card Stock
          CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
          CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
          COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
          CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
          CUSTOM Custom
          CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
          ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
          ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
          ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
          GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
          GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
          HOTSTEXT Hots Text
          INDEX Index
          LABEL80 80 Up Label
          MICROPRT Micro Print
          OFFSET Offset
          PART2 2 Part
          PART3 3 Part
          PART4 4 Part
          PART5 5 Part
          PART6 6 Part
          PERF 12 inch Perfed
          PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
          PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
          PREPERF Pre-Perforated
          RECYL Recycled
          SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
          SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
          SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
          TAG Tag
          TEXT Text
          TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
          TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
          TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
          TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
          VELLUM Vellum
          VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
          WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
          WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
          WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
          Paper Stock Color
          Black
          Blue
          Buff
          Canary
          Cherry
          Clear
          Cream
          Custom
          Goldrenrod
          Gray
          Green
          Ivory
          Lavender
          Manilla
          NCRPinkCanary
          NCRWhiteBlue
          NCRWhiteBlueCanary
          NCRWhiteCanary
          NCRWhiteCanaryPink
          NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
          NCRWhiteGreen
          NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
          NCRWhitePink
          NCRWhiteWhite
          Opaque
          Orange
          Orchid
          Peach
          Pink
          Purple
          Salmon
          Tan
          Violet
          White
          Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
          11 x 17
          18 x 24 Poster
          24 x 36 Poster
          3 x 5
          36 x 24 Poster
          4 x 6
          475 x 7
          475 x 775
          55 x 85
          6 x 4
          7 x 9
          7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
          85 x 11
          825 x 10875
          825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
          8375 x 10875
          9 x 12
          A4
          A5
          Other - Custom size listed below
          Drilling Locations
          1CENTER
          1LEFTTOP
          1TOPCENTER
          2LEFT
          2LEFT2TOP
          2TOP
          2TOP2LEFT
          2TOP3LEFT
          2TOP5LEFT
          2TOP5RIGHT
          3BOTTOM
          3LEFT
          3LEFT2TOP
          3LEFT3TOP
          3RIGHT
          3TOP
          3TOP5LEFT
          5BOTTOM
          5CENTER
          5LEFT
          5RIGHT
          5RIGHT2TOP
          5TOP
          For TRI fold - select Z or C type Description
          HALF Half
          C C Fold
          DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
          OFFSETZ Offset Z
          SAMPLE See Sample
          SHORT Short Fold
          V V Fold
          Z Z Fold
          Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
          Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
          77 or more pages 1
          33 to 76 pages 25
          3 to 32 pages 50
          1 or 2 pages 100
          Comments
          CoverText Stock Spine
          100 Gloss Cover If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
          100 Gloss Text
          100 Text
          10pt C1S Cover
          10pt C2S Cover
          10pt C2S Text
          10pt Text Stock
          110 White Index
          12pt C1S Cover
          20 White Opaque Bond
          50 Colored Offset
          50 White Offset
          50 White Opaque
          60 Cover Stock
          60 White Offset
          80 Gloss Cover
          80 Gloss Text
          8pt C1S White
          90 White Index
          CoverText Ink
          Black
          Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
          Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
          4 color
          4 color over black
          4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
          4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
          4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
          4 color + aqueous
          4 color + varnish
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 50 RRD must provide this information
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 RRD must provide this information
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          EA 1 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Black amp White B PERFECT PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 NA 516 3LEFT NA NA NA NA RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          1794-IN002G-EN-P FlexLogix Controller Installation Instructions EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial 19021 01232004 5 Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 4 28 7 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 55 85 NA NA NA NA NA HALF 55 x 85 100 RRD must provide this information Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black 957867-01
          Corp 17501
          Bill To 69
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information
          Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
          This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
          Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
          Generic pub print specs Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
          IN RN pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          UM RM PM pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          AP PP pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          BR pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          Field definitions Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
          Attach Print Specs to PDF
          For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
          RA-QR005C-EN-E 608
Page 17: FlexLogix Controller System - Rockwell Automation...FlexLogix Controller System 3 Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004 Environment and Enclosure Prevent Electrostatic Discharge

FlexLogix Controller System 17

7 Connect the adapter to the controller

The following diagram shows how you can also use the 1794-CE1 -CE3 cable to split a rail of IO You can split each rail only once You can split a rail right after the controller (or adapter) or after any IO module For more information about the 1794-CE1 -CE3 cables see the Interconnect Cable Installation Instructions publication 1794-512

Removing the extended-local adapterIf you need to remove the adapter follow these steps

1 Turn off power to the adapter

2 Disconnect all cables from the adapter

3 Remove the IO module that is adjacent to the adapter

4 On the terminal base adjacent to the adapter slide the FLEXBUS connector away from the adapter and remove the IO terminal base

5 Remove the adapter from the DIN rail

31039-M

1794-CE1 or 1794-CE3 cable

LOCAL rail

LOCAL2 rail

1794-CE1 or 1794-CE3 cable

1794-CE1 or 1794-CE3 cable

1794-CE1 or 1794-CE3 cable

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

18 FlexLogix Controller System

Make an RS-232 Connection to the ControllerThe RS-232 port is a non-isolated serial port built-in to the front of the controller

To connect to the serial port

1 Determine whether you need an optical isolator

If you connect the controller to a device outside of the systemrsquos enclosure consider installing an isolator between the controller and device

One possible isolator is the 1761-NET-AIC interface converter

serial port

port 1 DB-9 RS-232 DTE

baud rate selector switch

port 2 mini-DIN 8 RS-232

dc power source selector switch

terminals for external 24V dc power supply

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 19

2 Select the appropriate cable

Are you using an isolator

Use this cable

no The 1756-CP3 cable attaches the controller directly to the controller

If you make your own cable it must be shielded and the shields must be tied to the metal shell (that surrounds the pins) on both ends of the cableYou can also use a 1747-CP3 cable (from the SLC product family) This cable has a taller right-angle connector housing than the 1756-CP3 cable

yes The 1761-CBL-AP00 cable (right-angle connector to controller) or the 1761-CBL-PM02 cable (straight connector to the controller) attaches the controller to port 2 on the 1761-NET-AIC isolator The mini-DIN connector is not commercially available so you cannot make this cable

2 RDX

3 TXD

4 DTR

COMMON

6 DSR

7 RTS

8 CTS

9

1 CD

2 RDX

3 TXD

4 DTR

COMMON

6 DSR

7 RTS

8 CTS

9

1 CD

DB-9 right-angle or straight cable end 8-pin mini-DIN cable end

Pin DB-9 end Mini-DIN end1 DCD DCD

2 RxD RxD

3 TxD TxD

4 DTR DTR

5 ground ground

6 DSR DSR

7 RTS RTS

8 CTS CTS

9 na na

1 2

34

5

6 7867

8

9

1

2

3

4

5

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

20 FlexLogix Controller System

3 Connect the appropriate cable to the serial port on the controller

Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding

4 If necessary attach the controller to the isolator

WARNING If you connect or disconnect the serial cable with power applied to this module or the serial device on the other end of the cable an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations

modem

1761-NET-AIC isolator

user-supplied modem cable

1761 cable

system enclosure

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 21

Select the Operating Mode of the Controller

1 Use this table to determine the operating mode of the controller

2 Turn the key on the front panel of the controller to select the mode

If you want to Select one of these modes

Run Program Remote

Run Program Test

turn outputs to the state commanded by the logic of the project

YES YES

turn outputs to their configured state for Program mode

YES YES YES

execute (scan) tasks YES YES YES

change the mode of the controller through software

YES YES YES

download a project YES YES

schedule a ControlNet network YES YES

while online edit the project YES YES YES YES

To select Turn the key to

Remote Run RUN and then to REM

Remote Program PROG and then to REM

Remote Test REM and then go online and select Test mode via the programming software

keyswitch

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

22 FlexLogix Controller System

Monitor the Controller LEDs

FLASH Upgrade the Controllerrsquos Firmware RevisionTo update the firmware of a controller first install a firmware upgrade kit

bull An upgrade kit ships on a supplemental CD along with RSLogix 5000 software

bull To download an upgrade kit go to httpsupportrockwellautomationcom Choose Firmware Updates

Indicator Color Description

RUN off bull no task(s) running

bull controller in Program mode

green bull one or more tasks are running

bull controller is in Run mode

OK off no power applied

red flashing after initially installing the controller - the controller requires a FLASH upgrade to the proper firmware revision see belowafter the controller is operating - recoverable fault

red bull controller faulted

bull clear faults clear memory or replace the controller

green controller OK

BATTERY off battery will support memory

red bull battery may not support memory

bull replace battery

IO off bull controller project not downloaded (the condition after power up)

bull no IO or communications configured

green communicating to all devices

green flashing one or more devices are not responding

LOCALandLOCAL2

off rail is inhibited

green communicating to all devices on that rail

green flashing one or more devices on that rail not responding

red flashing no modules exist on that rail

RS232 off no activity

green data being received or transmitted

FORCE off no forces present

amber forces present

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 23

Update the Controller

1 Connect the controller to the same network as your workstation

2 Start ControlFLASH software

3 Choose Next gt

4 Select the catalog number of the controller and choose Next gt

5 Expand the network until you see the controller If the required network is not shown first configure a driver for the network in RSLinx software

6 Select the controller and choose OK

7 Select the revision level to which you want to update the controller and choose Next gt

8 To start the update of the controller choose Finish and then Yes

After the controller is updated the status box displays Update complete

9 Choose OK

10 To close ControlFLASH software choose Cancel and then Yes

TIP RSLogix 5000 software revision 100 or later lets you update controller firmware as part of the download sequence To update the controller download your project and follow the prompts of the software

IMPORTANT If the Revision list is empty download a new upgrade kit Some older upgrade kits do not work with new controllers

42900

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

24 FlexLogix Controller System

FlexLogix Controller Approximate Mounting Dimensions

19949mm (785in)

849mm (334in) 5043mm (199in)

12197mm (481in)

18296mm (7203in)

8857mm (349in)

10596mm (417in)

10149mm (399in)

64mm (025in)

10457mm (412in)

8724mm (343in)

9296mm (366in)

8857mm (349in)

8014mm (316in)

1016mm (400in)

885mm (035in)

1853mm (730in)

135mm (053in)

825mm (033in)

60mm (024in)

6436mm (253in)

centerline of MTG Hole

centerline of DIN rail

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 25

FlexLogix Extended-Local IO Adapter Approximate Mounting Dimensions

Approximate Mounting Clearance

94mm (37in)

69mm (272in)

11712mm (461in)

8894mm (35in)

8106mm (319in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

26 FlexLogix Controller System

Other PublicationsYou can use the following manuals with this product

You can obtain manuals at wwwtheautomationbookstorecom

Specifications

Documents required for installation details Publication number

Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines 1770-41

Flex 1794-PS3 Power Supply Installation Instructions 1794-571

Flex 1794-PS13 Power Supply Installation Instructions 1794-569

Flex IO Terminal Base Installation Instructions 1794-516

1794-CE1 -CE3 Interconnect Cable Installation Instructions 1794-512

FLEX IO and FLEX Integra IO Technical Data 1794-21

Documents available for further reference Publication number

FlexLogix System User Manual 1794-UM001

Logix5000 Controllers Common Procedures Reference Manual 1756-PM001

Logix5000 Controllers General Instruction Set Reference Manual 1756-RM003

Guidelines for Handling Lithium Batteries AG-54

Category FlexLogix controller(1794-L33 -L34)

FlexLogix extended-local IO adapter (1794-FLA)

user memory 1794-L33 64 KBytes1794-L34 512 KBytes

na

input voltagerating (nominal)range

24V dc192V to 312V dc (includes 5 ac ripple)

isolation voltage(continuous-voltage withstand rating)

30V dcQualification tested to withstand 850V dc for 60 seconds

input current(1) 133A maximum at 192V dc085A maximum at 24V dc

039A maximum at 192V dc025A maximum at 24V dc

power dissipation(2) 255W maximum at 192V204W maximum at 24V dc

75W maximum at 192V60W maximum at 24V dc

backplane (FLEXBUS) current output

653mA maximum 51V dc 653mA maximum 51V dc

thermal dissipation 87BTUhour 192V 256BTUhour 192V

weight 1794-L33 71 kg (156 lbs oz)1794-L34 75 g (166 lbs)(no communication cards installed)

28 kg (62 lbs)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 27

power supply 1794-PS3 or 1794-PS13 ndash In applications that must be compliant with CSA requirements use a Separated Extra-Low Voltage (SELV) power supply that is compliant with IEC 610101 Annex H

power conductors 60deg C (140deg F) minimum copper22 to 14 AWG (0324 to 208 sq mm) stranded364 inch (12mm) insulation maximumlength 10m or less

category 3(2)

power connector torque 5 to 7 inch-pounds (06 to 08Nm)

battery 1756-BA1 (AB part number 94194801)059g lithium

na

serial cable 1761-CBLPM02 to 1761-NET-AIC 1761-CBLPA00 to 1761-NET-AIC1756-CP3 directly to controller1747-CP3 directly to controller

category 3(4)

na

extended local IO cable 1794-CE1 cable (1 foot)1794-CE3 cable (3 feet)

category 3(2)

DIN rail steel 35 x 755mm DIN railA-B part number 199-DR1 46277-3 EN 50022

operating temperature IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad Operating Cold)IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd Operating Dry Heat)IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock)0 to 60degC (32 to 140degF)

storage temperature IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab Un-packaged Non-operating Cold)IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb Un-packaged Non-operating Dry Heat)IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na Un-packaged Non-operating Thermal Shock)ndash40 to 85degC (ndash40 to 185degF)

relative humidity IEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db Un-packaged Non-operating Damp Heat)5 to 95 non-condensing

vibration(3) IEC60068-2-6 (Test Fc Operating) 5g 10-500Hz

shock(3)

operatingnon-operating

IEC60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged shock)

30g50g

emissions CISPR 11Group 1 Class A (with appropriate enclosure)

ESD immunity IEC 61000-4-26kV contact discharges8kV air discharges

Category FlexLogix controller(1794-L33 -L34)

FlexLogix extended-local IO adapter (1794-FLA)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

radiated RF immunity IEC 61000-4-310Vm with 1kHz sine-wave 80AM from 30MHz to 2000MHz10Vm with 200Hz 50 Pulse 100AM at 900Mhz

EFTB immunity IEC 61000-4-4plusmn4kV at 25kHz on power portsplusmn2kV at 5kHz on communications ports

surge transient immunity IEC 61000-4-5plusmn2kV line-earth (CM) on shielded ports

conducted RF immunity IEC 61000-4-610Vrms with 1kHz sine-wave 80AM from 150kHz to 80MHz

enclosure type rating none (open-style)

Certifications(when product is marked)

UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipmentc-UL-us UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous

Locations certified for US and CanadaCSA CSA Certified Process Control EquipmentCSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class I Division 2

Group ABCD Hazardous Locations

CE(5) European Union 89336EEC EMC Directive compliant withEN 50082-2 Industrial ImmunityEN 61326 MeasControlLab Industrial RequirementsEN 61000-6-2 Industrial ImmunityEN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions

C-Tick(5) Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant withASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions

EEx(5) European Union 949EEC ATEX Directive compliant withEN 50021 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n (Zone 2)

(1) This specification is also known as Power Consumption(2) This specification is also known as Heat Dissipation(3) To maintain these vibration and shock specifications you must use DIN rail locks(4) Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing Refer to Publication 1770-41 Industrial

Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines(5) See the Product Certification link at wwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification

details

Category FlexLogix controller(1794-L33 -L34)

FlexLogix extended-local IO adapter (1794-FLA)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004 PN 957867-01Supersedes Publication 1794-IN002F-EN-P - October 2002 Copyright copy 2004 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

  • 1794-IN002G-EN-P FlexLogix Controller System Installation Instructions
    • Tools That You Need
    • Obtain a User Manual
    • Environment and Enclosure
    • Prevent Electrostatic Discharge
    • European Hazardous Location Approval
    • North American Hazardous Location Approval
    • Removal and Insertion Under Power
    • Other Considerations
    • What You Need to Do
    • Step 1 Verify That You Have All the Components
    • Step 2 Install the Battery
    • Step 3 Install Communication Daughtercards (optional)
    • Step 4 Install the Controller
    • Step 5 Install the Extended-Local Adapter (optional)
    • Make an RS-232 Connection to the Controller
    • Select the Operating Mode of the Controller
    • Monitor the Controller LEDs
    • FLASH Upgrade the Controllerrsquos Firmware Revision
    • Update the Controller
    • FlexLogix Controller Approximate Mounting Dimensions
    • FlexLogix Extended-Local IO Adapter Approximate Mounting Dimensions
    • Approximate Mounting Clearance
    • Other Publications
    • Specifications
      • Back Cover
        • Intro

          ampLRA-QR005B-EN-E 308

          Generic pub print specs

          ampCItem Setup Sheet for Conversion Transfers
          ampLJIT-D-print SpreadsheetampCRA-QR005C-EN-EampRampD ampT

          IN RN pub type specs

          UM RM PM pub type specs

          AP PP pub type specs

          BR pub type specs

          Field definitions

          ampL04032006ampRampP
          PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
          EA = Each
          PK = Pack
          PD = Pad
          RL = Roll
          BK = Book
          CT = Carton
          BX = Box
          ST = Set
          Multiple Order Qty
          Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
          Business Group
          The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
          CorporateBusiness Development
          Finance
          Human Resources
          IT
          Logistics
          Manufacturing
          Marketing Commercial
          Marketing Europe
          Marketing Other
          Operations
          Order Services
          Other
          Process Improvement
          Procurement
          Quality
          Sales
          Max Order Quantity
          Presale items = 100
          Postsale items = 5
          NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
          Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
          Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
          Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
          BindingStitching
          For a Form (F) use
          CARBONLESS
          CUTSHEET
          ENVELOPE
          For a Book (B) use
          LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
          PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
          PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
          SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
          STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
          STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
          STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
          THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
          THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
          WIRE O Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
          Saddle-Stitch Items
          20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
          19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
          18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
          All page quantities must be divisible by 4
          Tape Bound Items
          125 sheets max on 20 no cover
          120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Perfect Bound Items
          475 sheets max on 20 no cover
          470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Double Wire Bound Items
          40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Coil Bound Items
          290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Sides Printed
          Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
          Simplex = Single-sided printing
          Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
          Number of Forms to a Sheet
          Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
          Number of Sheets Required to Print
          Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
          Paper Stock Type
          Description
          PLAIN Bond
          ACNTCVR Accent Cover
          BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
          BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
          C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
          C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
          C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
          C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
          CARD Card Stock
          CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
          CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
          COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
          CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
          CUSTOM Custom
          CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
          ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
          ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
          ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
          GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
          GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
          HOTSTEXT Hots Text
          INDEX Index
          LABEL80 80 Up Label
          MICROPRT Micro Print
          OFFSET Offset
          PART2 2 Part
          PART3 3 Part
          PART4 4 Part
          PART5 5 Part
          PART6 6 Part
          PERF 12 inch Perfed
          PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
          PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
          PREPERF Pre-Perforated
          RECYL Recycled
          SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
          SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
          SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
          TAG Tag
          TEXT Text
          TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
          TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
          TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
          TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
          VELLUM Vellum
          VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
          WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
          WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
          WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
          Paper Stock Color
          Black
          Blue
          Buff
          Canary
          Cherry
          Clear
          Cream
          Custom
          Goldrenrod
          Gray
          Green
          Ivory
          Lavender
          Manilla
          NCRPinkCanary
          NCRWhiteBlue
          NCRWhiteBlueCanary
          NCRWhiteCanary
          NCRWhiteCanaryPink
          NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
          NCRWhiteGreen
          NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
          NCRWhitePink
          NCRWhiteWhite
          Opaque
          Orange
          Orchid
          Peach
          Pink
          Purple
          Salmon
          Tan
          Violet
          White
          Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
          11 x 17
          18 x 24 Poster
          24 x 36 Poster
          3 x 5
          36 x 24 Poster
          4 x 6
          475 x 7
          475 x 775
          55 x 85
          6 x 4
          7 x 9
          7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
          85 x 11
          825 x 10875
          825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
          8375 x 10875
          9 x 12
          A4
          A5
          Other - Custom size listed below
          Drilling Locations
          1CENTER
          1LEFTTOP
          1TOPCENTER
          2LEFT
          2LEFT2TOP
          2TOP
          2TOP2LEFT
          2TOP3LEFT
          2TOP5LEFT
          2TOP5RIGHT
          3BOTTOM
          3LEFT
          3LEFT2TOP
          3LEFT3TOP
          3RIGHT
          3TOP
          3TOP5LEFT
          5BOTTOM
          5CENTER
          5LEFT
          5RIGHT
          5RIGHT2TOP
          5TOP
          For TRI fold - select Z or C type Description
          HALF Half
          C C Fold
          DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
          OFFSETZ Offset Z
          SAMPLE See Sample
          SHORT Short Fold
          V V Fold
          Z Z Fold
          Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
          Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
          77 or more pages 1
          33 to 76 pages 25
          3 to 32 pages 50
          1 or 2 pages 100
          Comments
          CoverText Stock Spine
          100 Gloss Cover If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
          100 Gloss Text
          100 Text
          10pt C1S Cover
          10pt C2S Cover
          10pt C2S Text
          10pt Text Stock
          110 White Index
          12pt C1S Cover
          20 White Opaque Bond
          50 Colored Offset
          50 White Offset
          50 White Opaque
          60 Cover Stock
          60 White Offset
          80 Gloss Cover
          80 Gloss Text
          8pt C1S White
          90 White Index
          CoverText Ink
          Black
          Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
          Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
          4 color
          4 color over black
          4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
          4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
          4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
          4 color + aqueous
          4 color + varnish
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 50 RRD must provide this information
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 RRD must provide this information
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          EA 1 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Black amp White B PERFECT PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 NA 516 3LEFT NA NA NA NA RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          1794-IN002G-EN-P FlexLogix Controller Installation Instructions EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial 19021 01232004 5 Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 4 28 7 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 55 85 NA NA NA NA NA HALF 55 x 85 100 RRD must provide this information Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black 957867-01
          Corp 17501
          Bill To 69
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information
          Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
          This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
          Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
          Generic pub print specs Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
          IN RN pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          UM RM PM pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          AP PP pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          BR pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          Field definitions Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
          Attach Print Specs to PDF
          For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
          RA-QR005C-EN-E 608
Page 18: FlexLogix Controller System - Rockwell Automation...FlexLogix Controller System 3 Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004 Environment and Enclosure Prevent Electrostatic Discharge

18 FlexLogix Controller System

Make an RS-232 Connection to the ControllerThe RS-232 port is a non-isolated serial port built-in to the front of the controller

To connect to the serial port

1 Determine whether you need an optical isolator

If you connect the controller to a device outside of the systemrsquos enclosure consider installing an isolator between the controller and device

One possible isolator is the 1761-NET-AIC interface converter

serial port

port 1 DB-9 RS-232 DTE

baud rate selector switch

port 2 mini-DIN 8 RS-232

dc power source selector switch

terminals for external 24V dc power supply

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 19

2 Select the appropriate cable

Are you using an isolator

Use this cable

no The 1756-CP3 cable attaches the controller directly to the controller

If you make your own cable it must be shielded and the shields must be tied to the metal shell (that surrounds the pins) on both ends of the cableYou can also use a 1747-CP3 cable (from the SLC product family) This cable has a taller right-angle connector housing than the 1756-CP3 cable

yes The 1761-CBL-AP00 cable (right-angle connector to controller) or the 1761-CBL-PM02 cable (straight connector to the controller) attaches the controller to port 2 on the 1761-NET-AIC isolator The mini-DIN connector is not commercially available so you cannot make this cable

2 RDX

3 TXD

4 DTR

COMMON

6 DSR

7 RTS

8 CTS

9

1 CD

2 RDX

3 TXD

4 DTR

COMMON

6 DSR

7 RTS

8 CTS

9

1 CD

DB-9 right-angle or straight cable end 8-pin mini-DIN cable end

Pin DB-9 end Mini-DIN end1 DCD DCD

2 RxD RxD

3 TxD TxD

4 DTR DTR

5 ground ground

6 DSR DSR

7 RTS RTS

8 CTS CTS

9 na na

1 2

34

5

6 7867

8

9

1

2

3

4

5

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

20 FlexLogix Controller System

3 Connect the appropriate cable to the serial port on the controller

Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding

4 If necessary attach the controller to the isolator

WARNING If you connect or disconnect the serial cable with power applied to this module or the serial device on the other end of the cable an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations

modem

1761-NET-AIC isolator

user-supplied modem cable

1761 cable

system enclosure

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 21

Select the Operating Mode of the Controller

1 Use this table to determine the operating mode of the controller

2 Turn the key on the front panel of the controller to select the mode

If you want to Select one of these modes

Run Program Remote

Run Program Test

turn outputs to the state commanded by the logic of the project

YES YES

turn outputs to their configured state for Program mode

YES YES YES

execute (scan) tasks YES YES YES

change the mode of the controller through software

YES YES YES

download a project YES YES

schedule a ControlNet network YES YES

while online edit the project YES YES YES YES

To select Turn the key to

Remote Run RUN and then to REM

Remote Program PROG and then to REM

Remote Test REM and then go online and select Test mode via the programming software

keyswitch

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

22 FlexLogix Controller System

Monitor the Controller LEDs

FLASH Upgrade the Controllerrsquos Firmware RevisionTo update the firmware of a controller first install a firmware upgrade kit

bull An upgrade kit ships on a supplemental CD along with RSLogix 5000 software

bull To download an upgrade kit go to httpsupportrockwellautomationcom Choose Firmware Updates

Indicator Color Description

RUN off bull no task(s) running

bull controller in Program mode

green bull one or more tasks are running

bull controller is in Run mode

OK off no power applied

red flashing after initially installing the controller - the controller requires a FLASH upgrade to the proper firmware revision see belowafter the controller is operating - recoverable fault

red bull controller faulted

bull clear faults clear memory or replace the controller

green controller OK

BATTERY off battery will support memory

red bull battery may not support memory

bull replace battery

IO off bull controller project not downloaded (the condition after power up)

bull no IO or communications configured

green communicating to all devices

green flashing one or more devices are not responding

LOCALandLOCAL2

off rail is inhibited

green communicating to all devices on that rail

green flashing one or more devices on that rail not responding

red flashing no modules exist on that rail

RS232 off no activity

green data being received or transmitted

FORCE off no forces present

amber forces present

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 23

Update the Controller

1 Connect the controller to the same network as your workstation

2 Start ControlFLASH software

3 Choose Next gt

4 Select the catalog number of the controller and choose Next gt

5 Expand the network until you see the controller If the required network is not shown first configure a driver for the network in RSLinx software

6 Select the controller and choose OK

7 Select the revision level to which you want to update the controller and choose Next gt

8 To start the update of the controller choose Finish and then Yes

After the controller is updated the status box displays Update complete

9 Choose OK

10 To close ControlFLASH software choose Cancel and then Yes

TIP RSLogix 5000 software revision 100 or later lets you update controller firmware as part of the download sequence To update the controller download your project and follow the prompts of the software

IMPORTANT If the Revision list is empty download a new upgrade kit Some older upgrade kits do not work with new controllers

42900

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

24 FlexLogix Controller System

FlexLogix Controller Approximate Mounting Dimensions

19949mm (785in)

849mm (334in) 5043mm (199in)

12197mm (481in)

18296mm (7203in)

8857mm (349in)

10596mm (417in)

10149mm (399in)

64mm (025in)

10457mm (412in)

8724mm (343in)

9296mm (366in)

8857mm (349in)

8014mm (316in)

1016mm (400in)

885mm (035in)

1853mm (730in)

135mm (053in)

825mm (033in)

60mm (024in)

6436mm (253in)

centerline of MTG Hole

centerline of DIN rail

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 25

FlexLogix Extended-Local IO Adapter Approximate Mounting Dimensions

Approximate Mounting Clearance

94mm (37in)

69mm (272in)

11712mm (461in)

8894mm (35in)

8106mm (319in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

26 FlexLogix Controller System

Other PublicationsYou can use the following manuals with this product

You can obtain manuals at wwwtheautomationbookstorecom

Specifications

Documents required for installation details Publication number

Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines 1770-41

Flex 1794-PS3 Power Supply Installation Instructions 1794-571

Flex 1794-PS13 Power Supply Installation Instructions 1794-569

Flex IO Terminal Base Installation Instructions 1794-516

1794-CE1 -CE3 Interconnect Cable Installation Instructions 1794-512

FLEX IO and FLEX Integra IO Technical Data 1794-21

Documents available for further reference Publication number

FlexLogix System User Manual 1794-UM001

Logix5000 Controllers Common Procedures Reference Manual 1756-PM001

Logix5000 Controllers General Instruction Set Reference Manual 1756-RM003

Guidelines for Handling Lithium Batteries AG-54

Category FlexLogix controller(1794-L33 -L34)

FlexLogix extended-local IO adapter (1794-FLA)

user memory 1794-L33 64 KBytes1794-L34 512 KBytes

na

input voltagerating (nominal)range

24V dc192V to 312V dc (includes 5 ac ripple)

isolation voltage(continuous-voltage withstand rating)

30V dcQualification tested to withstand 850V dc for 60 seconds

input current(1) 133A maximum at 192V dc085A maximum at 24V dc

039A maximum at 192V dc025A maximum at 24V dc

power dissipation(2) 255W maximum at 192V204W maximum at 24V dc

75W maximum at 192V60W maximum at 24V dc

backplane (FLEXBUS) current output

653mA maximum 51V dc 653mA maximum 51V dc

thermal dissipation 87BTUhour 192V 256BTUhour 192V

weight 1794-L33 71 kg (156 lbs oz)1794-L34 75 g (166 lbs)(no communication cards installed)

28 kg (62 lbs)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 27

power supply 1794-PS3 or 1794-PS13 ndash In applications that must be compliant with CSA requirements use a Separated Extra-Low Voltage (SELV) power supply that is compliant with IEC 610101 Annex H

power conductors 60deg C (140deg F) minimum copper22 to 14 AWG (0324 to 208 sq mm) stranded364 inch (12mm) insulation maximumlength 10m or less

category 3(2)

power connector torque 5 to 7 inch-pounds (06 to 08Nm)

battery 1756-BA1 (AB part number 94194801)059g lithium

na

serial cable 1761-CBLPM02 to 1761-NET-AIC 1761-CBLPA00 to 1761-NET-AIC1756-CP3 directly to controller1747-CP3 directly to controller

category 3(4)

na

extended local IO cable 1794-CE1 cable (1 foot)1794-CE3 cable (3 feet)

category 3(2)

DIN rail steel 35 x 755mm DIN railA-B part number 199-DR1 46277-3 EN 50022

operating temperature IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad Operating Cold)IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd Operating Dry Heat)IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock)0 to 60degC (32 to 140degF)

storage temperature IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab Un-packaged Non-operating Cold)IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb Un-packaged Non-operating Dry Heat)IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na Un-packaged Non-operating Thermal Shock)ndash40 to 85degC (ndash40 to 185degF)

relative humidity IEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db Un-packaged Non-operating Damp Heat)5 to 95 non-condensing

vibration(3) IEC60068-2-6 (Test Fc Operating) 5g 10-500Hz

shock(3)

operatingnon-operating

IEC60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged shock)

30g50g

emissions CISPR 11Group 1 Class A (with appropriate enclosure)

ESD immunity IEC 61000-4-26kV contact discharges8kV air discharges

Category FlexLogix controller(1794-L33 -L34)

FlexLogix extended-local IO adapter (1794-FLA)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

radiated RF immunity IEC 61000-4-310Vm with 1kHz sine-wave 80AM from 30MHz to 2000MHz10Vm with 200Hz 50 Pulse 100AM at 900Mhz

EFTB immunity IEC 61000-4-4plusmn4kV at 25kHz on power portsplusmn2kV at 5kHz on communications ports

surge transient immunity IEC 61000-4-5plusmn2kV line-earth (CM) on shielded ports

conducted RF immunity IEC 61000-4-610Vrms with 1kHz sine-wave 80AM from 150kHz to 80MHz

enclosure type rating none (open-style)

Certifications(when product is marked)

UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipmentc-UL-us UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous

Locations certified for US and CanadaCSA CSA Certified Process Control EquipmentCSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class I Division 2

Group ABCD Hazardous Locations

CE(5) European Union 89336EEC EMC Directive compliant withEN 50082-2 Industrial ImmunityEN 61326 MeasControlLab Industrial RequirementsEN 61000-6-2 Industrial ImmunityEN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions

C-Tick(5) Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant withASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions

EEx(5) European Union 949EEC ATEX Directive compliant withEN 50021 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n (Zone 2)

(1) This specification is also known as Power Consumption(2) This specification is also known as Heat Dissipation(3) To maintain these vibration and shock specifications you must use DIN rail locks(4) Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing Refer to Publication 1770-41 Industrial

Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines(5) See the Product Certification link at wwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification

details

Category FlexLogix controller(1794-L33 -L34)

FlexLogix extended-local IO adapter (1794-FLA)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004 PN 957867-01Supersedes Publication 1794-IN002F-EN-P - October 2002 Copyright copy 2004 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

  • 1794-IN002G-EN-P FlexLogix Controller System Installation Instructions
    • Tools That You Need
    • Obtain a User Manual
    • Environment and Enclosure
    • Prevent Electrostatic Discharge
    • European Hazardous Location Approval
    • North American Hazardous Location Approval
    • Removal and Insertion Under Power
    • Other Considerations
    • What You Need to Do
    • Step 1 Verify That You Have All the Components
    • Step 2 Install the Battery
    • Step 3 Install Communication Daughtercards (optional)
    • Step 4 Install the Controller
    • Step 5 Install the Extended-Local Adapter (optional)
    • Make an RS-232 Connection to the Controller
    • Select the Operating Mode of the Controller
    • Monitor the Controller LEDs
    • FLASH Upgrade the Controllerrsquos Firmware Revision
    • Update the Controller
    • FlexLogix Controller Approximate Mounting Dimensions
    • FlexLogix Extended-Local IO Adapter Approximate Mounting Dimensions
    • Approximate Mounting Clearance
    • Other Publications
    • Specifications
      • Back Cover
        • Intro

          ampLRA-QR005B-EN-E 308

          Generic pub print specs

          ampCItem Setup Sheet for Conversion Transfers
          ampLJIT-D-print SpreadsheetampCRA-QR005C-EN-EampRampD ampT

          IN RN pub type specs

          UM RM PM pub type specs

          AP PP pub type specs

          BR pub type specs

          Field definitions

          ampL04032006ampRampP
          PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
          EA = Each
          PK = Pack
          PD = Pad
          RL = Roll
          BK = Book
          CT = Carton
          BX = Box
          ST = Set
          Multiple Order Qty
          Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
          Business Group
          The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
          CorporateBusiness Development
          Finance
          Human Resources
          IT
          Logistics
          Manufacturing
          Marketing Commercial
          Marketing Europe
          Marketing Other
          Operations
          Order Services
          Other
          Process Improvement
          Procurement
          Quality
          Sales
          Max Order Quantity
          Presale items = 100
          Postsale items = 5
          NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
          Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
          Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
          Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
          BindingStitching
          For a Form (F) use
          CARBONLESS
          CUTSHEET
          ENVELOPE
          For a Book (B) use
          LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
          PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
          PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
          SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
          STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
          STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
          STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
          THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
          THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
          WIRE O Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
          Saddle-Stitch Items
          20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
          19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
          18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
          All page quantities must be divisible by 4
          Tape Bound Items
          125 sheets max on 20 no cover
          120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Perfect Bound Items
          475 sheets max on 20 no cover
          470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Double Wire Bound Items
          40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Coil Bound Items
          290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Sides Printed
          Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
          Simplex = Single-sided printing
          Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
          Number of Forms to a Sheet
          Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
          Number of Sheets Required to Print
          Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
          Paper Stock Type
          Description
          PLAIN Bond
          ACNTCVR Accent Cover
          BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
          BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
          C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
          C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
          C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
          C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
          CARD Card Stock
          CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
          CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
          COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
          CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
          CUSTOM Custom
          CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
          ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
          ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
          ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
          GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
          GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
          HOTSTEXT Hots Text
          INDEX Index
          LABEL80 80 Up Label
          MICROPRT Micro Print
          OFFSET Offset
          PART2 2 Part
          PART3 3 Part
          PART4 4 Part
          PART5 5 Part
          PART6 6 Part
          PERF 12 inch Perfed
          PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
          PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
          PREPERF Pre-Perforated
          RECYL Recycled
          SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
          SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
          SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
          TAG Tag
          TEXT Text
          TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
          TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
          TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
          TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
          VELLUM Vellum
          VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
          WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
          WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
          WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
          Paper Stock Color
          Black
          Blue
          Buff
          Canary
          Cherry
          Clear
          Cream
          Custom
          Goldrenrod
          Gray
          Green
          Ivory
          Lavender
          Manilla
          NCRPinkCanary
          NCRWhiteBlue
          NCRWhiteBlueCanary
          NCRWhiteCanary
          NCRWhiteCanaryPink
          NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
          NCRWhiteGreen
          NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
          NCRWhitePink
          NCRWhiteWhite
          Opaque
          Orange
          Orchid
          Peach
          Pink
          Purple
          Salmon
          Tan
          Violet
          White
          Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
          11 x 17
          18 x 24 Poster
          24 x 36 Poster
          3 x 5
          36 x 24 Poster
          4 x 6
          475 x 7
          475 x 775
          55 x 85
          6 x 4
          7 x 9
          7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
          85 x 11
          825 x 10875
          825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
          8375 x 10875
          9 x 12
          A4
          A5
          Other - Custom size listed below
          Drilling Locations
          1CENTER
          1LEFTTOP
          1TOPCENTER
          2LEFT
          2LEFT2TOP
          2TOP
          2TOP2LEFT
          2TOP3LEFT
          2TOP5LEFT
          2TOP5RIGHT
          3BOTTOM
          3LEFT
          3LEFT2TOP
          3LEFT3TOP
          3RIGHT
          3TOP
          3TOP5LEFT
          5BOTTOM
          5CENTER
          5LEFT
          5RIGHT
          5RIGHT2TOP
          5TOP
          For TRI fold - select Z or C type Description
          HALF Half
          C C Fold
          DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
          OFFSETZ Offset Z
          SAMPLE See Sample
          SHORT Short Fold
          V V Fold
          Z Z Fold
          Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
          Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
          77 or more pages 1
          33 to 76 pages 25
          3 to 32 pages 50
          1 or 2 pages 100
          Comments
          CoverText Stock Spine
          100 Gloss Cover If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
          100 Gloss Text
          100 Text
          10pt C1S Cover
          10pt C2S Cover
          10pt C2S Text
          10pt Text Stock
          110 White Index
          12pt C1S Cover
          20 White Opaque Bond
          50 Colored Offset
          50 White Offset
          50 White Opaque
          60 Cover Stock
          60 White Offset
          80 Gloss Cover
          80 Gloss Text
          8pt C1S White
          90 White Index
          CoverText Ink
          Black
          Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
          Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
          4 color
          4 color over black
          4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
          4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
          4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
          4 color + aqueous
          4 color + varnish
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 50 RRD must provide this information
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 RRD must provide this information
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          EA 1 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Black amp White B PERFECT PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 NA 516 3LEFT NA NA NA NA RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          1794-IN002G-EN-P FlexLogix Controller Installation Instructions EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial 19021 01232004 5 Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 4 28 7 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 55 85 NA NA NA NA NA HALF 55 x 85 100 RRD must provide this information Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black 957867-01
          Corp 17501
          Bill To 69
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information
          Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
          This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
          Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
          Generic pub print specs Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
          IN RN pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          UM RM PM pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          AP PP pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          BR pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          Field definitions Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
          Attach Print Specs to PDF
          For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
          RA-QR005C-EN-E 608
Page 19: FlexLogix Controller System - Rockwell Automation...FlexLogix Controller System 3 Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004 Environment and Enclosure Prevent Electrostatic Discharge

FlexLogix Controller System 19

2 Select the appropriate cable

Are you using an isolator

Use this cable

no The 1756-CP3 cable attaches the controller directly to the controller

If you make your own cable it must be shielded and the shields must be tied to the metal shell (that surrounds the pins) on both ends of the cableYou can also use a 1747-CP3 cable (from the SLC product family) This cable has a taller right-angle connector housing than the 1756-CP3 cable

yes The 1761-CBL-AP00 cable (right-angle connector to controller) or the 1761-CBL-PM02 cable (straight connector to the controller) attaches the controller to port 2 on the 1761-NET-AIC isolator The mini-DIN connector is not commercially available so you cannot make this cable

2 RDX

3 TXD

4 DTR

COMMON

6 DSR

7 RTS

8 CTS

9

1 CD

2 RDX

3 TXD

4 DTR

COMMON

6 DSR

7 RTS

8 CTS

9

1 CD

DB-9 right-angle or straight cable end 8-pin mini-DIN cable end

Pin DB-9 end Mini-DIN end1 DCD DCD

2 RxD RxD

3 TxD TxD

4 DTR DTR

5 ground ground

6 DSR DSR

7 RTS RTS

8 CTS CTS

9 na na

1 2

34

5

6 7867

8

9

1

2

3

4

5

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

20 FlexLogix Controller System

3 Connect the appropriate cable to the serial port on the controller

Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding

4 If necessary attach the controller to the isolator

WARNING If you connect or disconnect the serial cable with power applied to this module or the serial device on the other end of the cable an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations

modem

1761-NET-AIC isolator

user-supplied modem cable

1761 cable

system enclosure

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 21

Select the Operating Mode of the Controller

1 Use this table to determine the operating mode of the controller

2 Turn the key on the front panel of the controller to select the mode

If you want to Select one of these modes

Run Program Remote

Run Program Test

turn outputs to the state commanded by the logic of the project

YES YES

turn outputs to their configured state for Program mode

YES YES YES

execute (scan) tasks YES YES YES

change the mode of the controller through software

YES YES YES

download a project YES YES

schedule a ControlNet network YES YES

while online edit the project YES YES YES YES

To select Turn the key to

Remote Run RUN and then to REM

Remote Program PROG and then to REM

Remote Test REM and then go online and select Test mode via the programming software

keyswitch

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

22 FlexLogix Controller System

Monitor the Controller LEDs

FLASH Upgrade the Controllerrsquos Firmware RevisionTo update the firmware of a controller first install a firmware upgrade kit

bull An upgrade kit ships on a supplemental CD along with RSLogix 5000 software

bull To download an upgrade kit go to httpsupportrockwellautomationcom Choose Firmware Updates

Indicator Color Description

RUN off bull no task(s) running

bull controller in Program mode

green bull one or more tasks are running

bull controller is in Run mode

OK off no power applied

red flashing after initially installing the controller - the controller requires a FLASH upgrade to the proper firmware revision see belowafter the controller is operating - recoverable fault

red bull controller faulted

bull clear faults clear memory or replace the controller

green controller OK

BATTERY off battery will support memory

red bull battery may not support memory

bull replace battery

IO off bull controller project not downloaded (the condition after power up)

bull no IO or communications configured

green communicating to all devices

green flashing one or more devices are not responding

LOCALandLOCAL2

off rail is inhibited

green communicating to all devices on that rail

green flashing one or more devices on that rail not responding

red flashing no modules exist on that rail

RS232 off no activity

green data being received or transmitted

FORCE off no forces present

amber forces present

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 23

Update the Controller

1 Connect the controller to the same network as your workstation

2 Start ControlFLASH software

3 Choose Next gt

4 Select the catalog number of the controller and choose Next gt

5 Expand the network until you see the controller If the required network is not shown first configure a driver for the network in RSLinx software

6 Select the controller and choose OK

7 Select the revision level to which you want to update the controller and choose Next gt

8 To start the update of the controller choose Finish and then Yes

After the controller is updated the status box displays Update complete

9 Choose OK

10 To close ControlFLASH software choose Cancel and then Yes

TIP RSLogix 5000 software revision 100 or later lets you update controller firmware as part of the download sequence To update the controller download your project and follow the prompts of the software

IMPORTANT If the Revision list is empty download a new upgrade kit Some older upgrade kits do not work with new controllers

42900

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

24 FlexLogix Controller System

FlexLogix Controller Approximate Mounting Dimensions

19949mm (785in)

849mm (334in) 5043mm (199in)

12197mm (481in)

18296mm (7203in)

8857mm (349in)

10596mm (417in)

10149mm (399in)

64mm (025in)

10457mm (412in)

8724mm (343in)

9296mm (366in)

8857mm (349in)

8014mm (316in)

1016mm (400in)

885mm (035in)

1853mm (730in)

135mm (053in)

825mm (033in)

60mm (024in)

6436mm (253in)

centerline of MTG Hole

centerline of DIN rail

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 25

FlexLogix Extended-Local IO Adapter Approximate Mounting Dimensions

Approximate Mounting Clearance

94mm (37in)

69mm (272in)

11712mm (461in)

8894mm (35in)

8106mm (319in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

26 FlexLogix Controller System

Other PublicationsYou can use the following manuals with this product

You can obtain manuals at wwwtheautomationbookstorecom

Specifications

Documents required for installation details Publication number

Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines 1770-41

Flex 1794-PS3 Power Supply Installation Instructions 1794-571

Flex 1794-PS13 Power Supply Installation Instructions 1794-569

Flex IO Terminal Base Installation Instructions 1794-516

1794-CE1 -CE3 Interconnect Cable Installation Instructions 1794-512

FLEX IO and FLEX Integra IO Technical Data 1794-21

Documents available for further reference Publication number

FlexLogix System User Manual 1794-UM001

Logix5000 Controllers Common Procedures Reference Manual 1756-PM001

Logix5000 Controllers General Instruction Set Reference Manual 1756-RM003

Guidelines for Handling Lithium Batteries AG-54

Category FlexLogix controller(1794-L33 -L34)

FlexLogix extended-local IO adapter (1794-FLA)

user memory 1794-L33 64 KBytes1794-L34 512 KBytes

na

input voltagerating (nominal)range

24V dc192V to 312V dc (includes 5 ac ripple)

isolation voltage(continuous-voltage withstand rating)

30V dcQualification tested to withstand 850V dc for 60 seconds

input current(1) 133A maximum at 192V dc085A maximum at 24V dc

039A maximum at 192V dc025A maximum at 24V dc

power dissipation(2) 255W maximum at 192V204W maximum at 24V dc

75W maximum at 192V60W maximum at 24V dc

backplane (FLEXBUS) current output

653mA maximum 51V dc 653mA maximum 51V dc

thermal dissipation 87BTUhour 192V 256BTUhour 192V

weight 1794-L33 71 kg (156 lbs oz)1794-L34 75 g (166 lbs)(no communication cards installed)

28 kg (62 lbs)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 27

power supply 1794-PS3 or 1794-PS13 ndash In applications that must be compliant with CSA requirements use a Separated Extra-Low Voltage (SELV) power supply that is compliant with IEC 610101 Annex H

power conductors 60deg C (140deg F) minimum copper22 to 14 AWG (0324 to 208 sq mm) stranded364 inch (12mm) insulation maximumlength 10m or less

category 3(2)

power connector torque 5 to 7 inch-pounds (06 to 08Nm)

battery 1756-BA1 (AB part number 94194801)059g lithium

na

serial cable 1761-CBLPM02 to 1761-NET-AIC 1761-CBLPA00 to 1761-NET-AIC1756-CP3 directly to controller1747-CP3 directly to controller

category 3(4)

na

extended local IO cable 1794-CE1 cable (1 foot)1794-CE3 cable (3 feet)

category 3(2)

DIN rail steel 35 x 755mm DIN railA-B part number 199-DR1 46277-3 EN 50022

operating temperature IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad Operating Cold)IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd Operating Dry Heat)IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock)0 to 60degC (32 to 140degF)

storage temperature IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab Un-packaged Non-operating Cold)IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb Un-packaged Non-operating Dry Heat)IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na Un-packaged Non-operating Thermal Shock)ndash40 to 85degC (ndash40 to 185degF)

relative humidity IEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db Un-packaged Non-operating Damp Heat)5 to 95 non-condensing

vibration(3) IEC60068-2-6 (Test Fc Operating) 5g 10-500Hz

shock(3)

operatingnon-operating

IEC60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged shock)

30g50g

emissions CISPR 11Group 1 Class A (with appropriate enclosure)

ESD immunity IEC 61000-4-26kV contact discharges8kV air discharges

Category FlexLogix controller(1794-L33 -L34)

FlexLogix extended-local IO adapter (1794-FLA)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

radiated RF immunity IEC 61000-4-310Vm with 1kHz sine-wave 80AM from 30MHz to 2000MHz10Vm with 200Hz 50 Pulse 100AM at 900Mhz

EFTB immunity IEC 61000-4-4plusmn4kV at 25kHz on power portsplusmn2kV at 5kHz on communications ports

surge transient immunity IEC 61000-4-5plusmn2kV line-earth (CM) on shielded ports

conducted RF immunity IEC 61000-4-610Vrms with 1kHz sine-wave 80AM from 150kHz to 80MHz

enclosure type rating none (open-style)

Certifications(when product is marked)

UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipmentc-UL-us UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous

Locations certified for US and CanadaCSA CSA Certified Process Control EquipmentCSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class I Division 2

Group ABCD Hazardous Locations

CE(5) European Union 89336EEC EMC Directive compliant withEN 50082-2 Industrial ImmunityEN 61326 MeasControlLab Industrial RequirementsEN 61000-6-2 Industrial ImmunityEN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions

C-Tick(5) Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant withASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions

EEx(5) European Union 949EEC ATEX Directive compliant withEN 50021 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n (Zone 2)

(1) This specification is also known as Power Consumption(2) This specification is also known as Heat Dissipation(3) To maintain these vibration and shock specifications you must use DIN rail locks(4) Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing Refer to Publication 1770-41 Industrial

Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines(5) See the Product Certification link at wwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification

details

Category FlexLogix controller(1794-L33 -L34)

FlexLogix extended-local IO adapter (1794-FLA)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004 PN 957867-01Supersedes Publication 1794-IN002F-EN-P - October 2002 Copyright copy 2004 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

  • 1794-IN002G-EN-P FlexLogix Controller System Installation Instructions
    • Tools That You Need
    • Obtain a User Manual
    • Environment and Enclosure
    • Prevent Electrostatic Discharge
    • European Hazardous Location Approval
    • North American Hazardous Location Approval
    • Removal and Insertion Under Power
    • Other Considerations
    • What You Need to Do
    • Step 1 Verify That You Have All the Components
    • Step 2 Install the Battery
    • Step 3 Install Communication Daughtercards (optional)
    • Step 4 Install the Controller
    • Step 5 Install the Extended-Local Adapter (optional)
    • Make an RS-232 Connection to the Controller
    • Select the Operating Mode of the Controller
    • Monitor the Controller LEDs
    • FLASH Upgrade the Controllerrsquos Firmware Revision
    • Update the Controller
    • FlexLogix Controller Approximate Mounting Dimensions
    • FlexLogix Extended-Local IO Adapter Approximate Mounting Dimensions
    • Approximate Mounting Clearance
    • Other Publications
    • Specifications
      • Back Cover
        • Intro

          ampLRA-QR005B-EN-E 308

          Generic pub print specs

          ampCItem Setup Sheet for Conversion Transfers
          ampLJIT-D-print SpreadsheetampCRA-QR005C-EN-EampRampD ampT

          IN RN pub type specs

          UM RM PM pub type specs

          AP PP pub type specs

          BR pub type specs

          Field definitions

          ampL04032006ampRampP
          PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
          EA = Each
          PK = Pack
          PD = Pad
          RL = Roll
          BK = Book
          CT = Carton
          BX = Box
          ST = Set
          Multiple Order Qty
          Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
          Business Group
          The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
          CorporateBusiness Development
          Finance
          Human Resources
          IT
          Logistics
          Manufacturing
          Marketing Commercial
          Marketing Europe
          Marketing Other
          Operations
          Order Services
          Other
          Process Improvement
          Procurement
          Quality
          Sales
          Max Order Quantity
          Presale items = 100
          Postsale items = 5
          NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
          Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
          Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
          Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
          BindingStitching
          For a Form (F) use
          CARBONLESS
          CUTSHEET
          ENVELOPE
          For a Book (B) use
          LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
          PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
          PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
          SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
          STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
          STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
          STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
          THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
          THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
          WIRE O Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
          Saddle-Stitch Items
          20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
          19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
          18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
          All page quantities must be divisible by 4
          Tape Bound Items
          125 sheets max on 20 no cover
          120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Perfect Bound Items
          475 sheets max on 20 no cover
          470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Double Wire Bound Items
          40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Coil Bound Items
          290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Sides Printed
          Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
          Simplex = Single-sided printing
          Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
          Number of Forms to a Sheet
          Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
          Number of Sheets Required to Print
          Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
          Paper Stock Type
          Description
          PLAIN Bond
          ACNTCVR Accent Cover
          BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
          BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
          C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
          C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
          C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
          C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
          CARD Card Stock
          CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
          CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
          COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
          CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
          CUSTOM Custom
          CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
          ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
          ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
          ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
          GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
          GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
          HOTSTEXT Hots Text
          INDEX Index
          LABEL80 80 Up Label
          MICROPRT Micro Print
          OFFSET Offset
          PART2 2 Part
          PART3 3 Part
          PART4 4 Part
          PART5 5 Part
          PART6 6 Part
          PERF 12 inch Perfed
          PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
          PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
          PREPERF Pre-Perforated
          RECYL Recycled
          SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
          SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
          SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
          TAG Tag
          TEXT Text
          TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
          TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
          TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
          TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
          VELLUM Vellum
          VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
          WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
          WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
          WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
          Paper Stock Color
          Black
          Blue
          Buff
          Canary
          Cherry
          Clear
          Cream
          Custom
          Goldrenrod
          Gray
          Green
          Ivory
          Lavender
          Manilla
          NCRPinkCanary
          NCRWhiteBlue
          NCRWhiteBlueCanary
          NCRWhiteCanary
          NCRWhiteCanaryPink
          NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
          NCRWhiteGreen
          NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
          NCRWhitePink
          NCRWhiteWhite
          Opaque
          Orange
          Orchid
          Peach
          Pink
          Purple
          Salmon
          Tan
          Violet
          White
          Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
          11 x 17
          18 x 24 Poster
          24 x 36 Poster
          3 x 5
          36 x 24 Poster
          4 x 6
          475 x 7
          475 x 775
          55 x 85
          6 x 4
          7 x 9
          7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
          85 x 11
          825 x 10875
          825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
          8375 x 10875
          9 x 12
          A4
          A5
          Other - Custom size listed below
          Drilling Locations
          1CENTER
          1LEFTTOP
          1TOPCENTER
          2LEFT
          2LEFT2TOP
          2TOP
          2TOP2LEFT
          2TOP3LEFT
          2TOP5LEFT
          2TOP5RIGHT
          3BOTTOM
          3LEFT
          3LEFT2TOP
          3LEFT3TOP
          3RIGHT
          3TOP
          3TOP5LEFT
          5BOTTOM
          5CENTER
          5LEFT
          5RIGHT
          5RIGHT2TOP
          5TOP
          For TRI fold - select Z or C type Description
          HALF Half
          C C Fold
          DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
          OFFSETZ Offset Z
          SAMPLE See Sample
          SHORT Short Fold
          V V Fold
          Z Z Fold
          Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
          Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
          77 or more pages 1
          33 to 76 pages 25
          3 to 32 pages 50
          1 or 2 pages 100
          Comments
          CoverText Stock Spine
          100 Gloss Cover If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
          100 Gloss Text
          100 Text
          10pt C1S Cover
          10pt C2S Cover
          10pt C2S Text
          10pt Text Stock
          110 White Index
          12pt C1S Cover
          20 White Opaque Bond
          50 Colored Offset
          50 White Offset
          50 White Opaque
          60 Cover Stock
          60 White Offset
          80 Gloss Cover
          80 Gloss Text
          8pt C1S White
          90 White Index
          CoverText Ink
          Black
          Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
          Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
          4 color
          4 color over black
          4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
          4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
          4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
          4 color + aqueous
          4 color + varnish
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 50 RRD must provide this information
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 RRD must provide this information
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          EA 1 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Black amp White B PERFECT PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 NA 516 3LEFT NA NA NA NA RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          1794-IN002G-EN-P FlexLogix Controller Installation Instructions EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial 19021 01232004 5 Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 4 28 7 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 55 85 NA NA NA NA NA HALF 55 x 85 100 RRD must provide this information Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black 957867-01
          Corp 17501
          Bill To 69
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information
          Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
          This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
          Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
          Generic pub print specs Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
          IN RN pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          UM RM PM pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          AP PP pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          BR pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          Field definitions Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
          Attach Print Specs to PDF
          For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
          RA-QR005C-EN-E 608
Page 20: FlexLogix Controller System - Rockwell Automation...FlexLogix Controller System 3 Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004 Environment and Enclosure Prevent Electrostatic Discharge

20 FlexLogix Controller System

3 Connect the appropriate cable to the serial port on the controller

Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding

4 If necessary attach the controller to the isolator

WARNING If you connect or disconnect the serial cable with power applied to this module or the serial device on the other end of the cable an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations

modem

1761-NET-AIC isolator

user-supplied modem cable

1761 cable

system enclosure

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 21

Select the Operating Mode of the Controller

1 Use this table to determine the operating mode of the controller

2 Turn the key on the front panel of the controller to select the mode

If you want to Select one of these modes

Run Program Remote

Run Program Test

turn outputs to the state commanded by the logic of the project

YES YES

turn outputs to their configured state for Program mode

YES YES YES

execute (scan) tasks YES YES YES

change the mode of the controller through software

YES YES YES

download a project YES YES

schedule a ControlNet network YES YES

while online edit the project YES YES YES YES

To select Turn the key to

Remote Run RUN and then to REM

Remote Program PROG and then to REM

Remote Test REM and then go online and select Test mode via the programming software

keyswitch

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

22 FlexLogix Controller System

Monitor the Controller LEDs

FLASH Upgrade the Controllerrsquos Firmware RevisionTo update the firmware of a controller first install a firmware upgrade kit

bull An upgrade kit ships on a supplemental CD along with RSLogix 5000 software

bull To download an upgrade kit go to httpsupportrockwellautomationcom Choose Firmware Updates

Indicator Color Description

RUN off bull no task(s) running

bull controller in Program mode

green bull one or more tasks are running

bull controller is in Run mode

OK off no power applied

red flashing after initially installing the controller - the controller requires a FLASH upgrade to the proper firmware revision see belowafter the controller is operating - recoverable fault

red bull controller faulted

bull clear faults clear memory or replace the controller

green controller OK

BATTERY off battery will support memory

red bull battery may not support memory

bull replace battery

IO off bull controller project not downloaded (the condition after power up)

bull no IO or communications configured

green communicating to all devices

green flashing one or more devices are not responding

LOCALandLOCAL2

off rail is inhibited

green communicating to all devices on that rail

green flashing one or more devices on that rail not responding

red flashing no modules exist on that rail

RS232 off no activity

green data being received or transmitted

FORCE off no forces present

amber forces present

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 23

Update the Controller

1 Connect the controller to the same network as your workstation

2 Start ControlFLASH software

3 Choose Next gt

4 Select the catalog number of the controller and choose Next gt

5 Expand the network until you see the controller If the required network is not shown first configure a driver for the network in RSLinx software

6 Select the controller and choose OK

7 Select the revision level to which you want to update the controller and choose Next gt

8 To start the update of the controller choose Finish and then Yes

After the controller is updated the status box displays Update complete

9 Choose OK

10 To close ControlFLASH software choose Cancel and then Yes

TIP RSLogix 5000 software revision 100 or later lets you update controller firmware as part of the download sequence To update the controller download your project and follow the prompts of the software

IMPORTANT If the Revision list is empty download a new upgrade kit Some older upgrade kits do not work with new controllers

42900

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

24 FlexLogix Controller System

FlexLogix Controller Approximate Mounting Dimensions

19949mm (785in)

849mm (334in) 5043mm (199in)

12197mm (481in)

18296mm (7203in)

8857mm (349in)

10596mm (417in)

10149mm (399in)

64mm (025in)

10457mm (412in)

8724mm (343in)

9296mm (366in)

8857mm (349in)

8014mm (316in)

1016mm (400in)

885mm (035in)

1853mm (730in)

135mm (053in)

825mm (033in)

60mm (024in)

6436mm (253in)

centerline of MTG Hole

centerline of DIN rail

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 25

FlexLogix Extended-Local IO Adapter Approximate Mounting Dimensions

Approximate Mounting Clearance

94mm (37in)

69mm (272in)

11712mm (461in)

8894mm (35in)

8106mm (319in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

26 FlexLogix Controller System

Other PublicationsYou can use the following manuals with this product

You can obtain manuals at wwwtheautomationbookstorecom

Specifications

Documents required for installation details Publication number

Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines 1770-41

Flex 1794-PS3 Power Supply Installation Instructions 1794-571

Flex 1794-PS13 Power Supply Installation Instructions 1794-569

Flex IO Terminal Base Installation Instructions 1794-516

1794-CE1 -CE3 Interconnect Cable Installation Instructions 1794-512

FLEX IO and FLEX Integra IO Technical Data 1794-21

Documents available for further reference Publication number

FlexLogix System User Manual 1794-UM001

Logix5000 Controllers Common Procedures Reference Manual 1756-PM001

Logix5000 Controllers General Instruction Set Reference Manual 1756-RM003

Guidelines for Handling Lithium Batteries AG-54

Category FlexLogix controller(1794-L33 -L34)

FlexLogix extended-local IO adapter (1794-FLA)

user memory 1794-L33 64 KBytes1794-L34 512 KBytes

na

input voltagerating (nominal)range

24V dc192V to 312V dc (includes 5 ac ripple)

isolation voltage(continuous-voltage withstand rating)

30V dcQualification tested to withstand 850V dc for 60 seconds

input current(1) 133A maximum at 192V dc085A maximum at 24V dc

039A maximum at 192V dc025A maximum at 24V dc

power dissipation(2) 255W maximum at 192V204W maximum at 24V dc

75W maximum at 192V60W maximum at 24V dc

backplane (FLEXBUS) current output

653mA maximum 51V dc 653mA maximum 51V dc

thermal dissipation 87BTUhour 192V 256BTUhour 192V

weight 1794-L33 71 kg (156 lbs oz)1794-L34 75 g (166 lbs)(no communication cards installed)

28 kg (62 lbs)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 27

power supply 1794-PS3 or 1794-PS13 ndash In applications that must be compliant with CSA requirements use a Separated Extra-Low Voltage (SELV) power supply that is compliant with IEC 610101 Annex H

power conductors 60deg C (140deg F) minimum copper22 to 14 AWG (0324 to 208 sq mm) stranded364 inch (12mm) insulation maximumlength 10m or less

category 3(2)

power connector torque 5 to 7 inch-pounds (06 to 08Nm)

battery 1756-BA1 (AB part number 94194801)059g lithium

na

serial cable 1761-CBLPM02 to 1761-NET-AIC 1761-CBLPA00 to 1761-NET-AIC1756-CP3 directly to controller1747-CP3 directly to controller

category 3(4)

na

extended local IO cable 1794-CE1 cable (1 foot)1794-CE3 cable (3 feet)

category 3(2)

DIN rail steel 35 x 755mm DIN railA-B part number 199-DR1 46277-3 EN 50022

operating temperature IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad Operating Cold)IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd Operating Dry Heat)IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock)0 to 60degC (32 to 140degF)

storage temperature IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab Un-packaged Non-operating Cold)IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb Un-packaged Non-operating Dry Heat)IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na Un-packaged Non-operating Thermal Shock)ndash40 to 85degC (ndash40 to 185degF)

relative humidity IEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db Un-packaged Non-operating Damp Heat)5 to 95 non-condensing

vibration(3) IEC60068-2-6 (Test Fc Operating) 5g 10-500Hz

shock(3)

operatingnon-operating

IEC60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged shock)

30g50g

emissions CISPR 11Group 1 Class A (with appropriate enclosure)

ESD immunity IEC 61000-4-26kV contact discharges8kV air discharges

Category FlexLogix controller(1794-L33 -L34)

FlexLogix extended-local IO adapter (1794-FLA)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

radiated RF immunity IEC 61000-4-310Vm with 1kHz sine-wave 80AM from 30MHz to 2000MHz10Vm with 200Hz 50 Pulse 100AM at 900Mhz

EFTB immunity IEC 61000-4-4plusmn4kV at 25kHz on power portsplusmn2kV at 5kHz on communications ports

surge transient immunity IEC 61000-4-5plusmn2kV line-earth (CM) on shielded ports

conducted RF immunity IEC 61000-4-610Vrms with 1kHz sine-wave 80AM from 150kHz to 80MHz

enclosure type rating none (open-style)

Certifications(when product is marked)

UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipmentc-UL-us UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous

Locations certified for US and CanadaCSA CSA Certified Process Control EquipmentCSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class I Division 2

Group ABCD Hazardous Locations

CE(5) European Union 89336EEC EMC Directive compliant withEN 50082-2 Industrial ImmunityEN 61326 MeasControlLab Industrial RequirementsEN 61000-6-2 Industrial ImmunityEN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions

C-Tick(5) Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant withASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions

EEx(5) European Union 949EEC ATEX Directive compliant withEN 50021 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n (Zone 2)

(1) This specification is also known as Power Consumption(2) This specification is also known as Heat Dissipation(3) To maintain these vibration and shock specifications you must use DIN rail locks(4) Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing Refer to Publication 1770-41 Industrial

Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines(5) See the Product Certification link at wwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification

details

Category FlexLogix controller(1794-L33 -L34)

FlexLogix extended-local IO adapter (1794-FLA)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004 PN 957867-01Supersedes Publication 1794-IN002F-EN-P - October 2002 Copyright copy 2004 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

  • 1794-IN002G-EN-P FlexLogix Controller System Installation Instructions
    • Tools That You Need
    • Obtain a User Manual
    • Environment and Enclosure
    • Prevent Electrostatic Discharge
    • European Hazardous Location Approval
    • North American Hazardous Location Approval
    • Removal and Insertion Under Power
    • Other Considerations
    • What You Need to Do
    • Step 1 Verify That You Have All the Components
    • Step 2 Install the Battery
    • Step 3 Install Communication Daughtercards (optional)
    • Step 4 Install the Controller
    • Step 5 Install the Extended-Local Adapter (optional)
    • Make an RS-232 Connection to the Controller
    • Select the Operating Mode of the Controller
    • Monitor the Controller LEDs
    • FLASH Upgrade the Controllerrsquos Firmware Revision
    • Update the Controller
    • FlexLogix Controller Approximate Mounting Dimensions
    • FlexLogix Extended-Local IO Adapter Approximate Mounting Dimensions
    • Approximate Mounting Clearance
    • Other Publications
    • Specifications
      • Back Cover
        • Intro

          ampLRA-QR005B-EN-E 308

          Generic pub print specs

          ampCItem Setup Sheet for Conversion Transfers
          ampLJIT-D-print SpreadsheetampCRA-QR005C-EN-EampRampD ampT

          IN RN pub type specs

          UM RM PM pub type specs

          AP PP pub type specs

          BR pub type specs

          Field definitions

          ampL04032006ampRampP
          PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
          EA = Each
          PK = Pack
          PD = Pad
          RL = Roll
          BK = Book
          CT = Carton
          BX = Box
          ST = Set
          Multiple Order Qty
          Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
          Business Group
          The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
          CorporateBusiness Development
          Finance
          Human Resources
          IT
          Logistics
          Manufacturing
          Marketing Commercial
          Marketing Europe
          Marketing Other
          Operations
          Order Services
          Other
          Process Improvement
          Procurement
          Quality
          Sales
          Max Order Quantity
          Presale items = 100
          Postsale items = 5
          NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
          Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
          Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
          Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
          BindingStitching
          For a Form (F) use
          CARBONLESS
          CUTSHEET
          ENVELOPE
          For a Book (B) use
          LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
          PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
          PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
          SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
          STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
          STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
          STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
          THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
          THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
          WIRE O Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
          Saddle-Stitch Items
          20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
          19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
          18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
          All page quantities must be divisible by 4
          Tape Bound Items
          125 sheets max on 20 no cover
          120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Perfect Bound Items
          475 sheets max on 20 no cover
          470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Double Wire Bound Items
          40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Coil Bound Items
          290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Sides Printed
          Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
          Simplex = Single-sided printing
          Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
          Number of Forms to a Sheet
          Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
          Number of Sheets Required to Print
          Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
          Paper Stock Type
          Description
          PLAIN Bond
          ACNTCVR Accent Cover
          BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
          BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
          C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
          C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
          C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
          C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
          CARD Card Stock
          CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
          CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
          COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
          CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
          CUSTOM Custom
          CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
          ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
          ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
          ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
          GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
          GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
          HOTSTEXT Hots Text
          INDEX Index
          LABEL80 80 Up Label
          MICROPRT Micro Print
          OFFSET Offset
          PART2 2 Part
          PART3 3 Part
          PART4 4 Part
          PART5 5 Part
          PART6 6 Part
          PERF 12 inch Perfed
          PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
          PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
          PREPERF Pre-Perforated
          RECYL Recycled
          SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
          SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
          SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
          TAG Tag
          TEXT Text
          TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
          TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
          TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
          TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
          VELLUM Vellum
          VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
          WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
          WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
          WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
          Paper Stock Color
          Black
          Blue
          Buff
          Canary
          Cherry
          Clear
          Cream
          Custom
          Goldrenrod
          Gray
          Green
          Ivory
          Lavender
          Manilla
          NCRPinkCanary
          NCRWhiteBlue
          NCRWhiteBlueCanary
          NCRWhiteCanary
          NCRWhiteCanaryPink
          NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
          NCRWhiteGreen
          NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
          NCRWhitePink
          NCRWhiteWhite
          Opaque
          Orange
          Orchid
          Peach
          Pink
          Purple
          Salmon
          Tan
          Violet
          White
          Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
          11 x 17
          18 x 24 Poster
          24 x 36 Poster
          3 x 5
          36 x 24 Poster
          4 x 6
          475 x 7
          475 x 775
          55 x 85
          6 x 4
          7 x 9
          7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
          85 x 11
          825 x 10875
          825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
          8375 x 10875
          9 x 12
          A4
          A5
          Other - Custom size listed below
          Drilling Locations
          1CENTER
          1LEFTTOP
          1TOPCENTER
          2LEFT
          2LEFT2TOP
          2TOP
          2TOP2LEFT
          2TOP3LEFT
          2TOP5LEFT
          2TOP5RIGHT
          3BOTTOM
          3LEFT
          3LEFT2TOP
          3LEFT3TOP
          3RIGHT
          3TOP
          3TOP5LEFT
          5BOTTOM
          5CENTER
          5LEFT
          5RIGHT
          5RIGHT2TOP
          5TOP
          For TRI fold - select Z or C type Description
          HALF Half
          C C Fold
          DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
          OFFSETZ Offset Z
          SAMPLE See Sample
          SHORT Short Fold
          V V Fold
          Z Z Fold
          Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
          Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
          77 or more pages 1
          33 to 76 pages 25
          3 to 32 pages 50
          1 or 2 pages 100
          Comments
          CoverText Stock Spine
          100 Gloss Cover If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
          100 Gloss Text
          100 Text
          10pt C1S Cover
          10pt C2S Cover
          10pt C2S Text
          10pt Text Stock
          110 White Index
          12pt C1S Cover
          20 White Opaque Bond
          50 Colored Offset
          50 White Offset
          50 White Opaque
          60 Cover Stock
          60 White Offset
          80 Gloss Cover
          80 Gloss Text
          8pt C1S White
          90 White Index
          CoverText Ink
          Black
          Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
          Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
          4 color
          4 color over black
          4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
          4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
          4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
          4 color + aqueous
          4 color + varnish
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 50 RRD must provide this information
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 RRD must provide this information
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          EA 1 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Black amp White B PERFECT PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 NA 516 3LEFT NA NA NA NA RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          1794-IN002G-EN-P FlexLogix Controller Installation Instructions EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial 19021 01232004 5 Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 4 28 7 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 55 85 NA NA NA NA NA HALF 55 x 85 100 RRD must provide this information Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black 957867-01
          Corp 17501
          Bill To 69
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information
          Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
          This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
          Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
          Generic pub print specs Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
          IN RN pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          UM RM PM pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          AP PP pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          BR pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          Field definitions Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
          Attach Print Specs to PDF
          For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
          RA-QR005C-EN-E 608
Page 21: FlexLogix Controller System - Rockwell Automation...FlexLogix Controller System 3 Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004 Environment and Enclosure Prevent Electrostatic Discharge

FlexLogix Controller System 21

Select the Operating Mode of the Controller

1 Use this table to determine the operating mode of the controller

2 Turn the key on the front panel of the controller to select the mode

If you want to Select one of these modes

Run Program Remote

Run Program Test

turn outputs to the state commanded by the logic of the project

YES YES

turn outputs to their configured state for Program mode

YES YES YES

execute (scan) tasks YES YES YES

change the mode of the controller through software

YES YES YES

download a project YES YES

schedule a ControlNet network YES YES

while online edit the project YES YES YES YES

To select Turn the key to

Remote Run RUN and then to REM

Remote Program PROG and then to REM

Remote Test REM and then go online and select Test mode via the programming software

keyswitch

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

22 FlexLogix Controller System

Monitor the Controller LEDs

FLASH Upgrade the Controllerrsquos Firmware RevisionTo update the firmware of a controller first install a firmware upgrade kit

bull An upgrade kit ships on a supplemental CD along with RSLogix 5000 software

bull To download an upgrade kit go to httpsupportrockwellautomationcom Choose Firmware Updates

Indicator Color Description

RUN off bull no task(s) running

bull controller in Program mode

green bull one or more tasks are running

bull controller is in Run mode

OK off no power applied

red flashing after initially installing the controller - the controller requires a FLASH upgrade to the proper firmware revision see belowafter the controller is operating - recoverable fault

red bull controller faulted

bull clear faults clear memory or replace the controller

green controller OK

BATTERY off battery will support memory

red bull battery may not support memory

bull replace battery

IO off bull controller project not downloaded (the condition after power up)

bull no IO or communications configured

green communicating to all devices

green flashing one or more devices are not responding

LOCALandLOCAL2

off rail is inhibited

green communicating to all devices on that rail

green flashing one or more devices on that rail not responding

red flashing no modules exist on that rail

RS232 off no activity

green data being received or transmitted

FORCE off no forces present

amber forces present

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 23

Update the Controller

1 Connect the controller to the same network as your workstation

2 Start ControlFLASH software

3 Choose Next gt

4 Select the catalog number of the controller and choose Next gt

5 Expand the network until you see the controller If the required network is not shown first configure a driver for the network in RSLinx software

6 Select the controller and choose OK

7 Select the revision level to which you want to update the controller and choose Next gt

8 To start the update of the controller choose Finish and then Yes

After the controller is updated the status box displays Update complete

9 Choose OK

10 To close ControlFLASH software choose Cancel and then Yes

TIP RSLogix 5000 software revision 100 or later lets you update controller firmware as part of the download sequence To update the controller download your project and follow the prompts of the software

IMPORTANT If the Revision list is empty download a new upgrade kit Some older upgrade kits do not work with new controllers

42900

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

24 FlexLogix Controller System

FlexLogix Controller Approximate Mounting Dimensions

19949mm (785in)

849mm (334in) 5043mm (199in)

12197mm (481in)

18296mm (7203in)

8857mm (349in)

10596mm (417in)

10149mm (399in)

64mm (025in)

10457mm (412in)

8724mm (343in)

9296mm (366in)

8857mm (349in)

8014mm (316in)

1016mm (400in)

885mm (035in)

1853mm (730in)

135mm (053in)

825mm (033in)

60mm (024in)

6436mm (253in)

centerline of MTG Hole

centerline of DIN rail

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 25

FlexLogix Extended-Local IO Adapter Approximate Mounting Dimensions

Approximate Mounting Clearance

94mm (37in)

69mm (272in)

11712mm (461in)

8894mm (35in)

8106mm (319in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

26 FlexLogix Controller System

Other PublicationsYou can use the following manuals with this product

You can obtain manuals at wwwtheautomationbookstorecom

Specifications

Documents required for installation details Publication number

Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines 1770-41

Flex 1794-PS3 Power Supply Installation Instructions 1794-571

Flex 1794-PS13 Power Supply Installation Instructions 1794-569

Flex IO Terminal Base Installation Instructions 1794-516

1794-CE1 -CE3 Interconnect Cable Installation Instructions 1794-512

FLEX IO and FLEX Integra IO Technical Data 1794-21

Documents available for further reference Publication number

FlexLogix System User Manual 1794-UM001

Logix5000 Controllers Common Procedures Reference Manual 1756-PM001

Logix5000 Controllers General Instruction Set Reference Manual 1756-RM003

Guidelines for Handling Lithium Batteries AG-54

Category FlexLogix controller(1794-L33 -L34)

FlexLogix extended-local IO adapter (1794-FLA)

user memory 1794-L33 64 KBytes1794-L34 512 KBytes

na

input voltagerating (nominal)range

24V dc192V to 312V dc (includes 5 ac ripple)

isolation voltage(continuous-voltage withstand rating)

30V dcQualification tested to withstand 850V dc for 60 seconds

input current(1) 133A maximum at 192V dc085A maximum at 24V dc

039A maximum at 192V dc025A maximum at 24V dc

power dissipation(2) 255W maximum at 192V204W maximum at 24V dc

75W maximum at 192V60W maximum at 24V dc

backplane (FLEXBUS) current output

653mA maximum 51V dc 653mA maximum 51V dc

thermal dissipation 87BTUhour 192V 256BTUhour 192V

weight 1794-L33 71 kg (156 lbs oz)1794-L34 75 g (166 lbs)(no communication cards installed)

28 kg (62 lbs)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 27

power supply 1794-PS3 or 1794-PS13 ndash In applications that must be compliant with CSA requirements use a Separated Extra-Low Voltage (SELV) power supply that is compliant with IEC 610101 Annex H

power conductors 60deg C (140deg F) minimum copper22 to 14 AWG (0324 to 208 sq mm) stranded364 inch (12mm) insulation maximumlength 10m or less

category 3(2)

power connector torque 5 to 7 inch-pounds (06 to 08Nm)

battery 1756-BA1 (AB part number 94194801)059g lithium

na

serial cable 1761-CBLPM02 to 1761-NET-AIC 1761-CBLPA00 to 1761-NET-AIC1756-CP3 directly to controller1747-CP3 directly to controller

category 3(4)

na

extended local IO cable 1794-CE1 cable (1 foot)1794-CE3 cable (3 feet)

category 3(2)

DIN rail steel 35 x 755mm DIN railA-B part number 199-DR1 46277-3 EN 50022

operating temperature IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad Operating Cold)IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd Operating Dry Heat)IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock)0 to 60degC (32 to 140degF)

storage temperature IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab Un-packaged Non-operating Cold)IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb Un-packaged Non-operating Dry Heat)IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na Un-packaged Non-operating Thermal Shock)ndash40 to 85degC (ndash40 to 185degF)

relative humidity IEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db Un-packaged Non-operating Damp Heat)5 to 95 non-condensing

vibration(3) IEC60068-2-6 (Test Fc Operating) 5g 10-500Hz

shock(3)

operatingnon-operating

IEC60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged shock)

30g50g

emissions CISPR 11Group 1 Class A (with appropriate enclosure)

ESD immunity IEC 61000-4-26kV contact discharges8kV air discharges

Category FlexLogix controller(1794-L33 -L34)

FlexLogix extended-local IO adapter (1794-FLA)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

radiated RF immunity IEC 61000-4-310Vm with 1kHz sine-wave 80AM from 30MHz to 2000MHz10Vm with 200Hz 50 Pulse 100AM at 900Mhz

EFTB immunity IEC 61000-4-4plusmn4kV at 25kHz on power portsplusmn2kV at 5kHz on communications ports

surge transient immunity IEC 61000-4-5plusmn2kV line-earth (CM) on shielded ports

conducted RF immunity IEC 61000-4-610Vrms with 1kHz sine-wave 80AM from 150kHz to 80MHz

enclosure type rating none (open-style)

Certifications(when product is marked)

UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipmentc-UL-us UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous

Locations certified for US and CanadaCSA CSA Certified Process Control EquipmentCSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class I Division 2

Group ABCD Hazardous Locations

CE(5) European Union 89336EEC EMC Directive compliant withEN 50082-2 Industrial ImmunityEN 61326 MeasControlLab Industrial RequirementsEN 61000-6-2 Industrial ImmunityEN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions

C-Tick(5) Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant withASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions

EEx(5) European Union 949EEC ATEX Directive compliant withEN 50021 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n (Zone 2)

(1) This specification is also known as Power Consumption(2) This specification is also known as Heat Dissipation(3) To maintain these vibration and shock specifications you must use DIN rail locks(4) Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing Refer to Publication 1770-41 Industrial

Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines(5) See the Product Certification link at wwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification

details

Category FlexLogix controller(1794-L33 -L34)

FlexLogix extended-local IO adapter (1794-FLA)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004 PN 957867-01Supersedes Publication 1794-IN002F-EN-P - October 2002 Copyright copy 2004 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

  • 1794-IN002G-EN-P FlexLogix Controller System Installation Instructions
    • Tools That You Need
    • Obtain a User Manual
    • Environment and Enclosure
    • Prevent Electrostatic Discharge
    • European Hazardous Location Approval
    • North American Hazardous Location Approval
    • Removal and Insertion Under Power
    • Other Considerations
    • What You Need to Do
    • Step 1 Verify That You Have All the Components
    • Step 2 Install the Battery
    • Step 3 Install Communication Daughtercards (optional)
    • Step 4 Install the Controller
    • Step 5 Install the Extended-Local Adapter (optional)
    • Make an RS-232 Connection to the Controller
    • Select the Operating Mode of the Controller
    • Monitor the Controller LEDs
    • FLASH Upgrade the Controllerrsquos Firmware Revision
    • Update the Controller
    • FlexLogix Controller Approximate Mounting Dimensions
    • FlexLogix Extended-Local IO Adapter Approximate Mounting Dimensions
    • Approximate Mounting Clearance
    • Other Publications
    • Specifications
      • Back Cover
        • Intro

          ampLRA-QR005B-EN-E 308

          Generic pub print specs

          ampCItem Setup Sheet for Conversion Transfers
          ampLJIT-D-print SpreadsheetampCRA-QR005C-EN-EampRampD ampT

          IN RN pub type specs

          UM RM PM pub type specs

          AP PP pub type specs

          BR pub type specs

          Field definitions

          ampL04032006ampRampP
          PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
          EA = Each
          PK = Pack
          PD = Pad
          RL = Roll
          BK = Book
          CT = Carton
          BX = Box
          ST = Set
          Multiple Order Qty
          Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
          Business Group
          The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
          CorporateBusiness Development
          Finance
          Human Resources
          IT
          Logistics
          Manufacturing
          Marketing Commercial
          Marketing Europe
          Marketing Other
          Operations
          Order Services
          Other
          Process Improvement
          Procurement
          Quality
          Sales
          Max Order Quantity
          Presale items = 100
          Postsale items = 5
          NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
          Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
          Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
          Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
          BindingStitching
          For a Form (F) use
          CARBONLESS
          CUTSHEET
          ENVELOPE
          For a Book (B) use
          LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
          PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
          PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
          SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
          STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
          STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
          STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
          THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
          THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
          WIRE O Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
          Saddle-Stitch Items
          20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
          19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
          18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
          All page quantities must be divisible by 4
          Tape Bound Items
          125 sheets max on 20 no cover
          120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Perfect Bound Items
          475 sheets max on 20 no cover
          470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Double Wire Bound Items
          40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Coil Bound Items
          290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Sides Printed
          Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
          Simplex = Single-sided printing
          Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
          Number of Forms to a Sheet
          Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
          Number of Sheets Required to Print
          Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
          Paper Stock Type
          Description
          PLAIN Bond
          ACNTCVR Accent Cover
          BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
          BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
          C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
          C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
          C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
          C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
          CARD Card Stock
          CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
          CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
          COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
          CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
          CUSTOM Custom
          CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
          ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
          ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
          ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
          GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
          GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
          HOTSTEXT Hots Text
          INDEX Index
          LABEL80 80 Up Label
          MICROPRT Micro Print
          OFFSET Offset
          PART2 2 Part
          PART3 3 Part
          PART4 4 Part
          PART5 5 Part
          PART6 6 Part
          PERF 12 inch Perfed
          PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
          PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
          PREPERF Pre-Perforated
          RECYL Recycled
          SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
          SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
          SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
          TAG Tag
          TEXT Text
          TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
          TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
          TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
          TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
          VELLUM Vellum
          VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
          WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
          WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
          WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
          Paper Stock Color
          Black
          Blue
          Buff
          Canary
          Cherry
          Clear
          Cream
          Custom
          Goldrenrod
          Gray
          Green
          Ivory
          Lavender
          Manilla
          NCRPinkCanary
          NCRWhiteBlue
          NCRWhiteBlueCanary
          NCRWhiteCanary
          NCRWhiteCanaryPink
          NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
          NCRWhiteGreen
          NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
          NCRWhitePink
          NCRWhiteWhite
          Opaque
          Orange
          Orchid
          Peach
          Pink
          Purple
          Salmon
          Tan
          Violet
          White
          Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
          11 x 17
          18 x 24 Poster
          24 x 36 Poster
          3 x 5
          36 x 24 Poster
          4 x 6
          475 x 7
          475 x 775
          55 x 85
          6 x 4
          7 x 9
          7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
          85 x 11
          825 x 10875
          825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
          8375 x 10875
          9 x 12
          A4
          A5
          Other - Custom size listed below
          Drilling Locations
          1CENTER
          1LEFTTOP
          1TOPCENTER
          2LEFT
          2LEFT2TOP
          2TOP
          2TOP2LEFT
          2TOP3LEFT
          2TOP5LEFT
          2TOP5RIGHT
          3BOTTOM
          3LEFT
          3LEFT2TOP
          3LEFT3TOP
          3RIGHT
          3TOP
          3TOP5LEFT
          5BOTTOM
          5CENTER
          5LEFT
          5RIGHT
          5RIGHT2TOP
          5TOP
          For TRI fold - select Z or C type Description
          HALF Half
          C C Fold
          DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
          OFFSETZ Offset Z
          SAMPLE See Sample
          SHORT Short Fold
          V V Fold
          Z Z Fold
          Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
          Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
          77 or more pages 1
          33 to 76 pages 25
          3 to 32 pages 50
          1 or 2 pages 100
          Comments
          CoverText Stock Spine
          100 Gloss Cover If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
          100 Gloss Text
          100 Text
          10pt C1S Cover
          10pt C2S Cover
          10pt C2S Text
          10pt Text Stock
          110 White Index
          12pt C1S Cover
          20 White Opaque Bond
          50 Colored Offset
          50 White Offset
          50 White Opaque
          60 Cover Stock
          60 White Offset
          80 Gloss Cover
          80 Gloss Text
          8pt C1S White
          90 White Index
          CoverText Ink
          Black
          Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
          Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
          4 color
          4 color over black
          4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
          4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
          4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
          4 color + aqueous
          4 color + varnish
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 50 RRD must provide this information
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 RRD must provide this information
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          EA 1 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Black amp White B PERFECT PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 NA 516 3LEFT NA NA NA NA RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          1794-IN002G-EN-P FlexLogix Controller Installation Instructions EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial 19021 01232004 5 Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 4 28 7 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 55 85 NA NA NA NA NA HALF 55 x 85 100 RRD must provide this information Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black 957867-01
          Corp 17501
          Bill To 69
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information
          Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
          This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
          Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
          Generic pub print specs Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
          IN RN pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          UM RM PM pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          AP PP pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          BR pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          Field definitions Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
          Attach Print Specs to PDF
          For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
          RA-QR005C-EN-E 608
Page 22: FlexLogix Controller System - Rockwell Automation...FlexLogix Controller System 3 Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004 Environment and Enclosure Prevent Electrostatic Discharge

22 FlexLogix Controller System

Monitor the Controller LEDs

FLASH Upgrade the Controllerrsquos Firmware RevisionTo update the firmware of a controller first install a firmware upgrade kit

bull An upgrade kit ships on a supplemental CD along with RSLogix 5000 software

bull To download an upgrade kit go to httpsupportrockwellautomationcom Choose Firmware Updates

Indicator Color Description

RUN off bull no task(s) running

bull controller in Program mode

green bull one or more tasks are running

bull controller is in Run mode

OK off no power applied

red flashing after initially installing the controller - the controller requires a FLASH upgrade to the proper firmware revision see belowafter the controller is operating - recoverable fault

red bull controller faulted

bull clear faults clear memory or replace the controller

green controller OK

BATTERY off battery will support memory

red bull battery may not support memory

bull replace battery

IO off bull controller project not downloaded (the condition after power up)

bull no IO or communications configured

green communicating to all devices

green flashing one or more devices are not responding

LOCALandLOCAL2

off rail is inhibited

green communicating to all devices on that rail

green flashing one or more devices on that rail not responding

red flashing no modules exist on that rail

RS232 off no activity

green data being received or transmitted

FORCE off no forces present

amber forces present

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 23

Update the Controller

1 Connect the controller to the same network as your workstation

2 Start ControlFLASH software

3 Choose Next gt

4 Select the catalog number of the controller and choose Next gt

5 Expand the network until you see the controller If the required network is not shown first configure a driver for the network in RSLinx software

6 Select the controller and choose OK

7 Select the revision level to which you want to update the controller and choose Next gt

8 To start the update of the controller choose Finish and then Yes

After the controller is updated the status box displays Update complete

9 Choose OK

10 To close ControlFLASH software choose Cancel and then Yes

TIP RSLogix 5000 software revision 100 or later lets you update controller firmware as part of the download sequence To update the controller download your project and follow the prompts of the software

IMPORTANT If the Revision list is empty download a new upgrade kit Some older upgrade kits do not work with new controllers

42900

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

24 FlexLogix Controller System

FlexLogix Controller Approximate Mounting Dimensions

19949mm (785in)

849mm (334in) 5043mm (199in)

12197mm (481in)

18296mm (7203in)

8857mm (349in)

10596mm (417in)

10149mm (399in)

64mm (025in)

10457mm (412in)

8724mm (343in)

9296mm (366in)

8857mm (349in)

8014mm (316in)

1016mm (400in)

885mm (035in)

1853mm (730in)

135mm (053in)

825mm (033in)

60mm (024in)

6436mm (253in)

centerline of MTG Hole

centerline of DIN rail

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 25

FlexLogix Extended-Local IO Adapter Approximate Mounting Dimensions

Approximate Mounting Clearance

94mm (37in)

69mm (272in)

11712mm (461in)

8894mm (35in)

8106mm (319in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

26 FlexLogix Controller System

Other PublicationsYou can use the following manuals with this product

You can obtain manuals at wwwtheautomationbookstorecom

Specifications

Documents required for installation details Publication number

Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines 1770-41

Flex 1794-PS3 Power Supply Installation Instructions 1794-571

Flex 1794-PS13 Power Supply Installation Instructions 1794-569

Flex IO Terminal Base Installation Instructions 1794-516

1794-CE1 -CE3 Interconnect Cable Installation Instructions 1794-512

FLEX IO and FLEX Integra IO Technical Data 1794-21

Documents available for further reference Publication number

FlexLogix System User Manual 1794-UM001

Logix5000 Controllers Common Procedures Reference Manual 1756-PM001

Logix5000 Controllers General Instruction Set Reference Manual 1756-RM003

Guidelines for Handling Lithium Batteries AG-54

Category FlexLogix controller(1794-L33 -L34)

FlexLogix extended-local IO adapter (1794-FLA)

user memory 1794-L33 64 KBytes1794-L34 512 KBytes

na

input voltagerating (nominal)range

24V dc192V to 312V dc (includes 5 ac ripple)

isolation voltage(continuous-voltage withstand rating)

30V dcQualification tested to withstand 850V dc for 60 seconds

input current(1) 133A maximum at 192V dc085A maximum at 24V dc

039A maximum at 192V dc025A maximum at 24V dc

power dissipation(2) 255W maximum at 192V204W maximum at 24V dc

75W maximum at 192V60W maximum at 24V dc

backplane (FLEXBUS) current output

653mA maximum 51V dc 653mA maximum 51V dc

thermal dissipation 87BTUhour 192V 256BTUhour 192V

weight 1794-L33 71 kg (156 lbs oz)1794-L34 75 g (166 lbs)(no communication cards installed)

28 kg (62 lbs)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 27

power supply 1794-PS3 or 1794-PS13 ndash In applications that must be compliant with CSA requirements use a Separated Extra-Low Voltage (SELV) power supply that is compliant with IEC 610101 Annex H

power conductors 60deg C (140deg F) minimum copper22 to 14 AWG (0324 to 208 sq mm) stranded364 inch (12mm) insulation maximumlength 10m or less

category 3(2)

power connector torque 5 to 7 inch-pounds (06 to 08Nm)

battery 1756-BA1 (AB part number 94194801)059g lithium

na

serial cable 1761-CBLPM02 to 1761-NET-AIC 1761-CBLPA00 to 1761-NET-AIC1756-CP3 directly to controller1747-CP3 directly to controller

category 3(4)

na

extended local IO cable 1794-CE1 cable (1 foot)1794-CE3 cable (3 feet)

category 3(2)

DIN rail steel 35 x 755mm DIN railA-B part number 199-DR1 46277-3 EN 50022

operating temperature IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad Operating Cold)IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd Operating Dry Heat)IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock)0 to 60degC (32 to 140degF)

storage temperature IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab Un-packaged Non-operating Cold)IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb Un-packaged Non-operating Dry Heat)IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na Un-packaged Non-operating Thermal Shock)ndash40 to 85degC (ndash40 to 185degF)

relative humidity IEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db Un-packaged Non-operating Damp Heat)5 to 95 non-condensing

vibration(3) IEC60068-2-6 (Test Fc Operating) 5g 10-500Hz

shock(3)

operatingnon-operating

IEC60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged shock)

30g50g

emissions CISPR 11Group 1 Class A (with appropriate enclosure)

ESD immunity IEC 61000-4-26kV contact discharges8kV air discharges

Category FlexLogix controller(1794-L33 -L34)

FlexLogix extended-local IO adapter (1794-FLA)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

radiated RF immunity IEC 61000-4-310Vm with 1kHz sine-wave 80AM from 30MHz to 2000MHz10Vm with 200Hz 50 Pulse 100AM at 900Mhz

EFTB immunity IEC 61000-4-4plusmn4kV at 25kHz on power portsplusmn2kV at 5kHz on communications ports

surge transient immunity IEC 61000-4-5plusmn2kV line-earth (CM) on shielded ports

conducted RF immunity IEC 61000-4-610Vrms with 1kHz sine-wave 80AM from 150kHz to 80MHz

enclosure type rating none (open-style)

Certifications(when product is marked)

UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipmentc-UL-us UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous

Locations certified for US and CanadaCSA CSA Certified Process Control EquipmentCSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class I Division 2

Group ABCD Hazardous Locations

CE(5) European Union 89336EEC EMC Directive compliant withEN 50082-2 Industrial ImmunityEN 61326 MeasControlLab Industrial RequirementsEN 61000-6-2 Industrial ImmunityEN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions

C-Tick(5) Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant withASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions

EEx(5) European Union 949EEC ATEX Directive compliant withEN 50021 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n (Zone 2)

(1) This specification is also known as Power Consumption(2) This specification is also known as Heat Dissipation(3) To maintain these vibration and shock specifications you must use DIN rail locks(4) Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing Refer to Publication 1770-41 Industrial

Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines(5) See the Product Certification link at wwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification

details

Category FlexLogix controller(1794-L33 -L34)

FlexLogix extended-local IO adapter (1794-FLA)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004 PN 957867-01Supersedes Publication 1794-IN002F-EN-P - October 2002 Copyright copy 2004 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

  • 1794-IN002G-EN-P FlexLogix Controller System Installation Instructions
    • Tools That You Need
    • Obtain a User Manual
    • Environment and Enclosure
    • Prevent Electrostatic Discharge
    • European Hazardous Location Approval
    • North American Hazardous Location Approval
    • Removal and Insertion Under Power
    • Other Considerations
    • What You Need to Do
    • Step 1 Verify That You Have All the Components
    • Step 2 Install the Battery
    • Step 3 Install Communication Daughtercards (optional)
    • Step 4 Install the Controller
    • Step 5 Install the Extended-Local Adapter (optional)
    • Make an RS-232 Connection to the Controller
    • Select the Operating Mode of the Controller
    • Monitor the Controller LEDs
    • FLASH Upgrade the Controllerrsquos Firmware Revision
    • Update the Controller
    • FlexLogix Controller Approximate Mounting Dimensions
    • FlexLogix Extended-Local IO Adapter Approximate Mounting Dimensions
    • Approximate Mounting Clearance
    • Other Publications
    • Specifications
      • Back Cover
        • Intro

          ampLRA-QR005B-EN-E 308

          Generic pub print specs

          ampCItem Setup Sheet for Conversion Transfers
          ampLJIT-D-print SpreadsheetampCRA-QR005C-EN-EampRampD ampT

          IN RN pub type specs

          UM RM PM pub type specs

          AP PP pub type specs

          BR pub type specs

          Field definitions

          ampL04032006ampRampP
          PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
          EA = Each
          PK = Pack
          PD = Pad
          RL = Roll
          BK = Book
          CT = Carton
          BX = Box
          ST = Set
          Multiple Order Qty
          Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
          Business Group
          The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
          CorporateBusiness Development
          Finance
          Human Resources
          IT
          Logistics
          Manufacturing
          Marketing Commercial
          Marketing Europe
          Marketing Other
          Operations
          Order Services
          Other
          Process Improvement
          Procurement
          Quality
          Sales
          Max Order Quantity
          Presale items = 100
          Postsale items = 5
          NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
          Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
          Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
          Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
          BindingStitching
          For a Form (F) use
          CARBONLESS
          CUTSHEET
          ENVELOPE
          For a Book (B) use
          LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
          PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
          PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
          SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
          STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
          STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
          STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
          THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
          THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
          WIRE O Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
          Saddle-Stitch Items
          20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
          19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
          18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
          All page quantities must be divisible by 4
          Tape Bound Items
          125 sheets max on 20 no cover
          120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Perfect Bound Items
          475 sheets max on 20 no cover
          470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Double Wire Bound Items
          40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Coil Bound Items
          290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Sides Printed
          Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
          Simplex = Single-sided printing
          Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
          Number of Forms to a Sheet
          Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
          Number of Sheets Required to Print
          Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
          Paper Stock Type
          Description
          PLAIN Bond
          ACNTCVR Accent Cover
          BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
          BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
          C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
          C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
          C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
          C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
          CARD Card Stock
          CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
          CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
          COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
          CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
          CUSTOM Custom
          CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
          ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
          ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
          ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
          GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
          GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
          HOTSTEXT Hots Text
          INDEX Index
          LABEL80 80 Up Label
          MICROPRT Micro Print
          OFFSET Offset
          PART2 2 Part
          PART3 3 Part
          PART4 4 Part
          PART5 5 Part
          PART6 6 Part
          PERF 12 inch Perfed
          PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
          PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
          PREPERF Pre-Perforated
          RECYL Recycled
          SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
          SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
          SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
          TAG Tag
          TEXT Text
          TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
          TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
          TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
          TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
          VELLUM Vellum
          VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
          WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
          WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
          WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
          Paper Stock Color
          Black
          Blue
          Buff
          Canary
          Cherry
          Clear
          Cream
          Custom
          Goldrenrod
          Gray
          Green
          Ivory
          Lavender
          Manilla
          NCRPinkCanary
          NCRWhiteBlue
          NCRWhiteBlueCanary
          NCRWhiteCanary
          NCRWhiteCanaryPink
          NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
          NCRWhiteGreen
          NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
          NCRWhitePink
          NCRWhiteWhite
          Opaque
          Orange
          Orchid
          Peach
          Pink
          Purple
          Salmon
          Tan
          Violet
          White
          Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
          11 x 17
          18 x 24 Poster
          24 x 36 Poster
          3 x 5
          36 x 24 Poster
          4 x 6
          475 x 7
          475 x 775
          55 x 85
          6 x 4
          7 x 9
          7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
          85 x 11
          825 x 10875
          825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
          8375 x 10875
          9 x 12
          A4
          A5
          Other - Custom size listed below
          Drilling Locations
          1CENTER
          1LEFTTOP
          1TOPCENTER
          2LEFT
          2LEFT2TOP
          2TOP
          2TOP2LEFT
          2TOP3LEFT
          2TOP5LEFT
          2TOP5RIGHT
          3BOTTOM
          3LEFT
          3LEFT2TOP
          3LEFT3TOP
          3RIGHT
          3TOP
          3TOP5LEFT
          5BOTTOM
          5CENTER
          5LEFT
          5RIGHT
          5RIGHT2TOP
          5TOP
          For TRI fold - select Z or C type Description
          HALF Half
          C C Fold
          DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
          OFFSETZ Offset Z
          SAMPLE See Sample
          SHORT Short Fold
          V V Fold
          Z Z Fold
          Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
          Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
          77 or more pages 1
          33 to 76 pages 25
          3 to 32 pages 50
          1 or 2 pages 100
          Comments
          CoverText Stock Spine
          100 Gloss Cover If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
          100 Gloss Text
          100 Text
          10pt C1S Cover
          10pt C2S Cover
          10pt C2S Text
          10pt Text Stock
          110 White Index
          12pt C1S Cover
          20 White Opaque Bond
          50 Colored Offset
          50 White Offset
          50 White Opaque
          60 Cover Stock
          60 White Offset
          80 Gloss Cover
          80 Gloss Text
          8pt C1S White
          90 White Index
          CoverText Ink
          Black
          Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
          Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
          4 color
          4 color over black
          4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
          4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
          4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
          4 color + aqueous
          4 color + varnish
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 50 RRD must provide this information
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 RRD must provide this information
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          EA 1 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Black amp White B PERFECT PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 NA 516 3LEFT NA NA NA NA RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          1794-IN002G-EN-P FlexLogix Controller Installation Instructions EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial 19021 01232004 5 Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 4 28 7 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 55 85 NA NA NA NA NA HALF 55 x 85 100 RRD must provide this information Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black 957867-01
          Corp 17501
          Bill To 69
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information
          Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
          This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
          Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
          Generic pub print specs Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
          IN RN pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          UM RM PM pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          AP PP pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          BR pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          Field definitions Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
          Attach Print Specs to PDF
          For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
          RA-QR005C-EN-E 608
Page 23: FlexLogix Controller System - Rockwell Automation...FlexLogix Controller System 3 Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004 Environment and Enclosure Prevent Electrostatic Discharge

FlexLogix Controller System 23

Update the Controller

1 Connect the controller to the same network as your workstation

2 Start ControlFLASH software

3 Choose Next gt

4 Select the catalog number of the controller and choose Next gt

5 Expand the network until you see the controller If the required network is not shown first configure a driver for the network in RSLinx software

6 Select the controller and choose OK

7 Select the revision level to which you want to update the controller and choose Next gt

8 To start the update of the controller choose Finish and then Yes

After the controller is updated the status box displays Update complete

9 Choose OK

10 To close ControlFLASH software choose Cancel and then Yes

TIP RSLogix 5000 software revision 100 or later lets you update controller firmware as part of the download sequence To update the controller download your project and follow the prompts of the software

IMPORTANT If the Revision list is empty download a new upgrade kit Some older upgrade kits do not work with new controllers

42900

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

24 FlexLogix Controller System

FlexLogix Controller Approximate Mounting Dimensions

19949mm (785in)

849mm (334in) 5043mm (199in)

12197mm (481in)

18296mm (7203in)

8857mm (349in)

10596mm (417in)

10149mm (399in)

64mm (025in)

10457mm (412in)

8724mm (343in)

9296mm (366in)

8857mm (349in)

8014mm (316in)

1016mm (400in)

885mm (035in)

1853mm (730in)

135mm (053in)

825mm (033in)

60mm (024in)

6436mm (253in)

centerline of MTG Hole

centerline of DIN rail

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 25

FlexLogix Extended-Local IO Adapter Approximate Mounting Dimensions

Approximate Mounting Clearance

94mm (37in)

69mm (272in)

11712mm (461in)

8894mm (35in)

8106mm (319in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

26 FlexLogix Controller System

Other PublicationsYou can use the following manuals with this product

You can obtain manuals at wwwtheautomationbookstorecom

Specifications

Documents required for installation details Publication number

Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines 1770-41

Flex 1794-PS3 Power Supply Installation Instructions 1794-571

Flex 1794-PS13 Power Supply Installation Instructions 1794-569

Flex IO Terminal Base Installation Instructions 1794-516

1794-CE1 -CE3 Interconnect Cable Installation Instructions 1794-512

FLEX IO and FLEX Integra IO Technical Data 1794-21

Documents available for further reference Publication number

FlexLogix System User Manual 1794-UM001

Logix5000 Controllers Common Procedures Reference Manual 1756-PM001

Logix5000 Controllers General Instruction Set Reference Manual 1756-RM003

Guidelines for Handling Lithium Batteries AG-54

Category FlexLogix controller(1794-L33 -L34)

FlexLogix extended-local IO adapter (1794-FLA)

user memory 1794-L33 64 KBytes1794-L34 512 KBytes

na

input voltagerating (nominal)range

24V dc192V to 312V dc (includes 5 ac ripple)

isolation voltage(continuous-voltage withstand rating)

30V dcQualification tested to withstand 850V dc for 60 seconds

input current(1) 133A maximum at 192V dc085A maximum at 24V dc

039A maximum at 192V dc025A maximum at 24V dc

power dissipation(2) 255W maximum at 192V204W maximum at 24V dc

75W maximum at 192V60W maximum at 24V dc

backplane (FLEXBUS) current output

653mA maximum 51V dc 653mA maximum 51V dc

thermal dissipation 87BTUhour 192V 256BTUhour 192V

weight 1794-L33 71 kg (156 lbs oz)1794-L34 75 g (166 lbs)(no communication cards installed)

28 kg (62 lbs)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 27

power supply 1794-PS3 or 1794-PS13 ndash In applications that must be compliant with CSA requirements use a Separated Extra-Low Voltage (SELV) power supply that is compliant with IEC 610101 Annex H

power conductors 60deg C (140deg F) minimum copper22 to 14 AWG (0324 to 208 sq mm) stranded364 inch (12mm) insulation maximumlength 10m or less

category 3(2)

power connector torque 5 to 7 inch-pounds (06 to 08Nm)

battery 1756-BA1 (AB part number 94194801)059g lithium

na

serial cable 1761-CBLPM02 to 1761-NET-AIC 1761-CBLPA00 to 1761-NET-AIC1756-CP3 directly to controller1747-CP3 directly to controller

category 3(4)

na

extended local IO cable 1794-CE1 cable (1 foot)1794-CE3 cable (3 feet)

category 3(2)

DIN rail steel 35 x 755mm DIN railA-B part number 199-DR1 46277-3 EN 50022

operating temperature IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad Operating Cold)IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd Operating Dry Heat)IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock)0 to 60degC (32 to 140degF)

storage temperature IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab Un-packaged Non-operating Cold)IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb Un-packaged Non-operating Dry Heat)IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na Un-packaged Non-operating Thermal Shock)ndash40 to 85degC (ndash40 to 185degF)

relative humidity IEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db Un-packaged Non-operating Damp Heat)5 to 95 non-condensing

vibration(3) IEC60068-2-6 (Test Fc Operating) 5g 10-500Hz

shock(3)

operatingnon-operating

IEC60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged shock)

30g50g

emissions CISPR 11Group 1 Class A (with appropriate enclosure)

ESD immunity IEC 61000-4-26kV contact discharges8kV air discharges

Category FlexLogix controller(1794-L33 -L34)

FlexLogix extended-local IO adapter (1794-FLA)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

radiated RF immunity IEC 61000-4-310Vm with 1kHz sine-wave 80AM from 30MHz to 2000MHz10Vm with 200Hz 50 Pulse 100AM at 900Mhz

EFTB immunity IEC 61000-4-4plusmn4kV at 25kHz on power portsplusmn2kV at 5kHz on communications ports

surge transient immunity IEC 61000-4-5plusmn2kV line-earth (CM) on shielded ports

conducted RF immunity IEC 61000-4-610Vrms with 1kHz sine-wave 80AM from 150kHz to 80MHz

enclosure type rating none (open-style)

Certifications(when product is marked)

UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipmentc-UL-us UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous

Locations certified for US and CanadaCSA CSA Certified Process Control EquipmentCSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class I Division 2

Group ABCD Hazardous Locations

CE(5) European Union 89336EEC EMC Directive compliant withEN 50082-2 Industrial ImmunityEN 61326 MeasControlLab Industrial RequirementsEN 61000-6-2 Industrial ImmunityEN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions

C-Tick(5) Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant withASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions

EEx(5) European Union 949EEC ATEX Directive compliant withEN 50021 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n (Zone 2)

(1) This specification is also known as Power Consumption(2) This specification is also known as Heat Dissipation(3) To maintain these vibration and shock specifications you must use DIN rail locks(4) Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing Refer to Publication 1770-41 Industrial

Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines(5) See the Product Certification link at wwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification

details

Category FlexLogix controller(1794-L33 -L34)

FlexLogix extended-local IO adapter (1794-FLA)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004 PN 957867-01Supersedes Publication 1794-IN002F-EN-P - October 2002 Copyright copy 2004 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

  • 1794-IN002G-EN-P FlexLogix Controller System Installation Instructions
    • Tools That You Need
    • Obtain a User Manual
    • Environment and Enclosure
    • Prevent Electrostatic Discharge
    • European Hazardous Location Approval
    • North American Hazardous Location Approval
    • Removal and Insertion Under Power
    • Other Considerations
    • What You Need to Do
    • Step 1 Verify That You Have All the Components
    • Step 2 Install the Battery
    • Step 3 Install Communication Daughtercards (optional)
    • Step 4 Install the Controller
    • Step 5 Install the Extended-Local Adapter (optional)
    • Make an RS-232 Connection to the Controller
    • Select the Operating Mode of the Controller
    • Monitor the Controller LEDs
    • FLASH Upgrade the Controllerrsquos Firmware Revision
    • Update the Controller
    • FlexLogix Controller Approximate Mounting Dimensions
    • FlexLogix Extended-Local IO Adapter Approximate Mounting Dimensions
    • Approximate Mounting Clearance
    • Other Publications
    • Specifications
      • Back Cover
        • Intro

          ampLRA-QR005B-EN-E 308

          Generic pub print specs

          ampCItem Setup Sheet for Conversion Transfers
          ampLJIT-D-print SpreadsheetampCRA-QR005C-EN-EampRampD ampT

          IN RN pub type specs

          UM RM PM pub type specs

          AP PP pub type specs

          BR pub type specs

          Field definitions

          ampL04032006ampRampP
          PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
          EA = Each
          PK = Pack
          PD = Pad
          RL = Roll
          BK = Book
          CT = Carton
          BX = Box
          ST = Set
          Multiple Order Qty
          Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
          Business Group
          The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
          CorporateBusiness Development
          Finance
          Human Resources
          IT
          Logistics
          Manufacturing
          Marketing Commercial
          Marketing Europe
          Marketing Other
          Operations
          Order Services
          Other
          Process Improvement
          Procurement
          Quality
          Sales
          Max Order Quantity
          Presale items = 100
          Postsale items = 5
          NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
          Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
          Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
          Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
          BindingStitching
          For a Form (F) use
          CARBONLESS
          CUTSHEET
          ENVELOPE
          For a Book (B) use
          LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
          PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
          PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
          SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
          STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
          STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
          STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
          THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
          THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
          WIRE O Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
          Saddle-Stitch Items
          20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
          19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
          18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
          All page quantities must be divisible by 4
          Tape Bound Items
          125 sheets max on 20 no cover
          120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Perfect Bound Items
          475 sheets max on 20 no cover
          470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Double Wire Bound Items
          40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Coil Bound Items
          290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Sides Printed
          Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
          Simplex = Single-sided printing
          Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
          Number of Forms to a Sheet
          Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
          Number of Sheets Required to Print
          Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
          Paper Stock Type
          Description
          PLAIN Bond
          ACNTCVR Accent Cover
          BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
          BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
          C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
          C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
          C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
          C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
          CARD Card Stock
          CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
          CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
          COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
          CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
          CUSTOM Custom
          CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
          ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
          ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
          ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
          GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
          GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
          HOTSTEXT Hots Text
          INDEX Index
          LABEL80 80 Up Label
          MICROPRT Micro Print
          OFFSET Offset
          PART2 2 Part
          PART3 3 Part
          PART4 4 Part
          PART5 5 Part
          PART6 6 Part
          PERF 12 inch Perfed
          PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
          PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
          PREPERF Pre-Perforated
          RECYL Recycled
          SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
          SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
          SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
          TAG Tag
          TEXT Text
          TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
          TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
          TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
          TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
          VELLUM Vellum
          VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
          WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
          WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
          WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
          Paper Stock Color
          Black
          Blue
          Buff
          Canary
          Cherry
          Clear
          Cream
          Custom
          Goldrenrod
          Gray
          Green
          Ivory
          Lavender
          Manilla
          NCRPinkCanary
          NCRWhiteBlue
          NCRWhiteBlueCanary
          NCRWhiteCanary
          NCRWhiteCanaryPink
          NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
          NCRWhiteGreen
          NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
          NCRWhitePink
          NCRWhiteWhite
          Opaque
          Orange
          Orchid
          Peach
          Pink
          Purple
          Salmon
          Tan
          Violet
          White
          Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
          11 x 17
          18 x 24 Poster
          24 x 36 Poster
          3 x 5
          36 x 24 Poster
          4 x 6
          475 x 7
          475 x 775
          55 x 85
          6 x 4
          7 x 9
          7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
          85 x 11
          825 x 10875
          825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
          8375 x 10875
          9 x 12
          A4
          A5
          Other - Custom size listed below
          Drilling Locations
          1CENTER
          1LEFTTOP
          1TOPCENTER
          2LEFT
          2LEFT2TOP
          2TOP
          2TOP2LEFT
          2TOP3LEFT
          2TOP5LEFT
          2TOP5RIGHT
          3BOTTOM
          3LEFT
          3LEFT2TOP
          3LEFT3TOP
          3RIGHT
          3TOP
          3TOP5LEFT
          5BOTTOM
          5CENTER
          5LEFT
          5RIGHT
          5RIGHT2TOP
          5TOP
          For TRI fold - select Z or C type Description
          HALF Half
          C C Fold
          DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
          OFFSETZ Offset Z
          SAMPLE See Sample
          SHORT Short Fold
          V V Fold
          Z Z Fold
          Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
          Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
          77 or more pages 1
          33 to 76 pages 25
          3 to 32 pages 50
          1 or 2 pages 100
          Comments
          CoverText Stock Spine
          100 Gloss Cover If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
          100 Gloss Text
          100 Text
          10pt C1S Cover
          10pt C2S Cover
          10pt C2S Text
          10pt Text Stock
          110 White Index
          12pt C1S Cover
          20 White Opaque Bond
          50 Colored Offset
          50 White Offset
          50 White Opaque
          60 Cover Stock
          60 White Offset
          80 Gloss Cover
          80 Gloss Text
          8pt C1S White
          90 White Index
          CoverText Ink
          Black
          Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
          Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
          4 color
          4 color over black
          4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
          4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
          4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
          4 color + aqueous
          4 color + varnish
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 50 RRD must provide this information
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 RRD must provide this information
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          EA 1 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Black amp White B PERFECT PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 NA 516 3LEFT NA NA NA NA RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          1794-IN002G-EN-P FlexLogix Controller Installation Instructions EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial 19021 01232004 5 Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 4 28 7 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 55 85 NA NA NA NA NA HALF 55 x 85 100 RRD must provide this information Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black 957867-01
          Corp 17501
          Bill To 69
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information
          Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
          This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
          Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
          Generic pub print specs Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
          IN RN pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          UM RM PM pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          AP PP pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          BR pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          Field definitions Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
          Attach Print Specs to PDF
          For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
          RA-QR005C-EN-E 608
Page 24: FlexLogix Controller System - Rockwell Automation...FlexLogix Controller System 3 Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004 Environment and Enclosure Prevent Electrostatic Discharge

24 FlexLogix Controller System

FlexLogix Controller Approximate Mounting Dimensions

19949mm (785in)

849mm (334in) 5043mm (199in)

12197mm (481in)

18296mm (7203in)

8857mm (349in)

10596mm (417in)

10149mm (399in)

64mm (025in)

10457mm (412in)

8724mm (343in)

9296mm (366in)

8857mm (349in)

8014mm (316in)

1016mm (400in)

885mm (035in)

1853mm (730in)

135mm (053in)

825mm (033in)

60mm (024in)

6436mm (253in)

centerline of MTG Hole

centerline of DIN rail

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 25

FlexLogix Extended-Local IO Adapter Approximate Mounting Dimensions

Approximate Mounting Clearance

94mm (37in)

69mm (272in)

11712mm (461in)

8894mm (35in)

8106mm (319in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

26 FlexLogix Controller System

Other PublicationsYou can use the following manuals with this product

You can obtain manuals at wwwtheautomationbookstorecom

Specifications

Documents required for installation details Publication number

Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines 1770-41

Flex 1794-PS3 Power Supply Installation Instructions 1794-571

Flex 1794-PS13 Power Supply Installation Instructions 1794-569

Flex IO Terminal Base Installation Instructions 1794-516

1794-CE1 -CE3 Interconnect Cable Installation Instructions 1794-512

FLEX IO and FLEX Integra IO Technical Data 1794-21

Documents available for further reference Publication number

FlexLogix System User Manual 1794-UM001

Logix5000 Controllers Common Procedures Reference Manual 1756-PM001

Logix5000 Controllers General Instruction Set Reference Manual 1756-RM003

Guidelines for Handling Lithium Batteries AG-54

Category FlexLogix controller(1794-L33 -L34)

FlexLogix extended-local IO adapter (1794-FLA)

user memory 1794-L33 64 KBytes1794-L34 512 KBytes

na

input voltagerating (nominal)range

24V dc192V to 312V dc (includes 5 ac ripple)

isolation voltage(continuous-voltage withstand rating)

30V dcQualification tested to withstand 850V dc for 60 seconds

input current(1) 133A maximum at 192V dc085A maximum at 24V dc

039A maximum at 192V dc025A maximum at 24V dc

power dissipation(2) 255W maximum at 192V204W maximum at 24V dc

75W maximum at 192V60W maximum at 24V dc

backplane (FLEXBUS) current output

653mA maximum 51V dc 653mA maximum 51V dc

thermal dissipation 87BTUhour 192V 256BTUhour 192V

weight 1794-L33 71 kg (156 lbs oz)1794-L34 75 g (166 lbs)(no communication cards installed)

28 kg (62 lbs)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 27

power supply 1794-PS3 or 1794-PS13 ndash In applications that must be compliant with CSA requirements use a Separated Extra-Low Voltage (SELV) power supply that is compliant with IEC 610101 Annex H

power conductors 60deg C (140deg F) minimum copper22 to 14 AWG (0324 to 208 sq mm) stranded364 inch (12mm) insulation maximumlength 10m or less

category 3(2)

power connector torque 5 to 7 inch-pounds (06 to 08Nm)

battery 1756-BA1 (AB part number 94194801)059g lithium

na

serial cable 1761-CBLPM02 to 1761-NET-AIC 1761-CBLPA00 to 1761-NET-AIC1756-CP3 directly to controller1747-CP3 directly to controller

category 3(4)

na

extended local IO cable 1794-CE1 cable (1 foot)1794-CE3 cable (3 feet)

category 3(2)

DIN rail steel 35 x 755mm DIN railA-B part number 199-DR1 46277-3 EN 50022

operating temperature IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad Operating Cold)IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd Operating Dry Heat)IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock)0 to 60degC (32 to 140degF)

storage temperature IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab Un-packaged Non-operating Cold)IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb Un-packaged Non-operating Dry Heat)IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na Un-packaged Non-operating Thermal Shock)ndash40 to 85degC (ndash40 to 185degF)

relative humidity IEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db Un-packaged Non-operating Damp Heat)5 to 95 non-condensing

vibration(3) IEC60068-2-6 (Test Fc Operating) 5g 10-500Hz

shock(3)

operatingnon-operating

IEC60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged shock)

30g50g

emissions CISPR 11Group 1 Class A (with appropriate enclosure)

ESD immunity IEC 61000-4-26kV contact discharges8kV air discharges

Category FlexLogix controller(1794-L33 -L34)

FlexLogix extended-local IO adapter (1794-FLA)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

radiated RF immunity IEC 61000-4-310Vm with 1kHz sine-wave 80AM from 30MHz to 2000MHz10Vm with 200Hz 50 Pulse 100AM at 900Mhz

EFTB immunity IEC 61000-4-4plusmn4kV at 25kHz on power portsplusmn2kV at 5kHz on communications ports

surge transient immunity IEC 61000-4-5plusmn2kV line-earth (CM) on shielded ports

conducted RF immunity IEC 61000-4-610Vrms with 1kHz sine-wave 80AM from 150kHz to 80MHz

enclosure type rating none (open-style)

Certifications(when product is marked)

UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipmentc-UL-us UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous

Locations certified for US and CanadaCSA CSA Certified Process Control EquipmentCSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class I Division 2

Group ABCD Hazardous Locations

CE(5) European Union 89336EEC EMC Directive compliant withEN 50082-2 Industrial ImmunityEN 61326 MeasControlLab Industrial RequirementsEN 61000-6-2 Industrial ImmunityEN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions

C-Tick(5) Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant withASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions

EEx(5) European Union 949EEC ATEX Directive compliant withEN 50021 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n (Zone 2)

(1) This specification is also known as Power Consumption(2) This specification is also known as Heat Dissipation(3) To maintain these vibration and shock specifications you must use DIN rail locks(4) Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing Refer to Publication 1770-41 Industrial

Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines(5) See the Product Certification link at wwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification

details

Category FlexLogix controller(1794-L33 -L34)

FlexLogix extended-local IO adapter (1794-FLA)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004 PN 957867-01Supersedes Publication 1794-IN002F-EN-P - October 2002 Copyright copy 2004 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

  • 1794-IN002G-EN-P FlexLogix Controller System Installation Instructions
    • Tools That You Need
    • Obtain a User Manual
    • Environment and Enclosure
    • Prevent Electrostatic Discharge
    • European Hazardous Location Approval
    • North American Hazardous Location Approval
    • Removal and Insertion Under Power
    • Other Considerations
    • What You Need to Do
    • Step 1 Verify That You Have All the Components
    • Step 2 Install the Battery
    • Step 3 Install Communication Daughtercards (optional)
    • Step 4 Install the Controller
    • Step 5 Install the Extended-Local Adapter (optional)
    • Make an RS-232 Connection to the Controller
    • Select the Operating Mode of the Controller
    • Monitor the Controller LEDs
    • FLASH Upgrade the Controllerrsquos Firmware Revision
    • Update the Controller
    • FlexLogix Controller Approximate Mounting Dimensions
    • FlexLogix Extended-Local IO Adapter Approximate Mounting Dimensions
    • Approximate Mounting Clearance
    • Other Publications
    • Specifications
      • Back Cover
        • Intro

          ampLRA-QR005B-EN-E 308

          Generic pub print specs

          ampCItem Setup Sheet for Conversion Transfers
          ampLJIT-D-print SpreadsheetampCRA-QR005C-EN-EampRampD ampT

          IN RN pub type specs

          UM RM PM pub type specs

          AP PP pub type specs

          BR pub type specs

          Field definitions

          ampL04032006ampRampP
          PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
          EA = Each
          PK = Pack
          PD = Pad
          RL = Roll
          BK = Book
          CT = Carton
          BX = Box
          ST = Set
          Multiple Order Qty
          Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
          Business Group
          The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
          CorporateBusiness Development
          Finance
          Human Resources
          IT
          Logistics
          Manufacturing
          Marketing Commercial
          Marketing Europe
          Marketing Other
          Operations
          Order Services
          Other
          Process Improvement
          Procurement
          Quality
          Sales
          Max Order Quantity
          Presale items = 100
          Postsale items = 5
          NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
          Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
          Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
          Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
          BindingStitching
          For a Form (F) use
          CARBONLESS
          CUTSHEET
          ENVELOPE
          For a Book (B) use
          LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
          PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
          PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
          SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
          STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
          STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
          STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
          THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
          THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
          WIRE O Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
          Saddle-Stitch Items
          20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
          19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
          18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
          All page quantities must be divisible by 4
          Tape Bound Items
          125 sheets max on 20 no cover
          120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Perfect Bound Items
          475 sheets max on 20 no cover
          470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Double Wire Bound Items
          40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Coil Bound Items
          290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Sides Printed
          Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
          Simplex = Single-sided printing
          Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
          Number of Forms to a Sheet
          Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
          Number of Sheets Required to Print
          Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
          Paper Stock Type
          Description
          PLAIN Bond
          ACNTCVR Accent Cover
          BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
          BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
          C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
          C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
          C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
          C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
          CARD Card Stock
          CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
          CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
          COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
          CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
          CUSTOM Custom
          CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
          ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
          ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
          ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
          GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
          GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
          HOTSTEXT Hots Text
          INDEX Index
          LABEL80 80 Up Label
          MICROPRT Micro Print
          OFFSET Offset
          PART2 2 Part
          PART3 3 Part
          PART4 4 Part
          PART5 5 Part
          PART6 6 Part
          PERF 12 inch Perfed
          PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
          PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
          PREPERF Pre-Perforated
          RECYL Recycled
          SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
          SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
          SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
          TAG Tag
          TEXT Text
          TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
          TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
          TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
          TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
          VELLUM Vellum
          VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
          WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
          WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
          WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
          Paper Stock Color
          Black
          Blue
          Buff
          Canary
          Cherry
          Clear
          Cream
          Custom
          Goldrenrod
          Gray
          Green
          Ivory
          Lavender
          Manilla
          NCRPinkCanary
          NCRWhiteBlue
          NCRWhiteBlueCanary
          NCRWhiteCanary
          NCRWhiteCanaryPink
          NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
          NCRWhiteGreen
          NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
          NCRWhitePink
          NCRWhiteWhite
          Opaque
          Orange
          Orchid
          Peach
          Pink
          Purple
          Salmon
          Tan
          Violet
          White
          Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
          11 x 17
          18 x 24 Poster
          24 x 36 Poster
          3 x 5
          36 x 24 Poster
          4 x 6
          475 x 7
          475 x 775
          55 x 85
          6 x 4
          7 x 9
          7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
          85 x 11
          825 x 10875
          825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
          8375 x 10875
          9 x 12
          A4
          A5
          Other - Custom size listed below
          Drilling Locations
          1CENTER
          1LEFTTOP
          1TOPCENTER
          2LEFT
          2LEFT2TOP
          2TOP
          2TOP2LEFT
          2TOP3LEFT
          2TOP5LEFT
          2TOP5RIGHT
          3BOTTOM
          3LEFT
          3LEFT2TOP
          3LEFT3TOP
          3RIGHT
          3TOP
          3TOP5LEFT
          5BOTTOM
          5CENTER
          5LEFT
          5RIGHT
          5RIGHT2TOP
          5TOP
          For TRI fold - select Z or C type Description
          HALF Half
          C C Fold
          DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
          OFFSETZ Offset Z
          SAMPLE See Sample
          SHORT Short Fold
          V V Fold
          Z Z Fold
          Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
          Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
          77 or more pages 1
          33 to 76 pages 25
          3 to 32 pages 50
          1 or 2 pages 100
          Comments
          CoverText Stock Spine
          100 Gloss Cover If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
          100 Gloss Text
          100 Text
          10pt C1S Cover
          10pt C2S Cover
          10pt C2S Text
          10pt Text Stock
          110 White Index
          12pt C1S Cover
          20 White Opaque Bond
          50 Colored Offset
          50 White Offset
          50 White Opaque
          60 Cover Stock
          60 White Offset
          80 Gloss Cover
          80 Gloss Text
          8pt C1S White
          90 White Index
          CoverText Ink
          Black
          Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
          Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
          4 color
          4 color over black
          4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
          4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
          4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
          4 color + aqueous
          4 color + varnish
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 50 RRD must provide this information
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 RRD must provide this information
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          EA 1 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Black amp White B PERFECT PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 NA 516 3LEFT NA NA NA NA RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          1794-IN002G-EN-P FlexLogix Controller Installation Instructions EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial 19021 01232004 5 Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 4 28 7 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 55 85 NA NA NA NA NA HALF 55 x 85 100 RRD must provide this information Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black 957867-01
          Corp 17501
          Bill To 69
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information
          Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
          This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
          Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
          Generic pub print specs Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
          IN RN pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          UM RM PM pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          AP PP pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          BR pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          Field definitions Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
          Attach Print Specs to PDF
          For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
          RA-QR005C-EN-E 608
Page 25: FlexLogix Controller System - Rockwell Automation...FlexLogix Controller System 3 Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004 Environment and Enclosure Prevent Electrostatic Discharge

FlexLogix Controller System 25

FlexLogix Extended-Local IO Adapter Approximate Mounting Dimensions

Approximate Mounting Clearance

94mm (37in)

69mm (272in)

11712mm (461in)

8894mm (35in)

8106mm (319in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

254 mm (1 in)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

26 FlexLogix Controller System

Other PublicationsYou can use the following manuals with this product

You can obtain manuals at wwwtheautomationbookstorecom

Specifications

Documents required for installation details Publication number

Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines 1770-41

Flex 1794-PS3 Power Supply Installation Instructions 1794-571

Flex 1794-PS13 Power Supply Installation Instructions 1794-569

Flex IO Terminal Base Installation Instructions 1794-516

1794-CE1 -CE3 Interconnect Cable Installation Instructions 1794-512

FLEX IO and FLEX Integra IO Technical Data 1794-21

Documents available for further reference Publication number

FlexLogix System User Manual 1794-UM001

Logix5000 Controllers Common Procedures Reference Manual 1756-PM001

Logix5000 Controllers General Instruction Set Reference Manual 1756-RM003

Guidelines for Handling Lithium Batteries AG-54

Category FlexLogix controller(1794-L33 -L34)

FlexLogix extended-local IO adapter (1794-FLA)

user memory 1794-L33 64 KBytes1794-L34 512 KBytes

na

input voltagerating (nominal)range

24V dc192V to 312V dc (includes 5 ac ripple)

isolation voltage(continuous-voltage withstand rating)

30V dcQualification tested to withstand 850V dc for 60 seconds

input current(1) 133A maximum at 192V dc085A maximum at 24V dc

039A maximum at 192V dc025A maximum at 24V dc

power dissipation(2) 255W maximum at 192V204W maximum at 24V dc

75W maximum at 192V60W maximum at 24V dc

backplane (FLEXBUS) current output

653mA maximum 51V dc 653mA maximum 51V dc

thermal dissipation 87BTUhour 192V 256BTUhour 192V

weight 1794-L33 71 kg (156 lbs oz)1794-L34 75 g (166 lbs)(no communication cards installed)

28 kg (62 lbs)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 27

power supply 1794-PS3 or 1794-PS13 ndash In applications that must be compliant with CSA requirements use a Separated Extra-Low Voltage (SELV) power supply that is compliant with IEC 610101 Annex H

power conductors 60deg C (140deg F) minimum copper22 to 14 AWG (0324 to 208 sq mm) stranded364 inch (12mm) insulation maximumlength 10m or less

category 3(2)

power connector torque 5 to 7 inch-pounds (06 to 08Nm)

battery 1756-BA1 (AB part number 94194801)059g lithium

na

serial cable 1761-CBLPM02 to 1761-NET-AIC 1761-CBLPA00 to 1761-NET-AIC1756-CP3 directly to controller1747-CP3 directly to controller

category 3(4)

na

extended local IO cable 1794-CE1 cable (1 foot)1794-CE3 cable (3 feet)

category 3(2)

DIN rail steel 35 x 755mm DIN railA-B part number 199-DR1 46277-3 EN 50022

operating temperature IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad Operating Cold)IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd Operating Dry Heat)IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock)0 to 60degC (32 to 140degF)

storage temperature IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab Un-packaged Non-operating Cold)IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb Un-packaged Non-operating Dry Heat)IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na Un-packaged Non-operating Thermal Shock)ndash40 to 85degC (ndash40 to 185degF)

relative humidity IEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db Un-packaged Non-operating Damp Heat)5 to 95 non-condensing

vibration(3) IEC60068-2-6 (Test Fc Operating) 5g 10-500Hz

shock(3)

operatingnon-operating

IEC60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged shock)

30g50g

emissions CISPR 11Group 1 Class A (with appropriate enclosure)

ESD immunity IEC 61000-4-26kV contact discharges8kV air discharges

Category FlexLogix controller(1794-L33 -L34)

FlexLogix extended-local IO adapter (1794-FLA)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

radiated RF immunity IEC 61000-4-310Vm with 1kHz sine-wave 80AM from 30MHz to 2000MHz10Vm with 200Hz 50 Pulse 100AM at 900Mhz

EFTB immunity IEC 61000-4-4plusmn4kV at 25kHz on power portsplusmn2kV at 5kHz on communications ports

surge transient immunity IEC 61000-4-5plusmn2kV line-earth (CM) on shielded ports

conducted RF immunity IEC 61000-4-610Vrms with 1kHz sine-wave 80AM from 150kHz to 80MHz

enclosure type rating none (open-style)

Certifications(when product is marked)

UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipmentc-UL-us UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous

Locations certified for US and CanadaCSA CSA Certified Process Control EquipmentCSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class I Division 2

Group ABCD Hazardous Locations

CE(5) European Union 89336EEC EMC Directive compliant withEN 50082-2 Industrial ImmunityEN 61326 MeasControlLab Industrial RequirementsEN 61000-6-2 Industrial ImmunityEN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions

C-Tick(5) Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant withASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions

EEx(5) European Union 949EEC ATEX Directive compliant withEN 50021 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n (Zone 2)

(1) This specification is also known as Power Consumption(2) This specification is also known as Heat Dissipation(3) To maintain these vibration and shock specifications you must use DIN rail locks(4) Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing Refer to Publication 1770-41 Industrial

Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines(5) See the Product Certification link at wwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification

details

Category FlexLogix controller(1794-L33 -L34)

FlexLogix extended-local IO adapter (1794-FLA)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004 PN 957867-01Supersedes Publication 1794-IN002F-EN-P - October 2002 Copyright copy 2004 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

  • 1794-IN002G-EN-P FlexLogix Controller System Installation Instructions
    • Tools That You Need
    • Obtain a User Manual
    • Environment and Enclosure
    • Prevent Electrostatic Discharge
    • European Hazardous Location Approval
    • North American Hazardous Location Approval
    • Removal and Insertion Under Power
    • Other Considerations
    • What You Need to Do
    • Step 1 Verify That You Have All the Components
    • Step 2 Install the Battery
    • Step 3 Install Communication Daughtercards (optional)
    • Step 4 Install the Controller
    • Step 5 Install the Extended-Local Adapter (optional)
    • Make an RS-232 Connection to the Controller
    • Select the Operating Mode of the Controller
    • Monitor the Controller LEDs
    • FLASH Upgrade the Controllerrsquos Firmware Revision
    • Update the Controller
    • FlexLogix Controller Approximate Mounting Dimensions
    • FlexLogix Extended-Local IO Adapter Approximate Mounting Dimensions
    • Approximate Mounting Clearance
    • Other Publications
    • Specifications
      • Back Cover
        • Intro

          ampLRA-QR005B-EN-E 308

          Generic pub print specs

          ampCItem Setup Sheet for Conversion Transfers
          ampLJIT-D-print SpreadsheetampCRA-QR005C-EN-EampRampD ampT

          IN RN pub type specs

          UM RM PM pub type specs

          AP PP pub type specs

          BR pub type specs

          Field definitions

          ampL04032006ampRampP
          PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
          EA = Each
          PK = Pack
          PD = Pad
          RL = Roll
          BK = Book
          CT = Carton
          BX = Box
          ST = Set
          Multiple Order Qty
          Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
          Business Group
          The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
          CorporateBusiness Development
          Finance
          Human Resources
          IT
          Logistics
          Manufacturing
          Marketing Commercial
          Marketing Europe
          Marketing Other
          Operations
          Order Services
          Other
          Process Improvement
          Procurement
          Quality
          Sales
          Max Order Quantity
          Presale items = 100
          Postsale items = 5
          NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
          Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
          Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
          Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
          BindingStitching
          For a Form (F) use
          CARBONLESS
          CUTSHEET
          ENVELOPE
          For a Book (B) use
          LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
          PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
          PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
          SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
          STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
          STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
          STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
          THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
          THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
          WIRE O Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
          Saddle-Stitch Items
          20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
          19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
          18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
          All page quantities must be divisible by 4
          Tape Bound Items
          125 sheets max on 20 no cover
          120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Perfect Bound Items
          475 sheets max on 20 no cover
          470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Double Wire Bound Items
          40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Coil Bound Items
          290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Sides Printed
          Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
          Simplex = Single-sided printing
          Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
          Number of Forms to a Sheet
          Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
          Number of Sheets Required to Print
          Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
          Paper Stock Type
          Description
          PLAIN Bond
          ACNTCVR Accent Cover
          BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
          BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
          C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
          C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
          C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
          C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
          CARD Card Stock
          CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
          CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
          COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
          CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
          CUSTOM Custom
          CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
          ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
          ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
          ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
          GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
          GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
          HOTSTEXT Hots Text
          INDEX Index
          LABEL80 80 Up Label
          MICROPRT Micro Print
          OFFSET Offset
          PART2 2 Part
          PART3 3 Part
          PART4 4 Part
          PART5 5 Part
          PART6 6 Part
          PERF 12 inch Perfed
          PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
          PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
          PREPERF Pre-Perforated
          RECYL Recycled
          SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
          SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
          SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
          TAG Tag
          TEXT Text
          TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
          TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
          TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
          TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
          VELLUM Vellum
          VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
          WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
          WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
          WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
          Paper Stock Color
          Black
          Blue
          Buff
          Canary
          Cherry
          Clear
          Cream
          Custom
          Goldrenrod
          Gray
          Green
          Ivory
          Lavender
          Manilla
          NCRPinkCanary
          NCRWhiteBlue
          NCRWhiteBlueCanary
          NCRWhiteCanary
          NCRWhiteCanaryPink
          NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
          NCRWhiteGreen
          NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
          NCRWhitePink
          NCRWhiteWhite
          Opaque
          Orange
          Orchid
          Peach
          Pink
          Purple
          Salmon
          Tan
          Violet
          White
          Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
          11 x 17
          18 x 24 Poster
          24 x 36 Poster
          3 x 5
          36 x 24 Poster
          4 x 6
          475 x 7
          475 x 775
          55 x 85
          6 x 4
          7 x 9
          7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
          85 x 11
          825 x 10875
          825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
          8375 x 10875
          9 x 12
          A4
          A5
          Other - Custom size listed below
          Drilling Locations
          1CENTER
          1LEFTTOP
          1TOPCENTER
          2LEFT
          2LEFT2TOP
          2TOP
          2TOP2LEFT
          2TOP3LEFT
          2TOP5LEFT
          2TOP5RIGHT
          3BOTTOM
          3LEFT
          3LEFT2TOP
          3LEFT3TOP
          3RIGHT
          3TOP
          3TOP5LEFT
          5BOTTOM
          5CENTER
          5LEFT
          5RIGHT
          5RIGHT2TOP
          5TOP
          For TRI fold - select Z or C type Description
          HALF Half
          C C Fold
          DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
          OFFSETZ Offset Z
          SAMPLE See Sample
          SHORT Short Fold
          V V Fold
          Z Z Fold
          Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
          Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
          77 or more pages 1
          33 to 76 pages 25
          3 to 32 pages 50
          1 or 2 pages 100
          Comments
          CoverText Stock Spine
          100 Gloss Cover If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
          100 Gloss Text
          100 Text
          10pt C1S Cover
          10pt C2S Cover
          10pt C2S Text
          10pt Text Stock
          110 White Index
          12pt C1S Cover
          20 White Opaque Bond
          50 Colored Offset
          50 White Offset
          50 White Opaque
          60 Cover Stock
          60 White Offset
          80 Gloss Cover
          80 Gloss Text
          8pt C1S White
          90 White Index
          CoverText Ink
          Black
          Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
          Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
          4 color
          4 color over black
          4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
          4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
          4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
          4 color + aqueous
          4 color + varnish
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 50 RRD must provide this information
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 RRD must provide this information
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          EA 1 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Black amp White B PERFECT PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 NA 516 3LEFT NA NA NA NA RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          1794-IN002G-EN-P FlexLogix Controller Installation Instructions EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial 19021 01232004 5 Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 4 28 7 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 55 85 NA NA NA NA NA HALF 55 x 85 100 RRD must provide this information Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black 957867-01
          Corp 17501
          Bill To 69
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information
          Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
          This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
          Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
          Generic pub print specs Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
          IN RN pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          UM RM PM pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          AP PP pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          BR pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          Field definitions Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
          Attach Print Specs to PDF
          For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
          RA-QR005C-EN-E 608
Page 26: FlexLogix Controller System - Rockwell Automation...FlexLogix Controller System 3 Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004 Environment and Enclosure Prevent Electrostatic Discharge

26 FlexLogix Controller System

Other PublicationsYou can use the following manuals with this product

You can obtain manuals at wwwtheautomationbookstorecom

Specifications

Documents required for installation details Publication number

Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines 1770-41

Flex 1794-PS3 Power Supply Installation Instructions 1794-571

Flex 1794-PS13 Power Supply Installation Instructions 1794-569

Flex IO Terminal Base Installation Instructions 1794-516

1794-CE1 -CE3 Interconnect Cable Installation Instructions 1794-512

FLEX IO and FLEX Integra IO Technical Data 1794-21

Documents available for further reference Publication number

FlexLogix System User Manual 1794-UM001

Logix5000 Controllers Common Procedures Reference Manual 1756-PM001

Logix5000 Controllers General Instruction Set Reference Manual 1756-RM003

Guidelines for Handling Lithium Batteries AG-54

Category FlexLogix controller(1794-L33 -L34)

FlexLogix extended-local IO adapter (1794-FLA)

user memory 1794-L33 64 KBytes1794-L34 512 KBytes

na

input voltagerating (nominal)range

24V dc192V to 312V dc (includes 5 ac ripple)

isolation voltage(continuous-voltage withstand rating)

30V dcQualification tested to withstand 850V dc for 60 seconds

input current(1) 133A maximum at 192V dc085A maximum at 24V dc

039A maximum at 192V dc025A maximum at 24V dc

power dissipation(2) 255W maximum at 192V204W maximum at 24V dc

75W maximum at 192V60W maximum at 24V dc

backplane (FLEXBUS) current output

653mA maximum 51V dc 653mA maximum 51V dc

thermal dissipation 87BTUhour 192V 256BTUhour 192V

weight 1794-L33 71 kg (156 lbs oz)1794-L34 75 g (166 lbs)(no communication cards installed)

28 kg (62 lbs)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

FlexLogix Controller System 27

power supply 1794-PS3 or 1794-PS13 ndash In applications that must be compliant with CSA requirements use a Separated Extra-Low Voltage (SELV) power supply that is compliant with IEC 610101 Annex H

power conductors 60deg C (140deg F) minimum copper22 to 14 AWG (0324 to 208 sq mm) stranded364 inch (12mm) insulation maximumlength 10m or less

category 3(2)

power connector torque 5 to 7 inch-pounds (06 to 08Nm)

battery 1756-BA1 (AB part number 94194801)059g lithium

na

serial cable 1761-CBLPM02 to 1761-NET-AIC 1761-CBLPA00 to 1761-NET-AIC1756-CP3 directly to controller1747-CP3 directly to controller

category 3(4)

na

extended local IO cable 1794-CE1 cable (1 foot)1794-CE3 cable (3 feet)

category 3(2)

DIN rail steel 35 x 755mm DIN railA-B part number 199-DR1 46277-3 EN 50022

operating temperature IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad Operating Cold)IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd Operating Dry Heat)IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock)0 to 60degC (32 to 140degF)

storage temperature IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab Un-packaged Non-operating Cold)IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb Un-packaged Non-operating Dry Heat)IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na Un-packaged Non-operating Thermal Shock)ndash40 to 85degC (ndash40 to 185degF)

relative humidity IEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db Un-packaged Non-operating Damp Heat)5 to 95 non-condensing

vibration(3) IEC60068-2-6 (Test Fc Operating) 5g 10-500Hz

shock(3)

operatingnon-operating

IEC60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged shock)

30g50g

emissions CISPR 11Group 1 Class A (with appropriate enclosure)

ESD immunity IEC 61000-4-26kV contact discharges8kV air discharges

Category FlexLogix controller(1794-L33 -L34)

FlexLogix extended-local IO adapter (1794-FLA)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

radiated RF immunity IEC 61000-4-310Vm with 1kHz sine-wave 80AM from 30MHz to 2000MHz10Vm with 200Hz 50 Pulse 100AM at 900Mhz

EFTB immunity IEC 61000-4-4plusmn4kV at 25kHz on power portsplusmn2kV at 5kHz on communications ports

surge transient immunity IEC 61000-4-5plusmn2kV line-earth (CM) on shielded ports

conducted RF immunity IEC 61000-4-610Vrms with 1kHz sine-wave 80AM from 150kHz to 80MHz

enclosure type rating none (open-style)

Certifications(when product is marked)

UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipmentc-UL-us UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous

Locations certified for US and CanadaCSA CSA Certified Process Control EquipmentCSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class I Division 2

Group ABCD Hazardous Locations

CE(5) European Union 89336EEC EMC Directive compliant withEN 50082-2 Industrial ImmunityEN 61326 MeasControlLab Industrial RequirementsEN 61000-6-2 Industrial ImmunityEN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions

C-Tick(5) Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant withASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions

EEx(5) European Union 949EEC ATEX Directive compliant withEN 50021 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n (Zone 2)

(1) This specification is also known as Power Consumption(2) This specification is also known as Heat Dissipation(3) To maintain these vibration and shock specifications you must use DIN rail locks(4) Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing Refer to Publication 1770-41 Industrial

Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines(5) See the Product Certification link at wwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification

details

Category FlexLogix controller(1794-L33 -L34)

FlexLogix extended-local IO adapter (1794-FLA)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004 PN 957867-01Supersedes Publication 1794-IN002F-EN-P - October 2002 Copyright copy 2004 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

  • 1794-IN002G-EN-P FlexLogix Controller System Installation Instructions
    • Tools That You Need
    • Obtain a User Manual
    • Environment and Enclosure
    • Prevent Electrostatic Discharge
    • European Hazardous Location Approval
    • North American Hazardous Location Approval
    • Removal and Insertion Under Power
    • Other Considerations
    • What You Need to Do
    • Step 1 Verify That You Have All the Components
    • Step 2 Install the Battery
    • Step 3 Install Communication Daughtercards (optional)
    • Step 4 Install the Controller
    • Step 5 Install the Extended-Local Adapter (optional)
    • Make an RS-232 Connection to the Controller
    • Select the Operating Mode of the Controller
    • Monitor the Controller LEDs
    • FLASH Upgrade the Controllerrsquos Firmware Revision
    • Update the Controller
    • FlexLogix Controller Approximate Mounting Dimensions
    • FlexLogix Extended-Local IO Adapter Approximate Mounting Dimensions
    • Approximate Mounting Clearance
    • Other Publications
    • Specifications
      • Back Cover
        • Intro

          ampLRA-QR005B-EN-E 308

          Generic pub print specs

          ampCItem Setup Sheet for Conversion Transfers
          ampLJIT-D-print SpreadsheetampCRA-QR005C-EN-EampRampD ampT

          IN RN pub type specs

          UM RM PM pub type specs

          AP PP pub type specs

          BR pub type specs

          Field definitions

          ampL04032006ampRampP
          PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
          EA = Each
          PK = Pack
          PD = Pad
          RL = Roll
          BK = Book
          CT = Carton
          BX = Box
          ST = Set
          Multiple Order Qty
          Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
          Business Group
          The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
          CorporateBusiness Development
          Finance
          Human Resources
          IT
          Logistics
          Manufacturing
          Marketing Commercial
          Marketing Europe
          Marketing Other
          Operations
          Order Services
          Other
          Process Improvement
          Procurement
          Quality
          Sales
          Max Order Quantity
          Presale items = 100
          Postsale items = 5
          NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
          Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
          Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
          Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
          BindingStitching
          For a Form (F) use
          CARBONLESS
          CUTSHEET
          ENVELOPE
          For a Book (B) use
          LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
          PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
          PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
          SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
          STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
          STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
          STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
          THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
          THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
          WIRE O Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
          Saddle-Stitch Items
          20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
          19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
          18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
          All page quantities must be divisible by 4
          Tape Bound Items
          125 sheets max on 20 no cover
          120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Perfect Bound Items
          475 sheets max on 20 no cover
          470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Double Wire Bound Items
          40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Coil Bound Items
          290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Sides Printed
          Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
          Simplex = Single-sided printing
          Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
          Number of Forms to a Sheet
          Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
          Number of Sheets Required to Print
          Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
          Paper Stock Type
          Description
          PLAIN Bond
          ACNTCVR Accent Cover
          BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
          BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
          C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
          C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
          C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
          C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
          CARD Card Stock
          CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
          CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
          COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
          CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
          CUSTOM Custom
          CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
          ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
          ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
          ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
          GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
          GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
          HOTSTEXT Hots Text
          INDEX Index
          LABEL80 80 Up Label
          MICROPRT Micro Print
          OFFSET Offset
          PART2 2 Part
          PART3 3 Part
          PART4 4 Part
          PART5 5 Part
          PART6 6 Part
          PERF 12 inch Perfed
          PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
          PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
          PREPERF Pre-Perforated
          RECYL Recycled
          SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
          SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
          SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
          TAG Tag
          TEXT Text
          TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
          TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
          TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
          TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
          VELLUM Vellum
          VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
          WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
          WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
          WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
          Paper Stock Color
          Black
          Blue
          Buff
          Canary
          Cherry
          Clear
          Cream
          Custom
          Goldrenrod
          Gray
          Green
          Ivory
          Lavender
          Manilla
          NCRPinkCanary
          NCRWhiteBlue
          NCRWhiteBlueCanary
          NCRWhiteCanary
          NCRWhiteCanaryPink
          NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
          NCRWhiteGreen
          NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
          NCRWhitePink
          NCRWhiteWhite
          Opaque
          Orange
          Orchid
          Peach
          Pink
          Purple
          Salmon
          Tan
          Violet
          White
          Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
          11 x 17
          18 x 24 Poster
          24 x 36 Poster
          3 x 5
          36 x 24 Poster
          4 x 6
          475 x 7
          475 x 775
          55 x 85
          6 x 4
          7 x 9
          7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
          85 x 11
          825 x 10875
          825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
          8375 x 10875
          9 x 12
          A4
          A5
          Other - Custom size listed below
          Drilling Locations
          1CENTER
          1LEFTTOP
          1TOPCENTER
          2LEFT
          2LEFT2TOP
          2TOP
          2TOP2LEFT
          2TOP3LEFT
          2TOP5LEFT
          2TOP5RIGHT
          3BOTTOM
          3LEFT
          3LEFT2TOP
          3LEFT3TOP
          3RIGHT
          3TOP
          3TOP5LEFT
          5BOTTOM
          5CENTER
          5LEFT
          5RIGHT
          5RIGHT2TOP
          5TOP
          For TRI fold - select Z or C type Description
          HALF Half
          C C Fold
          DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
          OFFSETZ Offset Z
          SAMPLE See Sample
          SHORT Short Fold
          V V Fold
          Z Z Fold
          Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
          Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
          77 or more pages 1
          33 to 76 pages 25
          3 to 32 pages 50
          1 or 2 pages 100
          Comments
          CoverText Stock Spine
          100 Gloss Cover If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
          100 Gloss Text
          100 Text
          10pt C1S Cover
          10pt C2S Cover
          10pt C2S Text
          10pt Text Stock
          110 White Index
          12pt C1S Cover
          20 White Opaque Bond
          50 Colored Offset
          50 White Offset
          50 White Opaque
          60 Cover Stock
          60 White Offset
          80 Gloss Cover
          80 Gloss Text
          8pt C1S White
          90 White Index
          CoverText Ink
          Black
          Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
          Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
          4 color
          4 color over black
          4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
          4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
          4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
          4 color + aqueous
          4 color + varnish
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 50 RRD must provide this information
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 RRD must provide this information
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          EA 1 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Black amp White B PERFECT PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 NA 516 3LEFT NA NA NA NA RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          1794-IN002G-EN-P FlexLogix Controller Installation Instructions EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial 19021 01232004 5 Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 4 28 7 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 55 85 NA NA NA NA NA HALF 55 x 85 100 RRD must provide this information Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black 957867-01
          Corp 17501
          Bill To 69
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information
          Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
          This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
          Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
          Generic pub print specs Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
          IN RN pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          UM RM PM pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          AP PP pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          BR pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          Field definitions Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
          Attach Print Specs to PDF
          For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
          RA-QR005C-EN-E 608
Page 27: FlexLogix Controller System - Rockwell Automation...FlexLogix Controller System 3 Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004 Environment and Enclosure Prevent Electrostatic Discharge

FlexLogix Controller System 27

power supply 1794-PS3 or 1794-PS13 ndash In applications that must be compliant with CSA requirements use a Separated Extra-Low Voltage (SELV) power supply that is compliant with IEC 610101 Annex H

power conductors 60deg C (140deg F) minimum copper22 to 14 AWG (0324 to 208 sq mm) stranded364 inch (12mm) insulation maximumlength 10m or less

category 3(2)

power connector torque 5 to 7 inch-pounds (06 to 08Nm)

battery 1756-BA1 (AB part number 94194801)059g lithium

na

serial cable 1761-CBLPM02 to 1761-NET-AIC 1761-CBLPA00 to 1761-NET-AIC1756-CP3 directly to controller1747-CP3 directly to controller

category 3(4)

na

extended local IO cable 1794-CE1 cable (1 foot)1794-CE3 cable (3 feet)

category 3(2)

DIN rail steel 35 x 755mm DIN railA-B part number 199-DR1 46277-3 EN 50022

operating temperature IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad Operating Cold)IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd Operating Dry Heat)IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock)0 to 60degC (32 to 140degF)

storage temperature IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab Un-packaged Non-operating Cold)IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb Un-packaged Non-operating Dry Heat)IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na Un-packaged Non-operating Thermal Shock)ndash40 to 85degC (ndash40 to 185degF)

relative humidity IEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db Un-packaged Non-operating Damp Heat)5 to 95 non-condensing

vibration(3) IEC60068-2-6 (Test Fc Operating) 5g 10-500Hz

shock(3)

operatingnon-operating

IEC60068-2-27 (Test Ea Unpackaged shock)

30g50g

emissions CISPR 11Group 1 Class A (with appropriate enclosure)

ESD immunity IEC 61000-4-26kV contact discharges8kV air discharges

Category FlexLogix controller(1794-L33 -L34)

FlexLogix extended-local IO adapter (1794-FLA)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004

radiated RF immunity IEC 61000-4-310Vm with 1kHz sine-wave 80AM from 30MHz to 2000MHz10Vm with 200Hz 50 Pulse 100AM at 900Mhz

EFTB immunity IEC 61000-4-4plusmn4kV at 25kHz on power portsplusmn2kV at 5kHz on communications ports

surge transient immunity IEC 61000-4-5plusmn2kV line-earth (CM) on shielded ports

conducted RF immunity IEC 61000-4-610Vrms with 1kHz sine-wave 80AM from 150kHz to 80MHz

enclosure type rating none (open-style)

Certifications(when product is marked)

UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipmentc-UL-us UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous

Locations certified for US and CanadaCSA CSA Certified Process Control EquipmentCSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class I Division 2

Group ABCD Hazardous Locations

CE(5) European Union 89336EEC EMC Directive compliant withEN 50082-2 Industrial ImmunityEN 61326 MeasControlLab Industrial RequirementsEN 61000-6-2 Industrial ImmunityEN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions

C-Tick(5) Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant withASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions

EEx(5) European Union 949EEC ATEX Directive compliant withEN 50021 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n (Zone 2)

(1) This specification is also known as Power Consumption(2) This specification is also known as Heat Dissipation(3) To maintain these vibration and shock specifications you must use DIN rail locks(4) Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing Refer to Publication 1770-41 Industrial

Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines(5) See the Product Certification link at wwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification

details

Category FlexLogix controller(1794-L33 -L34)

FlexLogix extended-local IO adapter (1794-FLA)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004 PN 957867-01Supersedes Publication 1794-IN002F-EN-P - October 2002 Copyright copy 2004 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

  • 1794-IN002G-EN-P FlexLogix Controller System Installation Instructions
    • Tools That You Need
    • Obtain a User Manual
    • Environment and Enclosure
    • Prevent Electrostatic Discharge
    • European Hazardous Location Approval
    • North American Hazardous Location Approval
    • Removal and Insertion Under Power
    • Other Considerations
    • What You Need to Do
    • Step 1 Verify That You Have All the Components
    • Step 2 Install the Battery
    • Step 3 Install Communication Daughtercards (optional)
    • Step 4 Install the Controller
    • Step 5 Install the Extended-Local Adapter (optional)
    • Make an RS-232 Connection to the Controller
    • Select the Operating Mode of the Controller
    • Monitor the Controller LEDs
    • FLASH Upgrade the Controllerrsquos Firmware Revision
    • Update the Controller
    • FlexLogix Controller Approximate Mounting Dimensions
    • FlexLogix Extended-Local IO Adapter Approximate Mounting Dimensions
    • Approximate Mounting Clearance
    • Other Publications
    • Specifications
      • Back Cover
        • Intro

          ampLRA-QR005B-EN-E 308

          Generic pub print specs

          ampCItem Setup Sheet for Conversion Transfers
          ampLJIT-D-print SpreadsheetampCRA-QR005C-EN-EampRampD ampT

          IN RN pub type specs

          UM RM PM pub type specs

          AP PP pub type specs

          BR pub type specs

          Field definitions

          ampL04032006ampRampP
          PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
          EA = Each
          PK = Pack
          PD = Pad
          RL = Roll
          BK = Book
          CT = Carton
          BX = Box
          ST = Set
          Multiple Order Qty
          Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
          Business Group
          The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
          CorporateBusiness Development
          Finance
          Human Resources
          IT
          Logistics
          Manufacturing
          Marketing Commercial
          Marketing Europe
          Marketing Other
          Operations
          Order Services
          Other
          Process Improvement
          Procurement
          Quality
          Sales
          Max Order Quantity
          Presale items = 100
          Postsale items = 5
          NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
          Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
          Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
          Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
          BindingStitching
          For a Form (F) use
          CARBONLESS
          CUTSHEET
          ENVELOPE
          For a Book (B) use
          LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
          PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
          PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
          SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
          STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
          STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
          STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
          THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
          THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
          WIRE O Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
          Saddle-Stitch Items
          20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
          19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
          18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
          All page quantities must be divisible by 4
          Tape Bound Items
          125 sheets max on 20 no cover
          120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Perfect Bound Items
          475 sheets max on 20 no cover
          470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Double Wire Bound Items
          40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Coil Bound Items
          290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Sides Printed
          Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
          Simplex = Single-sided printing
          Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
          Number of Forms to a Sheet
          Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
          Number of Sheets Required to Print
          Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
          Paper Stock Type
          Description
          PLAIN Bond
          ACNTCVR Accent Cover
          BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
          BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
          C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
          C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
          C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
          C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
          CARD Card Stock
          CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
          CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
          COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
          CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
          CUSTOM Custom
          CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
          ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
          ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
          ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
          GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
          GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
          HOTSTEXT Hots Text
          INDEX Index
          LABEL80 80 Up Label
          MICROPRT Micro Print
          OFFSET Offset
          PART2 2 Part
          PART3 3 Part
          PART4 4 Part
          PART5 5 Part
          PART6 6 Part
          PERF 12 inch Perfed
          PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
          PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
          PREPERF Pre-Perforated
          RECYL Recycled
          SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
          SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
          SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
          TAG Tag
          TEXT Text
          TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
          TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
          TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
          TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
          VELLUM Vellum
          VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
          WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
          WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
          WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
          Paper Stock Color
          Black
          Blue
          Buff
          Canary
          Cherry
          Clear
          Cream
          Custom
          Goldrenrod
          Gray
          Green
          Ivory
          Lavender
          Manilla
          NCRPinkCanary
          NCRWhiteBlue
          NCRWhiteBlueCanary
          NCRWhiteCanary
          NCRWhiteCanaryPink
          NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
          NCRWhiteGreen
          NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
          NCRWhitePink
          NCRWhiteWhite
          Opaque
          Orange
          Orchid
          Peach
          Pink
          Purple
          Salmon
          Tan
          Violet
          White
          Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
          11 x 17
          18 x 24 Poster
          24 x 36 Poster
          3 x 5
          36 x 24 Poster
          4 x 6
          475 x 7
          475 x 775
          55 x 85
          6 x 4
          7 x 9
          7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
          85 x 11
          825 x 10875
          825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
          8375 x 10875
          9 x 12
          A4
          A5
          Other - Custom size listed below
          Drilling Locations
          1CENTER
          1LEFTTOP
          1TOPCENTER
          2LEFT
          2LEFT2TOP
          2TOP
          2TOP2LEFT
          2TOP3LEFT
          2TOP5LEFT
          2TOP5RIGHT
          3BOTTOM
          3LEFT
          3LEFT2TOP
          3LEFT3TOP
          3RIGHT
          3TOP
          3TOP5LEFT
          5BOTTOM
          5CENTER
          5LEFT
          5RIGHT
          5RIGHT2TOP
          5TOP
          For TRI fold - select Z or C type Description
          HALF Half
          C C Fold
          DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
          OFFSETZ Offset Z
          SAMPLE See Sample
          SHORT Short Fold
          V V Fold
          Z Z Fold
          Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
          Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
          77 or more pages 1
          33 to 76 pages 25
          3 to 32 pages 50
          1 or 2 pages 100
          Comments
          CoverText Stock Spine
          100 Gloss Cover If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
          100 Gloss Text
          100 Text
          10pt C1S Cover
          10pt C2S Cover
          10pt C2S Text
          10pt Text Stock
          110 White Index
          12pt C1S Cover
          20 White Opaque Bond
          50 Colored Offset
          50 White Offset
          50 White Opaque
          60 Cover Stock
          60 White Offset
          80 Gloss Cover
          80 Gloss Text
          8pt C1S White
          90 White Index
          CoverText Ink
          Black
          Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
          Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
          4 color
          4 color over black
          4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
          4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
          4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
          4 color + aqueous
          4 color + varnish
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 50 RRD must provide this information
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 RRD must provide this information
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          EA 1 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Black amp White B PERFECT PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 NA 516 3LEFT NA NA NA NA RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          1794-IN002G-EN-P FlexLogix Controller Installation Instructions EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial 19021 01232004 5 Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 4 28 7 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 55 85 NA NA NA NA NA HALF 55 x 85 100 RRD must provide this information Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black 957867-01
          Corp 17501
          Bill To 69
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information
          Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
          This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
          Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
          Generic pub print specs Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
          IN RN pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          UM RM PM pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          AP PP pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          BR pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          Field definitions Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
          Attach Print Specs to PDF
          For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
          RA-QR005C-EN-E 608
Page 28: FlexLogix Controller System - Rockwell Automation...FlexLogix Controller System 3 Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004 Environment and Enclosure Prevent Electrostatic Discharge

radiated RF immunity IEC 61000-4-310Vm with 1kHz sine-wave 80AM from 30MHz to 2000MHz10Vm with 200Hz 50 Pulse 100AM at 900Mhz

EFTB immunity IEC 61000-4-4plusmn4kV at 25kHz on power portsplusmn2kV at 5kHz on communications ports

surge transient immunity IEC 61000-4-5plusmn2kV line-earth (CM) on shielded ports

conducted RF immunity IEC 61000-4-610Vrms with 1kHz sine-wave 80AM from 150kHz to 80MHz

enclosure type rating none (open-style)

Certifications(when product is marked)

UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipmentc-UL-us UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group ABCD Hazardous

Locations certified for US and CanadaCSA CSA Certified Process Control EquipmentCSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class I Division 2

Group ABCD Hazardous Locations

CE(5) European Union 89336EEC EMC Directive compliant withEN 50082-2 Industrial ImmunityEN 61326 MeasControlLab Industrial RequirementsEN 61000-6-2 Industrial ImmunityEN 61000-6-4 Industrial Emissions

C-Tick(5) Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant withASNZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions

EEx(5) European Union 949EEC ATEX Directive compliant withEN 50021 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n (Zone 2)

(1) This specification is also known as Power Consumption(2) This specification is also known as Heat Dissipation(3) To maintain these vibration and shock specifications you must use DIN rail locks(4) Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing Refer to Publication 1770-41 Industrial

Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines(5) See the Product Certification link at wwwabcom for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification

details

Category FlexLogix controller(1794-L33 -L34)

FlexLogix extended-local IO adapter (1794-FLA)

Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004 PN 957867-01Supersedes Publication 1794-IN002F-EN-P - October 2002 Copyright copy 2004 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA

  • 1794-IN002G-EN-P FlexLogix Controller System Installation Instructions
    • Tools That You Need
    • Obtain a User Manual
    • Environment and Enclosure
    • Prevent Electrostatic Discharge
    • European Hazardous Location Approval
    • North American Hazardous Location Approval
    • Removal and Insertion Under Power
    • Other Considerations
    • What You Need to Do
    • Step 1 Verify That You Have All the Components
    • Step 2 Install the Battery
    • Step 3 Install Communication Daughtercards (optional)
    • Step 4 Install the Controller
    • Step 5 Install the Extended-Local Adapter (optional)
    • Make an RS-232 Connection to the Controller
    • Select the Operating Mode of the Controller
    • Monitor the Controller LEDs
    • FLASH Upgrade the Controllerrsquos Firmware Revision
    • Update the Controller
    • FlexLogix Controller Approximate Mounting Dimensions
    • FlexLogix Extended-Local IO Adapter Approximate Mounting Dimensions
    • Approximate Mounting Clearance
    • Other Publications
    • Specifications
      • Back Cover
        • Intro

          ampLRA-QR005B-EN-E 308

          Generic pub print specs

          ampCItem Setup Sheet for Conversion Transfers
          ampLJIT-D-print SpreadsheetampCRA-QR005C-EN-EampRampD ampT

          IN RN pub type specs

          UM RM PM pub type specs

          AP PP pub type specs

          BR pub type specs

          Field definitions

          ampL04032006ampRampP
          PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
          EA = Each
          PK = Pack
          PD = Pad
          RL = Roll
          BK = Book
          CT = Carton
          BX = Box
          ST = Set
          Multiple Order Qty
          Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
          Business Group
          The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
          CorporateBusiness Development
          Finance
          Human Resources
          IT
          Logistics
          Manufacturing
          Marketing Commercial
          Marketing Europe
          Marketing Other
          Operations
          Order Services
          Other
          Process Improvement
          Procurement
          Quality
          Sales
          Max Order Quantity
          Presale items = 100
          Postsale items = 5
          NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
          Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
          Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
          Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
          BindingStitching
          For a Form (F) use
          CARBONLESS
          CUTSHEET
          ENVELOPE
          For a Book (B) use
          LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
          PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
          PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
          SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
          STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
          STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
          STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
          THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
          THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
          WIRE O Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
          Saddle-Stitch Items
          20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
          19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
          18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
          All page quantities must be divisible by 4
          Tape Bound Items
          125 sheets max on 20 no cover
          120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Perfect Bound Items
          475 sheets max on 20 no cover
          470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Double Wire Bound Items
          40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Coil Bound Items
          290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
          Sides Printed
          Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
          Simplex = Single-sided printing
          Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
          Number of Forms to a Sheet
          Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
          Number of Sheets Required to Print
          Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
          Paper Stock Type
          Description
          PLAIN Bond
          ACNTCVR Accent Cover
          BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
          BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
          C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
          C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
          C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
          C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
          CARD Card Stock
          CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
          CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
          COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
          CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
          CUSTOM Custom
          CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
          ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
          ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
          ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
          GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
          GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
          HOTSTEXT Hots Text
          INDEX Index
          LABEL80 80 Up Label
          MICROPRT Micro Print
          OFFSET Offset
          PART2 2 Part
          PART3 3 Part
          PART4 4 Part
          PART5 5 Part
          PART6 6 Part
          PERF 12 inch Perfed
          PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
          PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
          PREPERF Pre-Perforated
          RECYL Recycled
          SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
          SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
          SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
          TAG Tag
          TEXT Text
          TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
          TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
          TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
          TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
          VELLUM Vellum
          VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
          WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
          WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
          WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
          Paper Stock Color
          Black
          Blue
          Buff
          Canary
          Cherry
          Clear
          Cream
          Custom
          Goldrenrod
          Gray
          Green
          Ivory
          Lavender
          Manilla
          NCRPinkCanary
          NCRWhiteBlue
          NCRWhiteBlueCanary
          NCRWhiteCanary
          NCRWhiteCanaryPink
          NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
          NCRWhiteGreen
          NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
          NCRWhitePink
          NCRWhiteWhite
          Opaque
          Orange
          Orchid
          Peach
          Pink
          Purple
          Salmon
          Tan
          Violet
          White
          Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
          11 x 17
          18 x 24 Poster
          24 x 36 Poster
          3 x 5
          36 x 24 Poster
          4 x 6
          475 x 7
          475 x 775
          55 x 85
          6 x 4
          7 x 9
          7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
          85 x 11
          825 x 10875
          825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
          8375 x 10875
          9 x 12
          A4
          A5
          Other - Custom size listed below
          Drilling Locations
          1CENTER
          1LEFTTOP
          1TOPCENTER
          2LEFT
          2LEFT2TOP
          2TOP
          2TOP2LEFT
          2TOP3LEFT
          2TOP5LEFT
          2TOP5RIGHT
          3BOTTOM
          3LEFT
          3LEFT2TOP
          3LEFT3TOP
          3RIGHT
          3TOP
          3TOP5LEFT
          5BOTTOM
          5CENTER
          5LEFT
          5RIGHT
          5RIGHT2TOP
          5TOP
          For TRI fold - select Z or C type Description
          HALF Half
          C C Fold
          DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
          OFFSETZ Offset Z
          SAMPLE See Sample
          SHORT Short Fold
          V V Fold
          Z Z Fold
          Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
          Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
          77 or more pages 1
          33 to 76 pages 25
          3 to 32 pages 50
          1 or 2 pages 100
          Comments
          CoverText Stock Spine
          100 Gloss Cover If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
          100 Gloss Text
          100 Text
          10pt C1S Cover
          10pt C2S Cover
          10pt C2S Text
          10pt Text Stock
          110 White Index
          12pt C1S Cover
          20 White Opaque Bond
          50 Colored Offset
          50 White Offset
          50 White Opaque
          60 Cover Stock
          60 White Offset
          80 Gloss Cover
          80 Gloss Text
          8pt C1S White
          90 White Index
          CoverText Ink
          Black
          Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
          Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
          4 color
          4 color over black
          4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
          4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
          4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
          4 color + aqueous
          4 color + varnish
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 50 RRD must provide this information
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 RRD must provide this information
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          EA 1 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Black amp White B PERFECT PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 NA 516 3LEFT NA NA NA NA RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          1794-IN002G-EN-P FlexLogix Controller Installation Instructions EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial 19021 01232004 5 Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 4 28 7 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 55 85 NA NA NA NA NA HALF 55 x 85 100 RRD must provide this information Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black 957867-01
          Corp 17501
          Bill To 69
          dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
          Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
          Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
          See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information
          Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
          This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
          Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
          Generic pub print specs Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
          IN RN pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          UM RM PM pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          AP PP pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          BR pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
          Field definitions Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
          Attach Print Specs to PDF
          For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
          RA-QR005C-EN-E 608
Page 29: FlexLogix Controller System - Rockwell Automation...FlexLogix Controller System 3 Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004 Environment and Enclosure Prevent Electrostatic Discharge

Intro

ampLRA-QR005B-EN-E 308

Generic pub print specs

ampCItem Setup Sheet for Conversion Transfers
ampLJIT-D-print SpreadsheetampCRA-QR005C-EN-EampRampD ampT

IN RN pub type specs

UM RM PM pub type specs

AP PP pub type specs

BR pub type specs

Field definitions

ampL04032006ampRampP
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
EA = Each
PK = Pack
PD = Pad
RL = Roll
BK = Book
CT = Carton
BX = Box
ST = Set
Multiple Order Qty
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN Bond
ACNTCVR Accent Cover
BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
CARD Card Stock
CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM Custom
CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT Hots Text
INDEX Index
LABEL80 80 Up Label
MICROPRT Micro Print
OFFSET Offset
PART2 2 Part
PART3 3 Part
PART4 4 Part
PART5 5 Part
PART6 6 Part
PERF 12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF Pre-Perforated
RECYL Recycled
SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
TAG Tag
TEXT Text
TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
VELLUM Vellum
VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type Description
HALF Half
C C Fold
DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
OFFSETZ Offset Z
SAMPLE See Sample
SHORT Short Fold
V V Fold
Z Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages 1
33 to 76 pages 25
3 to 32 pages 50
1 or 2 pages 100
Comments
CoverText Stock Spine
100 Gloss Cover If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 50 RRD must provide this information
dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 RRD must provide this information
dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
EA 1 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Black amp White B PERFECT PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 NA 516 3LEFT NA NA NA NA RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1794-IN002G-EN-P FlexLogix Controller Installation Instructions EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial 19021 01232004 5 Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 4 28 7 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 55 85 NA NA NA NA NA HALF 55 x 85 100 RRD must provide this information Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black 957867-01
Corp 17501
Bill To 69
dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
Generic pub print specs Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
IN RN pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
UM RM PM pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
AP PP pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
BR pub type specs Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
Field definitions Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
Attach Print Specs to PDF
For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
RA-QR005C-EN-E 608
Page 30: FlexLogix Controller System - Rockwell Automation...FlexLogix Controller System 3 Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004 Environment and Enclosure Prevent Electrostatic Discharge

Generic pub print specs

ampCItem Setup Sheet for Conversion Transfers
ampLJIT-D-print SpreadsheetampCRA-QR005C-EN-EampRampD ampT

IN RN pub type specs

UM RM PM pub type specs

AP PP pub type specs

BR pub type specs

Field definitions

ampL04032006ampRampP
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
EA = Each
PK = Pack
PD = Pad
RL = Roll
BK = Book
CT = Carton
BX = Box
ST = Set
Multiple Order Qty
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN Bond
ACNTCVR Accent Cover
BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
CARD Card Stock
CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM Custom
CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT Hots Text
INDEX Index
LABEL80 80 Up Label
MICROPRT Micro Print
OFFSET Offset
PART2 2 Part
PART3 3 Part
PART4 4 Part
PART5 5 Part
PART6 6 Part
PERF 12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF Pre-Perforated
RECYL Recycled
SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
TAG Tag
TEXT Text
TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
VELLUM Vellum
VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type Description
HALF Half
C C Fold
DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
OFFSETZ Offset Z
SAMPLE See Sample
SHORT Short Fold
V V Fold
Z Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages 1
33 to 76 pages 25
3 to 32 pages 50
1 or 2 pages 100
Comments
CoverText Stock Spine
100 Gloss Cover If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 50 RRD must provide this information
dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 RRD must provide this information
dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
EA 1 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Black amp White B PERFECT PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 NA 516 3LEFT NA NA NA NA RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1794-IN002G-EN-P FlexLogix Controller Installation Instructions EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial 19021 01232004 5 Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 4 28 7 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 55 85 NA NA NA NA NA HALF 55 x 85 100 RRD must provide this information Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black 957867-01
Corp 17501
Bill To 69
dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information
Page 31: FlexLogix Controller System - Rockwell Automation...FlexLogix Controller System 3 Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004 Environment and Enclosure Prevent Electrostatic Discharge

IN RN pub type specs

UM RM PM pub type specs

AP PP pub type specs

BR pub type specs

Field definitions

ampL04032006ampRampP
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
EA = Each
PK = Pack
PD = Pad
RL = Roll
BK = Book
CT = Carton
BX = Box
ST = Set
Multiple Order Qty
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN Bond
ACNTCVR Accent Cover
BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
CARD Card Stock
CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM Custom
CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT Hots Text
INDEX Index
LABEL80 80 Up Label
MICROPRT Micro Print
OFFSET Offset
PART2 2 Part
PART3 3 Part
PART4 4 Part
PART5 5 Part
PART6 6 Part
PERF 12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF Pre-Perforated
RECYL Recycled
SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
TAG Tag
TEXT Text
TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
VELLUM Vellum
VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type Description
HALF Half
C C Fold
DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
OFFSETZ Offset Z
SAMPLE See Sample
SHORT Short Fold
V V Fold
Z Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages 1
33 to 76 pages 25
3 to 32 pages 50
1 or 2 pages 100
Comments
CoverText Stock Spine
100 Gloss Cover If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 50 RRD must provide this information
dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 RRD must provide this information
dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
EA 1 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Black amp White B PERFECT PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 NA 516 3LEFT NA NA NA NA RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1794-IN002G-EN-P FlexLogix Controller Installation Instructions EA 1 1 Marketing Commercial 19021 01232004 5 Black amp White B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 4 28 7 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 55 85 NA NA NA NA NA HALF 55 x 85 100 RRD must provide this information Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black 957867-01
Page 32: FlexLogix Controller System - Rockwell Automation...FlexLogix Controller System 3 Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004 Environment and Enclosure Prevent Electrostatic Discharge

UM RM PM pub type specs

AP PP pub type specs

BR pub type specs

Field definitions

ampL04032006ampRampP
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
EA = Each
PK = Pack
PD = Pad
RL = Roll
BK = Book
CT = Carton
BX = Box
ST = Set
Multiple Order Qty
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN Bond
ACNTCVR Accent Cover
BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
CARD Card Stock
CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM Custom
CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT Hots Text
INDEX Index
LABEL80 80 Up Label
MICROPRT Micro Print
OFFSET Offset
PART2 2 Part
PART3 3 Part
PART4 4 Part
PART5 5 Part
PART6 6 Part
PERF 12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF Pre-Perforated
RECYL Recycled
SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
TAG Tag
TEXT Text
TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
VELLUM Vellum
VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type Description
HALF Half
C C Fold
DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
OFFSETZ Offset Z
SAMPLE See Sample
SHORT Short Fold
V V Fold
Z Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages 1
33 to 76 pages 25
3 to 32 pages 50
1 or 2 pages 100
Comments
CoverText Stock Spine
100 Gloss Cover If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 50 RRD must provide this information
dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 RRD must provide this information
dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
EA 1 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Black amp White B PERFECT PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information 2 PLAIN 20 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 NA 516 3LEFT NA NA NA NA RRD must provide this information Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
Page 33: FlexLogix Controller System - Rockwell Automation...FlexLogix Controller System 3 Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004 Environment and Enclosure Prevent Electrostatic Discharge

AP PP pub type specs

BR pub type specs

Field definitions

ampL04032006ampRampP
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
EA = Each
PK = Pack
PD = Pad
RL = Roll
BK = Book
CT = Carton
BX = Box
ST = Set
Multiple Order Qty
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN Bond
ACNTCVR Accent Cover
BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
CARD Card Stock
CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM Custom
CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT Hots Text
INDEX Index
LABEL80 80 Up Label
MICROPRT Micro Print
OFFSET Offset
PART2 2 Part
PART3 3 Part
PART4 4 Part
PART5 5 Part
PART6 6 Part
PERF 12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF Pre-Perforated
RECYL Recycled
SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
TAG Tag
TEXT Text
TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
VELLUM Vellum
VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type Description
HALF Half
C C Fold
DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
OFFSETZ Offset Z
SAMPLE See Sample
SHORT Short Fold
V V Fold
Z Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages 1
33 to 76 pages 25
3 to 32 pages 50
1 or 2 pages 100
Comments
CoverText Stock Spine
100 Gloss Cover If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 50 RRD must provide this information
dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Item Description Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B NA PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information GLOSS TEXT 80 White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 RRD must provide this information
Page 34: FlexLogix Controller System - Rockwell Automation...FlexLogix Controller System 3 Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004 Environment and Enclosure Prevent Electrostatic Discharge

BR pub type specs

Field definitions

ampL04032006ampRampP
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
EA = Each
PK = Pack
PD = Pad
RL = Roll
BK = Book
CT = Carton
BX = Box
ST = Set
Multiple Order Qty
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN Bond
ACNTCVR Accent Cover
BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
CARD Card Stock
CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM Custom
CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT Hots Text
INDEX Index
LABEL80 80 Up Label
MICROPRT Micro Print
OFFSET Offset
PART2 2 Part
PART3 3 Part
PART4 4 Part
PART5 5 Part
PART6 6 Part
PERF 12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF Pre-Perforated
RECYL Recycled
SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
TAG Tag
TEXT Text
TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
VELLUM Vellum
VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type Description
HALF Half
C C Fold
DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
OFFSETZ Offset Z
SAMPLE See Sample
SHORT Short Fold
V V Fold
Z Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages 1
33 to 76 pages 25
3 to 32 pages 50
1 or 2 pages 100
Comments
CoverText Stock Spine
100 Gloss Cover If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint ContentComp Split Shipment Indicator Flag WCSS Item Number Customer Item Number Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Producing Plant Job Number Replenishing Plant Plant Code Product Code PackagingOrdering UOM Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM List Price Per Ea Transfer Cost per Ea Sell Price per Ea Standard Cost (per Ea) Min Order Qty (in eaches) Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches Chargeback Price Item Reference 1 Item Reference 2 Revision Field Max Order Qty (in eaches) Sequentially Numbered Item Sequentially Numbered Item - Details Priced for Digital or Offset Content File Location Item Category Form (F) Book (B) Item Subtype Orientation Sides Printed CSSJLS Stock Componet Paper Size Width Paper Size Length No of Forms to a Sheet Page Qty Sheets Qty CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size of Tabs Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) Thermal Tape Color Trim Size Width Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drilling Size Drilling Location Glue Location Pad Fold Type Fold At Poly Box Comments Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number Publication Title PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure Min Order Qty Multiple Order Qty Business Group Cost Center Revision Date Max Order Qty Black amp Whiteor Color Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) BindingStitching Orientation Sides Printed Printing Paper Size Width Printing Paper Size Length Number of Forms to a Sheet Page Count of Publication Number of Sheets Required to Print CSSJLS Production Stock Paper Stock Type Paper Stock Weight Paper Stock Color Stack Offset Tab Size Number of Tabs Needed Binder Size Binder Color Binder Ring Type Binder Transparency Thermal Tape Color Finished Trim Size Width Finished Trim Size Length Stitching Location Drill Hole Size Number and Location of Drill Holes Glue Location Number of Pages per Pad Fold Type Fold At Number of Pieces per Poly wrap Number of Pieces per Box Comments Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number 30 characters maximum Cannot use quote symbol that is---- Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) Required Enter one of the applicable product Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu If item uses tabs otherwise NA If needed otherwise type NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If item used in a binder otherwise NA If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA Click here for a list of possible drill locations If publication uses padding otherwise NA If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional The location(s) of the fold Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK 1 See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group Color B SADDLE PORTRAIT HEAD2HEAD RRD must provide this information RRD must provide this information White RRD must provide this information NA NA NA NA NA NA 85 11 SIDE NA NA NA NA HALF 85 x 11 50 RRD must provide this information
Page 35: FlexLogix Controller System - Rockwell Automation...FlexLogix Controller System 3 Publication 1794-IN002G-EN-P - January 2004 Environment and Enclosure Prevent Electrostatic Discharge

Field definitions

ampL04032006ampRampP
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
EA = Each
PK = Pack
PD = Pad
RL = Roll
BK = Book
CT = Carton
BX = Box
ST = Set
Multiple Order Qty
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1 STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2 STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN Bond
ACNTCVR Accent Cover
BOND3H Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE C2S Matt Finish
CARD Card Stock
CATLGENV Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6 6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM Custom
CVRFUTURA Futura Cover
ENV6x9 Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12 Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT Hots Text
INDEX Index
LABEL80 80 Up Label
MICROPRT Micro Print
OFFSET Offset
PART2 2 Part
PART3 3 Part
PART4 4 Part
PART5 5 Part
PART6 6 Part
PERF 12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF Pre-Perforated
RECYL Recycled
SE10ENV 10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV 10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV 9 Stanard Envelope
TAG Tag
TEXT Text
TEXTCOLOR Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA Futura Text
TEXTLASER Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY Transparencies
VELLUM Vellum
VELLUM3HP Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV 10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV 9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type Description
HALF Half
C C Fold
DBLEPARLL Double Parallel
OFFSETZ Offset Z
SAMPLE See Sample
SHORT Short Fold
V V Fold
Z Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages 1
33 to 76 pages 25
3 to 32 pages 50
1 or 2 pages 100
Comments
CoverText Stock Spine
100 Gloss Cover If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish